Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Science

S ( /^

REPORT

OF THE

FORTY-FIRST MEETING

OV THE \

^X^^iT^^'-

. BRITISH ASSOCIATION

FOE THE

ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE ;

HELD AT

EDINBURGH IN AUGUST 1871.

LONDON:
JOHN MURRAY, ALBEMARLE STREET.

1873.

PKINTED BY
TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RKD LION COURT, FLEKT STREET.

v:ti^f

CONTENTS.

'X'VW'V/x^

Page

Objects and Eules of the Association xvii

Places of Meeting and Officers from commencement xxiv

Presidents and Secretaries of the Sections of the Association from

commencement xsx

Evening Lectures yyxiy

Lectures to the Operative Classes xli

Table showing the Attendance and Receipts at previous Meetings . . xlii

Treasurer's Account xliv

Officers and Council, 1871-72 xlv

Officers of Sectional Committees xlvi

Eeport of the Council to the General Committee slvii

Eeport of the Kew Committee, 1870-71 1

Recommendations of the General Committee for Additional Reports

and Researches in Science .... * Ixix

Synopsis of Money Grants . . . i . . * Ixxiv

General Statement of Sums paid on account of Grants for Scientific

Purposes Ixxvi

Arrangement of the General Meetings Ixxxiii

Address by the President, Sir "William Thomson, Knt., LL.D., F.R.S. Lsxxiv

REPORTS OF RESEARCHES IN SCIENCE.

Seventh Report of the Committee for Exploring Kent's Cavern, Devon-
shire,— the Committee consisting of Sir Chaeles Ltell, Bart., E.R.S.,
Professor Pniiiips, F.R.S., Sir JoHjsr Lvjbbock, Bart., E.R.S., John

a2

11 CONTENTS.

Page

Evans, F.E.S., Edwaeb Vivian, George Busk, P.R.S., "Wilmam Boyd
Dawkins, F.R.S., William Ayshfobd Sanford, F.G.S,, and William
Pengellt, F.Il.S. (Reporter) 1

Fourth Report of tlie Committee for the purpose of investigating the rate
of Increase of Underground Temperature down-\yards in various Locali-
ties of Dry Land and under Water. Drawn up by Professor Everett,
at the request of the Committee, consisting of Sir William Thomson,
F.R.S., Sir Charles Lyell, Bart., F.R.S., Professor J. Clerk Maxwell,
F.R.S., Professor Phillips, F.R.S., G. J. Symons, F.M.S., Dr. Balfour
Stewart, F.R.S., Professor Ramsay, F.R.S., Professor A. Geikie,
F.R.S., James Glaisher, F.R.S., Rev. Dr. Graham, E. W. Binney,
F.R.S., George Maw, F.G.S.,W. Pengelly, F.R.S., S. J. Mackie, F.G.S.,
Edward Hull, F.R.S., and Professor Everett, D.C.L. (Secretary) . . 14

Report on Observations of Luminous Meteors, 1870-71. By a Com-
mittee, consisting of James Glaisher, F.R.S., of the Royal Observa-
tory, Greenwich, Robert P. Greg, F.G.S., F.R.A.S., Alexander S.
Herschel, F.R.A.S., and Charles Brooke, F.R.S., Secretary to the
Meteorological Society 26

Fifth Report of the Committee, consisting of Henry Woodward, F.G.S.,
F.Z.S., Dr. Duncan, F.R.S., and R. Etiiepidge, F.R.S., on the Struc-
ture and Classification of the Fossil Crustacea, drawn up by Henry
Woodward, F.G.S., F.Z.S 53

Report of the Committee appointed at the Meeting of the British Asso-
ciation at Liverpool, 1870, consisting of Prof. Jevons, R. Dudley
Baxter, J. T. Danson, James Heywood, F.R.S., Dr. W. B. Hodgson,
and Prof. Waley, with Edmund Macrory as their Secretary, " for the
purpose of urging upon Her Majesty's Government the expediency of
arranging and tabulating the resiUts of the approaching Census in the
three several parts of the United Kingdom in such a manner as to
admit of ready and effective comparison " 57

Report of the Committee appointed for the purpose of Superintending
the Publication of Abstracts of Chemical Papers. The Committee con-
sists of Prof. A. W. Williamson, F.R.S., Prof. H. E. Roscoe, F.R.S.,
Prof. E. Frankland, F.R.S 59

Report of the Committee for discussing Observations of Lunar Objects
suspected of Change. The Committee consists of the Rev. T. W.
Webb and Edward Crossley, Secretary CO

Second Provisional Report on the Thermal Conductivity of Metals. By
Prof. Tait 97

Report on the Rainfall of the British Isles, by a Committee, consisting of
C. Brooke, F.R.S. (Chairman), J. Glaisher, F.R.S., Prof. Phillips,
F.R.S., J. F. Bateman, C.E., F.R.S., R. W. Mylne, C.E., F.R.S.,
T. Hawksley, C.E., Prof. J. C. Adams, F.R.S., C. Tomlinson, F.R.S.,
Prof. Sylvester, F.R.S., Dr. Pole, F.R.S., Rogers Field, C.E., and
G. J. Symons, Secretary 98

Third Report on the British Fossil Corals. By P. Martin Duncan,
F.R.S., F.G.S., Professor of Geology in King's College, London 116

CONTENTS. Ill

Page

Eeport on the Heat generated m the Blood during the process of Arteria-
lization. By Arthur Gamgee, M.D., F.E..S.E., Lecturer on Physiology
in the Extra- Academical Medical School of Edinburgh 137

Eeport of the Committee appointed to consider the subject of Physiolo-
gical Experimentation 144

Eeport on the Physiological Action of Organic Chemical Compounds. By
Benjamin Ward Eichardson, M.A., M.D., P.E.S 145

Eeport of the Committee appointed to get cut and prepared Sections
of Mountain-Limestone Corals for the purpose of showing their Struc-
ture by means of Photography. The Committee consists of James
Thomson, P.G.S., and Prof. Hareness, F.E.S 165

Second Eeport of the Committee appointed to consider and report on the
various Plans proposed for Legislating on the subject of Steam-Boiler
Explosions, with a view to their Prevention, — the Committee consisting
of Sir William Fairbairn, Bart., C.E., LL.D., IF.E.S., John Penn,
C.E., F.E.S., Frederick J. Beamwell, C.E., Hugh Mason, Samuel
EiGBT, Thomas Schofield, Charles F. Beyer, C.E., Thomas Webster,
Q.G., and Lavington E. Fletcher, C.E 166

Eeport of the Committee on the " Treatment and Utilization of Sewage,"
consisting of Eichaed B. Geantham, C.E., F.Qr.S. (Chairman), Pro-
fessor D. T. Ansted, F.E.S., Professor W. H. Corfield, M.A., M.B., J.
Bailet Denton, C.E., F.G.S., Dr. W. H. Gilbert, F.E.S. , John Thorn-
hell Harrison, C.E., Thomas Haavksley, C.E., F.G.S., W. Hope, Y.C,
Lieut.-Col. Leach, E.E., Dr. W. Odling, F.E.S., Dr. A. Voelckee,
F.E.S., Professor A. W. Wu-liamson, F.E.S., F.C.S., and Sir John
Lubbock, Bart., M.P., F.E.S. (Treasurer) 166

Letters from M. Lavoisier to Dr. Black 189

Eeport of the Committee, consisting of Dr. Anton Dourn, Professor Eol-
LESTON, and Mr. P. L. Sclater, appointed for the purpose of promoting
the Foundation of Zoological Stations in differeat parts of the World :
— Eeporter, Dr. Dohen 192

Preliminary Eeport on the Thermal Equivalents of the Oxides of Chlo-
rine. By James Dewae, F.E.S.E 193

Eeport on the practicability of establishing " A Close Time " for the pro-
tection of indigenous Animals. By a Committee, consisting of Prof.
Newton, M.A., F.E.S., Eev. H. B. Tristram, F.E.S., J. E. Harting,
F.L.S., F.Z.S., Eev. H. Barnes, and H. E. Dresser (Eeporter) 197

Eeport of the Committee on Earthquakes in Scotland. The Committee
consists of Dr. Beyce, F.G.S., Sir W. Thomson, F.E.S., D. Mxlne-
HoME, F.E.S.E., P. Macfarlane, and J. Beough 197

Eeport on the best means of providing for a uniformity of Weights and
Measures, with reference to the Interests of Science. By a Committee,
consisting of Sir John Boa^-ring, F.E.S., The Eight Hon. Sir C. B. Ad-
derley, M.P., Samuel Brown, F.S.S., Dr. Fare, F.E.S., FEA^-K P.
Fellowes, Professor Frankland, F.E.S., Professor Hennessy, F.E.S.,
James Heywood, r.E.S., Sir Eobeei Kane, F.E.S., Professor Leose

IV CONTENTS.

Page

Lett, F.S.A., F.S.S., C. W. Siejtejts, F.E.S., Colonel Stkes, F.E.S.,
M.P., Professor A. W. Williamson, F.R.S., James Yates, F.R.S., Dr.
George Gloyee, Sir Joseph Whitwoeth, Bart., F.R.S., J. E. Napier,
H. DiECKS, J. V. N. Bazaigette, "W. Smith, Sir W. Fairbairk, Bart.,
F.E.S., and John Robhtson : — Professor Leoj^e Levi, Secretary .... 198

Eeport of the Committee appointed for the purpose of promoting the
extension, improvement, and harmonic analysis of Tidal Observations.
Consisting of Sir William Thomson, LL.D., F.E.S., Prof. J. C. Adams,
F.E.S., J. Oldham, William Paekes, M. Inst. C.E., Prof. Eanklse,
LL.D., F.E.S., and Admiral Eichaeds, E.N"., F.E.S 201

NOTICES AND ABSTRACTS

OF

MISCELLANEOUS COMMUNICATIONS TO THE SECTIONS.

MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS.

Address by Professor P. G. Tait, M.A., F.R.S.E, President of the Section , . 1

Mathematics.

Mr. Robert Sta'well Ball's exhibition and description of a Model of a
Conoidal Cubic Surface called the " Cylindroid," which is presented in the

Theory of the Geometrical Freedom of a Rigid Body 8

Professor Catley on the Number of Covariants of a Binaiy Quantic 9

Mr. W. K. Cliffoed on a Canonical Fonn of Spherical Harmonics 10

Mr. J. W. L. Glaishee on certain Definite Integrals 10

— ■ — ~ on Lambert's Proof of the In-ationality of tt, and on

the L-rationality of certain other Quantities 12

Mr. C. W. Meeelfield on certain Families of Surfaces 18

INIr. F. W. NEvraiAN on Doubly Diametral Quartan Ciu-ves 20

Professor Purser's Remarks on Napier's original Method of Logarithms 23

Mr. W. H. L. Russell on Linear Differential Equations 23

on MacCuUagh's Theorem 23

Mr. J. J. Stltesteh. on the Theory of a Point in Partitions 23

Sir W. Thomson on the General Canonical Form of a Spherical Harmonic of

the nth Order 25

CONTENTS. y

Gekehai, Physics,

Mr. Robert Stawell Ball's Account of Experiments upon tlie Resistance
of Air to the Motion of Vortex-rings 20

Mr. H. Deacon's Experiments on Vortex-rings in Liquids 29

Professor J. D. Everett on Units of Force and Energy 29

Dr. J. H. Gladstone and Alfred Tribe on the Corrosion of Copper Plates
by Nitrate of Silver 29

M. Janssen's Remarks on Physics 29

INIr. T. M. Lindsay and W. R. Smith on Democritus and Lucretius, a Ques-
tion of Priority in the Kinetical Theory of Matter 30

Professor James Thomson's Speculations on the Continuity of the Fluid State
of Matter, and on Relations between the Gaseous, the Liquid, and the Solid
States 30

Observations on Water in Frost Rising against

Gravity rather than Freezing in the Pores of Moist Earth 34

Astronomy.

Professor Cliffobd on the Secular Cooling and the Figure of tbe Earth .... 34

Dr. Gill's Observations on the Parallax of a Planetary Nebula 34

M. Janssen on the Coming Solar Eclipse 34

Mr. J. Norman Lockyer on the Recent and Coming Solar Eclipses 34

Mr. R. A. Proctor on the Construction of the Heavens 34

Professor Osborne Reynolds on Artificial Coronas 34

Mr. H. Fox Talbot on a Method of Estimating the Distances of some of the

Fixed Stars 34

Professor Charles V. Zenger on the Nutoscopo, an Apparatus for f^howing

Graphically the Curve of Precession and Nutation 30

Light.

Mr. Philip Braham's description of a Set of Lenses for the Accurate Cor-
rection of Visual Defect 37

Mr. Thomas'Stevenson's description of a Paraboloidal Reflector for Light-
houses, consisting of silvered facets of ground-glass ; and of a Diflereutial
Holophote ■. "T

Professor G. G. Stokes's Notice of the Researches of the late Rev. William
Vernon Harcoui-t' on the Conditions of Transparency in Glass, and the Con-
nexion between the Chemical Constitution and Optical Properties of dif-
ferent Glasses 38

Mr. G. Johnstone Stoney on one Cause of Transparency ........ r ....... . 41

on the advantage of referring the positions of

Lines in the Specti-um to a Scale of Wave-numbers 42

Professor William Swan on the Wave-lengths of the Spectra of the Hydro-
carbons - 43

The Abbe Moigno on the Poste Photographique .■ 44

Mr. R. Sutton's Accoimt of a New Photographic Dry Process 44

VI CONTENTS.

Page

Heat,

Mr. Donald MTablane's description of Experiments made in the Physical
Laboratory of the University of Glasgow to determine the Surface Conduc-
tivity for Ileat of a Copper Ball 44

Mr. William Ladd on a Respirator for Use in Extinction of Fires 44

Professor Balfoub Stewart on the Temperature-equilibrium of an Enclosure
in which there is a Body in Visible Motion 45

Professor Ch. V. Zexgee on a new Steam-gauge 45

Electeicitt and Magnetism.

Jlr. Thomas Bloxam on the Influence of Clean and Unclean Surfaces in Vol-
taic Action 47

Mr. Latimeb Clabk on a new Form of Constant Galvanic Battery 47

Dr. J. P. Joule's Notice of and Observations with a New Dip-circle 48

Professor Tait on Thermo-electricity 48

INIr. C. F. Varley on a Metliod of Testing Submerged Electric Cables 48

Professor Cn. V, Zengeb on a New Key for the Morse Printing Telegraph . . 48

Meteokology.

Dr. Buys Ballot on the Importance of the Azores as a Meteorological Sta-
tion 49

Dr. Alexander Brown on theMean Temperatm-e of Arbroath. Lat. 5(P33'35''
North, Long. 2= 35' 30" W. of Greenwich 60

Dr. William B. Carpenter on the Thermo-Dynamics of the General Oceanic
Circulation " 61

Rev. Professor Challis on the Mathematical Theory of Atmospheric Tides . 51

Professor Colding's Remarks on Aerial Currents 53

Professor J. D. Everett on Wet- and Dry-bidb Formula 54

on the General Circulation and Distribution of the

Atmosphere 64

M. Janssen's Observations Physiques en Ballon 65

Mr. W. Pengelly on the Influence of the Moon on the Rainfall 65

Mr. R. Russell on the Inferences drawn by Drs. !Rfagnxis and Tyndall from
their Experiments on the Radiant Properties of Vapour 66

Mr. William A, Traill on Parhelia, or Mock Suns, observed in L-eland . . 56

The Peogbess of Science.

Lieut.-Col. A. Strange on Government Action on Scientific Questions .... 56
Kev. W. TuCKYTELL on the Obstacles to Science-Teaching in Schools 57

CHEMISTRY.

Address by Professor Andrews, F.R.S.L. & E., President of the Section. ... 59
Mr. Thomas Ainsworth on the Facts developed by the Working of Hsema-
tite Ores in the Ulverstone and Whitehaven Districts from 1844-71 66

CONTENTS. VU

Dr. AjfDiiEWS on tlie Dicliroism of the Vapour of Iodine "^

on the Action of Heat on Bromine qq

Professor Apjohn's Remarks upon the Proximate Analysis of Saccharine

Matters ' qq

M. GusTAV BiscHOF on the Examination of Water for Sanitary purposes . . G7

Mr. Philip Brahajx on the Crystallization of Metals by Electricity G7

Mr. J. Y. Buchanan on the Rate of Action of Caustic Soda on a watery Solu-
tion of Chloracetic Acid at 100° C (37

Dr. F. Chace-Calyekt on the Estimation of Sulphur in Coal and Coke 68

Mr. John Dalzell and Dr. T. E. Thoupe on the Existence of Sulphur Di-

chloride go

Mr. Henry Deacon on Deacon's Chlorine Process as applied to the Manufac-
ture of Bleaching-powder on the larger Scale (59

Professor Delffs on Sorbit qq

on the Detection of Morphine by Iodic Acid 69

Dr. J. H. Gladstone and Alfbed Teihe's Experiments on Chemical Dy-
namics r-Q

Dr. J. H. Gladstone on Crystals of Silver 7X

Dr. John Goodman on Fibrin 7.9

• * t ^

Mr. William Hareness's Preliminary Notice on a New Method of Testing-
Samples of Wood-Naphtha ° 72

The Rev. H. Highton on a Method of Preserving Food by Muriatic Acid . . 73

Dr. J. Sinclair Holden on the Aluminous Iron-ores of Co. Antrim 74

Professor N. Story Maskelyne on the Localities of Dioptase 74

on Andrewsite 75

Dr. T. Moffat on Ozonometry 7g

The Abb:^ Moigno on the Photographic Post 76

Mr. Pattison Mulr on an Antimony-ore from New Zealand 76

Dr. T. L. Phipson on Regianic Acid 76

Dr. J. Emerson Reynolds on the Action of Aldehyde on the two Primary

Ureas 76

on the Analysis of a singular Deposit from Well-
water 7g

Dr. Otto Richter on the Chemical Constitution of Glycolic Alcohol and its

Ileterologues, as viewed in the new light of the Typo-nucleus Theory .... 78

Mr. William Chandler Roberts on the Molecular aiTangement of the Alloy

of Silver and Copper employed for the British Silver Coinage 80

Mr. E. C. C. Stanford on the Retention of Organic Nitrogen by Charcoal . . 81

Mr. John Smyth, Jun., on Improvements in Chlorimetry 81

Dr. T. E. Thorpe's Contributions to the History of the Phosphorus Chlorides 81

Mr. C. R. C. Tichbobne on the Dissociation of Molecules by Heat 81

Mr. C. ToMLiNSON on the behaviom- of Supersatiu-ated Saline Solutions when

exposed to the open air go

Mr. J. A. Wanklyn on the Constitution of Salts 83

Mr. C. Gilbert Wheeler on the Recent Progress in Chemistry in the United

States , , I ^ go

VIU CONTENTS.

Page
Mr, C. R. A. Wright and Chaeles H. Piesse on the Oxidation products
of the Essential Oil of Orange-peel, known as " Essence do Portug-al " . . . . 83

Sir. C. R. A. Wright on certain new Derivatives from Codeia 84

GEOLOGY.

Address by Archibald Geikie, F.R.S., President of the Section 87

The Rev. J. F. Blake on the Yortshiro Lias and the Distribution of its
Ammonites 90

Mr. D. J. Brown on the Silurian Rocks of the South of Scotland 93

on the Upper Silurian Rocks of the Pentland Hills and

Lesmahago 93

Dr. Robert Brown's Geological IVotes on the Noursoak Peninsida and Disco
Island in North Greenland 94

Dr. Bryce on certain Fossils from the Durine Limestone, N.W. Suther-
land ■* 94

Mr. W. Carruthers on the Vegetable Contents of Masses of Limestone
occurring in Trappean Rocks in Fifeshire, and the conditions under which
they are preserved 94

Mr. John Curry on the General Conditions of the Glacial Epoch ; with Sug-
gestions on the formation of Lake-basins 95

Mr. R. Dainteee on the General Geology of Queensland 96

Mr. W. Boyd Dawkins on the Relation of the Quaternary Mammalia to the
Glacial Period 9o

Prof. Geikie on the Progress of the Geological Survey in Scotland 9G

Mr. D. Grieve on the Fossiliferous Strata at Lochend near Edinburgh .... 98

]\Ir. G. J. Grieve on the position of Organic Remains near Burntisland .... 98

Sir Richard Griffith, Bart., on "The Boulder Drift and Esker Hills of
Ireland," and " Onthe position of Erratic Blocks in the Countiy " 98

The Rev. J. Gtjnn on the Agency of the Alternate Elevation and Subsidence
of the Land in the formation of Boulder-clays and Glaciers, and the Exca-
vation of Valleys and Bays 100

Mr. John Henderson on the Age of the Felstones and Conglomerates of the
Pentland Hills 101

Professor Edward Hull and Mr. William A. Traill on the relative ages
of the Granitic, Plutonic, and 'N'olcanic Rocks of the Mourne Mountains and
Slieve Croob, Co. Down, Ireland 101

The Rev. Dr. Hume on the Coal-beds of Panama, in reference mainly to their
Economic Importance 103

Mr. Charles Lapworth and Jajies Wilson on the Silurian Rocks of the
Coimties of Roxbm-gh and Selkirk 103

Mr. Charles Lapworth on the Graptolites of the Gala Group 104

Mr. P. W. Stuabt Menteath on the Origin of Volcanoes 104

Mr. L. C. Miall's further Experiments and Remarks on Contortion of Rocks 106

Mr. John Miller on the so-called Ilyoid plate of the Asteroleins of the Old
Red Sandstone lOG

Mr. D. Milne-Home on the Conservation of Boulders 107

Mr. W. S. Mitchell's further Remarks on the Denudation of the Bath
Oolite 107

CONTEXTS. IX

Page

Dr. Moffat on Geological Systems and Endemic Disease 107

Dr. James Murie on the Systematic Position of Sivatherium giganteum, Faulc.
and Caiit 108

Mr. C. W. Peach's Additions to the list of Fossils and Localities of the Car-
boniferous Formation in and around Edinbm'gh 109

L'Abb:e Richabd on Hydro-Geology 109

The Rev. W. S. Symonds on the Contents of a Hyaena's Den on the Great
Doward, Whitchurch, Ross 109

on a New Fish-spine from the Lower Old Red

Sandstone of Hay, Breconshire 110

IMr. J. S. Tayxob on the later Crag-Deposits of Norfolk and Suffolk 110

Mr. Jasies Thomson on the Stratified Rocks of Islay 110

Prof. Traquair's Additions to the Fossil Vertebrate Fauna of Burdiehouse,
near Edinburgh Ill

Professor W. C. Williamson on the Structure of the Diciyoxyhns of the
Coal-measures Ill

on the Structure of Diploxylon, a Plant of the

Carboniferous Rocks 112

Mr. Henry Woodward on the Discovery of a new and very perfect Arachnide
from the Ironstone of the Dudley Coal-field 112

on the Relics of the Carboniferous and other old

Land-surfaces 113

BIOLOGY.

Address by Dr. Axlen Thomson, F.R.SS. L. & R, President of the Section . . 114

Dr. Charlton Bastian on some new Experiments relating to the Origin of
Life 122

Dr. F. Cbace-Oalvebt on the Action of Heat on Germ-life 122

on Spontaneous Generation, or Protoplasmic Life . . 12.3

Dr. John Dougal on the relative Powers of various Substances in preventing
the Generation of Animalcules, or the Development of their Germs, with
special reference to the Germ Theory of Putrefaction 124-

Sir Walter Elliot on the advantage of Systematic Cooperation among Pro-
vincial Natural-History Societies, so as to make their observations available
to Naturalists generally 124

Dr. Burdon Sanderson and Dr. Ferrier on the Origin and Distribution of
Microzymes {Bacteria) in water, and the circumstances which determine
their Existence in the Tissues and Liquids of the Living Body 125

Mr. T. B. Grierson on the Establishment of Local Museums 126

Botany.

Professor Balfour on the Cultivation of Ipecacuanha in the Edinburgh Bo-
tanic Garden for transmission to India 127

Mr. Robert Bhot^tst on the Flora of Greenland 128

on the Geographical Distribution of the Floras of North-

west America 12

X CONTENTS.

Page

The Rev. Thomas Bho'wn on Specimens of Fossil-wood from the Base of the
Lower Carboniferous Rocks at Langton, Berwickshire 128

Professor A. Dickson's Suggestions on Fruit Classification 128

Mr. W. T. Thiselton Dyeb on the minute Anatomy of the Stem of the
Screw-Pine, PandaniK utilis 128

on the so-called ' Mimicry' in Plants 128

Mr. A. G. More on Spiranthes Bomanzoviana, Cham 129

on Eriophorum aljnnum, Linn., as a British Plant 129

Dr. James Mueie on the Development of Fungi within the Thorax of Living
Birds 129

Dr. J. BuiKBECK Nevins on the Changes which occur in Plants during the
ripening of the Seeds, in order to ensure the access of the Air and Light as
well as Heat, which are generally reqmsite for this purpose, without the
loss of the Seeds before the ripening is completed 130

on the Nature of the Cruciferous fruit, with refer-
ence to the Replum 130

Mr. J. Sadler on the Species of Grimynia (including Schididiuni) as repre-
sented in the neighboiu'hood of Edinburgh 131

Mr. Neil Stewart's Observations on the intimate Structure of Spiral ducts
in Plants and their relationship to the Flower 131

Inquiry into the Fimctions of Colour in Plants during

different Stages of their Development , 131

Prof. W. C. Williamson on the Classification of the Vascular Cryptogamia,
as affected by recent Discoveries amongst the Fossil Plants of the Coal-
measures 131

• Zoology.

Professor J. Duns's Notice of two Specimens of Echinorhinus qmiosiis taken
in the Firth of Forth 132

— — on the Rarer Raptorial Birds of Scotland 132

Dr. Grierson on the Carahm nitens of the Scottish Moors 132

Ml". W. Saville Kent on the Zoological Results of the Dredging Expedition
of the Yacht ' Norma ' off the Coast of Spain and Portugal in 1870 132

Mr. A. W. Lewis's Proposal for a Modification of the strict Law of Priority
in Zoological Nomenclature in certain cases 133

Dr. Christian Lutken on some resent Additions to the Arctic Fauna (a new
Antipathes and a new Apodal Lophioid) 133

Mr. A. G. More on the occun-ence of Brown Trout in Salt Water 133

on some Dredgings in Kenmare Bay 133

Mr. C. W. Peach on the so-called Tailless Trout of Islay 1S3

Colonel Playfair on the Hydrographical System of the Freshwater Fish of
Algeria 134

Dr. P. L. Sclater's Remarks on a favourable occasion for the establishment
of Zoological Observatories 134

Professor Wyville Thomson on the Structure of Crinoids 134

on the Paleeontological Relations of the Fauna

of the North Atlantic ' 134

CONTENTS. XI

Page
Mr. Roland Thimen on a curious Soutli-Afiicau Grasshopper, Trachypetra
bufo (White), which mimics with much precision the appearance of the

stones among which it lives 13-4

Professeur Van Beneden sur les Chauves-souris de I'^poque du Mammouth
et de I'epoque actuelle 13*5

The Rev. R. B. Watson's Notes on Dredging at Madeira 137

Anatomy and Physiology.

Professor A. Buchanan on the Pressure of the Atmosphere as an Auxiliary
Force in carrying on the Circulation of the Blood 137

Dr. John Chiene's Experimental Inquiry into some of the Resxilts of Inocu-
lation in the lower Animals 138

Professor W. H. Flower on the Composition of the Carpus of the Dog .... 138

Dr. Arthitr Gamgee on the Magnetic and Diamagnetic Properties of the
Blood 138

Sir Duncan Gibb on the Uses of the Uvula 139

on some Abnormalities of the Larynx 139

Professor Humphry on the Caudal and Abdominal Muscles of the Crypto-
branch 140

Mr. E. Ray Lankesteh on the Existence of Haemoglobin in the Muscular
Tissue, and its relation to Muscular Activity 140

Mr. B. T. LowNE on the Ciliated Condition of the Inner Layer of the Blasto-
derm in the Ova of Birds and in the Omphalo-mesenteric Vessels 140

Professor A. Macalisteh on the Bearing of Muscular Anomalies on the Dar-
winian Theory of the Origin of Species 140

Dr. M'Kendbiok on a New Form of Tetanometer , 140

Dr. William Mahcet on the Nutrition of Muscular and Pulmonary Tissue
in Health and in Phthisis, with Remarks on the Colloid Condition of Mat-
ter 140

Dr. Edward Smith on Dietaries in the Workhouses of England and Wales . 141

Professor Stbuthers on some Rudimentary Structures recently met with in
the Dissection of a large Fin-Whale 142

on the Cervical Vertebrte in Cetacea 142

Professor R. H. Traquair on the Restoration of the Tail in Protopterus an-
nectens 143

Dr. J. Batty Tuke and Professor Rutherford on tlie Morbid Appearances
noticed in the Brains of Insane People 144

Professor Turner on the Placentation in the Cetacea 144

's Notes on the Cervical Vertebrae of Steypirethyr {JBala-

noptera Sihbaldii) 144

Dr. M. Watson's Contributions to the Anatomy of the Thoracic Viscera of
the Elephant 144

Anthropology.

Professor Turner's Address to the Department of Anthropology 144

Dr. John Beddoe on the Anthropolygy of the Merse 147

on Degeneration of Race in Britain 148

Dr. Charnock on Le Sette Communi, a German Colony in the neighbourhood
of Viceuza 148

Xn CONTENTS.

Pa

Dr. Chaenock and Dr. Carter Blake on tlie Physical, Mental, and Philo-
logical Characteristic of the Wallons , , 1-48

Dr. Eugene A. Coxwell on an Inscribed Stone at Newhaggard, in the
County of Meath 149

Mr. W. Boyd Dawkins on the Origin of the Domestic Animals of Europe . . 149

on the attempted Classification of the Palaeolithic

Age by means of the Mammalia 119

Mr. Walter Dendy on a Gleam of the Saxon in the Weald 150

Mr. J. W. Flower on the Eelative Ages of the Flint- and Stone-Implement
Periods in England 150

Sir Duncan Gibb on Centenarian Longevity 151

on the Fat Woman exhibiting in London 152

Ml-. George Harris on the Hereditary Transmission of Endowments and
Qualities of different kinds 152

on the Comparative Longevity of Animals of difierent

Species and of Man, and the probable Causes which mainly conduce to pro-
mote this difierence 153

Mr. J. W, Jackson on the Adantean Eace of Western Europe 153

Mr. J. Kaines on the Anthropology of Auguste Comte 153

Dr. E. King on the Lapps 153

Lieut. -Col. Forbes Leslie on Megalithic Circles , 154

on Ancient Hierogh'phic Sculptui'es 155

Eev. J. M'^Cann on the Origin of the Moral Sense 155

]SIr. W. D. MiCHELL, Is the Stone Age of LyeU and Lubbock as yet at all
proven ? 155

Mr. M. MoGGRiDGE on Bones and Flints foimd in the Caves at Mentone and in
the adjacent Eailway Cutting 155

Ml'. J. Wolfe Murray on a Cross traced upon a hill at Criugletie, near Peebles 156

Mr. George Pethie on Ancient Modes of Sepultm-e in the Orkneys 15G

Mr. John S. Phene on an Expedition for the Special Investigation of the
Hebrides and West Highlands, in search of Evidences of Ancient Serpent-
Worship 158

on some indications of the Manners and Customs of the

early Inhabitants of Britain, deduced from the Eemains of their towns and
villages 159

The Abbe Eichard on the Discoveiy of Flint Implements in Eg3pt, at Moimt
Sinai, at Galgala, and in Joshua's Tomb ' 160

Professor Struthers on Skulls presenting Sagittal Sj-nostosis 160

The Eev. W. S. Symonds on Implements found in King Arthui-'s Cave, near
Whitchm-ch 160

Professor Turner on Human and Animal Bones and Flints from a Cave at
Oban, Ai-gyleshire 160

Mr. C. Staniland Wake on Man and the Ape 162

The Eev. W. Webster on certain Points concerning the Origin and Eelations
of the Basque Eace t 162

CONTENTS. XIU

GEOGRAPHY.

Address by Colonel Henry Yule, C.B., President of the Section 162

Major-General jLtbeamof on the Principality of Karategin 174

Major Basevi on Minicoy Island 174

Captain L. Bbine on the Euined Cities of Central America 175

Dr. Eobekt BnowN on the Interior of Greenland 175

Captain Chimmo on Cagayan Sulu Island 176

Dr. CoPELAND on the Second German Arctic Expedition 176

Captain F. Elton on the Limpopo Expedition 178

JNIi-. Chhistopher George on a Self-replenishing Artificial Horizon 178

Dr. Ginsburg's Further disclosxu-es of the Moabite Stone 179

Dr. J. D. Hooker's Ascent of the Atlas Eauge 179

Ibrahim Khan's Journey from Yassin to Yarkand . . . i .i...> 180

Captain "B. Lovett on the Interior of Mekran 180

Colonel E. Maclagan on the Geographical Distribution of Petroleum and
allied products 180

Dr. E. J. Mann on the Formation of Sand-bars 184

Pandit Manphal's Eeport on Badakolan 184

ISIx. C. E. Mahkham on the Eastern Cordillera, and the Navigation of the
Eiver Madeira 184

— on the Geographical Positions of the Tiibes which

formed the Empire of the Yncas 185

Captain JNIiles on the Somali Coast 186

Eev. F. 0. Morris on the Encroachments of the Sea on the East Coast of
Yorkshire 187

Mr. S. Mossman on the Inundation and Subsidence of the Yang-tsze Eiver,
in China 187

Archimandrate Pallakius's Letters from Vladivostok and Nikolsk, South
Ussuri District , 187

]\Ii-. E. H. Palmer on the Geography of Moab 187

Captain H. S. Palmer on an Acoustic Phenomenon at Jebel Nagiis, in the
Peninsula of Sinai 188

Capt. A. Pullan's Notes on British Gm-whal 189

Dr. Eae on the Saskatchewan Valley 189

Mr, W. B. Eichardson on the Volcan de Agua, near Guatemala 189

Major E. C. Eoss, A Journey through Mekran 189

Mr. George St. Clair on the Topography of Ancient Jerusalem 189

Mr. Thela-svney Saunders on the Himalayas and Central Asia 189

Major Sladen on Ti-ade Eoutes between Burmah and China 189

Commander A. Dundas Taylor on the Proposed Ship-Canal between Ceylon
and India 189

Capt. Ward on the American Arctic Expedition 190

M. Arthur Wertherman on the Exploration of the Headwaters of the
Maranon 190

Colonel Henry YuLEon Captain Garnier's Expedition up the Camboja , . , . 190

^^^ CONTENTS.

ECONOMIC SCIENCE and STATISTICS.

Addi-ess by Lohd Neaves, one of the Lords of Session, President of the Sec-
tion 191

Colonel Sir J. E. Alexander on Sanitary Measures for Scottish Villages . . 200
Lydia E. Becker on some Maxims of Political Economy as applied to the
Employment of Women, and the Education of Girls 201

Mr. William Botley on Land Tenure 202

Mr. Thomas J. Boyd on Educational Hospital Reform : The Scheme of the
Edinburgh Merchant Company 202

Mr. Samuel Brown on the Measurement of Man and his Faculties 210

Sheriff Cleghorn on the Wellington Reformatory 211

Mr. F. P. Fellowes on a proposed Doomsday Book, giving the Value of the
Governmental Property as a basis for a sound system of National Finance
and Accounts 211

Mr. William Hoyt:,e on Political Economy, Pauperism, the Labour Question,
and the Liquor Traffic 212

Mr. A. Jyram-Row on the present state of Education in India, and its bear-
ings on the question of Social Science 212

:Mr. Charles Lamport on Naval Efficiency and Dockyard Economy 212

Mr. W. M'Bean on the Edinburgh Industrial Home for Fallen Women, Aln-
wick Hill, near Liberton 212

Mr. James Meikle on the Mode for Assessing for the Poor-Rates 213

Mr. W. A. Peterkin on the Administration of the Poor Law 213

Mr. George Seton on the Illegitimacy of Banffshire 214

■ — on the Expediency of recording Still-Births 215

• on certain Cases of Questioned Legitimacy under the

Operation of the Scottish Registration Act (17 & 18 Vict. c. 80) 217

Dr. George Smith on Indian Statistics and Official Reports 220

Mr. William Stephenson on the Scientific Aspects of Children's Hospitals 221

Mr. G. Johnstone Stoney on the Relation between British and Metrical
Measures 222

Mr. W. Taylor on the Manual Labour Classes of England, Wales, and
Scotland 223

Mr. James Valentine on Census Reform 223

Mr. R. Bailey Walker on the Organization of Societies, nationally and locally
considered 223

Mr. William Westgabth on the Law of Capital 223

MECHANICAL SCIENCE.

Address by Professor Fleeming Jenkin, F.R.S., President of the Section . , 225
Mr. Philip Braham on an Apparatus for working Torpedoes 229

Mr. F. J. BRAMm-ELL's Account of some Experiments upon a " Carr's Disin-
tegrator" at work at Messrs. Gibson and Walker's Flour-mills, Leith .... 229

CONTENTS. XV

Mr. A. B. Brom'N ou a direct-acting Combined Steam and Hydraulic Crauo . 231

Mr. Alexakdeb Buchan on the Rainfall of Scotland 232

— on the Rainfall of the Northern Hemisphere in July,

as contrasted with that of January, with Remarks on Atmospheric Circula-
tion 232

on the Great Heat of August 2nd-4th, 18G8 232

Mr. TuoMAS Carr on a new iNIill for Disintegrating Wheat 233

Mr. R. Douglas on the Corliss Engine 234

Mr. R. F. Fairlie on the Gauge of Railways 234

Mr. A. E. Fletcher on the Rhysimeter, an Instrument for Measuring the
Speed of Flowing Water or of Ships 234

Mr. Lavington E. Fletcher on Steam-boiler Legislation 236

Mr. Thomas Gillott on Designing Pointed Roofs 239

Mr. jAiiES Leslie's Description of a Salmon-ladder meant to suit the vary-
■ ing levels of a Lake or Reservoir 239

J\Ir. J. D. Morrison on a new S3-stem of Warming and Ventilation 240

Mr. R. A. Peacock on Chain-Cable Testing, and lu-oposed New Testing-Link 240

Mr. E. C. C. Stanford on the Carbon Closet System 240

Mr. C. William Siemens on the Steam Blast 240

Mr. Thomas Ste-st<:nson, Automatic Gauge for the Discharge of Water over
Weirs 241

Thermometer of Translation for recording the Daily

Changes of Temperatm-o 241

Mr. MiCHAL Scott on improved Ships of War 241

Mr. W. Thomson on a Road Steamer 241

APPENDIX.

The Rev. Robert Boog Watson's Notes on Dredgings at Madeira 242

Mr. B. T. LowNE on the Ciliated Condition of the Inner Layer of the Blasto-
derm and of the Omphalo -mesenteric Vessels in the Egg of the Coumion
Fowl 242

EREATA IN EEPOET FOE 1870.

^^^"^

s, offer line 32, inseri Anatomy and rinsiOLOCY.

si, ,, 37, ,, Etiixology and Akthropoi.ogy.

XV, „ 25, „ Address by Mr. Jolm Evans lo the Department of Ethno-
logy and Anthropology,
xxxii, line 31, fur Glasgow read Edinburgli.
129, Transactions of Sections, afier line 11, insert Anatomy and Puysiology.
1^3, „ „ ,, „ 35, „ Ethnology and ANTimoroLOGY.

EERATUM IN THE PEESENT VOLUME.

Page 177, Traneaetious of the Sections, line 33, /yr 0'-58 read 0"-5S.

OBJECTS AND RULES

OP

THE ASSOCIATION.

OBJECTS.

The Association contemplates no interference with the ground occupied by
other institutions. Its objects are : — To give a stronger impulse and a more
systematic direction to scientific inquiry,— to promote the intercourse of those
who cultivate Science in different parts of the British Empire, with one an-
other and with foreign philosophers, — to obtain a more general attention to
the objects of Science, and a removal of any disadvantages of a public kind
which impede its progress.

RULE S.

Admission of Members and Associates.

All persons who have attended the first Meeting shall bo entitled to be-
come Members of the Association, upon subscribing an obligation to con-
form to its Rules.

The Fellows and Members of Chartered Literary and Philosophical So-
cieties publishing Transactions, in the British Empii-e, shall be entitled, in
like manner, to become Members of the Association.

The Officers and Members of the Councils, or Managing Committees, of
Philosophical Institutions shall be entitled, in lilie manner, to become Mem- *
bers of the Association.

All Members of a Philosophical Institution recommended by its Council
or Managing Committee shall be entitled, in Hke manner, to become Mem-
bers of the Association.

Persons not belonging to such Institutions shaU be elected by the General
Committee or Coimcil, to become Life Members of the Association, Annual
Subscribers, or Associates for the year, subject to the approval of a General
Meeting.

^£>-

Compositions, Subscriptions, and Privileges.

Life Mehbers shall pay, on admission, the sum of Ten Pounds. They
shall receive gratuitously the Reports of the Association which may be pub-
1871. 6

Xviii RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION.

lished after the date of such payment. They arc eligible to all the offices
of the Association.

Annual Stibsceibers shall pay, on admission, the sum of Two Pounds,
and in each following year the sum of One Pound. They shall receive
(iratultoushj the Reports of the Association for the year of theii- admission
and for the yeai-s in which they continue to pay tvithout intermission their
Annual Subscription. By omitting to pay this Subscription in any particu-
lar year, Members of this class (Annual Subscribers) Jose for that and all
future years the pri\ilege of receiving the volumes of the Association r/ratis:
but they may resume their Membership and other privileges at any sub-
sequent Meeting of the Association, paying on each such occasion the sum of
One Pound. They are eligible to all the Offices of the Association.

Associates for the year shall pay on admission the sum of One Pound.
They shall not receive (jratuitoushj the Reports of the Association, nor be
eligible to serve on Committees, or to hold any office.

The Association consists of the following classes : —

1. Life Members admitted from 1831 to 1845 inclusive, who have paid
on admission Five Pounds as a composition.

2. Life Members who in 1846, or in subsequent years, have paid on ad-
mission Ten Pounds as a composition.

3. Annual Members admitted from 1S31 to 1839 inclusive, subject to the
payment of One Pound annually. [May resume their Membership after in-
termission of Annual Payment.]

4. Annual Members admitted in any year since 1839, subject to the pay-
ment of Two Pounds for the fii-st year, and One Pound in each following year.
[May resume their Membership after intermission of Annual Payment.]

5. Associates for the year, subject to the payment of One Pound.

6. Corresponding Members nominated by the Coimcil.

And the Members and Associates will be entitled to receive the annual
volume of Reports, gratis, or to purchase it at reduced (or Members') price,
according to the foUo-ning specification, viz. : —

1. Gratis. — Old Life Members who have paid Pive Pounds as a compo-

sition for Annual Payments, and previous to 1845 a further
sum of Two Pounds as a Book Subscription, or, since 1845, a
further sum of Five Pounds.

New Life Members who have paid Ten Pounds as a composition.

Annual Members who have not intermitted their Annual Sub-
scription.

2. At reduced or Memhers' Prices, viz. two-thirds of the Publication

Price. — Old Life Members who have paid Five Pounds as a

composition for Annual Payments, but no ftirther sum as a

Book Subscription.
Annual Members who have intermitted theii* Annual Subscription.
Associates for the year. [Privilege confined to the volume for

that year only.]

3. M<nubcrs may purchase (for the purpose of completing theii' sets) any

of the fii'st seventeen volumes of Transactions of the Associa-
tion, and of wJiich more than 100 copies remain, at one-third of
the Publication Price. Application to be made at the Office
of the Association, 22 Albemarle Street, London, "W.

RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. XIX

Volumes not clp,imed -within two years of the date of publication can only
be issued by directioji of the Coiincil.

Subscriptions shall be received by the Treasurer or Secretaries.

Meetinys.

The Association shall meet annually, for one week, or longer. The plac6
of each Meeting shall be appointed liy the General Committee two years in
advance ; and the Arrangements for it shall be entrusted to the Officers of
the Association.

General Committee,

The General Committee shall sit during the week of the Meeting, or
longer, to transact the business of the Association. It shall consist of the
following persons : —

Class A. Peemanent Members.

1. Members of the Council, Presidents of the Association, and Presidents
of Sections for tlie present and preceding years, with Authors of Reports in
the Transactions of the Association,

2. Members who by the publication of AVorks or Papers have furthered
the advancement of those subjects which are taken into consideration at the
Sectional Meetings of the Association. With a vieiv of stihiniiilruj new claims
under this Hide to the decision of the Council, thei/ must he sent to the Assistant
Genercd Secretari/ at least one month before the Meeting of the Association.
The decision of the Council on the claims of any Member of tli^e Association to
he placed on the list of the General Committee to he final.

Class B. Temposaey Mejibebs.

1. Presidents for the time being of any Scientific Societies pubhshing Trans-
actions or, in liis absence, a delegate representing him. Claims under this Rule
to be sent to the Assistant General Secretary before the openiwj of the Meeting.

2. Office-bearers for the time being, or delegates, altogether not exceeding
tliree, from Scientific Institutions established in the place of Meeting.
Claims tinder this Eide to be approved by the Loccd Secretaries before the
openiny of the Meeting.

3. Foreigners and other individuals whose assistance is desired, and who
are specially nominated in writing, for the Meeting of the year, by the Pre-
sident and General Secretaries.

4. Yice-Presidents and Secretaries of Sections.

Oi'gamzing Sectional Commiite^s^,

The Presidents, Yice-Presidents, and Secretaries of the several Sections
are nominated by the Council, and have power to act until their names are
submitted to the General Committee for election.

From the time of their nomination they constitute Organizing Committees
for the purpose of obtaining information upon the Memoirs and Eeports
Hkely to be submitted to the Sections f, and of preparing Eeports thereon,

* Passed by the General Committee, Edinburgh, 1871.

t l\oticc to Contributors of Memoirs.— kwihova are reminded that, nndpi" an arrange-
ment dating from 1871, the acceptance of Memoirs, and the days on -which they are to be

XX RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION.

and on the order in -which it is desirable that they should be read, to be pre-
sented to the Committees of the Sections at their first Meeting.

An Orgauiziug Committee may also hold snch preliminary Meetings as the
President of the Committee thinks expedient, but shall, under any circum-
stances, meet on the first Wednesday of the Annual Meeting, at 11 a.m., to
settle the terms of their Report, after which their functions as an Organizing
Committee shall cease.

Constitution of the Sectional Committees''^.

On the first day of the Annual Meeting, the President, Vice-Presidents,
and Secretaries of each Section having been appointed by the General Com-
mittee, these Officers, and those previous Presidents and Vice-Presidents of
the Section who may desire to attend, are to meet, at 2 p.m., in their Com-
mittee Eooms, and enlarge the Sectional Committees by selecting individuals
from among the Members (not Associates) present at the Meeting whose as-
sistance they may particularly desire. The Sectional Committees thus con-
stituted shall have power to add to their number from day to day.

The List thus formed is to be entered daily in the Sectional Minute-Book,
and a copy forwarded without delay to the Printer, who is charged with
publishing the same before 8 a.m. on the next day, in the Journal of the
Sectional Proceedings.

Business of the Sectional Committees.

Committee Meetings are to be held on the Wednesday at 2 p.m., on the
following Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Monday, and Tuesday, from 10 to
11 A.M., punctually, for the objects stated in the Pules of the Association,
and specified below.

The business is to be conducted in the following manner : —

At the first meeting, one of the Secretaries will read the Minutes of last
year's proceedings, as recorded in the Minute-Book, and the Synopsis of
Recommendations adopted at the last Meeting of the Association and printed
in the last volume of the Transactions. He will next proceed to read the
Report of the Organiziug Committee f. The List of Communications to be
read on Thursday shall be then arranged, and the general distribution of
business throughout the week shall be provisionally appointed. At the close
of the Committee Meeting the Secretaries shall forward to the Printer a List
of the Papers appointed to be read. The Printer is charged with publishing
the same befoi-e 8 a.m. on Thursday in the Journal.

On the second day of the Annual Meeting, and the following days, the

read, are now as far as possible determined by Organizing Committees for the several
Sections heforc the h'cginning of the Meeting. It has therefore bccorao necessary, in order
to give an opportunity to tlie Committees of doing justice to the several Communications,
that each Author should in-epare an Abstract of his Memoir, of a lengtli suitable for in-
sertion in the published Transactions of the Association, and that he should send it, toge-
ther with the original Memoir, by book-post, on or before ,, addressed

thus — "General Secretaries, British Association, 22 Albemarle Street, London, W. For

Section _.." If it should be inconvenient to the Author tliat his Paper should be read

on any particular days, he is requested to send information thereof to the Secretaries in a
se)5arate note.

* Passed by the General Committee, Edinburgh, 187L

t This and the following sentence were added by the General Committee, 1871.

RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION. XXI

Secretaries are to correct, on a copy of the Journal, the list of papers which
have been read on that day, to add to it a list of those appointed to be read
on the next day, and to send this coi^y of the Journal as early in the day as
possible to the Printers, who are charged with printing the same before 8 a.m.
next morning in the Journal. It is necessary that one of the Secretaries of
each Section should call at the Printing Office and revise the proof each
evening.

Minutes of the proceedings of every Committee are to be entered daily in
the Minute-Book, which should be confirmed at the next meeting of the
Committee.

Lists of the Eeports and Memoirs read in the Sections are to be entered
in the Minute-Book daily, which, with all Memoirs and Copies or Abstracts
of Memoirs furnished by Authors, are to be forwarded, at the close of the Sec~
tional Meetings, to the Assistant General Secretary.

The Vice-Presidents and Secretaries of Sections become ex officio temporary
Members of the General Committee {vide p. xix), and will receive, on ap-
phcation to the Treasurer in the Eeception Eoom, Tickets entitling them to
attend its Meetings.

The Committees will take into consideration any suggestions which may
be offered by their Members for the advancement of Science. They are
specially requested to review the recommendations adopted at preceding
Meetings, as published in the volumes of the Association and the communi-
cations made to the Sections at this Meeting, for the purposes of selecting
definite points of research to which individual or combined exertion may be
usefully directed, and branches of knowledge on the state and progress of
which Eeports are wanted ; to name individuals or Committees for the exe-
cution of such Eeports or researches ; and to state whether, and to what de-
gree, these objects may be usefully advanced by the appropriation of the
funds of the Association, by application to Government, Philosophical Insti-
tutions, or Local Authorities.

In case of appointment of Committees for special objects of Science, it is
expedient that all Members of the Committee should be named, and one of
them appointed to act as Secretary, for insurinr/ attention to business.

Committees have power to add to their number persons whose assistance
they may require.

The recommendations adopted by the Committees of Sections are to be
registered in the Forms furnished to their Secretaries, and one Copy of each
is to be forwarded, without delay, to the Assistant-General Secretary for pre-
sentation to the Committee of Eecommendations. Unless this be done, the
Recommendations cannot receive the sanction of the Association.

N.B. — Eecommendations which may originate in any one of the Sections
must first be sanctioned by the Committee of that Section before they can be
referred to the Committee of Eecommendations or confirmed by the General
Committee.

Notices Regarding Grants of Money.

Committees and individuals, to whom grants of money have been entrusted
by the Association for the prosecution of particular researches in Science,
are reqiiired to present to each following Meeting of the Association a Eeport
of the progress which has been made ; and the Individual or the Member first
named of a Committee to whom a money grant has been made must (pre-
viously to the next meeting of the Association) forward to the General

1871. c

XXII RULES OF THE ASSOCIATION.

Secretaries or Treasurer a statement of tiie sums which have been expended,
and the balance which remains disposable on each grant.

Grants of money sanctioned at any one meeting of the Association expire
a iveelc before the opening of the ensuing Meeting ; nor is the Treasurer
authorized, after that date, to allow any claims on account of such grants,
unless they be renewed in the original or a modified form by the General
Committee.

No Committee shall raise money in the name or under the auspices of the
British Association without special permission from the General Committee
to do so ; and no money so raised shall be expended except in accordance
with the rules of the Association.

In each Committee, the Member fii-st named is the only person entitled to
call on the Treasurer, W. Spottiswoode, Esq., 50 Grosvenor Place, London,
S.W., for such portion of the sums granted as may from time to time be
required.

In grants of money to Committees, the Association does not contemplate
the pajTnent of personal expenses to the members.

In aU cases where additional grants of money are made for the continua-
tion of Kesearches at the cost of the Association, the sum named is deemed
to include, as a part of the amount, whatever balance may remain unpaid on
the former grant for the same object.

All Instruments, Papers, Drawings, and other property of the Association
are to be deposited at the Office of the Association, 22 Albemarle Street,
Piccadilly, London, W., when not employed in carrying on scientific inquiries
for the Association.

Business of the Sections.

-The Meeting Eoom of each Section is opened for conversation from 10 to
11 daily. The Section Booms and approaches thereto can he used for no notices,
exliihitions, or other pxoposes than those of the Association.

At 11 pi-ecisely the Chaii- wiU be taken, and the reading of communica-
tions, in the order pre^•iousiy made public, be commenced. At 3 p.m. the
Sections will close.

Sections may, by the desire of the Committees, divide themselves into
Departments, as often as the number and nature of the communications de-
livered in may render such divisions desirable.

A Eeport presented to the Association, and read to the Section which
originally called for it, may be read in another Section, at the request of the
Officers of that Section, with the consent of the Author.

Duties of the Dooi'heepers.

1. — To remain constantly at the Doors of the Rooms to -nhicli tht;y are ap-
pointed during the whole time for which they are engaged.
2. — To rcquii'c of every person desirous of entering the Piooms the exhibi-
tion of a Member's, Associate's or Lady's Ticket, or Reporter's Ticket,
signed by the Treasui-er, or a Special Ticket, signed by the Assistant-
General Secretary.
3. — Persons unprovided with any of these Tickets can only be admitted to
any particular Eoom by order of the Secretary in that Room,
No person is exempt from these Rules, except those Officers of the Asso-
ciation whose names are printed in the Programme, p. 1 ,

RULES OV THE ASSOCIATION. XXIU

Duties of the Messengers.

To remain constantly at the Eooms to which they are appointed, during
the whole time for which they are engaged, except when employed on mes-
sages bj' one of the Officers directing these Eooms.

Committee of Recommendations.

The General Committee shall appoint at each Meeting a Committee, which
shall receive and consider the Eecommendations of the Sectional Committees,
and report to the General Committee the measures which they would advise
to be adopted for the advancement of Science.

All Eecommendations of Grants of Money, Eequests for Special Eesearches,
and Eeports on Scientific Subjects shall be submitted to the Committee of
Eecommendations, and not taken into consideration by the General Committee
miless previously recommended by the Committee of Eecommendations.

Local Committees.

Local Committees shall be formed by the Officers of the Association to
assist in making arrangements for the Meetings.

Local Committees shall have the power of adding to their numbers those
Members of the Association whose assistance they may desire.

Officers.

A President, two or more Vice-Presidents, one or more Secretaries, and a
Treasurer shall be annually appointed by the General Committee.

Council.

In the intervals of the Meetings, the affairs of the Association shall be ma-
naged by a Coimcil appointed by the General Committee. The Council may
also assemble for the despatch of business duiing the week of the Meeting.

Papers and Communications.

The Author of any paper or communication shall be at liberty to reserve
his light of property therein.

Accounts.

The Accounts of the Association shall be audited annually, by Auditors
appointed by the General Committee.

c2

tj

a

'm
lU

<u

.2 S

'o
o

O OJ

o

a
o

OS

CO

,•5 SJ .
- -, >i "

-O — J3W

S Sfe 3
.2 S .2

rco

W2

s s

3 OJlC

4"

3d

an

f^M

"•a

■«-<

S *

o a

PS a:

i .S ^

< "*• .

^'-^

^«&.

> c 3
*^ i^ «

.2«

CO

«■
»

co|

-•a

5 -^

.>a
en-'

CO

pi

. rt " b
C c e3 33

t»

cii

h

>•

H

«M

O

5 "^

IS

•tj

CJM

• u

as

«i

§&

O CO

^ J"

§1

o^*

u

H

c;

'so

;o3

■^<u.<

no

4 .

'«d-s

•CO

■go* s

S 3 g" J

O I; >>^

H'-s . SJ

a; > ^ u

09

PS

^ tn

S 00

n-
►is
kI

co^

W u

K2

'' s
P^O

tia,

ss

o «

■p =
a 2

W „ « (L . i;

^ o oj -^- .
.S 'S -i^ f^ Kl

■S . g .,o &,

"Srjco 20 a

•S ^* aj S ^*-' ._:
fc>Oi; 3 °S

■" = SCO O c

'5 2 c «®o

H J rt r/i E^ p.

O 00

O u

as

o a.

z
o

CO

W
S

S''
o

o

«
-O

o

►J

> • r
= «g

■*-> _— t

si's

;w e

— - *j ^ C5

"! •S » *! a

m QJ -is a; J?
m CJ tJ -c «
O c 3 '^■2

K 2» g
COO'S "^

es .

S X

K> 2 b 0)

aj u o o

i-c « 2
■JO .

>''£2
:<5-

Of'

coa
«^

- o

CO

s-s

r J tf ".
,-co<*, j-b.

f^ a ° ^ r

•5 Q rt Q rt
r" Mr" J>^

•CO

CO 33

?rd«
sad*

T3 -C/3
StitfCO

O

H

is
<

a

E-

o
z

3
EH

3
<

c."«
O .2

£■•<

Sgco
C?co

%^

^ cs

P5&.1

El's ■< -J

•= s <i-aw

a ■- CO "

a'K-g s g
i« . I- =3 fc-

fea „ o--
jsTi^sa

E-iao6.!n

CO

■<
ci

Cb

<i

S2

o

Q

1

Z

ro

o

to

«

^;

•<

m

IX]

c^

O

a

K

s

K

«

:q

Lh

>

Ui

tf

■a

:«

•03!0

en c^ =

55 ■

- w

J3 CO

rsK

13 ^' ™ ..
Ml-' • :2

" a o 5 J=

cg(j«aj-H

3 cj >,^^2:

w

c/l

«

•s

>J

o

to

IS

B

•s

hen

O

w

■J

^<-<

>J

Ml

B

U

WO

fS"

■T3

H

fe

^

t:^ "OP

P a = a
Cd C2 ■< i*.

as?"

s :

:;Hw

'•^5^.

13 . g

ag^;

J o
_ ■ ^

:-S«

pH **

■J

a— ^

B5rt

w S

o g

1^ 1
o s
w

to
u

E
u

ui
o)

_l
<
U

o

is!

. rt CO

2
bJ
Q

(/)
UI

a
a.
I

111
O
>

h

WW

o 2

O B
CO'-'

3.H

PL, a

, u

■.3S

SW

>.-3

Km

Si

w

a ffs

fa

O^W
S o g

o

W=3 O

W = "

■a .?;

c > .

,4K?

pjW«

gww

B) fS U7

J s «

. en 3
>> • 2

fv; < L-.

tn

re . <u

to33 CO

;^ '«

• ^ ** ■ CS

^QP^Q -

- . . -fc,
<^ C *.* S -
•o -^. - £

, ^ w „ DO £

:^ c >>cm

- tS W Ch .

£>»tnK t.
c'O . ■ o
gws-H S

as • • -.2
> > > o

U CJ <U U u
tn tf C^ Ch ^

to" "^ "
3 JJ 4j .^

o o_ .
■So. s'S

■o > "^ ■

C m V ■

■^ u-.a

O i W

. f^ ^.CC CO

CO .-^eSDJ

« '^. 73 W" W
W<^r/ - -

.— ^ an (o

;i:3

:*. -w
:^wrt

W « ■ -

Wo

"W

b o

w-

u c] K

l/>

H

UJ
Q
u>

UI

§ :

w ■ s

en o 73

Pa ""
o "

W ="

O
U

— o a :^ o
EnaoPfl.

■a at.'s

CL ," ■
OJ ^ >

H 73 Ci< W

— -j;f«>&:

to

;w

03^

S ^3 73 ^ »-i o

^^ -"^ . '£

.e-«<&;w t^2

c g S ■- ^w ^
S,-Szi "A '•■■ S

^..2 ^ E 5 ^ t:

" H = 2^

-*73 .
"?5"?W
^ i; r5 a>

m" I i «

Ci ^ .2 13
c aj o

« J .

'coH

a-S

So

0*0 o ..
EC ** 2 -3

« '-3 CJ

.S=2 « S
CSO.S J

u u c; o

J5^ j3.a

.CO

■ w

S :w
■s :»3

|-3 p I?

• -^

t • w
■"2 -
:dcn'

:w"

: .-M

oa- J

W r~

" w 13 w u &i
O t- C u d ^
^^ cl rf fc. r^i W

t- C u d

rt d t W

;;5'

5^^^'

-a ""o O
• 3^-a

cH CO 3 PS

a"

'>>S

w

.Si F=

w

73 cu

V.

. **

-:3''-

gSi

0

p s

a

na

c3

3

U

<!

n

h3

fi

73 o

1^ S

.a

CD O4
^71

a H
w^

«

V
6i

CO «

• 10

" IM

h C
W S

J73

W J

w
w

D

n

o .

d. :

to '

PS i

w
.-a
■ t-

0.2 .

►J r, 10

*^ l*H i-<

- o „

w=-

«^5

&•" s
<: c K

I-" P^H

• 3 ^

K 5 H

o a

co°

W S

PS «
■<^

a

jjS;=;s

j3 J3.a t ~
r-i E-> r- 73 H

— ;-Y-

= 3^2

H _ c
L a -^

vs VI O

|S§1

o

«21

a-; £

w°*
P*J

w

•^-a

w 03 3

a ;o5
o

O
tn

•o .W

. -H oj 4)

^- ^- •■^

I- u, o

pH Oh '^

03 50

en

fa-<<!

d

33

rro"

r

aw

to

•fi5

■fl9

K

"5

V

CO u

be

■ ^

UW«

. . « . ■

oS>§

5'S c

:p3

03
«■

[i)

O

H da
-»« u .

K

fa

;o3

:«
:fa

d

• - o t.

- —"2 ^

- (U O 0)

i «J o .

jM r ."^

'o d -< Q IS
a^_Sdi^;^

K S^ s o "^

o = a .
s h'-j ■

►^ ri Ci! ^ Ci]

:'H :p.,

; ►! -co
:° :«

* <y • ^

• " r,- S

.-a . 2

fan

. M '7^ ^ f

■-; 2 fa "'• ^

p i'Tfaa

•-■-". 'a

o > a <! ,

>» C — aj -^ ,
^ 3 J5 <" PT'

a ''■- "

a .B<

aa
— -am

3 -^'fa'

4 1: e c

5wa =

-• r^ r" cfi

-4j > > a

X 'm &" E-i ■<

5 «; 3 a S
faSow.J
OJ V aj u oj

«a-d

fc- o o

a> E» w

►-i to to

'■^ ,aj u

_g o o

PS
O

CO

Z

o
o

OCD

«2
"3,S

«3

03

►fi a

o

P5

03

fa

03

■J §

034

w -

Eh «

a

o
►J

0}

d

fa'

o; K^_
- - dj

^ -IS

w .3°

3W|W

a'Ss^

A

". :o3

: :6
:«(=;

.fa^ai

03^4 fa
fa ^

m

3 J

Bia jo3

^a «?3

£^ ,_! rt >» o .'War

—.•73-3 2-a*^ ^»^■
aj oj « O £ S

«S

fa^b

c" ."
o cr

CA «

03

«

fa

»

^H

w

■o

u

'^

«

■^

a

Si

>j

J3

►J

•?

;■

W

03

a

'/■^

a

«

H

<
05

«

?-.

<

<

fa«

^ ,

f^

<:

h4

00

p^i ^ tM

toe S
.S'S ti
a "3 fa

ddz

u u ^

O ■= 5

la (A C^
0) u "^

^^ S

0.faH

. U3 ■

.-3 •

• *C !

• j= ;

• a •

* rt ■

:o :

•3

to

. a>

.a
. o
•o

J2

t.,"-llfa

3 3 ^ •

iSd

■=i-l a .

5 rSa

a - -

■" -^ ^
I. e ^-

3-3 'TJ

goa "-fa
s >._-.- u -

• i3 ^ *- ^

<u a jj o 5

■u £ . 9~

u u qj O) ■

<i; Cj 1) (D >

P h H r^ «

C M 2-1

|P3 r

o5*=".fa

faoj

ioa

"-^ a

<:

a- ■

^ o o

03-3

^

PSt^

fa3

J3
O

r n

o

<"^

'*S

K

J-33 a

. WI

al an
ambr
Cam

P5 S"

M A >.

OS'S-;

" . a

2; g,o

. 3 r

03 o : c

--- g 3
03 g £&

"Ifa^ O^
t2 -■^ t- o

•^ -: t*- o ^
^M o >. -

•sd s5 »i

m n a r s

. r.i: 3- ."
aaxw .
^ J U - ^
^ hJ : ^ «

• V' - =^ S

t- t; 3 a .-

03 03 33 « Z

03;n

fifa"
^.d

« to

=^ «
53 5

H

QJ "^ 3
c .-^

tn

O)

PS

2|

fa

to

3

<;

a

bT

I-;

<5

hj

>-

H

05 5

2; m

o ■<

PS

00

v>

UI

<

u

<
u
o

o

<

h .

s

^B*

§«<

o

CO ^

i-S -

o .S

wS-g.

fa-.fe

-■2 &

lews
Chan

y. B

".2 35

Ifc-d

£ « >

William B
John Hen
rhc Rev.

■Ji

fa

tn .
<<

fa c

- (3

tSgPS
QW£h

3 0 0*

" « s

-J £

O CT3

£-43 a

«

<n
I-
Z
ui
o
u>
llj

CC
Q.

uj

u

>

.2 c c = g •

a> *j ^ ^ t^ sj ■

.t % U yj ^ c J-

3 S Pi Pi > > -^

5; a> i> « 0) oj

" j= ja ^ j= J3 ►^

K «}

^ i» - •
> Ofa

o |j S
c|d £i

: _cj ^3 1-1 .--ts

«s

•gs

«a

0 £

fa s

3 S

o^J

cS

aj aj

0 a,

►J 3

. J3

faH

•S3

« 73

■«3 -

? CO a

<:fa?

S " O O o"

;?-S«

- o

o-'Z

: w .'=5

£ 3 O-'S CO

::gJ-JS;d-3 5- -SZ'

c c

a)

• cc;

U

M

111

CO

fa
d

.00

s a

^T a*

u a

n
»)

>^

■<
a

o

aaaaKrta.aS
'[5 S i5 5 S J5 S =^ ^

Hr-E-^bHHP

CO

d

fa ■

C3
c aj

a> ai

a a

^ ^ i; fa S"

- --.s =^ ■-«

c H a "" ^ *
= . .w . «

. . =^ -"'^ ?

giwjs'a^
= = .:.- 2-3=5 1

■gd|S-Co

^H

m

I- aj rt "^

2 u 3 ^ as . -

'■■■I
5as

aj oO o ^_gO
H H •^ E-i >? ►^ H

aa'iJ!

t^ « = -n •; -p ,

^ n ^ d rt

Si

fcrD
r cs

a =

-fa

O CO

.g a

In ^ u

(« C <I

W" a

to o j^

^ aj s

JO £

K£

91

«

fa

•■0

r)

•<

f!^

C4

0

S

0

^

r

<

cr

w

Cr]

n

>

0

n

H

5

0

!*•

z

H H CC 73 !» i» "-s

I^

<^fa
5

5

o
2q

CO

PS
Px'

«i C o

2 ^ «

■le-s

-= o- o
rt « g

1°^

i- V u

oap5

^•a to
• CO

: * S

■ o-S

• ►J a

• <*4 . f*

mo :i/i'5

* « • -"S

t" . h3 4) _3 q ■•-»
ea J Ml, I. "^ C «

W g-oS « =W

■mc £.S 5,9 s .
t- x r" en >-a H

VI

<

(^ .

-CT' .
^ " C

rw §

^^'S^
^fc -

CU .m

•=£ ;-

W -2 - - a- «

^ >. J s w .

t^M aju >, O

aa 1^ K^

"5. tb c g -* f^

. -<
« c »

5 S^ 3

•||as

.•■o § ^
a V a V

ell

J r -
tfo J"

t<::3 uj (: oTCU "-■
(S^tf o "-S

J '-.a »- S S
£-■ !0 H !/3 tn -5 ■^

cS cWj

Q .

|w

■6i^ :

■" .5 J

tnWp^

2-so

4 to J - „

i 2 -»-■ =

H

• '?"4;-
s , • fc- rt

:Ka "^

: :w

m

6

r ' S

, .-"to

„« C&;

—-.t 2 >^

«PUOM

l§S =
rt i; « (o

o o

.00 .

j« ;

q*. :
qqj

.«•' ^ r
^■-'•^

" .ft.

" o - r'^c

« rt

S a Cu r S
<= o S ~; .

.- o • _: feu «>

y "^ O O .= i.^ "_

t4_ 'o a a '5 i^.^

^ S S 5 -^ 0.-S

o 4) aj D "^ . CI4

h H t^ r- w Q >-.

«

ij
u

o
o

u

2:

o

o
a

aa

pi

J

o .
OS

O H

o
03
m

o

m

a
ti

w .
fit

Si,

J ST

* o
•J e<
S ■

. H

c

03

H
|i<
O
(4

tf.

§>

CO

■i

I* .
oil,;

«-.

« a"

HO

XXX

KEPORT 1871.

Presidents and Secretaries of the Sections of the Association,

Date and Place.

Presidents.

Secretaries.

MATHEMATICAL AND PHYSICAL SCIENCES.

COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, I. MATHEMATICS AND GENERAl PHYSICS.

1832.

1833.
1834.

Oxford

Cambridge
Edinburgh

Davies Gilbert, D.C.L., F.E.S....|Re7. H. Coddiugton.

SirD. Brewster, RE.S Prof. Porbes.

Kev. W. Wliewell, F.E.S |Prof. Forbes, Prof. Llnjd.

SECTION A. ^MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS.

1835.

1836.
1837.
1838.
1839.
1840.

1841.

1842.

1843.
1844.
1845.

1846.

1847.

1848.
1849.

Dublin...

Bristol ...

Liverpool . . ,

Newcastle..

Birmingham

Glasgow . . .

Plymouth. . .
Manchester

Cork

York

Cambridge. .

Southampton

Oxford...

Swansea .
Birmingham

1850. Edinburgh..

1851.
1852.
1853.
1854.
1855.
1856.
1857.

Ipswich

Belfast

Hull

Liverpool . . .
Glasgow . . .
Cheltenham
Dublin

Eev. Dr. Eobinson

Eev. William Wliewell, F.E.S,...

Sir D. Brewster, F.E.S

Sir J. F. W. Hersohel, Bart.,

Eev! Prof. Whewell, F.E.S

Prof. Forbes, F.E.S

Eev. Prof. Lloyd, F.E.S

Very Eev. G. Peacock, D.D.,
FES

Prof. MCulloch, M.E.I. A

The Earl of Eosse, F.E.S

The Very Eev. the Dean of Ely .

Sir John F. W. Herschel, Bart.,

F.E.S.
Eev. Prof. Powell, M.A., F.E.S. .

Lord Wrottesley, F.E.S

William Hopkins, F.E.S

Prof. J. D. Forbes, F.E.S., Sec.
E.S.E.

Eev. W. ^Vliewell, D.D., F.E.S.,

&c.
Prof. W. Thomson, M.A., F.E.S.

L. &E.
The Dean of Ely, F.E.S

Prof. G. G. Stokes, M.A., Sec.

E.S.
Eev. Prof. Kelland, M.A., F.E.S.

L.&E.
Eev. E. Walker, M.A., F.E.S. ...

Eev.T. E. Eobinson,D.D., F.E.S.,
M.E.I.A.

Prof. Sh- W. E. Hamilton, Prof.

Wheatstone.
Prof. Forbes, W. S. Harris, F. W.

Jerrard.
W. S. Harris, Eev. Prof. PoweU, Prof.

Stevelly.
Eev. Prof. Chcvallier, Major Sabine,

Prof. Stevelly.
J. D. Chance, W. Snow Harris, Prof.

Stevelly.
Eev. Dr. Forbes, Prof. Stevelly, Arch.

Smith.
Prof. Stevelly.
Prof. M'Cuilocb, Prof. Stevelly, Eev.

W. Scoresby.
J. Nott, Prof. Stevelly.
Eev. Wm. Hey, Prof. Stevelly.
Eev. H. Goodwin, Prof. Stevelly, G.

G. Stokes.
John Drew, Dr. SteveUy, G. G.

Stokes.
Eev. H. Price, Prof. Stevelly, G. G.

Stokes.
Dr. Stevellv, G. G. Stokes.
Prof. Stevelly, G. G. Stokes, W.

Eidout Wills.
W. J. Macquorn Eankine, Prof.

Smyth, Prof. Stevelly, Prof. G. G.

Stokes.
'S. Jackson, W. J. Macquorn Eankine,

Prof. Stevelly, Prof. G. G. Stokes.
Prof. Dixon, W. J. Macquorn Ean-
kine, Prof. SteveUy, J. Tyndall.

B. Blaydes Haworth, J. D. Sollitt,
Prof. Stevellv, J. Welsh.

J. Hartnup, H. G. Puckle, Prof.

Stevelly, J. Tyndall, J. Welsh.
Eev. Dr. Forbes, Prof. D. Gray, Prof.

Tyndall.

C. Brooke, Eev. T. A. Southwood,
Prof. SteveUy, Eev. J. C. TurnbuU.

Prof. Curtis, Prof. Hennessy, P. A.
Ninnis, W. J. Macquorn Eankine,
Prof. SteveUy.

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS.

XXXI

Date and Place.

1858. Leeds

1859. Aberdeen ...

1860. Oxford

1861. Manchester,

1862. Cambridge.

1863. Newcastle...

Presidents.

Secretaries.

1864. Bath

1865. Birmingham

1866. Nottingham

1867. Dundee

1868. Norwich ...

1869. Exeter

1870. Liverpool . . .

1871. Edinburgh.

Eer. W.WheweU, D.D,, V.P.E.S.

The Earl of Eosse, M.A,, K.P.,

Eev. B. Price, M.A., F.E.S

G. B. Airy, M.A., D.C.L., F.E.S.

Prof. G. G. Stokes, M.A., F.E.S

Prof. W. J. Macquorn Eankine,
C.E., F.E.S.

Prof. Cayley, M.A., F.E.S.,

F.E.A.S.
W. Spottiswoode, M.A., F.E.S.,

F.E.A.S.

Prof. Wlieatstone, D.C.L., F.E.S

Prof. Sir W. Thomson, D.C.L.,

F.E.S.
Prof. J. Tyndall, LL.D., F.E.S...

Prof. J. J. Sylvester, LL.D.,

J. Clerk Maxwell, M.A., LL.D.,
F.E.S.

Prof. P. G. Tait, F.E.S.E

Eev. S. Earnshaw, J. P. Hennessy,
Prof Stevelly, H. J. S. Smith, Prof.
Tyndall.
J. P. Hennessy, Prof. Maxwell, H. J. S.

Smith, Prof Stevelly.
Eev. G. C. Bell, Eev. T. Eennison,

Prof. Stevelly.
Prof E. B. Clifton, Prof. H. J. S.

Smith, Prof. Stevelly.
Prof E. B. CUfton, Prof. H. J. S.

Smith, Prof. Stevelly.
Eev. N. Ferrers, Prof. Fuller, F. Jen-
kin, Prof. Stevelly, Eev. C. T.

Whitley.
Prof. Fuller, F. Jenkin, Eev. G.

Buckle, Prof SteveUy.
Eev. T. N. Hutchinson, F. Jenkin, G.

S. Mathews, Prof. H. J. S. Smith,

J. M. Wilson.
Fleeming Jenkin, Prof. H. J. S. Smith,

Eev. S. N. Swann.
Eev. G. Buckle, Prof. G. C. Foster,

Prof. Fuller, Prof. Swan.
Prof. G. 0. Foster, Eev. E. Harley,

E: B. Hayward.
Prof G. C. Foster, E. B. Hayward,

W. K. Clifford.
Prof. W. G. Adams, W. K. ChfTord,

Prof. G. C. Foster, Eev. W. Allen

Whitworth.
Prof. W. G. Adam.s, J. T. Bottomlcv,

Prof. W. K. Clifford, Prof. J. D.

Everett, Eev. E. Harley.

CHEMICAL SCIENCE.

COMMITTEE or SCIENCES, II. — CHEMISTKT, JIINERALOGT.
1832. Oxford [John Dalton, D.C.L., F.E.S

1833. Cambridge..! John Dalton, D.C.L., F.E.S

1834. Edinbiu'gh...]Dr. Hope

James F. W. Johnston.

Prof. Miller.

Mr. Johnston, Dr. Christison.

1835. Dublin .

1836. Bristol .

1837. Liverpool...

1838. Newcastle...

1839. Birmingham

1840. Glasgow ..

1841. Plymouth..

1842. Manchester

1843. Cork

1844. York

1845. Cambridge..

SECTION B. — -CHEMISTRY AND MINEEALOGY.

Dr. T. Thomson, F.E.S

Eev. Prof. Cumming

1846. Southampton

Michael Faraday, F.E.S

Eev. William Whewell, F.E.S.,

Prof. T. Graham, F.E.S

Dr. Thomas Thomson, F.E.S.

Dr.Daubeny, F.E.S

John Dalton, D.C.L., F.E.S

Prof. Apjohn, M.E.I. A

Prof. T. Graham, F.E.S

Eev. Prof, dimming

Michael Faraday, D.C.L., F.E.S.

1847. Oxford lEev.W.Y.Harcoiu-t, M.A., F.E.S

Dr. Apjohn, Prof Jolmston.

Dr. Apjohn, Dr. C. Henry, W. Hera»

path.
Prof. Johnston, Prof. Miller, Dr.

Eeynolds.
Prof, ililler, E. L. Pattinson, Thomas

Eichardson.
Gokling Bird, M.D., Dr. J.B. MeLson.
Dr. E. D. Thomson, Dr. T. Clark,

Dr. L. Playfair.
J. Prideaux, Eobert Hunt, W. M.

Tweedy.

Dr. L. Playfair, E. Hunt, J. Graham.
E. Hvmt, Dr. Sweeny.
Dr. E. Playfair, E. Solly, T. H. Barker.
E. Hunt, J. P. Joule, Prof. Miller,

E. Solly.
Dr. Miller, E. Hunt, W. Eandall.
B. C. Brodie, E. Hunt, Prof. Solly.

xxxu

REPOKT 1871.

Date and Place.

Presidents.

Secretaries.

1848. Swansea ...Richard Phillips, F.R.S T. H. Henry, R. Hunt, T. William.s,

1849. Birmingham .John Percy, M.D., F.R.S

18.50. Edinburgh .ICr. Christison, V.P.R.S.E

1851. Ipswich ...IProf. Thomas Graham, F.R.S. ...

1852. Belfast Thomas Andrews, M.D., F.R.S. .

1853. Hull

1854. Lirerpool

1855. Glasgow ...

1856. Cheltenham

1857. DubUn

1858. Leeds

1859. Aberdeen ...

1860. Oxford

1861. Manchester.

1862. Cambridge .

1863. Newcastle...

1864. Bath

1865. Birmingham

1866. Nottingham

1867. Dundee

1868. Norwich

1869. Exeter ...

1870. Liverpool

Prof. J. F. W. Johnston. M.A.,

Prof. W. A. Miller, M.D., F.R.S.

Dr. Lyon Playfair, C.B., F.R.S.
Prof. B. C. Brodie, F.R.S

Prof. Apjohn, M.D., F.R.S.,

M.R.I.A.
Sir J. F. W. Herschel, Bart.,

D.C.L.
Dr. Lyon Playfair, C.B., F.R.S. .

Prof. B. C. Brodie, F.E.S

Prof. W. A. Miller, M.D., F.R.S
Prof. W. A. Miller, M.D., F.R.S.

Dr. Alex. W. WUliamson, F.R.S.

W. Odling, M.B., F.R.S., F.C.S

Prof. W. A. Miller, M.D., V.P.E.S.

H. Bence Jones, M.D., F.R.S. ...

Prof.T.Anderson,M.D.,r.R.S.E.

Prof.E .Frankland, F.R.S., F.C.S.

Dr. H. Debus, F.R.S., F.C.S. ...

Prof. H. E. Eoscoe, B.A., F.R.S.
F C S
1871. Edinburgh iProf. T.' Andrews, M.D., F.R.S.

R. Hunt, G-. Shaw.

Dr. Anderson, R. Hunt, Dr. Wilson.

T. J. Pearsall, W. S. Ward.

Dr. Gladstone, Prof. Hodges, Prof.

Ronalds.
H. S. Bluudell, Prof R. Hunt, T. J.

Pearsall.
Dr. Edwards, Dr. Gladstone, Dr.

Price.
Prof. Frankland, Dr. H. E. Roscoe.
J. Horsley, P. J. Worsley, Prof.

Voelcker.
Dr. Davy, Dr. Gladstone, Prof. Sul-
livan.
Dr. Gladstone, W. Odlmg, E. Rey-
nolds.
J. S. Brazier, Dr. Gladstone, G. D.

Liveing, Dr. Odling.
A. Vernon Harcom-t, G. D. Liveing,

A. B. Northcote.
A. Vernon Harcourt, G. D. Liveing.
H. W. Elpliinstone, W. Odling, Prof.

Eoscoe.
Prof. Liveing, H. L. Pattinson, J. C.

Stevenson.
A. V. Harcourt, Prof. Liveing, E.

Biggs.
A. V. Harcourt, H. Adkins, Prof.

Wanklyn, A. Winkler Wills.
J. H. Atherton, Prof. Liveing, W. J.

Eussell, J. White.
A. Crum Brown, Prof. G. D. Liveing,

W. J. Russsll.
Dr. A. Crum Brown, Dr. W. J. Rus-

9?11, F. Sutton.
Prof. A. Crum Brown, M.D., Dr. W.

J. Russell, Dr. Atkinson.
Prof. A. Crum Brown, M.D., A. E.

Fletcher, Dr. W. J. Russell.
J. T. Buchanan, W. N. Hartley, T. E.

Thorpe.

GEOLOGICAL (akd, untii, 1851, GEOGRAPHICAL) SCIENCE.

COMMITTEE OF SCrENCES, IH. — GEOLOGY AJfD GEOGEAPHT.

1832. Oxford IE. I. Murchison, F.E.S.

1833. Cambridge .'G. B. Greenough, F.E.S.

1 834. Edinburgh . ' Prof. Jameson

John Taylor.

W. Lonsdale, John Phillips.
Prof. Phillips, T. Jameson Torrie,
Eev. J. Yates.

1835. DubUn ,

1836. Bristol ,

1837. Liverpool..

1838. Newcastle..

1839. Birmingham

SECTION c

R. J. Griffith

R«v. Dr. Buckland, F.E.S.— Gco-

graphy. E.I. Murchison, F.R.S.
Rev .Prof. Sedgwick,F.E.S.— Gco-

qraphy. G.B.Greenough,F.R.S.
C.'Lyell, F.R.S., V.P.G.S.— Gpo-

graphy. Lord Prudliope.
Rev. Dr. Buckland, F.R.S.— frfo-

gmi)hy. G.B.Greenough,F.R.S.

GEOLOGY AND GEOGEArHY.

Captain Portlock, T. J. Torrie.

William Sanders, S. Stutchbury, T. J.

Torrie.

Captain Portlock, R. Hunter. — Gio-

graphy. Captain H. M. Denham,R.N.

W. C. Trevelyan, Capt. Portlock.—

Geography. Capt. Washington.
George Lloyd, M.D.,H. E. Strickland,

Charles Darwin.

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS.

XXXIU

Date and Place.

1840. Glasgow ...

1841. Plymouth..

1842. Manchester

1843. Cork

1844. York

1845. Cambridge |.

1846. Southampton

1847. Oxford

1848. Swansea ...

1849. Birmingham

1850. Edinburgh*

Presidents.

Charles Lyell, F.n.S.—Geogra-
fhy. G. B. Greenough, F.R.S.

H. T. DelaBeche,r.E.S.

E. I. Murchison, F.R.S

Richard E. Griffith, F.R.S.,

M.R.I.A.
Henry Warburton, M.P., Pres.

Geol. Soc.
Rev. Prof. Sedgwick, M. A., F.R.S.

LeonardHorner,F.R.S.— (rw^'ra-
fhy. G. B. Greenough, F.R.S.

Very Rev. Dr. Buckland, F.R.S.

Sir H. T. De la Beche, C.B.,

Sir Charles Lyell, F.R.S., F.G.S.|

Sir Roderick I. Murchison.F.R.S.

Secretaries.

W. J. Hamilton, D. Milne, Hugh
Murray, H. E. Strickland, John
Scoular, M.D.

W. J. Hamilton, Edward Moore.M.D.,
R. Hutton.

E. W. Binney, R. Hutton, Dr. R.
Lloyd, H. E. Strickland.

Francis M. Jennings, H. E. Strick-
land.

Prof.Ansted, E. H. Bunbury.

Rev. J. C. Cumming, A. C. Ramsay,

Rev. W. Thorp.
Robert A. Austen, J. H. Norten, M.D.,

Prof. Oldham. — Geography. Dr. C.

T. Beke.
Prof. Ansted, Prof. Oldham, A. C.

Ramsay, J. Ruskin.
Starling JBenson, Prof. Oldham, Prof.

Ramsay.
J. Beete Jukes, Prof Oldliam, Prof.

A. C. Ramsay.
A. Keith Johnston, Hugh Miller, Pro-
fessor Nicol.

1851. Ipswich

1852. Belfast ..

1853. Hull

1854. Liverpool . .

1855. Glasgow ...

1856. Cheltenham

1857. Dublin

1858. Leeds

1859. Aberdeen ...

1860. Oxford

1861. Manchester
1802. Cambridge

1863. Newcastle ...

1864. Bath

SEcxiox c {continued). — geoiogy,
WiUiam Hopkins, M.A., F.R.S...

Lieut.-Col.Poraock,R.E., F.R.S.

C. J. F. Bunbury, G. W. Ormerod,
Searles Wood.

James Bryce, James MacAdam, Prof.
M'Coy, Prof Nicol.

Prof. Harkness, William Lawton.

John Cunningham, Prof. Harkness,
G. W. Ormerod, J. W. Woodall.

James Bryce, Prof. Harkness, Prof.
Nicol.

Rev. P. B. Brodie, Rev. R. Hepworth,
Edward Hull, J. Scougall, T.Wright.

Prof Harkness, Gilbert Sanders, Ro-
bert H. Scott.

Prof. Nicol, H. C. Sorby, E. W.
Shaw.

Prof Harkness, Rev. J. Longmuir, H.
C. Sorby.

Prof Harkness, Edward HuU, Capt.
Woodall.

Prof. Harkness, Edward Hull, T. Ru-
pert Jones, G. W. Ormerod.

Lucas Barrett, Prof T. Rupert Jones,
H. C. Sorby.

E. F. Boyd, John Daglish, H. C. Sor-
by, Thomas Sopwith.

W. B. Dawkins, J. Johnston, H. C.
Sorby, W. Pengelly.

Rev. P. B. Brodie, J. Jones, Rev. E.
Myers, H. C. Sorby, W. Pengelly.

* At the Meeting of the General Committee held in Edinburgh, it was agreed " That the
subject of Geography be separated from Geology and combined with Ethnology, to consti-
tute a separate Section, under the title of the " Geographical and Ethnological Section,"
for Presidents and Secretaries of vt'hioh see page ixxvi.

1865. Birmingham

Prof. Sedgwick, F.R.S

Prof. Edward Forbes, F.R. S. ...

Sir R. I. Murchison, F.R.S

Prof A. C. Ramsay, F.R.S

The Lord Talbot de Malahide ...

WilUam Hopkins, M.A., LL.D.,

F R S
Sir Charles Lyell, LL.D., D.C.L.,

F.R.S.
Rev. Prof. Sedgwick, LL.D.,

F.R.S., F.G.S.
Sir R. I. Murchison, D.C.L.,

LL.D., P.R.S., &c.
J. Beete Jukes, M.A., F.R.S

Prof. Warington W. Smyth,

F.R.S., F.G.S.
Prof J. Phillips, LL.D., F.R.S.,

F.G.S.
Sir R. I. Murchison, Bart.,K:.C.B.

XXXIV

REPORT — 1871.

Date and Place.

1866. Nottingham

1867. Dundee

1868. Norwich ...

1869. Eseter

1870. Liverpool...

Presidents.

Secretaries.

Prof.A.C.Eamsay.LL.D., F.R.S.E. Etheridge, W. Pcngelly, T. Wil-
son, G. H. Wright.

Archibald Geikie, F.E.S., F.G.S. Edward Hull, W. PengeUy, Henry

Woodward.

R. A. C. Godwin-Austen, E.R.S.,lReT. O. Fisher, Rev. J. Gunn, W.

F.G.S
Prof. R. Harkness, F.E.S., F.G.S.

Sir Philip de M. Grey Egerton,
I Bart., M.P., F.R.S.
1871. Edinburgh ..Prof. A. Geikie, F.R.S., F.G.S...

Pengelly, Rev. H. H. Winwood.
W. Pengelly, W. Boyd Dawkins, Rev.

H. H. Winwood.
W. Pengelly, Rev. H. H. Winwood,

W. BoydDawkins, G. H. Morton.
E. Etheridge, J. Geikie, J. McKeuny

Hughes, L. C. Miall.

BIOLOGICAL SCIEIs^CES.

COMJIITTEE OF SCIEXCES, IT. ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, PHTSIOLOGT, ANATOMT.

Rev. p. B. Duncan, F.G.S.

1832. Oxford

1833. Cambridge*

1834. Edinburgh

1835. DubHn ,

1836. Bristol

1837. Liverpool..

1838. Newcastle...

1839. Brimingham

1840. Glasgow ...

1841. Plymouth...

1842. Manchester

1843. Cork

1844. York

184.5. Cambridge

1846. Southampton

1847. Oxford

Rev. Prof. Henslow

W. S. MacLeay

Sir W. Jardine, Bart.

Rev. Prof. J. S. Henslow.
Rev. W. L. P. Garnons, F.L.S....|C. C. Babingtou, D. Don.
Prof. Graham [ W. Tarrell, Prof. Burnett.

SECTION D. ZOOIOGT AND BOTAST.

Dr. Allman IJ. Curtis, Dr. Litton.

J.Curtis, Prof. Don, Dr. Eiley, S.
Rootsey.

0. C. Babingtou, Rev. L. Jenyns, W.
Swainson.

.J. E. Gray, Prof. Jones, E. Owen, Dr.
Richardson.

E. Forbes, W. Ick, R. Patterson.

Prof. W. Couper, E. Forte, E. Pat-
terson.

J. Couch, Dr. Lankester, E. Patterson.

Dr. Lankester, R. Patterson, J. A.
Turner.

G. J. Allman, Dr. Lankester, E. Pat-
terson.

Prof Allman, H. Goodsir, Dr. King,
Dr. Lankester.

Dr. Lankester, T. V. Wollaston.

Dr. Lankester, T. V. WoUaston, H.
Wooldridge.

Dr. Lankester, Dr. M«lville, T. V.
Wollaston.

Prof. Owen, F.E.S

Sir W. J. Hooker, LL.D ,

John Eichard.son, M.D., F.R.S. .
Hon. and Very Rev. W. Herbert,

LL.D., F.L.S.
William Thompson, F.L.S

VeryEev. The Dean of Manches-
ter.

Eev. Prof. Henslow, F.L.S

Sir J. Eichardson, M.D., F.R.S.

H. E. Strickland, M.A., F.E.S... .

SECTION B (continued). — zoology anb BOXAinr, inclitbikg bhysiologt,

• [For the Presidents and Secretaries of the Anatomical and Physiological Subsections
and the temporary Section E of Anatomy and Medicine, see pp. ssxv, xxxvi.]

1848. Swansea ...

1849. Birmingham

1850. Edinburgh..

1851. Ipswich.

1852. Belfast .

L. W. Dillwyn, F.R.S.

William Spence, F.E.S

Prof. Good.sir, F.E.S. L. & E.

W. Ogilby

Dr. E. Wilbraham Falconer, A. Hen-
frey. Dr. Limkester.

Dr. Lankester, Dr. Eussell.

Prof. J. II. Bennett, M.D., Dr. Lan-
kester, Dr. Douglas Ullaclagan.
Rev. Prof. Henslow, M.A., F.E.S. Prof. Allman, F. W. Johnston, Dr. E.

Lankester.

Dr. Dickie, George C. Hyndman, Dr.
Edwin Lankester.

Robert Harrison, Dr. E. Lankester.

Isaac Byerley, Dr. E. L.ankcster.

WiUiam Keddie, Dr. Lankester.

185.3. HuU

1854. Liverpool

1855. Glasgow

* At this Meeting Physiology and Anatomy were made a separate Committee, for
Presidents and Secretaries of wMch see p. xxsv.

C. C.Babington, M.A., F.R.S....

Prof. Baliom-, M.D., F.R.S

Eev. Dr. Fleeming, F.E.S.E. ...

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIKS OF THE SECTIONS.

XXXV

Date and Place.

1856.

1857.

1858.

1859.

1860.

1861.

1862.
1863.

18G4.

1865.

Cheltenliam

Dublin

Leeds

Aberdeen ..

Oxford

Manchester.

Cambridge..
Newcastle . .

Bath

Birmingham

Presidents.

Secretaries.

1808. Nottingham.

1867. Dmidee

1868. Norwich ...

1809. Exeter

1870. Liverpool . .

1871. Edinburgh

Thomas Bell, F.R.S., Pres.L.S....

Prof. W.H. Harvey, M.D., F.E.S.

C. C.Babington, M.A., F.E.S....

Sir W. Jardine, Bart., F.R.S.E. ,

Rev. Prof. Henslow, F.L.S

Prof. C. C. Babington, F.R.S. ..

Prof. Huxley, F.R.S

Prof. Balfour, M.D., F.R.S

Dr. John E. Gray, F.R.S

T. Thomson, M.D., F.R.S

SECTION D (continued).-
Prof. Husley, LL.D., F.R.S.—

Phi/sioloqical Dq>. Prof. Hum-

phvj,Mll>.,F.B,.S.—A}ifhropo-

lofficalDi'p. Alfred R. Wallace,

F R G- S
Prof. Sharpey, M.D., Sec. R.S.—

Bep. of Zool. and Bot. George

Busk, M.D., F.R.S.
Rev. M. J. Berkeley, F.L S.—

Brp. of Physiology. W. H

Flower, F.R.S.

George Busk, F.R.S., F.L.S.—
Bcp. of Bot. and Zool. C. Spencc
Bate, F.R.S.— i)c^. of Eihno.
E. B. Tvlor.

Prof. G. Rolleston, M.A., M.D.,
P.R.S.,F.L.S.— Dfp. Anat. and
Physio. Prof. M. Foster, M.D.,
F.L.S.— Df?^. of Ethno. J.
Evans, F.R.S.

Prof Allen Thomson,M.D.,F.R.S.
— Bep. of Bot. and Zool. Prof
Wyville Thomson, F.R.S.—
Bep. of Anthropo. Prof. W.
Turner, M.D.

Dr. J. Abercronibie, Prof Buckman,

Dr. Lankester.
Prof J. R.Ejnahan,Dr. E. Lankeister,

Robert Patterson, Dr. W. E. Steele.
Henry Denny, Dr. Hcaton, Dr. E.

Lankester, Dr. E. Perceval Wright.
Prof. Dickie, M.D., Dr. E. Lankester,

Dr. Ogilvy.
W. S. Church, Dr. E. Lankester, P.

L. Sclater, Dr. E. Percoval Wright.
Dr. T. Alcock, Dr. E. Lankester, Dr.

P. L. Sclater, Dr. E. P. Wright.
Alfred Newton, Dr. E. P. Wright.
Dr. E. Charlton, A. Newton, Rev. H.

B. Tristram, Dr. E. P. Wright.
H. B. Brady, C. E. Broom, H. T.

Stainton, Dr. E. P. Wright.
Dr. J. Anthony. Rev. C. Clarke, Rev.

H. B. Tristram, Dr. E. P. Wright.

-BIOLOGY*.

Dr. J. Beddard, W. Felkin, Rev. H.

B. Tristram, W. Turner, E. B.

Tylor, Dr. E. P. Wright.

C. Spence Bate, Dr. S. Cobbold, Dr.
M. Foster, H. T. Stainton, Rev. H.

B. Tristram, Prof. W. Turner.

Dr. T. S. Cobbold, G. W. Firth, Dr.

M. Foster, Prof. Lawson, H. T.

Stainton, Rev. Dr. H. B. Tristram,

Dr. E. P. Wright.
Dr. T. S. Cobbold, Prof M. Foster,

M.D., E. Ray Lankester, Professor

Lawson, H. T. Stainton, Rev. H. B.

Tristram.
Dr. T. S. Cobbold, Sebastian Evans,

Prof. Lawson, Thos. J. Moore, H.

T. Stainton, Rev. H. B.Tristram,

C. Staniland Wake, E. Ray Lan-
kester.

Dr. T. R. Fraser, Dr. Arthur Gamgee,
E. Ray Lankester, Prof. Lawson,
H. T. Stainton, C. Staniland Wake,
Dr. W. Rutherford, Dr. Kelburne
King.

ANATOMICAL AND PHYSIOLOGICAL SCIENCES.

COinilTTEE or SCIEXCES, T. ANAT03IT AND PHTSIOIOGT.

J833. Cambridge...
1834. Edinburgh...

Dr. Haviland IDr. Bond, Mr. Paget.

Dr. Abercrombie |Dr . Eoget, Dr. William Thomson.

SECTION E. (until 1847.) — .VNAT05IY AND MEDICnfE.

1835. Dublin IDr. Pritcbard Dr. Harrison, Dr. Hart.

1836. Bristol Dr. Rogct, F.R.S Dr. Symonds.

18.37. Liverpool ... Prof. W. Clark, M.D Dr. J. Carson, jun., James Long, Dr.

I J. E. W. Vose.

* At the Meeting of the General Committee at Birmingham, it was resolved :— " That the
title of Section D be changed to Biology ; " and "That for the word ' Subsection,' in the
rules for conducting the business of the Sections, the word ' Department' be substituted."

XXXVl

REPORT 1871.

Date and Place.

Presidents.

Secretaries.

1838. Newcastle . . . T. E. Headlam, M.D

1839. Birmingbam'jolm Yelloly, M.D., F.E.S.

1840. Glasgow . . . James Watson, M.D

1841. Plymouth...

1842. Manchester.

1843. Cork

1844. York

P. M. Eoget, M.D., Sec.E.S.

Edward Holme, M.D.; F.L.S.

Sir James Pitcairn, M.D

J. C. Pritchard, M.D

...:T. M. Greenhow, Dr. J. R.W. Vose.

...Dr. G. O. Eces, F. Eyland.

. . . Dr. J. Brown, Prof. Couper, Prof.

Eeid.
...Dr. J. Butter, J. Fuge, Dr. E. S.

Sargent.
... Dr. Chaytor, Dr, E. S. Sargent.
...JDr. John Popham, Dr. E. §. Sargent.
...|l. Erichsen, Dr. E. S. Sargent.

SECTION E. PHYSIOLOGY.

1845. Cambridge .'Prof. J. Haviland, M.D. .
1846.Southampton!Prof. Owen, M.D., F.E.S..
1847. Oxford* ...Prof. Ogle, M.D., F.E.S.'.

Dr. E. S. Sargent, Dr. Webster.
C. P. Keele, Dr. Laycock, Dr. Sargent.
Dr. Thomas K. Chambers, W. P.
Ormerod.

1850. Edinburgh
1855. Glasgow ...

1857. Dublin

1858. Leeds

1859. Aberdeen ...

1860. Oxford

1861. Manchester.

1862. Cambridge .

1863. Newcastle...

1864. Bath

1865. Birminghmf.

PHYSIOLOGICAL SUBSECTIONS OF SECTION D.

Prof. Bennett, M.D., F.E.S.E.
Prof. Allen Thomson, F.E.S. ...

Prof. E. Harrison, M.D

Sir Benjamin Brodie, Bart. .F.E.S.
Prof. S'harpey, M.D., Sec.E.S. ...
Prof. G. EoUeston, M.D., F.L.S.
Dr. John Davy, F.E.S.L. & E. ...

C.E.Paget, M.D

Prof Eolleston, M.D., F.E.S. ...
Dr. Edward Smith, LL.D., F.E.S.
Prof Acland, M.D., LL.D., F.E.S.

Prof J. H. Corbett, Dr. J. Struthers.
|Dr. E. D. Lyons, Prof. Eedfern.
C. G. Wheelliouse.
Prof. Bennett, Prof. Eedfern.
Dr. E. M'Donnell, Dr. Edward Smith.
Dr. W. Eoberts, Dr. Edward Smith.
G. F. Helm, Dr. Edward Smith.
Dr. D. Embleton, Dr. W. Turner.
J. S. Bartrum, Dr. W. Turner.
Dr. A. Fleming, Dr. P. Heslop, Oliver
Pemblcton, Dr. W. Turner.

GEOGEAPHICAL AND ETHNOLOGICAL SCIENCES.
[For Presidents and Secretaries for Geography preTious to 1851, see Section 0, p. xxxii.]

ETHNOLOGICAL SUBSECTIONS OF SECTION D.

1846. Southampton

1847. Oxford

1848. Swansea ...

1849. Birmingham

1850. Edinburgh..

Dr. Pritchard

Prof. H. H. Wilson, M.A.

Vice-Admiral Sir A. Malcolm ...

Dr. King.
Prof. Buckley.
G. Grant Francis.
Dr. E. G. Latham.
Daniel Wilson.

SECTION E. GEOGEAPHY AND ETHNOLOGY.

1851. Ipswich ..

1852. Belfast

1853. Hull

1854. Liverpool..

1855. Glasgow ..

1856. Cheltenham

. Sir E. L Murchison, F.E.S., Pres. E. Cull, Eev. J. W. Donaldson, Dr.

E.G.S. I Norton Shaw.

, Col. Chesney, E.A., D.C.L., E. Cull, E. MacAdam, Dr. Norton

F.E.S. I Shaw.

. E. G. Latham, M.D., F.E.S. ...U. Cull, Eev. H. W. Kemp, Dr. Nor-

( ton Shaw.
. Sir E. I. Murchison, D.C.L.,'Eichard Cull, Eev. H. Higgins, Dr.

F.E.S. Ihne, Dr. Norton Shaw.

, Sir J. Eichardson, M.D., F.E.S. Dr. W. G. Blackie, E. Cull, Dr. Nor-

ton Shaw.
Col. Sir H. C. Eawlinson, K.C.B. E. Cull, F. D. Hartland, W. H. Eum-
) I sey, Dr. Norton Shaw.

* By direction of the General Committee at Oxford, Sections D and E were incorporated
under the name of " Section D — Zoology and Botany, including Physiology " (seep, xxxiv).
The Section being then vacant was assigned in 1851 to Geography.

t Vide note on preceding page.

Presidents and gECRKTAftiEg op the sections.

XXXVll

Date and Place.

18.57.
1858.

1859.
1860.
1861.
1862.
1863.
18G4.
1865.
1866.

1867.
1868.

Dublin ;
Leeds ,

Presidents.

Secretaries.

Aberdeen ..

Oxford

Manchester

Cambridge .

Newcastle...

Batli...

Birmingliam

Nottingbiim

Dundee

Norwich ...

Eev. Dr. J. HenthawnTodd, Pres

E.I.A.
Sir E. I. Murchison, G.C.St.S.,

RR.S.

Rear-Admir.al Sir James Clerk

Ross, D.C.L., RR.S.
Sir R. I. Murchison, D.C.L.,

RR.S.
John Crawfurd, RR.S

'Francis Galton, F.R.S

Sir R. I. Murcliisou, K.C.B,

RR.S.
Sir R. I. Murchison, K.C.B.,

RR.S.
Major-General Sir R, Rawliuson,

M.P., K.C.B., F.R.S.
Sir Charles Nicholson, Bart.,

LL.D.

Sir Samuel Baker, F.R.G.S

Capt. G. H. Richards, R.N., F.R.S.

R. Cull, S. Ferguson, Dr. R. R. Mad-
den, Dr. Norton Sliaw.
R. Cull, Francis Galton, P. O'Cal-

laghan. Dr. Norton Shaw, Tliomas

Wriglit.
Richard Cull, Professor Geddcs, Dr.

Norton Shaw.
Capt. Burrows, Dr. J. Hunt, Dr. C.

Lempriere, Dr. Norton Shaw.
Dr. J. Hunt, J. Kingsley, Dr. Norton

Shaw, W. Spottiswoode.
J. W. Clarke, Rev. J. Glover, Dr.

Hunt, Dr. Norton Shaw, T. Wright.
C. Carter Blake, Hume Greenfield,

C. R. Markham, R. S. Watson.
H. W. Bates, C. R. Markham, Capt.

R. M. Murchison, T. Wright.
H. W. Bates, S. Evans, G. Jabct, C.

R. Markham, Tliomas Wright.
H. W. Bates, Rev. E. T. Cusins, R.

H. Major, Clements R. Markliam,

D. W. Nash, T. Wright.
H. W. Bates, Cyril Graham, C. R.

Markham, S. J. Mackie, R. Sturrock.
T. Baines, H. W. Bates, C. R. Mark-
ham, T. Wright.

1869. Exeter

1870. Liverpool..

1871. Edinburgh,

1833. Cambridge .

1834. Edinburgh .

SECTION E (continued). — geography.

Sir Bartle Frere, KC.B., LL.D.,

F.R.G.S.
Sir R, I. Murchison. Bt., K.C.B.,

LL.D., D.C.L., F.R.S., F.G.S.
Colonel Yule, C.B., F.R.G.S. ...

H. W. Bates, Clements E. Markliam,

J. H. Thomas,
H. W. Bates, David Buxton, Albert

J. Mott, Clements R. Markham.
Clements R. Markhain, A Buc'nnn,

J. II. Thomas, A. Keith Jolmslon.

STATISTICAL SCIENCE.

COMMITTEE OF SCIENCES, TI. STATISTICS,

Prof. Babbage, RR.S. ..,
Sir Charles Lemon, Bart.

J. E. Drinkwater.

Dr. Cleland, C. Hope Maclean.

SECTION F. STATISTICS.

18.35. Dublin ,
1836. Bristol .

1837. Liverpool...

18.38. Newcastle...

1839. Birmingham

1840. Glasgow ...

1841. Plymouth...

1842. Manchester.

1843. Cork

1844. York

1845. Cambridge .
1840. Southampton

Charles Babbage, F.R.S. ...
Sir Charles Lemon, Bart., F.R.S.

Rt. Hon. Lord Sandon

Colonel Sykes, F.R.S '....

Henry ILillam, F.R.S

Rt. Hon. Lord Sandon, F.R.S.

M.P.
Lieut. -Col. Sykes, F.R.S

G. W. Wood, M.P., RL.S

Sir C. Lemon, Bart., M.P

Lieut.-Col. Sykes, RR.S., RL.S.
Rt. Hon. The Earl Fitzwilliam. . .
G. R. Porter, RR.S

1871.

W. Greg, Prof. Longfield.

Rev. J. E. Bromby, C. B. Fripp,

James Heywood.
W. R. Greg, W. Langton, Dr. W. C.

Tayler.

W. Cargill, J. Heywood, W. R. Wood.
F. Clarke, R. W. Raw.son, Dr. W. C.

Tayler.
C. R. Baird, Prof. Ramsay, E. W.

Rawson.
Rev. Dr. Byrth, Rev. R. Luney, R.

W. Rawson.
Rev. R. Luney, G. W. Ormerod, Dr.

W. C. Tayler.
Dr. D. Bullen, Dr. W. Cooke Tayler.
J. Fletcher, J. Heywood, Dr. Lavco;k.
J. Fletcher, W. Cooke Tayler, LL.D.
J. Fletcher, F. G. P. Neison, Di-. W.

C. Tavler, Rev. T. L. Shapcotr.
d

XXXVlll

REPORT 1871.

Date and Place.

Presidents.

Secretaries.

1847. Oxford,

1848.
1849.

Swansea . . .
Birmingham

Travers Twiss, D.C.L., F.E.S. ..

J. H. Vivian, M.P., F.RS

Et. Hon. Lord Lyttelton

1850. Edinburgh .,

1851.
1852.

1853.
1854.

Ipswich.
Belfast .

Rev. W. H. Cox, J. J. Danson, F. G.

P. Neison.
J. Fletcher, Capt. E. Shortrede
Dr. Finch, Prof. Hancock, F. G. P.

Neison.
Prof. Hancock, J. Fletcher, Dr.

Stark.
J. Fletcher, Prof Hancock.
His Grace the Archbishop of Prof. Hancock, Prof Ingram, James

Very Eev. Dr. John Lee,

V.P.E.S.E.
Sir John P. Boileau, Bart.

Hull

Liverpool

1855. Glasgow

Dublin

James Heywood, M.P., F.E.S. . . .
Thomas Tooke, F.E.S

E. Monckton Milnes, M.P

Mac Adam, Jun.

Edward Cheshii-e, WiUiam Newmarch.

E. Cheshii-e, J. T. Danson, Dr. W. H,
Duncan, W. Newmarch.

J. A. CampbeU, E. Cheshire, W. New-
march, Prof E. H. Walsh.

SECTION r (continued), — economic science and statistics.

1856. Cheltenham

1857.
1858.
1859.
1860.
1861.

1862.
1863.

1864.

1865.

1866.

1867.

1868.

1869.

1870.

1871.

Dublin

Leeds

Aberdeen ..

Oxford

Manchester

Cambridge .
Newcastle ..

Bath.

Et. Hon. Lord Stanley, M.P.

His Grace the Archbishop of

Dublin, M.E.I.A.
Edward Bainea

Col. Sjkes, M.P., F.E.S. .
Nassau W. Senior, M.A. .
William Newmarch, F.E.S

Edwin Chadwick, C.B

William Tite, M.P., F.E.S.

William Farr, M.D., D.C.L.,

F.E.S.
Birmingham Et. Hon. Lord Stanley, LL.D.,

M.P.
Prof J. E. T. Sogers

Eev. C. H. Bromby, E. Cheshire, Dr.

W. N. Hancock Ne^vmarch, W. M.

Tartt.
Prof Cairns, Dr. H. D. Hutton, W.

Newmarch.
T. B. Baines, Prof Cairns, S. Brown,

Capt. Fishbourne, Dr. J. Strang.
Prof. Cairns, Edmund Macrory, A. M.

Smith, Dr. John Strang.
Edmmid Macrory, W. Newmarch,

Eev. Prof J. E. T. Rogers.
David Chadwick, Prof E. C. Clu-istie,

E. Macrory, Rev. Prof J. E. T.

Roger.?.
H. D. Macleod, Edmund Macrory.
.It. Doubleday, Edmund Macrory,

Frederick Purdy, James Potts.
E. Macroi7, E. T.' Payne, F. Purdy.

Nottingham
Dundee

M. E. Grant Duff, M.P.

Norwich ... Samuel Brown, Pres. Instit. Ac-

I tuaries.
Exeter Rt. Hon. Sir Stafford H. North-

1 cote, Bart., C.B., M.P.
Liverpool... [Prof. W. Stanley Jevons, M.A. ..

Edinburgh |Rt. Hon. Lord Neaves.,

G. J. D. Goodman, G. J. Johnston,

E. Macrory.
R. Birkin, Jun., Prof Leone Levi, E.

Macroiy.
Prof. Leone Levi, E. Macrory, A. J.

Warden.
Rev. W. C. Davie, Prof Leone Levi.

Edmund Macrory, Frederick Purdy,

Charles T. D. Acland.
Chas. R. Dudley Baxter, E. Macrory,

J. Miles Moss.
J. G. Fitch, James Meiklo.

MECHANICAL SCIENCE.

section G. MECHANICAl SCIENCE.

1836. Bristol Davies Gilbert, D.C.L., F.R.S,

1837. Liverpool . . . Rev. Dr. Eobinson

1838. Newcastle ... Charles Babbage, F.E.S

1839. Birmingham Prof WilUs, F.E.S., and Eobert

Stephenson.

1840. Gkisgow ... Sir John Robinson

T. G. Bunt, G. T. Clark, W. West.

Charles Vignoles, Thomas Webster.

E. Hawthorn, C. Vignoles, T. Webster.

W. Carpmael, WiUiam Hawkes, Tho-
mas Webster.

J. Scott Eussell, J. Thomson, J. Tod,
C. Vignoles.

PRESIDENTS AND SECRETARIES OF THE SECTIONS.

XXXIX

Date and Place.

Presidents.

Secretaries.

1841.
1842.

1843.
1844.
1845.
1846.
1847.
1848.
1849.
1S50.
1S51.
1852.

1853.

1854.

1855.

1856.

1857.

1858.
1859.

1860.

1861.

1862.
1863.

1864.
1865.

1866.

1867.

1868.

1869.
1870.

1871.

Plynioutli . . .
Manchester .

Cork

York

Cambridge ..
Southampton

Oxford

Swansea

Birmingham
Edinburgh ..

Ipswich

Belfast

Hull

LiTerpool ...

Glasgow . . .

Cheltenham

Dublin

Leeds

Aberdeen ...

Oxford

Manchester .

Cambridge ..
Newcastle . . .

Bath

Birmingham

Nottingham

Dundee

Norwich ...

Exeter

Liverpool . . .

Edinburgh

Henry Chatfield, Thomas Webster.
J. E. Bateman, J. Scott Eussell, J.

Thomson, Charles Vignoles.
James Thomson, Eobert Mallet.
Charles Vignole.s, Thomas V/ebster.
Eev. W. T. King,sley.
William Betts, Jim., Charles Manbj.
J. Glynn, R. A. Le Mesurier.
R. A. Le Mesiu-ier, W. P. StruTi5.
Charles Manby, W. P. Marshall.
Dr. Lees, David Stephenson.
John Head, Charles Manby.

John Taylor, E.R.S

Rev. Prof. Willis, E.R.S

Prof J. Macneill, M.R.I.A

John Taylor, F.R.S

George Rennie, F.R.S

Rev. Prof. WiUis, M.A., E.R.S. .
Rev. Prof. Walker, M.A., F.R.S.
Rev. Prof. Walker, M.A., E.R.S.
Robert Stephenson, M.P., F.R.S.

Rev. Dr. Robinson

William Cubitt, F.R.S '

John Walker,C.E.,LL.D., F.R.S. John F. Bateman, C. B^ Hancock,

Charles Manby, James Thomson.
James Oldham, J.Thomson, W. Sykcs

Ward.
John Grantham, J. Oldham, J. Thom-
son.
L. Hill, Jan., William Ramsay, J.

Thomson.
C. Atherton, B. Jones, Juu., H. M.

Jeffery.
Prof. Dovming, W. T. Doyne, A. Tate,

James Thomson, Henry Wright.
J. C. Dennis, J. Dixon, H. Wright.
R. Abernethy, P. Le Neve Foster, H.

Wright.
P. Le Neve Foster, Rev. E. Harrison,

Henry Wright.
P. Le Neve Foster, John Robinson, H.

Wright.
W. M. Fawcett, P. Le Neve Foster.
P. Le Neve Foster, P. Wcstmacott, J.

F. Spencer.
P. Le Neve Foster, Robert Pitt.
P. Le Neve Foster, Henry Lea, W. P.

Marshall, Walter May.
P. Le Neve Foster, J. 'E. Iselin, M.

A. Tarbottoni.
P. Le Neve Fo.-5ter, Jor.n P. Smith,

W. W. TJrquhart.
P. Le Neve Foster, J. E. Iselin, G.

Manby, W. Smith.
P. Le Neve Foster, H. Bauormau.
H. Bauerman, P. Le Neve Foster, T.

King, J. N. Shoolbred.
H. Ba\iernian, Alexander Leslie, J. P,
Smith.

William Fairbairn, C.E., E.R.S..

John Scott Russell, F.R.S

W. J. Macquorn Rankine, C.E.,

F.R.S.
George Rennie, F.R.S

The Right Hon. The Earl of
Rosse, F.R.S.

WilUam Fan-bairn, F.R.S

Rev. Prof. Willis, M.A., F.R.S. .

Prof. W. J. Macquorn Rankine,

LL.D., F.R.S.
J. F. Bateman, C.E., F.R.S

William Pan-bairn, LL.D., F.R.S.
Rev. Prof. Willis, M.A., F.R.S. .

LL.D..

J. Hawkshaw, F.R.S. .
Sir W. G. Armstrong.

E.R.S.
Thomas Hawksley, V.P.Inst,

C.E., F.G.S.
Prof. W. J. Macquorn Rankine

LL.D., E.R.S.
G. P. Bidder, C.E., P.R.G.S. ..

C. W. Siemens, F.R.S. .
Chas. B. Vignoles, C.E.,

F.R.S.

Prof. Fleeming Jenkin, F.R.S..

List of Evening Lectures.

Date and Place.

Lecturer.

Subject of Discourse.

1842. Manchester .

Charles Vignoles, E.R.S

Sir M. I. Brunei

The Principles and Construction of

Atmospheric Railways.
The Thames Tunnel.

i?,i I. IVTurchison. .. .

The Geology of Russia.

The Dinornis of New Zealand.

The Distribution of Animal Life in

the .3igean Sea.
The Earl of Rosse's Telescope.
il2

1843. Cork

Prof. Owen, M.D., F.R.S

trof. E. Forbes, F.R.S

t) r . Robinson ...,.,....

xl

REPORT 1871.

1844. York .

1845. Cambridge ..

1846. Southampton

1847. Oxford

1848. Swansea ...

1849. Birmingham

1850. Edinburgh.

1851. Ipswich.

1852. Belfast .

1853. Hull ....

1854. Liverpool ..

1855. Glasgow

1856. Cheltenham

1857. Dublin

1858. Leeds

1859. Aberdeen ..

1860. Oxford

1861. Manchester
18G2, Cambridge

Charles Lyell, F.E.S

Dr. Falconer, RR.S

a. B. Airy, P.R.S.,Astron. Royal

R. L Murchison, RR.S

Prof. Owen, M.D., RR.S

Charles Lyell, F.R.S

W. R. Grove, F.R.S

Rev. Prof. B. Powell, F.R.S. ..
Prof. M. Faraday, F.R. S

Hugh E. Strickland, F.G.S. ..
John Percy, M.D., F.R.S

W. Carpenter, M.D., F.R.S. . . .

Dr. Faraday, F.R.S

Rev. Prof. WiUis, M.A., F.R.S.

Prof. J. H. Bennett, M.D.
F.R.S.E.

Dr. Mantell, F.R.S

Prof. R. Owen, M.D., F.R.S.

G. B. Airy, F.R.S., Astron. Roy.
Prof G.G. Stokes,D.C.L., F.R.S.

Colonel Portlock, R.E., F.R.S.

Prof. J. Phillips, LL.D., F.R.S.,
F.G.S.

Robert Hunt, F.R.S

Prof. R. Owen, M.D., F.R.S. ..
Col. E. Sabine, V.P.R.S

Dr. W. B. Carpenter, F.R.S. ..
Lieut.-Col. H. Rawlinson

Col. Sir H. Rawlinson ,

W. R. Grove, F.R.S

Prof. W. Thomson, F.R.S

Rev. Dr. Livingstone, D.C.L. ...
Prof. J. Phillips, LL.D., F.R.S
Prof. R. Owen, M.D., RR.S. ..,

Sir R.I. Murchison, D.C.L

Rev. Dr. Robinson, F.R.S

Rev. Prof. Vv^alker, F.R.S

C:iptain Sherard Osborn, R.N.
Prof. W. A. Miller, M.A., F.R.S
G. B. Airv, F.R.S., Astron. Roy. .
Prof. Tvndall, LL.D., F.R.S. ...
Prof. Odling, RR.S

Subject of Discourse.

Geology of North America.

The Gigantic Tortoise of the Siwalik
Hills in India.

Progress of Terrestrial Magnetism.

Geology of Russia.

Fossil Mammalia of the British Isles.

Valley and Delta of the Mississippi.

Properties of the Explosive substance
discovered by Dr. Schonbein ; also
some Researches of his own on the
Decomposition of Water by Heat.

Shooting-stars.

Magnetic and Diamagnetic Pheno-
mena.

The Dodo (Bidus inepfus).

Metallurgical operations of Swansea
and its neighbourhood.

Recent Microscopical Discoveries.

Mr. Gassiot's Battery.

Transit of diflerent Weights with
varying velocities on Railways.

Passage of the Blood through the
minute vessels of Animals in con-
nexion with Nutrition.

Extinct Birds of New Zealand.

Distinction between Plants and Ani-
mals, and their changes of Form.

Total Solar Eclipse of July 28, 1851.

Recent discoveries in the properties
of Light.

Recent discovery of Rock-salt at
Carrickfergus, and geological and
practical considerations connected
with it.

Some peculiar phenomena in the Geo-
logy and Physical Geography of
Yorkshire.

The present state of Photography.

Anthropomorphous Apes.

Progress of researches in Terrestrial
Magnetism.

Characters of Sjiecies.

As.syrian and Babylonian Antiquities
and Ethnology.

Recent discoveries in Assyria and
Babylonia, with the results of Cunei-
form research up to the present
time.

Correlation of Physical Forces.

The Atlantic Telegraph.

Recent discoveries in Africa.

The Ironstones of Yorkshire.

The Fossil Mammalia of Australia.

Geology of the Northern Highlands.

Electrical Discharges in highly rare-
fied Media.

Physical Constitution of the Sun.

Arctic Discovery.

Spectrum Analysis.

The late Eclipse of the Sun.

The Forms and Action of Water,

Organic Chemistry.

LIST OF EVENING LECTUllES.

ili

1863.

1864.
1865.

1866.
1867.

1868.
1869.
1870.
1871.

Newcastle-
on-Tyne.

Bath

Birmingham

Nottingham.
Dundee

Norwich ....

Exeter

Liverpool ...
Edinburgh

Prof. Williamson, F.E.S.

James Glaisher, F.R.S.

Prof. Eoscoe, RR.S

Dr. Livingstone, F.R.S.
J. Beete Jukes, F.R.S. ...

William Huggins, F.R.S

Dr. J. D. Hoolcer, F.R.S

Archibald Geikie, F.R.S

Alexander Herschel, F.R.A.S. .

J. Fergusson, F.R.S

Dr. W. Odling, F.R.S

Prof. J. Phillips, LL.D., F.R.S
J. Norman Lockyer, F.R.S...

Prof. J. Tyndall, LL.D., F.R.S
Prof. W. J. Macquorn Rankine,

LL.D., F.R.S.
F. A. Abel, F.R.S

E. B. Tylor, F.R.S

The chemistry of the Galvanic Bat-
tery considered in relation to Dy-
namics.

The Balloon Ascents made for the
British Association.

The Chemical Action of Light.

Recent Travels in Africa.

Probabilities as to the position and
extent of the Coal-measures beneath
the red rocks of the Midland Coun-
ties.

The results of Spectrura_ Analysis
applied to Heavenly Bodies.

Insular Floras.

The Geological origin of the present
Scenery of Scotland.

The present state of knowledge re-
garding Meteors and IMeteorites.

Archaeology of the early Buddhist
Monuments.

Reverse Chemical Actions.

Vesuvius.

The Physical Constitution of the
Stars and Nebulaj.

The Scientific Use of the Imagination .

Stream-lines and Waves, in connexion
with Naval Architecture.

On some recent investigations and ap-
plications of Explosive Agents.

On the Relation of Primitive to Mo-
dern Civilization.

1867. Dundee..

1868. Norwich

1869. Exeter ..

1870. Liverpool ,

Lectures to the Ojjerative Classes.

Prof J. Tyndall, LL.D., F.R.S,
Prof Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S. ...
Prof. MiUer, M.D., F.R.S

Sir John Lubbock, Bart., M.P.,
F.R.S,

Matter and Force.

A piece of Chalk.

Experimental illustrations of the
modes of detecting the Composi-
tion of the Sun and other Heavenly
Bodies by the Spectrum.

Savages.

xlii

EEPORT 1871.

Table showing the Attendance and Receipts

Date of Meeting.

Where held.

Presidents.

Old Life New
Members. Mem

Life

bers.

1831, Sept. 27 ...

1832, June 19 ...

1833, June 25 ...

1834, Sei^t. 8 ...

1835, Aug. 10 ...

1836, Aug. 22 ...

1837, Sept. 11 ...

1838, Aug. 10 ...

1839, Aug. 26 ...

1840, Sept. 17 ...

1 841, July 20 ...

1842, June 23 ...

1843, Aug. 17 ...

1844, Sept. 26 ...

1845, June 19 ...

1846, Sept. 10 ...

1847, June 23 ...

1848, Aug. 9

1849, Sept. 12 ...

1850, July 21 ...

1851, July 2

1852, Sept. I

1853, Sept. 3 ...

1854, Sept. 20 ...

1855, Sept. 12 ...

1856, Aug. 6

1857, Aug. 26 ...

1858, Sept. 22 ...

1859, Sept. 14 ...
i860, Juno 27 ...

1861, Sept. 4

1862, Oct. I

1863, Aug. 26 ...

1864, Sept. 13 ...

1865, Sept. 6 ...

1866, Aug. 22 ...

1867, Sept. 4 ...

1568, Aug. 19 ...

1569, Aug. 18 ...

1 8 70, Sept. 14 ...

1871, Aug. 2

York

The Earl Fitzwilliam, D.C.L. ...
The Eev. W. Buekland, F.R.S. ..
The Rev. A. Sedgwick, F.R.S....

Sir T. M. Brisbane, D.C.L

The Eev. Provost Lloyd, LL.D.

The Marquis of Lansdovme

The Earl of Burlington, F.E.S. .
The Duke of Northumberland...
The Eev. W. Vernon Harcourt .
The Marquis of Breadalbane . . .
The Eev. W. Whewell, F.E.S....

The Lord Francis Egerton

The Earl of Eosse, F.E.S

The Eev. G. Peacock, D.D

Sir John F. W. Herschel, Bart. .
Sir Eoderick I. Mui'chison, Bart.

Sir Eobert H. Inglis, Bart

The Marquis of Northampton . . .
The Eev. T. R. Robinson, D.D. .

Sir David Brewster, K.H

G. B. Airy, Esq., Astron. Roval .
Lieut.-General Sabine, F.R.S. ...
William Hopkins, E.sq., F.E.S. .
Tlie Earl of Harrowby, F.E.S. ..

The Duke of Argyll, F.E.S

Prof C. G. B.Daubenv, M.D....
The Rev. HumiDhrey Lloyd, D.D.
Eicliard Owen, M.D., D.C.L. ...
n.R.H. The Prince Consort ...

The Lord Wrotteslev, M.A

William Fairbairn, LL.D.,F.R.S.
The Rev. Prof WiUis, M.A. ...
Sir William G. Armstrong, C.B.
Sir Charles Lyell, Bart., M.A....
Prof J. Phillips, M.A.,LL.D....
William E. Grove, Q.C., F.E.S.
The Duke of Buccleuch, K.C.B.
Dr. Joseph D. Hooker, F.E.S. .

Prof. G. G. Stokes, D.C.L

Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D

Prof. Sir W. Thomson, LL.D....

^9
18

50
J6
to
[8

3
12

9

g

to

'3
^3
33
'4
'5

1.2
ZI

13
«S

56
^0

31
25
18
11

39
i8

Oxford

169 <
303 i(
109 :
226 I

313

241

314

149

227

23s

172

164

141

238

194

182

236

222 I

184

286

321 I

239

203

287

292 -

207

167

196

204

314

2,J fi

Cambridge

Edinbureh

Dublin

Bristol

Liverpool

Newcastle-on-Tyne ..
Birmingham

Glasgow

Plymouth

Manchester

Cork

York

C ambridgo

Southampton

Oxford

Swansea

Birmingham

Edinburgh

Ipswich

Belfast

HiiU

Liver^jool

Glasgow

Cheltenham

Dublin

Leeds

Aberdeen

Oxford

l\Ianchester

Cambridge

Newcastle-on-Tyne ..
Bath

Birmingham

Nottingham

Dundee

Norwich

Exeter

Liverpool

Edinburgh

ATTENDANCE AND RECEIPTS AT ANNUAL MEETINGS.

xliii

at Annual .

Meetings of the Association.

Attended by

Amount
received

Sums paid on
Accoimt of
Grants for

Old

New-

during the

Seientitle

Annual

Annual

Asaociates.

Ladies. Fore

igners. Total.

Meeting.

Purposes.

Members.

Members.

£ .s. d.

£ s. d.

...

353

900
129S

20 0 0

. . .

167 0 0

434 14 0
918 14 6

1350
1840

1 1 00*

2400

34 1438

40 1353

891

956 12 2
1595 II 0
1546 16 4
1235 10 II

••

r.

"60*

4<j

31/

376

33t

331*

i8 1315

1449 17 8

75

185
190

160
260

1565 10 2
981 12 8

71

9t

45

22

407

172

35 1079

830 9 9

94

65

39

270

196

36 857

685 16 0

40

495

203

53 1260

208 5 4

275 I 8

197

54

25

376

197

15 929

707 0 0

93

33

447

237

22 1071

963 0 0

159 19 6

12S

4-

510

273

44 I 241

1085 0 0

345 iS °

61

47

244

141

37 710

620 0 0

391 9 7

63

60

510

292

9 1108

iog5 0 0

304 6 7

56

57

367

236

6 876

903 0 0

205 0 0

121

121

765

524

10 i8o2

1882 0 0

330 19 7

142

loi

1094

543

26 2133

231 100

480 16 4

104

48

412

346

9 1H5

1098 0 0

734 13 9

156

lao

900

569

26 2022

2015 0 0

507 IS 3

I I I

91

710

509

13 1698

1931 0 0

618 18 2

125

179

1206

821

22 2564

2782 0 0

684 II I

177

59

636

463

47 1689

1604 0 0

124 1 7 0

1S4

125

1589

791

15 3139

3944 0 0

iiii 5 10

150

57

433

242

25 1161

1089 0 0

1293 16 6

154

209

1704

1004

25 3335

3640 0 0

1608 3 10

182

103

11 19

1058

13 2802

2965 0 0

1289 15 8

215

149

766

508

23 1997

2227 0 0

1591 7 10

218

105

960

771

II 2303

2469 0 0

1750 13 4

193

118

1163

771

7 ' 2444

2613 0 0

1739 4 0

226

117

720

682 J

45 2004

2042 0 0

1940 0 0

229

107

678

600

17 1856

1931 0 0

1572 0 0

3°3

1^95

1103

910

14 2878

3096 0 0

1472 2 6

311

127

976

754

21 2463

2575 0 0

* Ladies were not admitted by purchased Tickets until 1843.

t Tickets for admission to Sections only. % Including Ladies

xliv

JtEl'OKT— 1871.

»^ O W O 35

60

0)

c
o
PL,

Cm

o

vt

*^ O^ O CO
=2 CD <>' OI

o o o

(N O t^

(NO-*
«--. O ?o
■* 00 -y

'a

s

a>

s

s

o

o ^

q; ►:^
'^ S

gQ

S &C
O 3

c: <^

O
O
O

m

Eh
W

;^
p^
o

w

to

W o ^.^

t ^2°

OOOO oOOOO'XJOOOOO oooo

oooo ooooowooooo oooo

o o ifT' o <-> o lo o >o t- o o «s lo o oooo

OOCIO ^OCi:^M iOiQC^WW c^ic^o-^

"X) .-( r-t t-H t-H 1-H

r^ > ^ y, V

53 Tj v3 ijj -r;
0-<! C - — rt

j< -S -5

(ZJ ; O 3

-Si*? =:o

^ O S

2- w *a u

») o ^ ° ,

no c3

o o

;3 ^ 03 - ^^ C

"_0 ^ O Sri

3M sS.'

:2 3? ° g^spj*;;

i ^ !^ tj n ^ "^

o — oo

-r ™

:■« S o
•m-2 J

I • cj o O

■ M 5; -g^O

-1 S' ,

.:;" Pi c

:i "

o a
o a

'3
"a

O 'C ■- - -
<a rf o o

■*-> ^

,2

a p,
■g CO

a W

IS 3

a o
o =

1^ CO o o o o o
o; o o o o o ©

«rt

(N 00 N CO O m
CO 00 i-O O '-^ CO
Csl TI* 00 ^^ as <N

CO o

CO o
I— I

.— o
CO o

o
o

o

(M

-If

CO

o

OI

C/3

H

"^ -u -c

o o
5 ^

o

a< e

o o
"3 '3

S c
_o

*^ "S

^ ° G
g S-

O O 3

toj S
= I. =

a ti>

C-. o
CI o

<N

» a

OJ o •

-a - ■
c

o

H

o

,0

■iS

;-= *-

s s

o

^ c

c o

O to

£ a

a n

c a
a .H

c °

^ »

a -p

~ a
to "2
." a

«

O qj

O <u :-
4) W l-H

S 2

a ""I

to L.

y - ^

to <u o ■— ' a Q

to , hLh cj o

• — ^ 3 .„ i^ ,

to P o "a a S o

S • "? o " s

c a.t£ o = >~ a>

1^ o S P 'o

h ^ t^ fc S 'T' «

.S o

M

V

t3 O

a o

c «•-

5 i^-S

OJ CO S

■^ . o
Jig2

« ^ Q^ OJ

o

Oi

O Tf

l-H

l^ CO

ci oi
1 =*«

■-I r-i o»

o :
^o •

S o «"

«3 O *>

s^:

fe J3

Q

i3«<3

O
O

o te 'a

|i

Lone
t Mes
n han

H

-s =^-

O

O.

t>

VJ

a

is^i

§

C
es

B

cs
P4

"«
^

to

3

O

LIST 01" OFFICliRS.

OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1871-72.

xlv

TRUSTEES (PERMANENT).
General Sir Edward Sabine, K.C.B., E.A., D.C.L., Tres.K.S.
Sir PiilLir DE il. Gi!Ei- Egebtox, Bart., M.P., F.E.S.

PRESIDENT.
SIR WILLIAM THOMSON, M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., F.H.SS.L. & E.,

the UniTcrsity of Glasgow.

VICE-PRESIDENTS.

Professor of Katural Philosoiihy iu

His Grace The DUKE OF BucCLEUCir, K.G., D.C.L.,

F.E.S.
The Right Hon. The Lord Provost of Edinburgh.
The Eight Hon. John Inglis, D.C.L., LL.D., Lord

Justice General of Scotland.
Sir Alexander Grant, Bart., M,A,, Principal of

the UniTersity of Edinburgh.

Sir EoDERiCK I. Mur.cnisox, Bart,, K.C.B.,

G.C.St.S., D.C.L., F.H.S.
Sir Charles Lyell, Bart., D.C.L., P.E.S., F.G.S.
Dr. Lyon Playfair, M.P., C.B., F.E.S.
Professor Chkistison, M.D., D.C.L., Prcs. E.S.E.
Professor Balfour, F.B.SS. L, & E.

PRESIDENT ELECT.
DR. W. B. CARPENTER, LL.D., F.E.S., F.L.S., r.G,S.

VICE-PRESIDENTS ELECT.

The Earl of Chichester, Lord Lieutenant of the

County of Sussex.
The Duke of Norfolk.
The Right Hon. The DuKE of Eiciimoxd, K.G.,

P.C.D.C.L.

The Eight Hon. The Duke OF Devonshiee, E.G.,

D.C.L., F.E.S.
Sir John LuBBOCK,Bart.,M.P.,F.E.S.,P.L,S.,F.G.S.
Dr. Shari'EY, LL.D., Sec. E.S., F.L.S.
J. Prest-wich, Esq., F.E.S., Pres. G.S.

LOCAL SECRETARIES FOR THE MEETING AT BRIGHTON.

Charles Carpenter, Esq.
The Eev. Dr. Griffith.
Henry Willett, Esq,

LOCAL TREASURER FOR THE MEETING AT BRIGHTON.

William Hexry Hallett, Esq., F.L.S.

ORDINARY MEMBERS OF THE COUNCIL.

BatemAN, J. F., Esq., FE.S.

Beddoe, John, M.D.

Debus, Dr. H., F.R.S.

Evans, John, Esq., F.E.S.

Fitch, J. G., Esq., M.A.

Foster, Prof. G. C, F.E.S.

Foster, Prof. M., M.D.

Galton, Francis, Esq., F.E.S.

Gassiot, J. P., Esq., D.C.L., F.E.S,

Godwin-Austen, R. A. C, Esq., F.R.S.

Hirst, Dr. T. A., F.E.S.

HuGGiNS, William, Esq., D.C.L., F.E.S.

Jeffreys, J. G., Esq., F.H.S.

Lockyee, J. N., Esq., F.R.S.

Merrifield, C. W., Esq., F.E.S.
KoRTncoTE,Et.Hon.SirSTAFFORDH.,Bt.,M.P.
' Eamsay-, Professor, LL.D., F.R.S.
Rankine, Professor W. J. M., LL.D., F.R.S.
Siemens, C. W., Esq., D.C.L., F.R.S.
Simon, Dr. John, D.C.L., F.R.S.
Straciiky-, Major-General, F.R.S.
Strange, Lieut.-Colonel A., F.R.S.
Sykes, Colonel, M.P., F.R.S.
Tyndall, Professor, LL.D., F.R.S.
Wallace, A. E., Esq., F.R.G.S.
Wiieatstone, Professor Sir C, F.R.S.
Williamson, Professor A. W., F.R.S.

EX-OFFICIO MEMBERS OF THE COUNCIL.

The President and President Elect, the Vice-Presidents and Vice-Presidents Elect, the General and
Assistant General Secretaries, the General Treasurer, the Trustees, and the Presidents of former
years, \ii.: —

Rev. Professor Sedgwick.

The Duke of Devonshire.

The Rev. T. R. Robinson, D.D.

G. B. Airy,Esq.,AstrononierRoyal

General Sir E. Sabine, K.C.B.

The Earl of Harrowby.

The Duke of Argyll.

Dr. Thomas Thomson, F.R.S.

The Rev. H. Lloyd, D.D.
Richard Owen, M.D., D.C.L.
Sir W. Fairbairn, Bait., LL.D.
The Rev. Professor Willis, F.R.S.
Sir W. G. Armstrong, C.B., LL.D.
Sir Chas. Lyell, Bart., M.A.,LL.D,

Professor Phillips, M.A., D.C.I.
William R. Gro^e, Esq., F.R.S.
The Duke of Buceleueh, K.B.
Dr. Joseph D. Hooker, D.C.L.
Professor Stok.'s, C.B., D.C.L.
Prof. Huxley, LL.D.

GENERAL SECRETARIES.

F.L.S., The Athen.TUm Club, Pall Mall, London, S.W.

Capt. Douglas Galton, C.B., R.E., F.R.S., 12 Chef:tcr Street, Grosvenor Place, London, S.W.

ASSISTANT GENERAL SECRETARY.

George Griffith, Es^., M.A., Harrow.

GENERAL TREASURER.
William Spottievoode, Esq., M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.G.S., cO Grosvenor Place, London, S.W.

G. Busk, Esq., F.E.S.

AUDITORS.

Warren De La Rue, Esq., D.C.L., F.R.S.

John Evans, Esq., F.R.S.

Xlvi REPORT 1871.

OFEICEES OF SECTIONAL COMMITTEES PRESENT AT THE
EDINBURGH MEETING..

SECTION A. MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS.

P/-esiVfe;«f.— Professor P. G. Tait, F.R.S.E.

Vice-Presidents. — Professor J. C. Adams, F.R.S. ; Professor Cayley, F.R.S. ; Rev.
Professor Challis, F.R.S. ; J. P. Gassiot, D.C.L., F.R.S. ; Professor R. Grant,
LL.D., F.R.S. ; Dr. Joule, D.C.L., F.R.S. ; Professor J. Clerk Maxwell, LL.D.,
F.R.S. ; Professor W. J. M. Rankine, LL.D., F.R.S. L. and E. ; Dr. Spottiswoode,
F.R.S. ; Rev. Professor Kelland, F.R.SS. L. and E. ; Professor Stokes, D.C.L.,
F.R.S. ; Professor Sylvester, LL.D., F.R.S.

iS'ec/-e!;«/-je.s.— Professor W. G. Adams, F.G.S. ; J. T. Bottomlev, M.A., F.C.S. ;
Professor W. K. Clifford, M.A. : Professor J. D. Everett, F.R.S.E. : Rev. R.
Harley, F.R.S.

SECTION B. CHEMISTEY AND MINERALOGY, INCLrDING THEIR APPLICATIONS TO

AGRICULTURE AND THE ARTS.

P/-esj(feM!!.— Professor T. .^jidrevs's, M.D., F.R.SS. L. and E.

Vice-Presidmits. — Professor Abel, F.R.S.; Professor Apjohn, F.R.S.; Professor

Criim Brown, M.D., F.R.S.E. ; Dr. Ronalds, F.R.S.E. ; Professor H. E. Roscoe,

F.R.S. ; Dr. J. Stenhouse, F.R.S. ; James Young, F.R.S.E.
Secretaries.— J. Y. Buchanan, F.R.S.E.; W. N. Hartley; T. E.Thorpe, F.R.S.E.

SECTION C. GEOLOGY.

President. — Professor Archibald Geikie, F.R.S., F.G.S.

Vice-Presidents.— Dr. J. Bryce, F.R.S.E., F.G.S. ; Thomas Davidson, F.R.S. ; Su-

Richard Griffith, Bart., F.R.S. ; Professor Harkuess, F.R.S. ; D. Milne Home,

F.R.S.E. ; J. Can-ick Moore, F.R.S. ; WiUiam PengeUy, F.R.S. ; J. Prestwich,

F.R.S., Pres. G.S. Loud. ; Professor J. Young, M.D.
Secretaries.— B.. Etheridge, F.R.S., F.G.S.; J. Geikie, F.R.S.E.; T. M 'Kenny

Hughes, M.A., F.G.S.; L. C. Miall.

SECTION D. BIOLOGY.

President. — Professor Allen Thomson, M.D., F.R.SS. L. and E.

Vice-Presidents. — Professor WvviUe Thomson, F.R.S. ; Professor W. Tm-ner,
M.B., F.R.S.E. ; Professor "Owen, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. ; Professor Huxley,
LL.D., F.R.S.; Dr. Beddoe; Dr. Hughes Bennett; Dr. Carpenter, LL.D.,
F.R.S. ; Dr. Shai-pey, F.R.S.

Secretaries.— Dx. T. R. Eraser, F.R.S.E. ; Dr. Arthur Gamgee, F.R.S.E. ; E. Ray
Lankester, B.A. ; Professor Lawson, M.A. ; H. T. Staintou, F.R.S. ; C. Staui-
landAVake, Dir. A. I.; Dr. W. Rutherford, F.R.S.E.; Dr. Kelburne Eing.

SECTION E. GEOGRAPHY AND ETHNOLOGY.

JVesK7«fi;.— Colonel H. Yule, C.B., F.R.G.S.

Vice-Presidents.— '&IV Walter Elliot, K.C.S.L ; Sir Arthur Phayre, K.C.S.L;

Major-General Sir Andrew Waugh, F.R.S. ; Dr. Rae, M.D. ; Admiral Sir

Edward Belcher, K.C.B. ; Sir James ^Uexander, K.C.M.G.
Secretaries. — Clements R. Markham, C.B., Sec. R.G.S. ; A. Buchan. F.R.S.E. :

J. H. Thomas, F.R.G.S.; A. Keith Johnston, F.R.G.S.

SECTION F. ECONOMIC SCIENCE AND STATISTICS.

President. — Lord Neaves.

Vice-Presidents. — The Lord Advocate, Sir John Bowring, K.C.B., D.C.L., F.R.S. ;
Samuel Brown, Baron Eotvos, of Pesth ; Edward S. Gordon, M.P. ; Sir Alex-
ander Grant, Bart. ; Sir Willoughby Jones, Bart. ; James Heywood, M.A.,
F.R.S. ; Duncan M'Laren, [M.P. ; Sir William Stirling Maxwell, Bart. ; Lvon
Playfair, M.P., LL.D. ; W. NeHson Hancock, LL.D. ; General Sir Andrew Scott
Waugh, K.C.B., F.R.S.

Secretaries. — J. G, Fitch, M.A. ; James Meikle, F.I.A., F.S.S.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. xlvi

SECTION G. MECHANICAL SCIENCE.

President. — Professor Fleeiuing Jenkin, C.E., F.R.S.

Vice-Presidents.— J. F. Bateman, F.R.S. ; Admiral Sir E. Belcher, K.C.B. ; F. J.
Bramwell, O.E. ; Peter Le Neve Foster, M.A. ; Professor W. J. Rankine,
LL.D., F.R.S. ; C. W. Siemens, D.C.L., F.R.S. ; Thomos Stevenson, F.R.S.E, ;
Professor James Thomson, LL.I).

Secretaries. — H. Bauerman, F.G.S. ; Alexander Leslie, C.E. ; J. P. Smith, C.E.

Report of the Council for the Year 1870-71, presented to the General
Committee at Edinburgh, on Wednesday, August 2nd, 1871.

At each of their meetings during the past year the Council have as usual
received a report froii the General Treasurer, as well as one from the Kew
Committee. A resume of these Reports wiU be laid before the General
Committee this day.

The Council have had under their consideration the several resolutions, five
in number, referred to them by the General Committee at Liverpool. They
beg to report as follows upon the action they have taken in each case : —

First Resolution — " That the discontinuance of the maintenance of Kew
Observatory by the British Association having been determined on, the
President and Council be authorized to communicate with the President and
Council of the Royal Society, and with the Government, so that the future
use of the buildings may in 1872 be placed at the disposal of the Royal
Society, in case the Royal Society should desire it, under the same con-
ditions as those buildings are at present held by the British Association."

A copy of this resolution was forwarded by direction of your Council
to the President and Council of the Royal Society. The following is the
reply which one of your General Secretaries has received from Dr. Sharpey,
Secretary of the Royal Society : —

" The Eoyal Society, Burlington House,
July 8, 1871.

" Deab De. Hibst, — In reply to your letter of the 10th December, 1870,
enclosing a copy of a resolution of the General Committee of the British
Association relative to the future occupation of the buildings at Kew now
held by the British Association, I am directed to acquaint you that the
President and Council of the Royal Society are ready to take possession of
the Observatory at Kew on the terms it is at present held from Her Majesty's
Government, as stated in a letter dated 26th March 1842, addressed to the
President of the British Association from the Office of Woods, &c., viz. : —
' during the pleasure and upon the conditions usual on sach occasions, that
no walls shall be broken through, and no alterations made that can afi'ect
the stability of the building, and alter its external appearance, without the
previous sanction of the Board of Works.' I have further to acquaint you
that the President and Council have appointed a Standing Committee of
Fellows of the Royal Society for the management of the Kew Observatory
in accordance with the terms of the Gassiot Trust, consisting of the following
gentlemen : —

Mr. Warren De La Rue.
Mr. Francis Galton.
Mr. Gassiot.
Admiral Richards.

Sir Edward Sabine.
Colonel Smythe.
Mr. Spottiswoode.
Sir Charles Wheatstone.

and that .£600 from the income of the Gassiot Fund has been placed at the
disposal of that Committee to meet the expenses of the establishment for the
ensuing year. " I remain, yours very truly,

(Signed) " W. Shaepey, M.D., Secretary B. S."

xlviii REPOKT — 1871.

Through, the munificence of Mr, Gassiot, tlicrefore, tho Association can,
^yithout detriment to science, give up possession of the Kcw Observatory at
once instead of in 1872, as -was originally contemplated. Your Council
accordingly recommend that Government should be informed without
further delay of the desire of the Association to see the direction and
maintenance of the Kew Observatory transferred to the Roj-al Society.

Second Resolution. — " That the Council be empowered to cooperate with
the Eoyal and Eoyal Astronomical Societies, in the event of a new appli-
cation being made to Government to aid in the observation of the Solar
Eclipse of December 1870."

On the 4tli November a Joint Committee of the Royal and Royal Astro-
nomical Societies decided to make a second application; on the 5th of
November your Council selected a few of their body to accompany the new
deijutation to Government which the above two Societies had resolved to
send. The necessity for any such deputation was subscqiiently obviated
through the intervention of private individuals, and, as is well known, aid
was promptly and liberally granted by Government to the Eclipse Ex-
pedition.

Third Resolution. — " That the Council be requested to take such steps as
they deem wisest, in order to urge upon Government the importance of
introducing scientific instruction into the elementary schools throughout the
country."

A Committee of your Council having considered the subject, recommended
the appointment of a deputation to wait upon the Lord President of tho
Council in order to i;rge upon him the desirability of including elementary
natural science amongst the subjects for which payments are made by the
authority of the Revised Code. The Council accordingly formed themselves
into a deputation, and on the 13tli of December 1870 had an interview with
the Right Hon. "W. E. Eorstcr, M.P., Vice-rresident of the Committee of
Council on Education, who was pleased to express his concurrence with tho
objects of the deputation and his willingness to carry out those objects so far
as circumstances would permit.

Fourth Resolution. — " That tho Council of the British. Association be
authorized, if it should appear to be desirable, to urge upon Her Majesty's
Government the expediency of jn-oposing to the legislature a measure to
insure the introduction of the metric system of weights and measures for
international purposes."

The Council deemed it expedient to postpone the consideration of this
resolution.

Fifth Resolution. — " That it is inexpedient that new institutions, such as
the proposed Engineering College for India, should be established by Govern-
ment, until the Royal Commission now holding an inquiry into the relation
of the State to scientific instriictiou shall have issued their report. That the
Council of the British Association be requested to consider this opinion, and,
should they see fit, to urge it upon the attention of Her Majesty's Govern-
ment."

The Committee appointed without loss of time to consider and report on
this resolution were informed at their first meeting tliat the arrangements
for the establishment of the College had been virtually completed. Your
President, however, in accordance with the wishes of this Committee, entered
into unofiicial communication with tlic authorities at the India Office, relative
to the proposed examination for entrance into the new Engineering College,
and succeeded thereby in gaining for natural science, as compared with

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL. xlix

classics, a recognition, in the form of allotted marks, which it prcviouslj- did
not possess.

Your Council has given considerable attention to the important question
(raised at the last meeting) of a revision of the regulations relating to the
proceedings of the several Sections at the annual meetings of the Association.
Hitherto, it has been justly urged, these proceedings, from not having been
sufficiently pre-arranged, have fi-equently been of too desultory and mixed
a character. It is hoped that by a proper observance of the Revised Regu-
lations which are this day to be submitted to the General Committee for
approval, and by increased vigilance on the part of the Sectional Committees,
much of this may bo obviated, and that greater prominence may be given to,
and a fuller discussion secured for, the really important communications
which are annually made to the several Sections.

The Council has pleasure in informing the General Committee that the
Association at length possesses a central office in London. The Asiatic
Society has, in consideration of a yearly rent of £100, granted to the Asso-
ciation entire possession of four of their rooms at 22 Albemarle Street, and
the use of another room for meetings of the Council and Committees. Your
Council, moreover, acting under the power given to thera by the General
Committee at Liverpool, have engaged Mr. Askham as clerk at a salary of
£120 a year. He is in attendance daily, and there transacts much of the
business which was formerly done at the office of Messrs. Taylor and Francis,
the printers to the Association. With the exception of certain works of
reference, the whole of the books and MSS. formerly deposited at Kew have
been transferred to 22 Albemarle Street, and are being catalogued and
rendered available for reference by Members of the Association. One of the
four rooms not at present in use has been sub-let to the London Mathe-
matical Society.

The Council having been informed by Dr. Hirst of his desire at the close
of the present Meeting to resign his ofRce as Joint General Secretary of the
Association, appointed a Committee, consisting of the General Officers and
former General Secretaries, to select a successor. This Committee unani-
mously recommended the appointment of Captain Douglas Galton, C.B.,
F.R.S. The Coimcil, entirely agreeing with the Committee as to the high
qualifications of Captain Galton for the office, cordially recommend his
election by the General Committee at their meeting on Monday next.

The Council cannot allow this occasion to pass without expressing their
sense of the great services rendered to the Association by Dr. Hirst; but
they abstain from saying more, as they are unwilling to anticipate a more
mature expression on the part of the General Committee.

The Council have added the following names of gentlemen present at the
last Meeting of the Association to the list of Corresponding Members : —

Professor Van Beneden.

Dr. Crafts.

Dr. Anton Dohrn.

H. H. the Rajah of Kolapore,
M. Plateau.
Professor Tchebichef.

Governor Gilpin, Colorado.

The General Committee will remember that Brighton has already been
selected as the place of meeting next year. Livitations for subsequent
meetings have been received by your Council from Bradford, Belfast,
and Glasgow.

The Coimcil, lastly, recommend that the name of Professor Balfour be
added to the list of Vice-Presidents of the present Meeting.

1 REPORT 1871.

Report of the Kew Committee of the British Association for the
Advancement of Science for 1870-71.

The Committee of the Kew Observatory submit to the Council of the British
Association the follomng statement of their proceedings during the past
year : —

(A) WOEK BONT! BY KeW ObSEEVATORT UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE

British Association.

1. Magnetic ivorlc. — In their last Eeport the Committee stated the plan on
■which they proposed to reduce their Magnetic observations ; they now report
that with reference to the reduction of the Magnetic Disturbances from
January 1865 to December 1869, the period foUowing that which has already
been published, the discussion of Declination and Horizontal Force Disturb-
ances is nearly ready for presentation to the Eoyal Society, and that of the
Vertical Force is in progress ; when that is completed, the whole period, 1865
to 1869 inclusive, will have been discussed at Kew. The tabular statement,
which is herewith presented (see Appendix I.), exhibits the exact state of
the reduction.

Two Dipping-needles by Dover and one by Adie have been tested for Mr.
Chambers, Superintendent of the Colaba Observatory ; and one needle has
been procured from Dover and tested for Prof. JeUnek, of Vienna.

A Dip-circle by Dover has been verified and forwarded to Prof. Jelinek,
■who ordered it on behalf of the K. K. mUitiir-geograpliisches Institut.

Major-General Lefroy, Governor of Bermuda, having applied for the loan
of a Dip-circle, one has now been prepared for his use, and will be forwarded
to Bermuda as soon as possible. A Dip-circle has been obtained from Dover,
and, after verification, ^vill be forwarded to the Survey Department, Lisbon.

At the request of Prof. Jelinek the Committee have undertaken to examine
a Dip-circle by Eepsold. It is of a large size and has eight needles, but Prof.
Jelinek reports that the results obtained by them are very discordant.

Copies of certain specified maguetograph curves have been made and for-
warded to the late Sir J. Herschel, M. DiamiUa Miiller, of Florence, and Senhor
CapeUo, of Lisbon, at the request of those gentlemen.

The usual monthly absolute determinations of the magnetic elements con-
tinue to be made by Mr. "\Miipple, the Magnetic Assistant.

The Self-recording Magnetographs are in constant operation as heretofore,
also nuder his charge.

2. Meteorological ivorh. — The meteorological work of the Observatory
continues in the charge of Mr. Baker.

Since the Liverpool Meeting, 113 Barometers (including 17 Aneroids) have
been verified, and 2 rejected ; 1320 Thermometers and 215 Hydrometers have
like^wise been verified.

Two Standard Thermometers have been constructed for Owens College,
Manchester, one for the Bugby School, one each for Profs. Harkness and
Eastmanu, of the Washington Observatory, four for Dr. Draper, of the New
York Central Park Observatory, one for Major Norton, of the Chief Signal
Office, "Washington, one for Mr. G. J. Symons, and three for the Meteorolo-
gical Committee.

Three Thermograph Thermometers have been examined for Mr. Chambers,
of the Colaba Observatory, and three for the Meteorological Committee.

REPORT OF THE KEW COMMITTEE. li

Two Standard Barometers have been purchased from Adie, and tested at
Kew, one of which has becu forwarded to the Chief Signal Office, Washington,
and the other to Prof. Jack, of Fredricton, New Brunswick.

Tubes for the construction of a Welsh's Standard Barometer on the Kew
pattern, together with the necessary metal mountings, and a Cathetometer,
have been made under the superintendence of the Committee for the Chief
Signal Office, Washington.

The Committee have likewise superintended the purchase of meteorological
instruments for Owens College, Manchester, and for the ObseiTatory attached
to the University of Fredricton, New Brunswick.

The Kew Standard Thermometer (M. S. A.), divided arbitrarily by the late
Mr. Welsh, and employed for many years past as the standard of reference
in the testing of thermometers, was accidentally broken on the 3rd of January.
Since then a Kew Standard, of the ordinary construction, made in 1866, and
which had been compared on several occasions with M. S. A., has been used
to replace it.

Copies of some of the meteorological observations made at Kew during the
years 1869 and 1870 have been supplied to the ^Institution of Mining
Engineers at Newcastle-upon-Tyne, and the Editor of Whitaker's Almanac,
the cost of the extraction being paid by the applicants in both instances.

A set of self-recording meteorological instruments, the property of the
Meteorological Committee, have been erected in the Verification-house, and
are now undergoing examination.';'

The self-recording metereological instruments now in work at Kew will be
again mentioned in the second division of this Eeport. These are in the
charge of Mr. Baker.

3. PhotoJieJiocjraph.—Thc Kew Heliograph, in charge of Mr. Warren De
La Rue, continues to be worked in a satisfactory manner. During the past
year 362 pictures have been taken on 205 days. The prints from the
negatives alluded to in last Report have been taken to date, and the printing
of these has become part of the current work of the estabHshment. A paper
by Messrs. Warren De La Rue, Stewart, and Loewy, embodying the position
and areas of sim-groups observed at Kew during the years 1864, 1865, and
1866, as well as fortnightly values of the spotted solar area from 1832 to
1868, has been published in the Philosophical Transactions, and distributed
to those interested in solar research. A Table exhibiting the number of
sun -spots recorded at Kew during the year 1870, after the manner of
Hofrath Schwabe, has been communicated to the Astronomical Society, and
published in their ' Monthly Notices.'

An apparatiis is being constructed under the direction and at the expense
of Mr. Warren De La Rue, and it will shortly be erected on the Pagoda in
Kew Gardens, in order to be employed in obtaining corrections for optical
distortion in the heliographical measurements.

4. Miscellaneous ivorl: — Experiments are being made on the heat produced
by the rotation of a disk in vacuo.

A daily observation has been made with the Rigid Spectroscope, the
property of Mr. J. P. Gassiot.

Observations have been made with two of Hodgkinson's Actinometers,
the property of the Royal Society, in order to compare them with the
Actinometers deposited at the Observatory, for reference, before forwarding
them to India.

The Committee have siiperintended the purchase of optical apparatus,
chemicals, &c. for the Observatories at Coimbra and Lisbon.

lii REPORT — 1871.

An invoiitory lias licoii iiiiule of the apparatus, instruments, &c. at present
deposited in the Observator}', and forms Appendix III. of the present llepoi+.

In Appendix II. a list is given of the books at present in the Obsei'va-
tory, the property of the British Association.

List B (Appendix II.) is a rough inventory of books, the property of the
British Association, which have been transferred from the Observatory to the
rooms of the Association in London for the purpose of being catalogued.

(B) Work D02fE at Kew as the Centrai Obseevatoet op the
Meteokological Committee.

1. Work done at Keiv as one of the Observatories of the 2Ieteorolof/tcal Com-
mittee.— The Barograph, Thermograph, Anemograph, and Rain-gauge arc
kept in constant operation. Mr. Baker is in charge of these instruments.

From the first two instruments traces in duplicate are obtained, one set being
sent to the Meteorological Office and one retained at Kew. As regards the
Anemograph and llain-gaugc, the original records are sent, while a copy by
hand of tlicse on tracing-paper is retained. The tabulations from the curves
of the Ivew instruments are made by Messrs. Page and lligby.

2. Verification of Records. — The system of checks devised by the Kew
Committee for testing the accuracy of the observations made at the different
Observatories continues to be followed, as well as the ruling of zero lines in
the Barograms and Thermograms suggested b}' the Meteorological Office.
Messrs. Bigby and Page perform this work, 3Ir. Baker, Meteorological
Assistant, having the general supei-intendence of the department.

3. Occasional Assistance. — The Meteorological Committee have availed
themselves of the permission to have the occasional services of Mr. Beckley,
Mechanical Assistant at Xew ; and he has lately been visiting the various
Observatories of the Meteorological Committee.

The self-recording Eain-gauge, as mentioned in the last Heport, has been
adopted by the ileteorological Committee, and instruments of this kind have
been constructed for the various Observatories.

A series of comparative observations was commenced in April 1870 of
two Anemometers erected in the grounds attached to the Observatory,
in order to compare the indications of a large and small instrument ; but as
a discussion of the result showed them to have been greatly affected by the
influence of the neighbouring buildings, the instruments were dismounted
in January last and re-erected in an open part of the Park, at a distance
from the Obscrvatorj-. Three months' observations were made in this posi-
tion, and as these proved satisfactory, the instruments have been dismounted.
The cost of this experiment has been defrayed by the Meteorological
Committee. Owing to his duties in Manchester, and to a railway accident.
Dr. Stewart has not been able during the last j'car to devote much time
to the Observatory. During his absence his most pressing duties were dis-
charged by Mr. "Whipple in an efficient manner.

The Obsei-vatorj- was honoured on the 9th of July b}' a 'vnsit from the
Emperor and Empi-ess of Brazil. Their Majesties were received, on behalf
of the Committee, by Sir E. Sabine and Mr. W. De La Rue.

In the unavoidable absence, through illness, of Dr. Balfour Stewart, the
Emperor was conducted over the Observatory by the above-named gentlemen,
and the various instruments &c. were explained by Mr. Whipple and the
other members of the staff of the Observatory.

REPORT OF THE KEW COMMITTEE.

liii

APPENDIX I.

Tabular statement showing state of Magnetic Ecductions at the present date.

Hourly Tabulations from
Traces.

Correct
Monthly

Disturb-
ances ex-
cluded and

Lunar
Diurnal

Variation

Tables of

Secular and

Annual

Solar

Diurnal

Variation

By Tabula-
tor.

By Subsidiary
Scale.

Means.

aggregated.'

Tables.

Variation.

Tables.

('1865

1865

1865

1865

1865

1865

1865

o

1866

1866

1866

1866

1860

. 1866

1866

•^

1867

1867

1867

1867

1867

1867

1867

.2 "^

1868

1868

1868

1868

1868

1868

1868

g

1869

1869

1869

18G9

1869

1869

1869

P

[l870

1870*

n865

1865

1865

1865

18G5

C3

1866

1866

1866

1866

1866

° P J

1867

1867

1867

1867

1867

1868

1868

1868

1868

1868

1869
^1870

1869

1869

1869

1869

J-H

1870*

a865

1865

1865

<-H

1866

1866

1866

o g

1867

1867

1867

^c£l

1868

1868

1868

t>f^

1869
J870

1869
1870*

1869

* The reduction of the tabulations for the year 1870 is being performed in Sir E. Sabine's
office.

Arrears of Work.

Hourly Tabulations from
Traces.

Correct

Monthly

Disturb-
ances ex-
cluded and

Lunar

Diurnal

Variation

Tables of

Secular and
Ajinual

Solar
Diurnal
Variation

By Tabula-
tor.

By Subsidiary
Scale.

Means.

aggregated.

Tables.

Variation.

Tables.

n858

1858

1858

1858

185St

1858t

1858t

fl

1859

1859

1859

1859

18591

18.59t

18.59t

1860

1860

1860

1860

1860t

1860t

1860t

C -1

1861

1861

1861

1861

lS61t

1861t

18011-

1862

1862

1862

1862

1862t

1862t

1862t

1863

1863

1863

1863

1,1864

1864

1864

1864

1^1858

1858

1858

1858

>-H

1859

18.59

1859

^.^

1860

1860

1860

°s

1861

1801

1861

1861

-?^

1862

1862

1862

1862

^

1863

1863

1863

1863

1863

^1864

1804

1864

1804

1804

o ^1858

1858

se

1859

1859

^

1860

1860

1860

^ ^

1861

1861

1861

O

1862

1862

•.••<•

1862

t,

1863

1863

1863

>

1864

1864

1864

1871.

t These have been already published by Sir E. Sabine.

liv REPORT 1871.

APPENDIX II.

BOOKS AT PRESENT IN THE KEW OBSERVATOEY,

THE PEOPEBTT OF

THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION.

LIST A.

Books to he retained at Kew for reference.

Britisli Association Keports, 1 vol. for the following years : —
1831-32, 1833, 1834, 1835, 1836, 1837, 1838, 1839,
1840, 1841, 1842, 1843, 1844, 1845, 1846, 1847,
1848, 1849, 1850, 1851, 1852, 1853, 1854, 1855,
1856, 1857, 1858, 1859, 1860, 1861, 1862, 1863,
1864, 1865, 1866, 1867, 1868, 1869.-

Philosophical Transactions 88 vols.

„ ,, (Abstracts) 6 „

Proceedings of the lloyal Society 12 „

Royal Society Catalogue of Scientific Papers 4 „

Philosophical Magazine (half-yearly) 21 „

» „ (unbound) 11 parts.

Logarithmic Tables (various) 6 vols.

Royal Astronomical Society's Proceedings 13

Buchan's Meteorology 2

Dalton's „ 1

Kaemtz's ,, , 1

Meteorological Papers 27 nos.

Meteorology of England 18 nos.

Papers relating to the Meteorological Department of the

Board of Trade 39 „

Instructions for taking Meteorological Observations (Col,

James) 1 vol.

Quarterly "Wuatner Reports 3 vols.

British Almanac 2 „

Deviations of the Compass (Evana) 2 „

»
»

REPORT OF THE KEW COMMITTEE. Iv

Miller's Elements of Chemistry 2 vols.

WiUiamson's Chemistry for Students 1 vol.

Elements of Chemistry (Sir E. Kane) 1 ,,

Mathematics (Royal Military Academy Course) 2 vols.

Euler's Letters on Mathematics and Physics 4 ,,

Barlow on Magnetic Attraction 1 vol.

Treatise on Electricity (De La Eive) 3 vols.

"Woodhouse's Astronomy 1 vol.

The Heavens (Guillemin, edited by Norman Lockyer) . . 1 „

Art of Photography (Lake Price) 1 „

Meteorological Tables, Smithsonian (Guyot) 1 „

Treatise on Mathematical Instruments (Heather) 1 „

Sabine's Pendulum and other Experiments 2 vols.

Chauvenet's Astronomy 2 „

Timbs's Year-Book of Facts, 1861-1871 11 „

Taylor's Scientific Memoirs 2 „

Manual of Surveying for India, by Capts. Smythe and

ThmUier 1 vol.

Nichol's Cyclopaedia of Physical Science 1

Admiralty Manual of Scientific Enquiry 1

Dictionary of Terms of Art (Weale) 1

Magnetic and Meteorological Observations at : —

St. Helena 3 vols

Toronto 5

Hobarton 5 „

Cape of Good Hope 1 vol

Observations during Magnetic Disturbances, 1840-1841 . . 1 „
Magnetic and Meteorological Observations, Unusual Dis-
turbances . , 1

j>

5>

»

Plates to Magnetic and Meteorological Observations .... 1 ,,

Report of the Astronomer Royal to the Board of Visitors . . 40 nos.

Theory of Errors of Observations, by Airy 1 vol.

Todhimter's Conic Sections 1 „

Distribution of Heat (Dove) 1 „

Optics (Potter) 1 „

Camus on the Teeth of Wheels 1 „

Simmonds's Meteorological Tables 1 „

Observations of Sun-spots (Carrington) 1

Newton's Principia 1

Symons's British Rainfall and Meteorological Magazine . .

Experiences sur les Machines a Vapeur (Regnault) .... 2

Cours Elementaii'e de Chimie (Regnault) 4

J5

»

e2

J>

J)

»

>)

JJ

J?

5)

J>

?)

)>

3?

>J

>>

JJ

J5

»

5>

>J

J>

J>

»

5>

J?

5>

5>

JJ

Ivi KEFORT ]871.

LIST B.

Bools to he sent to tJte London Office, 22 Albemarle Street.

British Association Report, 1831-32 20 vols.

1833 20

1834 20

1835 20

1836 20

1837 20

1838 20

1839 20

1840 20

1841 20

1842 20

1843 20

1844 20

1845 20

1846 20

1847 39

1848 19

1849 19

1850 18

1851 19

1852 20

1853 21

1854 21

1855 22

1856 23

1857 22

1858 22

1859 22

1860 22

1861 22

1862 22

1863 22

1864 23

1865 22

1866 22

1867 92

1868 22

1869 ;; 22

Lalande's Catalogue (MS. Calculations) 96

" » (MS. copy) 3 ^^

La Place's Celestial Mechanics 1 yof,

Armagh, Places of Stars ' ' ' , 1

Eadcliffe Observatory Catalogue of Stars for 1845 '. '. ". ". '. '. 1

Paramatta Catalogue of 7358 Stars 1

Groombridge's Catalogue of Circumpolar Stars .......... 3 vo'L.

Edinburgh Astronomical Observations 4

Astronomical Observations at the Cape of Good Hope .. . . 1

>}

»

r.

>>

y>

)>

jj

REPORT or THE KEW COMMITTEE. Ivil

(MSS.) Apparent Places of Principal Stars 1 vol.

iJi-itish. Association Catalogue (MS. copy) 1 ,,

(MSS.) British Association Catalogue (Calculations) .... 24 vols.

(MSS.) British Association Catalogues, Synonyms and Notes 23 „

(MSS.) Lacaille's Catalogue (Calculations) 2-4 „

LacaiUe's Catalogue (MS. copy) 1 ,,

Proceedings of the Eoyal Institution of Great Britain .... 33 nos.

Ordnance Survey, Comparisons of Standards of Length . . 2 vols.

EadclifFe Observatory, Meteorological Observations .... 3 „

Makerstoun, Meteorological Observations and Tables .... 10 „

„ Abstracts of Meteorological Observations . . 3 ,,

Cambridge Observations 8 „

Playfair's Natural Philosophy 2 „

Bland's Algebraical Problems 1 „

Lectures on Quaternions (Sir W. Hamilton) 1 „

Meteorological and Nautical Observations at Melbourne

and Victoria 1 „

Mastery of Languages (Prendergast) 1 ,,

La Place's Analytical Mechanics 1 ,,

Levelling in England and Wales 1 „

„ „ (Abstract) 1 „

Levelling in Scotland 1 „

„ „ (Abstract) 1 ,,

Pasley on Measures, Weights, and Money 1 ,,

Cork Savings-bank Tables 1 ,,

Weld's History of the Royal Society 2 „

Bombay Magnetical and Meteorological Observations,

1845 3 „

Meteorological Results, Toronto 8 „

Greenwich Observations 52 ,,

„ „ (Appendices &.c.) 125 „

Catalogue of Reference, Manchester Free Library 1 ,,

Brisbane's Star Catalogue 2 ,,

Johnson and Henderson's Star Catalogue 2 „

(MSS.) Hartnup Star Catalogue 1 ,,

Mayer's Star Catalogue 1 „

Wrottesley's Star Catalogue 1 „

Taylor's „ „ 8 ,,

Everest's Survey of India 2 ,,

Ordnance Survey C ,,

Extension of Triangulation into Belgium and France .... 2 ,,

Yerification and Extension of Lacaille's Arc of Meridian . . 2 ,,

Schlagintweit's India and Hi^li Asia 2 „

Proceedings of Institution of Mechanical Engineers .... 8 ,,

„ „ „ 70 nos.

Modern Geology Exposed 1 vol.

Melbourne Magnetic and Meteorological Observations ... 3 vols.

Extracts from the Great Trigonometrical Survey of India 5 „

Madras Meteorological Observations 2 „

Sydney „ „ 38 nos.

Calcutta Hourly Meteorological Observations '/ ,,

Bengal Meteorological Reports 5 ,,

Iviii REPORT — 1871.

Statistics of New Zealand 9 nos

Tide Tables for English and Irish Ports •.••.•■•• "*

Reports and Transactions of the Devonshire As ociation . . 3 vols

Annual Reports of the Royal Polytechnic Society _ 17

Transactions of the Historic Society of Lancashire and

Cheshire 17

Transactions of the Royal Scottish Society of Arts 10

Results of Trials on H.M. Ships 5

Trigonometrical Survey of England and Wales 3

Determination of Longitudes of England and Wales .... 2

La Place's Mathematical Works 6

Lagrange's „ „ 6

Euler's Mathematical Works 4

Simpson's „ „ 2

Dupin's „ „ 1 vol

Carnot's „ „ 1

Shipbuilding, by Rankine 1

Dublin Mag-netical and Meteorological Observations .... 1

Maxima and Minima (Ramchundi'a) 1

Meteorological Results Toronto, 1862 1

Army Meteorological Register 1

Mathematical Tracts from Library of the late Mr. Christio
Magnetical and Meteorological Observations at Lake

Athabasca.
Sundries (English Pamphlets).

U, S. Coasts Survey, Report of Superintendent 25 vols.

Annals of the Dudley Observatory 4 „

Transactions of the Albany Institute 5 „

Proceedings of the American Geological and Statistical

Society 10 >,

Reports of the National Academy of Sciences 5 „

Documents of the U. S. Sanitary Commission o „

State Transactions of the Historic Society of Wisconsin . . G „

Report of Geological Reconnaisance of Arkansas 2 ,,

Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History .... 45 „
„ of the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science 12 „

Monthly Report of the Commissioners of the Revenue of

U. S. A 5 „

Proceedings of the American Academy of Ai-ts and

Sciences 20 ,,

Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 50 „

Papers relating to Harvard College 60 „

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Phila-
delphia 71 „

Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections 20 „

„ Contributions to Knowledge 26 „

Memoirs of the American Academy 9 „

Washington Astronomical and Meteorological Obsei-va-

tions 9 „

Maury's Sailing Directions 3 „

Transactions of the American Philosophical Society .... 0 „

REPORT OF THE KEW COMMITTEE. lix

Sundry Volumes (various subjects) 16 vols.

Smithsoman Keports 22 ,,

Explorations and Surveys, Senate, U. S. A 4 ,,

Reports of the Department of Agriculture, U. S. A 8 „

Geology of Iowa 2 „

Catalogue, Army Medical Museum, U. S. A 1 „

Sundries. (American Pamphlets.)

Bulletin de la Societe de Geographie 42 „

J, 34 nos.

Memoires de I'Academie de Dijon 13 vols.

Bulletin de la Federation de la Societe de Horticulture de

Belgique 9 »

Actes de la Societe Helvetique 7 „

Memoires de I'Academie Royale de Metz 3 ,,

Resume Meteorologique pour Geneve and Le Grand St.

Bernard 6 „

Extraits de I'Academie Royale de BruxeUes 10 nos.

Bulletin de la Societe Vaudoise 4 „

Memoires de la Societe des Sciences 7 „

Revues des Cours Scientifiques 19 ,,

PanheUenium 20 ,,

Quetelet sur le Climat de la Belgique 7 „

Extraits de I'Academie de Belgique 54 „

Commission Hydrometrique de Lyon 16 „

Bulletin de I'Association Scientifique de France 140 „

Memoires de I'Academie des Sciences et Lettres de Mont-

pellier 5 „

Atlas Meteorologiquo de I'Observatoire Imperial, 1866-

1869 4 „

La Belgique Horticole 6 „

Compte Rendu Annuel 15 vols.

Annales de I'Observatoire Physique Central (Russia) .... 35 „

Annuaire Magnetique et Mcteorologique (Russia) 4 „

Annuaire Mcteorologique de Franco 7 „

Cosmos 4 ,,

Les Mondes, 1863-70 8 „

Tables de la Lune, par Hanseen 1 vol.

Traite de Calcul Differential, par Lubbe 1 ,,

Histoire Celeste, par Lalande 1 no.

Sundries. (French Pamphlets.)

Oversigt over det K. D. V. Sclskabs af Forchhammcr . ... 33 ,,

Videnskabernes Selskabs Skriftcr 6 vols.

Sundries. (Dutch Pamphlets.)
Archives Neerlaudaises.

Meteorologische Waarnerningen 30 „

Helsingfors Magnetical and Meteorological Observations . . 6 „

Acta Societatis Scientiarum Fennicae 8 „

„ „ Indo-Neerlandsch 7 „

Norsk if eteorologisk Aarbog _ 4 „

Meteorologische Jagttagelser paa Christiania Observa-

torium 6 „

>5

>}

J>

Ix EEPOKT — 1871.

Meteorologisclie Eeobachtungen Aiifgezeiclmct auf Chris-

tiaiiia Observatorium 3 vols.

Beretning om en Botauisk Eeise af H. L. Lorensen 6 „

Judex Scholarum iu Uiiiversitate Christiaiiia IS „

Sundries. (Norwegian Pamphlets.)

Sitzungsberichte der Mathematisch N'aturwissenschaftliche

Classe der Akademie der AVisseuschaften 280

Sitzungsberichte der K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften 78
Mittheilungen der Naturforschenden GeseUschaft iu Bern 11 „
Monatsberichte der K. P. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu

BerHn 80 „

Annalen fiir Meteorologie und Erdmagnetismus 6 „

Beobachtungen Meteorologische an der Wiener Stem-

warte 22

Yerhandlungen der AUgemeinen Sehweizerischen GeseU-
schaft der Naturwissenschaften 16

Zeitschrift der Osterreichischen GeseUschaft fiir Mete-
orologie 130

Eeise der Osterreichischen Frigatte Novara, Magnetische

Beobachtungen 3 „

Magnetische Beobachtungen in Wien 4 „

Tageblatt der 32 Yersammlung der N. "NY. A. in "VYien,

1856 9 „

Jahrbucher der K.-K. Central Anstalt fiir Meteorologie und
Erdmagnetismus in Wieu. 1856-1859, 1 of each,

1:866-1869, 2 of each 10 nos,

Det KongeUge Norske XJniversitets Aarberetunger, 1856

to 1858 8 vols.

Travaux de la Commission pour fixer les mesures ct les

poids de I'Emptre de Russic 3 „

Abhandlungen der Math-Physikal Classe der K. B. Aka-
demie dor Wissenschaften 4 „

Bulletin der Akademie der Wissenschaften der Miinchen. 47 „
Sundries. (German Pamphlets.)

Annaes do Observatorio do Infante D. Luiz 46 „

Trabalhos „ „ 5 ,,

Memoires de Academie Beale de Sciences de Lisboa .... 8 ,,

Annaes da Academia das Sciencias Lisboa 12 „

Coimbra, Observacoes Metcorologicas 21 „

Sundries. (Portuguese Pamphlets.)

Russian Nautical Magazine 63 „

Harmonia Mcnsuram.

^l^ldes HartweUiauffi 1 vol.

Speculum HartweUianum 1

Diverse Machine (EameUi) 1

Memorie dell' I. R. Istituto Lombardo .5 vols.

Memorie deUa Societa Italiana dellc Scienzc 5 „

Momorie dell' Osservatorio del CoUegio Romano 10 ,,

}}

Memorie del Rcale Istituto Lombardo 41

Atti dell' Accademia Pontificia de' Nuovi Lincei 90

Atti del Reale Istituto Lombardo 29

j>

REPORT OF THE KEW COMMITTi E.

Ixi

A< ti della Reale Accaclemia delle Scienze di Napoli 7 vols.

JJuUetino Meteorologico dell' Osservatorio del CoUegio

Romano 9 „

Giornale dell' I. R. Istitiito Lombardo 44 „

Rendiconti del Reale Istituto Lombardo 112 „

Sundries. (Italian Pamphlets.)

APPENDIX III.

luventory of Apparatus and Instruments at present in the Kew
Observatoiy, with the names of Owners O]- Funds by which
they were purchased. May 1871.

[Abbreviations adopted in col. 2 : — Brit. Assoc, for British Assciciation ; Don. Fund for
Donation Fund ; Gov. Grant for Government Grant Fund ; Met. Com. for Meteoro-
logical Committee ; Par. Ex. Fund for Paris Exhibition Fund ; Eoy. Ast. Soc. for
Boyal Astronomical Society ; Eoyal Soc. for Eoyal Society.]

Entrance Hall. Property of, or

Purchased by,

Bird's Mercurial Thermometer Royal Soc.

Captain Kater's Hygrometer, by Robinson „

Dr. Lind's Portable Wind Gauge „

Huygens's Aerial Telescope (twelve parts) „

Huygens's Object-glass „

Huygens's Object-glass, with two Eye-glasses by]

Scarlet J "

Plamsteed's Object-glass (Venetian) „

Dollond's 42-inch Transit, with a cast-iron stand . . „

Short's 36-inch Reflecting Telescope, with an Object- 1

glass Micrometer by DoUond (nine parts) j" "

Kater's Convertible Pendulum, with the Agate Planes „

Captain Sabine's Cylindrical Pendulum, vibrating on ]

Planes ; with the Knife-edges J" "

Apparatus, with Leaden Balls, by Paull of Geneva]

(ten parts) J" "

Nairne and Bluut's 12-inch Dipping N^eedle (two 1

parts) J "

A 12-inch Yariation Needle ,,

Dr. Godwin Knight's Battery of Magnets ,,

Air-Pump, with Double Barrel ,,

Nairne's Air Condenser (three parts) „

Ramsden's Great Theodolite, with other Instruments '

and Apparatus employed by Major-General Roy in

the Trigonometrical Survey (sixty-six parts, in four

cases), incomplete

Ixii I REPORT — 1871.

Gary's Large Levelliijig Instrument (twenty-one parts) Eoyal Soc.
Troughton and Simmis's Large Levelling Instrument "1

(twenty parts) J "

Adams's 5-incli Tlieodolite (two parts) „

Bowles's Trigonometer (four parts) „

Trougbton's Repeating Circle, of 1 foot diameter . . „

Eamsden's 10-inch Protractor, with. Yeruier to 1' . . „

Bird's 12-inch. Astronomical Quadrant (fifteen parts) „

Fordyce's Hydrometer „

Cole's Orrery, explanatory of Eclipses „

Two Miner's Compasses „

Armed Loadstone „

Le Cerf's Brass Instrument „

Curious Steel Callipers for very accurate measure- "I

ment, by Paull of Geneva : 1777 J

Eowning's Universal Constructor of Equations .... „

Chronometer Stove, for ascertaining the Influence of "1

Temperature on the Bate of Chronometers (six V „

parts) J

Wedgewood's Pyrometer ; or Thermometer for mea- 1

suring high degrees of heat (sixty-six parts) .... J "

Two strong Brass PuUeys ,,

Bird's 4-feet Eofracting Telescope „

Dicas's Hydrometer „

Hadley's Metal for a Newtonian Eeflcctor, with l

several wooden Eyepieces, but without Tube or >■ „

Mounting J

Troughton and Siinms's 6-inch Circular Protractor. . „

Baily's Pendulum, No. 2 Eoy. Ast. Soc.

Standard "Wrought-iron bar used in Mallet's Expo- 1 -n -i. a

riments, 1838-1842 | ^"'^- ^^'°''-

Observing Telescope used by Schlagintweit.

Experimental Tubes employed in the construction of ] p, p ,

"Welsh's Standard Barometers J

Six 39-inch GlasB Slabs.

Sixty Lamp Chimneys Brit. Assoc.

Eight 14-inch Magnets.

Sundry Lamps, Plate Boxes, Daguerotypes and Ap- I

paratus employed with Eonalds's Self-recording v Donat. Fund.

Barograph and Magnetograph J

Sundry Chemical Apparatus used with Addams's Car- 1 p p ,

bonic acid Gas Generators J

Three large Magnetometers with Marble Slabs, Pil-
lars, Eeading Telescopes, &c.
Two Thermometer Testing -jars (damaged). ....... Brit. Assoc.

Two 6-uich Bull's-eye Lenses.

Sir W. Thomson's Portable Atmospheric Electro- \ Prof. Sir W.

meter j Thomson.

Sir "W. Thomsonis Eecording Atmospheric Electro- 1

meter J J "

Various pieces of Electrical Apparatus SirF.Eonalds.

Sundry Lenses,

)}

REPORT OV THE KEW COMMITTEE. Ixiii

Galton's Dial Anemometer, with Battery, &c Met. Com.

Artificial Horizon Sir E. Sabine.

Heliostats and Reflectors used in Mr. Galton's Sex- ^ r< „ o

tant Testing Apparatus : J ° '

Apparatus for Trisecting an Arc.

Saussure's Hygrometer SirF.Eonalds.

Seven-inch Protractor, by Jones.

Marine Barometer.

Two Patent Compensated Barometers, by Harris.

One 30-inch Steel Bar.

Two EJriel's SeLf-reeording Barometers, with Spare 1 -n ,-i. a

Tubes J ^^ ■ ^^ ^'

Tube of Ronalds's Photo-barograph Gov. Grant.

Glass Receiver (damaged).

Model of Sheerness Tide-gauge Royal Soc.

Mallet's Model of the Descent of Glaciers.
Several Models, not named.

Appold's Automatic Hygrometer Royal Soc.

Appold's Automatic Temperature Regidator „

Lindley's Patent Central Thermometer.
Lindley's Model of Fire Escape.

Perspective Instrument SirF.Eonalds.

Barrow's Dip Circle, No Sir E. Sabine,

Robinson's 6-inch Circle

Two Unifilars and a Declinometer, by Gibson

Seven Tripods „

Balance of Torsion.
A "Watchman's Clock.

Oertling's Balance Gov. Grant.

Two Aspirators

Wooden Wind-pressure Gauge

Altazimuth, by Cary Sir E. Sabine.

Ronalds's Atmospheric Electrical Apparatiis Gov. Grant.

Model of Mr. De La Rue's Tower for supx)orting

Huyghen's Aerial Telescope-lenses Par.Ex.Fuud.

Model of a design for Photohehograph Mounting . . Brit. Assoc.
Leyden Jars Mr. Gassiot.

Testing Room.

Six frames exhibiting Kew and Lisbon Magnetic 1 t. -i. *
^ ° ? Brit. Assoc.

Curves j

Two Welsh's Standard Barometers Gov. Grant.

Cathetometer „

Receiver for testing Barometers, with Air-Pump, (fee. ,,

Apparatus for testing Thermometers „

Newman's Standard Barometer, No. 34 „

Brass Mural Quadrant Observatory.

Spare Tubes for Standard Barometer construction . . Gov. Grant.

Thomson's Galvanometer and Apparatus employed by 1

Dr. Stewart in Rotating Disk experiments J

Siemens's Air-Pump

Sprengel's Air-Pump

>j

j>

»

>y

Ixiv REPORT 18/1.

Parts of Eonalds's ilagnetographs Gov. Grant.

Air-Thermometer (incomplete)

MSS., Books, Papers, Documents, and Correspondence
referring to Meteorological work.

Trcoisit Room.

Thermometer-waxing Apparatus Brit. Assoc.

Photographic Paper "Waxing Apparatus „

Thomson's Atmospheric Eecording Electrometer . . Met. Com.

Thermograph ,,

Chronometer, Arnold Gov. Grant.

Invariable Pendulum Eoyal Soc.

Pendulum, No. 8 „

Dip Circle, by Jordan Sir E. Sabine.

Declinometer, by Eobinson and Barrow „

Eive Daniell's Hygrometers

Four Declinometers (various makers)

Artificial Horizon

Eour Thermometers

Three Herschel's Actinometers

10-inch Azimuth Compass

Vertical Force Magnetometer „

Standard Yard „

Three Dip Circles and one Fox's Circle „

Several old Observing Telescopes and incomplete ]

Magnetic Apparatus J "

Photograi)hic Paper, waxed and unwaxed Brit. Assoc.

Sundry Bottles, Chemicals, and Apparatus employed

in the ordinary work of the Observatory „

Computing Room.

Dividing Engine by Perreaux, and Apparatus em- 1

ployed in the construction of Standard Thermo- I Gov. Grant,
meters J

Standard Thermometers, divided and undivided .... Brit. Assoc.

Evaporation Gauge (exhibited at Paris) Par.Ex.Fund,

Portable Barometer, by Newman Sir E. Sabine.

Gay-Lussac Barometer, by Bunter.

Troughton and Simms's Mercurial Standard Ther- "I -^ , ^
mometer J ^

Newman's Spirit Thermometer for very low Tempe-
ratures

Jones's Hygrometer

Set of Bar Magnets (six) „

Pair of Levelling Staves, by Jones „

Sundry old Thermometers.

Thermometer, by Greiner Sir E. Sabine.

Dry and Wet Thermometer, from Hobarton.

Thermometer, No. 2, from Greenwich Observatory.

Actinometer Tube P^,^' ^- ^""^S-

kinson.

{

>)

}>

REPORT OF THE KEW COMMITTEE. IxV

Actinometer Tube Royal Soc.

Two Actinometers j , ." ' °'

Three Actinometers Eoyal Soc.

Ten Hydrometers.

Spirit-level used in Pendulum experiments Gov. Grant.

Small Boiling-point Apparatus Par.Ex.Eund.

Two Mountain Thermometers.

One Regnault's Hygrometer Gov. Grant.

One Daniell's Hygrometer.

Several Declinometers, by various makers Sir E. Sabine.

Several TJnifilars, by various makers

Several Dip Circles, by various makers

Two Altazimuth Instruments Admii'alty.

Eepeating Circle, by Dollond Sir E. Sabine.

Vertical Force Magnetometer

Sundry Magnets, Dip Needles, Magnet Fittings, In- "1

ertia Bars, Eiugs, &c., belonging to various instru- > „

ments J

Magnets and Needles in use at the Observatory. ... ,,

Standard Yard Gov. Grant.

Standard Weights „

Jars and Standard Solutions used in Hydrometer-
testing' Brit. Assoc.

Chemicals and Chemical Apparatus used in the Ob- 1

servatory J "

Apparatus employed by Prof. Clerk Maxwell.

Telescope support, by Goloz Koyal Soc.

Several Tripods

Surveying Rods

6-inch Globe ,,

Model of Hydraulic Anemometer Mr. Galton.

Several Rules and Scales in use Brit. Assoc.

Box of Ozonometer Papers.

Magnetograph Curves Brit. Assoc.

Magnetic Observation-books „

MS. Papers of Magnetic Reductions „

MS. Papers on various subjects „

Surplus copies of Publications issued by Observatory | '^^■-f ° ^ ^^^
"Wood Engravings of Magnetograph Drawings .... Brit. Assoc.

SoutJi Hall.

Cooke's Sextant Testing Apparatus Gov. Grant.

Shelton's Astronomical Regulator, with Gridiron Pen- 1 -r, , „

dulum j ^oy^l S°<'-

Gas Governors and Regulators Don. Fund.

Magnetograph Room.

Magnetographs Gov. Grant.

Earthenware Stove Brit. Assoc.

Ixvi REPORT — 1871.

Deflecting Apparatus Brit. Assoc.

Barograph Met. Com.

Eigid Spectroscope Mr. Gassiot.

Pendulum Room.

Vacuum Chamber and Vibrating Apparatus Admiralty.

Observing Telescope „

Shelton's Astronomical Eegulator Eoyal Soc.

Transit House.

Portable Transit Instrument Sir E. Sabine.

Apparatus for determining Scale value of Levels . . Mr. Adie.

Lower PliotograpMc Room.

Baths, Dishes, Bottles, and Chemical Apparatus .... Gov. Grant.

Chemicals and Paper Brit. Assoc.

Printing Frames „

Meteorological Room.

Globe Brit. Assoc.

Barograph, Thermograph, and Anemograph Curves . . Met. Com.

Ditto (duplicates) Brit. Assoc.

Tabulations of ditto (duplicates).

Scales, Eules, &c., employed in tabulating Curves . . Met. Com.

Post Cases, MSS. and Documents in connexion with 1

the Meteorological Committee's work J "

Working Drawings of Instruments.

Observatory Correspondence.

Furniture and Fittings Met. Com.

Sun Room,

Sun Pictures (Negatives) Gov. Grant.

Sun Pictures (Prints) „

Thirty-seven Vols. Schwabe's Observations (MSS.) . . Eoy. Ast. Soc.

Sundry Papers connected with Solar Eesearch.

Sundry Volumes of Kew Electrical and Meteoro-
logical Observations (MSS.).

Surplus Lithographed and Engraved copies of Kew 1 p p .
Magnetic Curves / ^°^- ^^^^'

Photo-galvanographed Plates of Curves, by Paul 1

Pretsch J »

Spare Magnets for Magnetographs Mr. Adie.

One Magnetic Tabulator Brit. Assoc.

Two Magnetic Tabulators j ^^'^Q^ggYo^t'

Lofts.
Old Observing Clock.

Parts of old Electrical and Meteorological Apparatus Brit. Assoc.
Parts of old Eoyal Society Apparatus Eoyal Soc.

Solar Photographic Room.

Anemograph with Blank sheets Met. Com.

Baths, Dishes, Printing-frames, Bottles, Paper, Che-

REPORT OF THE KEW COMMITTEE. Ixvii

micals, Glass, &c., used in connexion with the Pho-
toheliograph Gov. Grant.

Dome.

Photoheliograph Don, Fund.

Eobinson's Registering Anemometer (dismounted) Brit. Assoc.

Roof.

Old Pressure Anemometer (incomplete) Brit. Assoc.

Old Rain-gauge (incomplete) „

Magnetic Ohsei'vaiory.

Declinometer! ci- -n ci i.-

DipCircles / SirE.&abiue.

Sundry Apparatus employed in Magnetic Determina- 1

tions J "

Stone Pillars „

Worlcshop (Sfo. 1).

Whitworth Lathe 1 -r.^^ t?„„j

T)i • T,r !-• > Don. fund.

Planing Machine J

Holtzapffel Lathe Sii'F.Ronalds.

Forge Don. Fund.

Forge Brit. Assoc.

Surfaces and Straight Edges Gov. Grant.

Grindstone Brit. Assoc.

Yices , „

Castings and Tools „

Worlcshoj) (No. 2).

Electro-magnet and Battery Sir E. Sabine.

Carbonic-acid Gas Generators Gov. Grant.

Ronalds's Barograph (incomplete) „

Gas-holder Mr. Atkinson.

Glass-blowing Table .

StiU

Sundry Packing-cases.

Glass-blowing Table Gov. Grant.

StiU

»

Enclosure.

Self-recording Rain-gauge Met. Com.

Rain-gauge (ordinary) . . , Brit. Assoc.

Two Dial Anemometers Met. Com.

Mowing Machine and sundry other Garden Tools . . Brit. Assoc.

Verification House.
Stone Pillars for erecting Self-recording Magneto- "1 -p. p ^ 1

graphs J

Self-recording Barograph, Thermograph, and Ane- \-\t ^ p ^

mograph (undergoiug examination) J

In the Custody of B. Loewy, Esq., 11 Leverton Street, N.W.
Mr. De La Rue's Micrometer for measuring Astronomical Photo-
graphs (in use for measuring the photographs obtained with
the heliograph).

Ixviii

EEPORT — 1871.

o«>.inoco-*-*«>. CO o

■^

CO C»3

•«
»

to

©MOMtOorttO

o-fl-cotocoin^o

V3

H

00 ^ J. -H to

,_ t; S t^ <U

- P o c^ S ■

-' — -m" =^2

. to rt tS X "
to c: o ^^ « »

o -E « = S o

-- "g 2 "S S

U o ^ <J 1) -J.

- a ^ o o "
I t « SO SO

S B S <" g ii
§•=«■= S

: 0--
5h«

"^ o t- "^

-H CO t^
. ■-' CO
to -rt

o 6 < t>,'^
o o-^

00 .2
'-' o .

. . in CO (^

O O r-i rH CO

SP£P« ?^

Da

■a

cT
to

■Si "
CO -*^

•a gCL.

-I =^

ea 0^ ;_

cj ^ c:
is « o

!^ c2 §

S s tc-B
=* 2 c c

C £ H CO

CU g 'C =3

■a; iti-o

=a

O)

. ^

OJ C GJ O

^ o

o -

«.?

c

t3 to —

X

w

<u o S

2 ?^^

r/1

3

Port
Met
Mag

O

w

cs S

tao

'3

3
13

pq

c» o o

to o o

in i-H

o

M
<M

CO

1-1 rH CO
tD r-i O

«0 (N O
0» 1-1 ■*

s

o

^§

(u o

s

Is

© 05

-* rH

in *>•

o

to'-'

O -13

•3 3

a a

o o

M 00 (>«
CO to rH
CO

3 <u

|i

s a

en Oj

£ -^

s

s

a; o

3
O

a

t05O

^ o .a c
o _ to o

_ 2 O 3

a o — c3

2'-i= £ ^
-»j S o o

CS g <u —

■2 " ""^

V O

t» o o

•^■^^
■^ -^ B

»-. »-i o

o o K

pH Pi- piH

• .2 a i S

, to a C5ti

I O 3 o ^
JO gO«

1 s § « -^

I -£5 <L> ^ «

iSo E 3

(4-1 ^ "^^ ■■

ai o o --

>- *^ «J 5-

rt " O rt

aj o " oj

o -go

a; ed
.S CO

' ! *£/)

'Ij to

o ^

3 **H

3 fC" OT

3 I*- QJ

3 to o

5:= £:

s g ^

00

Ph ^

o -^j

is

0.2
•« «

O £

ai S

o -o

-3 5

to u

•si

11'

a)

■■i a

3 O

<^

si

3

13

3

"3
.a

•53

c

00

T3

w

8

a

a

X

M

= ■3

"^ CO © 0

r-l

rH

J? (O OD 0

" rH rH

in

Cj 0 rH in

00

00

^

■■c

S

=rt

o bO

c c

03

««•§

RCOMMENDATIONS OF THE GENERAL COMMITTEE. Ixix

EBCOlIMEJfLATIONS ADOrXED BX THE GeNBRAL CoJIMIIIEE AT THE EDINBTJReH

Meeting in Axtgust 1871.

[When Committees are appointed, the Member first named is regarded as the Secretary,
except there is a specific nomination.]

That in future the division of the Section of Biology into the three Depart-
ments of Anatomy and Physiology, Anthropology, and Zoology and Botany
shall be recognized in the programme of the Association Meetings, and that
the President, two Vice-Presidents, and at least three )Secretaries shall be
nominated, and that the Yice-Presidents and Secretaries who shall take
charge of the organization of the several Departments shall be designated
respectively before the publication of such programme.

Dr. R. King's motion, " that a Subsection for Ethnology be formed," -s^as
rejected.

That the Apparatus, Instruments, «S;c. mentioned in Appendix III. of the
Eeport of the Kew Committee for the past year be transferred to the charge
of the Royal Society.

That the Electrical Apparatus belonging to the British Association, now in
possession of the Committee of Electrical Standards, be placed in the Physical
Laboratory of Cambridge, in charge of the Professor of Experimental Physics,
the apparatus remaining the property of the Association and at the disposal
of the Committee.

[For Regulations relating to Organizing Sectional Proceedings, vide p. xix.]

Recommendations Involving Grants of Money.

That the sum of .£300 be placed at the disposal of the Council for main-
taining the establishment of the Kew Observatory.

That Professor Cayley, Professor H. J. S. Smith, Professor Stokes, Sir "W.
Thomson, and Mr. J. W. L. Glaisher be a Committee for the purpose of re-
porting on Mathematical Tables, which it may be desirable to compute or
reprint ; that Mr. J. W. L. Glaisher be the Secretary, and that the sum of
e£50 be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Mr. Edward Crossley, Rev. T. W. Webb, and Rev. R. Harley be a
Committee for discussing Observations of Lunar Objects suspected of change ;
that i^lr. Crossley be the Secretary, and that the sum of .£20 be placed at
their disposal for the purpose.

That Professor Tait, Professor Tyndall, and Dr. Balfour Stewart be a
Committee for the purpose of investigating the Thermal Conductivity of
Metals ; that Professor Tait be the Secretary, and that the sum of £25 be
placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That the Committee on Tides, consisting of Sir "W. Thomson, Professor J. C.
Adams, Professor J. W. M. Rankine, Mr. J. Oldham, Rear-Admiral Richards,
and Mr.W. Parkes, be reappointed; that Colonel Walker, F.R.S., Superintendent
of the Trigonometrical Survey of India, be added to the Committee ; and that
the sum of £200 be placed at their disposal to defray the expenses of calcula-
tion during the ensuing year.

That the Committee for reporting on the Rainfall of the British Isles be
reappointed, and that this Committee consist of Mr. Charles Brooke, Mr.
Glaisher, Professor Phillips, Mr. G. J. Spnons, Mr. J. F. Bateman, Mr. R.
W. Mylne, Mr. T. Hawksley, Professor J. C- Adams, Mr. C. Tomlinson,

1871. /

IXX REPORT — 1871.

Professor Sylvester, Dr. Pole, Mr. Rogers Field, Professor Ansted, and Mr.
Buchan ; that Mr. G. J. Symons be the Secretary, and that the sum of £100
be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That a Committee on Underground Temperature, consisting of Sir William
Thomson, Professor Everett, Sir Charles Lyell, Bart., Professor J. Clerk
Maxwell, Professor Phillips, Mr. G. J. Symons, Professor Eamsay, Professor
Geikie, Mr. Glaisher, Eev. Dr. Graham, Mr. George Maw, Mr. Pengelly,
Mr. S. J. Mackie, Professor Edward Hull, and Professor Ansted, be apporuted ;
that Professor J. D. Everett be the Secretary, and that the sum of £100 be
placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That the Committee on Luminous Meteors, consisting of Mr. Glaisher,
Mr. R. P. Greg, Mr. Alexander Herschel, and Mr. C. Brooke, be reappointed,
and that the sum of =£20 be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Dr. Huggins, Mr. J. N. Lockyer, Dr. Reynolds, Professor Swan, and
Mr. Stoney be a Committee for the purpose of constructing and printing tables
of Inverse "Wave Lengths, Mr. Stoney to be reporter ; and that the sum of
£20 be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Professor A. W. Wniiamson, Professor Roscoe, and Professor Frank-
land be a Committee for the purpose of superintending the Monthly Reports
of the progress of Chemistry ; and that the sum of £100 be placed at their
disposal for the purpose.

Professor A. W. Williamson, Sir W. Thomson, Professor Clerk Maxwell,
Professor G. C. Foster, Mr. Abel, Professor Fleeming Jenkin, Mr. Siemens,
and Mr. R. Sabine, with power to add to their number, be a Committee for
the purpose of testing the N^ew Pyrometer of Mr. Siemens, by whom the
chief instrument will be supplied ; and that the sum of £30 be placed at
their disposal for the purpose.

That Dr. Gladstone, Dr. C. R. A. Wright, and Mr. Chandler Roberts be a
Committee for the purpose of investigating the chemical constitution and
optical properties of essential oils, such as are used for perfumes ; that Mr.
Chandler Roberts be the Secretary, and that the sum of £40 be placed at
their disposal for the purpose.

That the Committee, consisting of Professor Crum Brown, Professor Tait,
and Mr. Dewar, be reappointed for the purpose of continuing experiments on
the Thermal Equivalents of the Oxides of Chlorine ; and that the sum of £15
be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Dr. Duncan, Mr. Heniy Woodward, and Mr. Robert Etheridge be a
Committee for the purpose of continuing researches in Fossil Crustacea ; that
Mr. Woodward be the Secretary, and that the sum of £25 be placed at their
disposal for the purpose.

That Sir C. LyeU, Bart., Professor Phillips, Sir J. Lubbock, Bart., Mr. J.
Evans, Mr. E. Yivian, Mr. W. Pengelly, Mr. G. Busk, Mr. W. B. Dawkins,
and Mr. W. A. Sandford be a Committee for the purpose of continuing the
Exploration of Kent's Cavern, Torquay ; that Mr. Pengelly be the Secretary,
and that the sum of £100 be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Professor Harkness and Mr. James Thomson be a Committee for the
purpose of continuing the investigation of Carboniferous Corals with the view
of reproducing them for pubhcation ; that Mr. Thomson be the Secretary, and
that the sum of £25 be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Mr. G. Busk and Mr. Boyd Dawkins be a Committee for the purpose
of assisting Dr. Leith Adams in the preparation of Plates illustrating an
accouut of the Fossil Elephants of Malta ; that Mr. Busk be the Secretary,
and that the sum of £25 be placed at their disposal fcr the purpose.

RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE GENERAL COMMITTEE. Ixxi

That Professor Harkness, Mr. William Jolly, aud Dr. J. Bryce bo a
Committee for the purpose of coUectiug Fossils from localities of difficult
access iu North -western Scotland, that the specimens be deposited in the
Edinburgh Industrial Museum, aud that duplicates be deposited in such
Museum as the Association may designate ; that Mr. William JoUy be the
Secretary, and that the sum of £10 be placed at their disposal for the
purpose.

That Professor Eamsay, Professor Geikie, Professor J. Young, Professor
Nicol, Dr. Bryce, Dr. Arthur Mitchell, Professor Hull, Sir E. Griffith, Bart.,
Dr. King, Professor Harkness, Mr. Prestwich, Mr. Hughes, and Mr. PengcRy
be a Committee for the purpose of ascertaining the existence in different
parts of the United Kingdom of any Erratic Blocks or Boulders, indicating on
Maps their position and height above the sea, as also of ascertaining the
nature of the rocks composing these blocks, their size, shape, and other par-
ticulars of interest, and of endeavouring to prevent the destruction of such
blocks as in the opinion of the Committee are worthy of being preserved ;
that Mr. MiLne Holme be the Secretary, and that the sum of £10 be placed
at their disposal for the purpose.

That Mr. Stainton, Professor Kewton, and Sir John Lubbock be a Com-
mittee for the purpose of continuing a Eecord of Zoological Literature ; that
Mr. Stainton be the Secretary, and that the sum of £100 be placed at theii
disposal for the purpose.

That Professor Balfour, Dr. Cleghorn, Mr. Eobert Hutchinson, Mr. Alexander
Buchau, and Mr. John Sadler be a Committee for the purpose of taking Ob-
servations on the effect of the Denudation of Timber on the EainfaU in North
Britain ; that Dr. Cleghorn be the Secretary, and that the sum of £20 be placed
at their disposal for the purpose.

That Dr. Sharpey, Dr. Eichardson, and Professor Humphry be a Com-
mittee for the purpose of continuing investigations on the Physiological
Action of Organic Chemical Compounds ; that Dr. Eichardson be the Secretary,
and that the sum of £25 be jjlaced at their disposal for the purpose.

That Professor Michael Foster, Mr. W. H. Flower, and Mr. Benjamin
Lowne be a Committee for the purpose of making Terato-embryological
inquiries ; that Mr. Lowne be the Secretary, and that the sum of £20 be
placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Professor M. Foster, Dr. Arthur Gamgee, and Mr. E. Eay Lankester
be a Committee for the purpose of investigating the amount of Heat gene-
rated in the Blood in the Process of Arterialization ; that Dr. Gamgee be the
Secretarj', and that the sum of £15 be placed at their disposal for the
purpose.

That Professor Christison, Dr. Laycock, and Dr. Frascr be a Committee for
the purpose of investigating the Antagonism of Poisonous Substances ; that
Dr. Fraser be the Secretary, and that the sum of £20 be placed at their disposal
for the purpose.

That Sir E. I. Murchison, Bart., the Eev. Dr. Giusburg, Mr. Hepworth
Dixon, Eev. Dr. Tristram, General Chesney, Eev. Professor Eawlinson, and
Mr. John A. Tinne be a Committee for the pui-pose of undertaking a Geogra-
phical Exploration of the country of Moab ; and that the sum of £100 be.
placed at their disposal for the purpose, in addition to the sum of £1 00
granted last year, but not expended because it was found to be insufficient
for the purpose. . ^ .

That the Metric Committee be reappointed, such Committee to consist of
Sir John Bowring. The Eight Hon. Sir Stafford H. Northeote, Bart., C.B.,

/2

Ixxii REPORT IS71.

M.P., The Right Hon. Sir C. B. Adderley, M.P., Mr. Samual Brown, Dr. Farr,
Mr. Frank P. Fellowes, Professor Fraukland, Mr. James Heywood, Profes-
sor Leone Levi, Mr. C. W. Siemens, Professor A. W. "Williamson, Dr. George
Glover, Sir Joseph Whitworth, Bart., Mr. J. B. Napier, Mr. J. Y. N.
Bazalgette, and Sir W. Fairbairn, Bart. ; that Professor Leone Levi be the
Secretary, and that the sum of =£75 be placed at their disposal for the pur-
pose of being applied solely to scientific purposes, printing, and corre-
spondence.

That Professor "W. J. Macquorn Rankine, Mr. Froude, Mr. C. "W. Merrifield,
Mr. CM. Siemens, Mr. BramAvell, Mr. L. E. Fletcher, and Mr. James R. ]S"apier
be a Committee for the purpose of making experiments on instruments for
Measuring the Speed of Ships and Currents by means of the difference of
height of two columns of liquids ; that Mr. Fletcher be the Secretary, and
that the sum of .£30 be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

That Mr. R. B. Grantham, Professor Corfield, M.B., Mr. J. Bailey Denton,
Dr. J. H. GUbcrt, Mr. J. Thornhill Harrison, Mr. William Hope, Lieut.-
Col. Leach, Dr. A. Yoelcker, and Professor A. W, "Williamson be a
Committee for the purpose of continuing the investigations on the " Treat- ,
ment and Utilization of Sewage ; " that the balance of the funds raised by
the Committee appointed at Exeter, and now in the hands of the General
Treasurer, be placed at their disposal for the purpose.

Applications for Reports and Researches not involving Grants of Money.

That the Committee, consisting of Dr. Joule, Sir "W. Thomson, Professor Tait,
Professor Balfour Stewart, and Professor J. C. Maxwell, be reappointed to
effect the determination of the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat.

That Sir "W. Thomson, Professor Everett, Professor G. C. Foster, Professor
J. C. Maxwell, Mr. G. J. Stoney, Professor Fleeming Jenkin, Professor
Rankine, Mr, Siemens, and Mr. Bramwell be a Committee for the purpose of
framing a nomenclature of Units of Force and Energ}'.

That Professor Sylvester, Professor Cayle}-, Professor Hirst, Rev. Professor
Bartholomew Price, Professor H. J. S. Smith, Dr. Spottiswoode, Mr. R. B.
Hayward, Dr. Salmon, Rev. R. Townsend, Professor Fuller, Professor Kel-
land, Mr. J. M. AVilson, and Professor Clitibrd be reappointed a Committee
(with power to add to their number) for the purpose of considering the pos-
sibility of improving the methods of instruction in elementary geometry ; and
that Professor Clifford be the Secretary.

That Mr. "W. H. L. Russell be requested to continue his Report on recent
progress in the theory of Elliptic and Hyperelliptic Functions.

That Mr. Carruthers, Dr. Hooker, Professor Balfour, and Mr. Dyer be a
Committee for the pui-pose of investigating the Fossil Flora of Britain.

That Rev. Canon Tristram, Professor X ewton, Mr. H. E. Dresser, Mr. J. E.
Harting, and Rev. H. F. Barnes be reappointed a Committee for the purpose
of continuing the investigation on the desirability of establishing " a close
time" for the preservation of indigenous animals; and that the Rev. Canon
Tristram be the Secretary.

That Dr. RoUeston, Dr. Sclater, Dr. Dohni, Professor Huxley, Professor
Wyville Thomson, and Mr. E. Ray Lankcster be a Committee for the jrarpose
of promoting the foundation of Zoological Stations; and that Dr. Anton
Dohrn be the Secretary.

That the Committee appointed last year " to consider and report on the
various plans proposed for legislating on the subject of Steam-boiler Explosions

RECOMJIENDATIONS OF THE GEXEKAL COMMITTiSE. Ixxiii

witli a view to tLeir prevention" bo requested to eontinne their labours;
such Committee to consist of Sir "W. Fairbairn, Bart., Mr. John Penn, Mr.
P. J. Bramwell, Mr. Hugh Mason, Mr. Samuel Eigby, Mr. Thomas Schofield,
Mr. C. F. Beyer, Mr. T. Webster, Q.C., Mr. Lavington E. Fletcher, and Mr.
Ed^yard Easton, with power to add to their number.

That Mr. Bateman, Mr. Le Neve Foster, Mr. Merrifield, Mr. Edward
Easton, Mr. F. J. Bramwell, Mr. W. Hope, and Mr. H. Bauerman be a
Committee to consider the mode in which new inventions, and claims for
reward in respect of adopted inventions, are examined and dealt with by the
different Departments of Government, and to report on the best means of
removing any real causes of dissatisfaction, as well as of sUenciug unfounded
complaints.

That a Committee be appoiiited — •

1°, to consider and report on the best means of advancing science by

Lectures, with authority to act, subject to the approval of the

Council, in the course of the present year, if judged desirable.

2°, to consider and report whether any steps can be taken to render

scientific organization more complete and effectual.

That the Committee consist of the following Members, with power to add

to their number : — Professor Eoscoe, Professor W. G. Adams, Professor

Andrews, Professor Balfour, Mr. Bramwell, Professor A. Crum Brown, Mr.

Dyer, Sir Walter Elliot, Professor Flower, Professor G. C. Foster, Professor

Geikie, Rev. E. Harley, Professor Huxley, Professor Fleeming Jenkin, Dr.

Joule, Colonel Lane Fox, Dr. Lankester, Mr. J. N. Lockyer, Dr. O'Callaghan,

Professor Eamsay, Professor Balfour Stewart, Mr. Stainton, Professor Tait,

Mr. J. A. Tinne, Dr. Allen Thomson, Sir William Thomson, Professor

Wyville Thomson, Professor Turner, Professor A. W. WUliamson, Dr. Young ;

and that Professor Eoscoe be the Secretary.

Resolutions involving Apjylications to Government.

That the President and Council of the British Association be authorized to
cooperate with the President and Council of the Eoyal Society, in whatever
way may seem to them best, for the promotion of a Circumnavigation Expe-
dition, specially fitted out to carry the Physical and Biological Exploration of
the Deep Sea into all the Great Oceanic areas.

That the President and General Officers, with power to add to their
number, be requested to take such steps as may seem to them desirable in
order to promote observations on the forthcoming Total Solar Eclipse.

Communications ordered to be printed in extenso in the Annual Rejjort

of the Association.

That the letter of Lavoisier to Black, referred to in the Address of the
President of the Chemical Section, be printed in the Annual Eeport ; and
that the letter dated 19th November, 1790, be published in facsimile.

That Mr. Bramwell's paper " On Experiments made with Carr's Disinte-
grating Flour-miU " be printed in extenso in the Transactions of the Associa-
tion.

Resolutions referred to the Council for consideration and action

if it seem desirable.

That it is desirable that the British Association apply to the Treasury for
funds to enable the Tidal Committee to continue their calculations.

Ixxiv REPORT 1871.

That it is desirable that the British Association should urge upon the
Government of India the importance for navigation and other practical pur-
poses, and for science, of making accurate and continued observations on the
Tides at several points on the coast of India.

That the Council of the Association be requested to take such steps as to
them may seem most expedient in support of a proposal, made by Dr. Buys
Ballot, to establish a telegraphic meteorological station at the Azores.

That the Council be requested to take into consideration the desirability of
the publication of a periodic record of advances made in the various branches
of science represented by the British Association.

That the CouncU of this Association be requested to take such steps as may
appear to them desirable "nith reference to the arrangement now in contem-
plation to establish " leaving Examinations," and to report to the Association
on the present position of science-teaching in the public and first-grade
schools.

That the Council be requested to take such steps as they deem wisest in
order to promote the introduction of scientific instruction into the elementary
schools throughout the countrj'-.

Synopsis of Ch-ants of Money appropriated to Scientific Purposes by
the General Committee at the Edinbm-yh Meeting in August 1871.
The names of the Members who would be entitled to call on the
General Treasurer for the respective Grants are prefixed.

Kew Observatory.
The Council. — Maintaining the Establishment of Kew Obser-

servatory 300 0 0

Mathematics and Physics.

■ Cayley, Professor. — Mathematical Tables 50 0 0

*Crossley, Mr. — Discussion of Observations of Lunar Objects . . 20 0 0

*Tait, Professor. — Thermal Conductivity of Metals 25 0 0

*Thomsou, Professor Sir W. — Tidal Observations 200 0 0

*Brooke, Mr. — British Eainfall 100 0 0

*Thomson, Sir W. — Underground Temperature 100 0 0

*Glaisher, Mr.— Luminous Meteors 20 0 0

Huggins, Di". — Tables of Inverse "Wave-lengths 20 0 0

Chemistry.

^Williamson, Prof. A. W. — Eeports of the Progress of Chemistry 100 0 0

. Williamson, Prof. A. W. — Testing Siemens's new Pyrometer . 30 0 0
. Gladstone, Dr. — Chemical Constitution and Optical Properties

of Essential Oils 40 0 0

*BrowD, Dr. Crum. — Thermal Equivalent of the Oxides of

Chlorine 15 0 0

Carried forward ^1020 0 0

* Eeappointed.

SYNOPSIS OF GRANTS OF MONEY. IxXV

Geology. ' £ s. d.

Brought forward ■ 1020 0 0

*Duneaii, Dr. — Fossil Crustacea 25 0 0

*Lyell, Sir C, Bart. — Kent's Cavern Exploration 100 0 0

*Harkuess, Professor. — Investigation of Fossil Corals 25 0 0

*Busk, Mr. — Fossil Elephants of Malta (renewed) 25 0 0

Harkness, Professor. — Collection of Fossils in the North-west

of Scotland 10 0 0

Ramsay, Professor. — Mapping Positions of Erratic Blocks and

Boulders 10 0 0

Biology.

*Stainton, Mr. — Eecord of the Progress of Zoology 100 0 0

*Balfour, Professor. — Effect of the Denudation of Timber on

the EaiufaU in North Britain (renewed) 20 0 0

*Sharpey, Dr. — Physiological Action of Organic Compounds . . 25 0 0

Foster, Professor M. — Terato-embryological Inquiries 20 0 0

Foster, Professor M. — Heat Generated in the Arterialization

of the Blood. (part renewed) 15 0 0

Christison, Professor. — Antagonism of Poisonous Substances. . 20 0 0

Geo(/raj)?iy.

*Murchison, Sir R. Bart. — Exploration of the Country of Moab 100 0 0

Economic Science and Statistics.

*Bowring, Sir J. — Metric Committee 75 0 0

MecJianics,

Rankine, Professor. — Experiments on Instruments for Mea-
suring the Speed of Ships and Currents 30 0 0

Total.. . . il620~"0~~0

*

Eeappointed.

Place of Electing in 1873.

It was resolved that the Annual Meeting of the Association in 1873 be
held at Bradford.

Ixxvi

REPOKT 1871.

General Statement of Sums ivhich have been paid on Account of Grants

for Scientific Purposes.

1834.

Tide Discussions

£ g. d.

20 0 0

1S35.

Tide Discussions G2 0 0

Britisli Fossil Ichthyology 105 0 0

JE167 0 0

1836.

Tide Discussions • 1C3

Biitish Fossil Ichthyology 105

Thermometric Observations, &c. 50
Experiments on long-continued

Heat 17

Rain- Gauges 9

Refraction Experiments 15

Lunar Nutation 60

Thermometers 15

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

13

0

0

0

0

0

6

0

1837.

Tide Discussions 284

Chemical Constants 24

Lunar Nutation 70

Observations on Waves 100

Tides at Bristol 150

Meteorology and Subterranean

Temperature 89

Vitrification Experiments 150

Heart Experiments 8

Barometric Observations 30

Barometers 11

5
0
4

0
18

1838.
Tide Discussions

British Fossil Fishes

Meteorological Observations and

Anemometer (construction) ...

Cast Iron (Strength of)

Animal and Vegetable Substances

(Preservation of)

Railway Constants

Bristol Tides...

Grovfth of Plants

Mud in Rivers

Education Committee

Heart Experiments

Land and Sea Level

Subterranean Temperature

S team-vessels

Meteorological Committee

Thermometers

£434 14 0

1

0

13

e

0

0

12

0

0

0

£918 14 6

29

0

0

100

0

0

100

0

0

60

0

0

19

1

10

41

12

10

50

0

0

75

0

0

3

6

6

50

0

0

5

3

0

267

8

7

8

6

0

100

0

0

31

9

5

16

4

0

£956 12 2

1839.

Fossil Ichthyology 110 0 0

Meteorological Observations at

Plymouth G3 10 0

Mechanism of Waves 141 2 0

Bristol Tides , 35 18 0

£ s. d.

Meteorology and Subterranean
Temperature

Vitrification Experiments,

Cast-iron Experiments

Railway Constants

Land and Sea Level

Steam-vessels' Engines

Stars in Histoire Celeste

Stars in Lacaille

Stars in R.A.S. Catalogue

AnimalSecretions

Steam-engines in Cornwall

Atmospheric Air

Cast and Wrought Iron

Heat on Organic Bodies

Gases on Solar Spectrum

Hourly Meteorological Observa-
tions, Inverness and Kingussie

Fossil Reptiles

Mining Statistics

£

21

9

100

28

274

100

331

11

6

10

50

16

40

3

22

49

118

50

11 0

4 7

0 0
7 2

1 4
0 0

18 6

0 0

16 6

10 0

0 0

1 0
0 0
0 0
0 0

7 8

2 9
0 0

1595 11 0

1840.

Bristol Tides 100

Subterranean Temperature 13

Heart Experiments IS

Lungs Experiments 8

Tide Discussions 50

Land and Sea Level 6

Stars (Histoire Celeste) 242

Stars (Lacaille) 4

Stars (Catalogue) 264

Atmospheric Air 15

Water on Iron 10

Heat on Organic Bodies 7

Meteorological Observations 52

Foreign Scientific Memoirs 112

Working Population 100

School Statistics 50

Forms of Vessels 184

Chemical and Electrical Pheno-
mena 40

Meteorological Observations at

Plymouth SO

Magnetical Observations 185

0

0

13

6

19

0

13

0

0

0

11

1

10

0

15

0

0

0

15

0

0

0

0

0

17

6

1

a

0

0

0

0

7

0

0 0

0 0

13 9

£1546 16 A

1841.

Observations on Waves

Meteorology and Subterranean

Temperature 8

Actinometers 10

Earthquake Shocks 17

Acrid Poisons 6

Veins and Absorbents 3

Mud in Rivers 5

Marine Zoology 15

j Skeleton Maps' 20

I Mountain Barometers 6

I S'ars (Histoire Celeste) 185

30 0 0

8

0

0

0

7

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

2

8

0

0

8

6

U

0

GENEKAIi STATEMENT.

Ixxvii

£ s. d.

Stars (Lacaille) 79 5 0

Stars (Nomenclature ol") 17 19 C

Stars (Catalogue of) 40 0 0

Water on Iron 50 0 0

Meteorological Observations at

Inverness 20 0 0

Meteorological Observations (re-
duction of) 25 0 0

Fossil Reptiles 50 0 0

Foreign Memoirs 62 0 0

Railway Sections 38 1 6

Forms of Vessels 193 12 0

Meteorological Observations at

Plymouth 55 0 0

Magnetical Observations Gl 18 8

Fishes of the Old Red Sandstone 100 0 0

Tides at Leith 50 0 0

Anemometer at Edinburgh C9 1 10

Tabulating Observations 9 6 3

Races of Men 5 0 0

Radiate Animals 2 0 0

£1235 10 11

1842.

Dynamometric Instruments 113 11 2

Anoplura Britanniae 52 12 0

Tides at Bristol 59 8 0

Gases on Light 30 14 7

Chronometers , 20 17 6

Marine Zoology 15 0

British Fossil Mammalia 100 0 0

Statistics of Education 20 0 0

Marine Steam-vessels' Engines... 28 0 0

Stars (Histoire Celeste) 59 0 0

Stars (Brit. Assoc. Cat. of ) 110 0 0

Railway Sections 161 10 0

British Belemnites 50 0 0

Fossil Reptiles (publication of

Report) 210 0 0

Forms of Vessels 180 0 0

Galvanic Experiments on Rocks 5 8 6
Meteorological Experiments at

Plymouth 68 0 0

Constant Indicator and Dynamo-
metric Instruments 90 0 0

ForceofWind 10 0 0

Light on Growth of Seeds 8 0 0

Vital Statistics 50 0 0

Vegetative Power of Seeds 8 111

Questions on Human Race 7 9 0

£1449 17 8

2 0 0

1843.

Revision of the Nomenclature of
Stars 2

Reduction of Stars, British Asso-
ciation Catalogue 25 0 0

Anomalous Tides, Frith of Forth 120 0 0

Hourly Meteorological Observa-

tionsat Kingussie andlnverness 77 12 8

Meteorological Observations at
Plymouth 55

Whewell's Meteorological Ane-
mometer at Plymouth 10

0 0

0 0

£
Meteorological Observations, Os-
ier's Anemometer at Plymouth 20
Reduction of Meteorological Ob-
servations 30

Meteorological Instruments and

Gratuities 39

Construclion of Anemometer at

Inverness 56

Magnetic Cooperation 10

Meteorological Recorder for Kew

Observatory 50

Action of Gases on Light 18

Establishment at Kew Observa-
tory, Wages, Repairs, Furni-
ture and Sundries 133

Experiments by Captive Balloons 81
Oxidation of the Rails of Railways 20
Publication of Report on Fossil

Reptiles 40

Coloured Drawings of Railway

Sections 147

Registration of Earthquake

Shocks 30

Report on Zoological Nomencla-
ture 10

Uncovering Lower Red Sand-
stone near Manchester 4

Vegetative Power of Seeds 5

Marine Testacea (Habits of) ... 10

Marine Zoology 10

Marine Zoology 2

Preparation of Report on British

Fossil Mammalia 100

Physiological Operations of Me-
dicinal Agents 20

Vital Statistics 36

Additional Experiments on the

Forms of Vessels 70

Additional Experiments on the

Forms of Vessels 100

Reduction of Experiments on the

Forms of Vessels 100

Morin's Instrument and Constant

Indicator 69

Experiments on the Strength of

Materials 60

£1565

s.

d.

0

0

0

0

6

0

12

8

2
10

0
16

0

1

4

8
0

7
0
0

0

0

18

3

0

0

0

0

4
3
0
0
14

6

8

0

0

11

0 0

0

0

5

8

0

0

0

0

0

0

14

10

0

0

10 2

1844.

Meteorological Observations at

Kingussie and Inverness 12 0 0

Completing Observations at Ply-
mouth 35 0 0

Magnetic and Meteorological Co-
operation 25 8 4

Publication of the British Asso-
ciation Catalogue of Stars 35 0 0

Observations on Tides on the

East coast of Scotland 100 0 0

Revision of the Nomenclature of

Stars 1842 2 9 6

Maintaining the Establishmentin

Kew Observatory 117 17 3

Instruments for Kew Observatory 56 7 3

Ixxviii

REPORT — 1871.

£

Influence of Light on Plants 10

Subterraneous Temperature in

Ireland 5

Coloured Drawings of Railway

Sections 15

Investigation of Fossil Fislies of

the Lower Tertiary Strata ... 100
Registering the Shocks of Earth-
quakes 1842 23

Structure of Fossil Shells 20

Radiata and Mollusca of the

■ yEgean and Red Seas 1842 100

Geographical Distributions of

Marine Zoology 1842 10

Marine Zoology of Devon and

Cornwall 10

Marine Zoology of Corfu 10

Experiments on the Vitality of

Seeds 9

Experiments on the Vitality of

Seeds 1842 8

Exotic Anoplura 15

Strength of Materials 100

Completing Experiments on the

Forms of Ships 100

Inquiries into Asphyxia 10

Investigations on the Internal

Constitution of Metals 50

Constant Indicator and Morin's

Instrument 1842 10

JE981

1845,
Publication of the British Associa-
tion Catalogue of Stars 351

Meteorological Observations at

Inverness 30

Magnetic and Meteorological Co-
operation 16

Meteorological Instruments at

Edinburgh 18

Reduction of Anemometrical Ob-
servations at Plymouth 25

Electrical Experiments at Kew

Observatory 43

Maintaining the Establishment in

Kew Observatory 149

For Kreil's Barometrograph 25

Gases from Iron Furnaces 50

The Actinograpli 15

Microscopic Structure of Shells... 20

Exotic Anoplura 1843 10

Vitality of Seeds 1843 2

Vitality of Seeds 1844 7

Marine Zoology of Cornwall 10

Physiological Action of Medicines 20
Statistics of Sickness and Mor-
tality in York 20

Earthquake Shocks 1843 15

£830
1846.
British Association Catalogue of

Stars 1844 211

Fossil Fishes of the London Clay 100

s.
0

d.
0

0

0

17

6

0

0

11
0

10
0

0

0

0

0

0
0

0
0

0

3

7
0
0

3
0
0

0
0

0
0

0

0

3

6

12 8

14 6
18 11

16 8
11 9

0 0

17 8

15

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

7

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

14

8

9 9

15
0

Computation of the Gaussian

Constants for 1829 50

Maintaining tlie Establishment at

Kew Observatory 146

Strength of Materials 60

Researches in Asphyxia 6

Examination of Fossil Shells 10

Vitality of Seeds 1844 2

Vitality of Seeds 1845 7

Marine Zoology of Cornwall 10

Marine Zoology of Britain 10

Exotic Anoplura 1844 25

Expenses attending Anemometers 11

Anemometers' Repairs 2

Atmospheric Waves 3

Captive Balloons 1844 8

Varieties of the Human Race

1844 7
Statistics of Sickness and Mor-
tality in York 12

£ s, d.

0 0

16

7

0

0

IC

2

0

0

15

10

12

3

0

0

0

0

0

0

7

6

3

6

3

3

19

3

6

3

0

0

£685 16 0

1847.
Computation of the Gaussian

Constants for 1829 50

Habits of Marine Animals 10

Physiological Action of Medicines 20

Marine Zoology of Cornwall ... 10

Atmospheric Waves 6

Vitality of Seeds 4

Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory 107

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

9

3

7

7

£208 5 4

1848.
Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory 171 15 11

Atmospheric Waves 3 10 9

Vitality of Seeds 9 15 0

Completion of Catalogues of Stars 70 0 0

On Colouring Matters 5 0 0

On Growth of Plants 15 0 0

£275 i 8

1849.
Electrical Observations at Kew

Observatory 50

Maintaining Establishment at

ditto 76

Vitality of Seeds 5

On Growth of Plants 5

Registration of Periodical Phe-
nomena 10 0

Bill on account of Anemometrical

Observations 13 9

0 0

1850.
Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatoi'y 255

Transit of Earthquake Waves ... 50

Periodical Phenomena 15

Meteorological Instrument,

Azores , 25

0 0

0

£159 19 6

18

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

£345 18 0

GENERAL STATEMENT.

Ixxix

£
1851.
Maintaining the Establishment at
Kew Observatory (includes part

ofgrantin 1849) 309

Theory of Heat 20

Periodical Plienomena of Animals

and Plants 5

Vitality of Seeds 5

Influence of Solar Radiation 30

Ethnological Inquiries 12

Researches on Annelida 10

£391

1852. ~
Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory (including
balance of grant for 1850) ...233
Experiments on the Conduction

ofHeat 5

Influence of Solar Radiations ... 20

Geological Map of Ireland 15

Researches on the British Anne-
lida 10

Vitality of Seeds „,„ 10

Strengthof Boiler Plates 10

£304

1853. ==
Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory 165

Experiments on the Influence of
Solar Radiation 15

Researches on the British Anne-
lida 10

Dredging on the East Coast of
Scotland 10

Ethnological Queries 5

~£205"

1854.
Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory (including

balance of former grant) 330

Investigations on Flax 11

Effects of Temperature on

Wrought Iron 10

Registration of Periodical Phe-

nomena , 10

British Annelida 10

Vitality of Seeds 5

Conduction of Heat 4

£380
1855. =

Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory 425

Earthquake Movements 10

Physical Aspect of the Moon 1 1

Vitality of Seeds 10

Map of the World , 15

Ethnological Queries 5

Dredging near Belfast 4

£480

1856.
Maintaining the Establishment at
Kew Observatory: —

1854 £75 0 01 ,,^

1855 £500 0 0/ ^'^

2

2

1

1

0

0

6

4

0

0

0

0

0

0

9 7

17 8

2

9

0

0

0

0

0

0

S

2

0

0

6 7

0 0

0 0

0 0

15
0

0 0

0 0

19 7

16 4

0

0

13

9

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

£ s. d.
Strickland's Ornithological Syno-
nyms 100

Dredging and Dredging Porms... 9

Chemical Action of Light 20

Strength of Iron Plates 10

Registration of Periodical Pheno-
mena 10

Propagation of Salmon 10

£734 13 9

1857.

Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory 350

Earthquake Wave Experiments. . 40

Dredging near Belfast 10

Dredging on the West Coast of

Scotland 10

Investigations into the MoUusca

ofCalifornia , 10

Experiments on Flax 5

Natural History of Madagascar. , 20

Researches on British Annelida 25

Report on Natural Products im-
ported into Liverpool 10

Artificial Propagation of Salmon 10

Temperature of Mines 7 8 0

Thermometers for Subterranean

Observations 5 7 4

Life-Boats 5 0 0

£507 15 4

1858. """"■ ""
Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory 500

Earthquake Wave Experiments.. 25
Dredging on the West Coast of

Scotland 10

Dredging near Dublin 5

Vitality of Seeds 5

Dredging near Belfast 18

Report on the British Annelida.., 25
Experiments on the production

of Heat by Motion in Fluids ... 20
Report on the Natural Products

imported into Scotland 10

£018 18 2

1859. "
Maintaining the Establishment at

Kew Observatory 500

Dredging near Duijlin 15

Osteology of Birds 50

Irish Tunicata 5

Manure Experiments 20

British Medusida: 5

Dredging Committee 5

Steam-vessels' Performance 5

Marine Fauna of South and West

of Ireland , 10

Photographic Chemistry 10

Lanarkshire Fossils 20

Balloon Ascents 39

£684 11 I

1860. "
Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory 500 0 0

Dredging near Belfast 16 6 0

Dredging in Dublin Bay 15 0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

5

0

13

2

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

I

1

0

Ixxx

IIEPOIIT 1871.

Inquiry into the Performance of
Steam- vessels 124

Explorations iu the Yellow Sand-
stone of Dura Den 20

Chemico-mechanical Analysis of
Rocks and Minerals 25

Researches on the Growth of
Plants 10

Researches on the Solubility of
Salts 30

Researches on the Constituents
of Manures 25

Balance of Captive Balloon Ac-
counts 1

^1241

1861.
Maintaining the Establishment

ofKew Observatory 500

Earthquake Experiments 25

Dredging North and East Coasts

of Scotland 23

Dredging Committee : —

1S60 £50 0 0\ ^

1861 £22 0 0 J '-^

Excavations at Dura Den 20

Solubility of Salts 20

Steam-vessel Performance 150

Fossils of Lesmahago 15

Explorations at Uriconium 20

Chemical Alloys 20

Classified Index to the Transac-
tions 100

Dredging in the Mersey and Dee 5

Dip Circle 30

Photoheliographic Observations 50

Prison Diet 20

Gauging of Water 10

Alpine Ascents C

Constituents of Manures 25

s.

d.

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

13

6

7

0

n

A

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

5

1

0

0

£1111 5 10

1862.
Maintaining the Establishment

ofKew Observatory 500

Patent Laws 21

Mollusca of N.-W. America 10

Natural History by Mercantile

Marine 5

Tidal Observations 25

Photoheliometer at Kew 40

Photographic Pictures of the Sun 150

Rocks of Donegal 25

Dredging Durham and North-
umberland 25

Connexion of Storms 20

Dredging North-east Coast of

Scotland C

Ravages of Teredo 3 1

Standards of Electrical Resistance 50

Railway Accidents 10

Balloon Committee 200

Dredging Dublin Bay 10

Dredging the Mersey 5

Prison Diet 20

Gauging of Water 12 1

0

0

6

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

c

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

£ s. d.

Steamships' Performance 150 0 0

Thcrmo-Electric Currents 5 0 0

£1293 16 6

1863. ~
Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory COO 0 0

Balloon Committee deficiency... 70 0 0

Balloon Ascents (other expenses) 25 0 0

Entozoa 25 0 0

Coal Fossils 20 0 0

Herrings 20 0 0

Granites of Donegal 5 0 0

Prison Diet 20 0 0

Vertical Atmospheric Movements 13 0 0

Dredging Shetland 50 0 0

Dredging North-east coast of

Scotland 25 0 0

Dredging Northumberland and

Durham 17 3 10

Dredging Committee superin-
tendence 10 0 0

Steamship Performance 100 0 0

Balloon Committee 200 0 0

Carbon under pressure 10 0 0

Volcanic Temperature 100 0 0

Bromide of Ammonium 8 0 0

Electrical Standards 100 0 0

Construction and distribu-
tion ... 40 0 0

Luminous Meteors 17 0 0

Kew Additional Buildings for

Photoheliograph 100 0 0

Thermo-Electricity 15 0 0

Analysis of Rocks 8 0 0

Hydroida 10 0 0

£1608 S^HJ

1864. ■""

Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory GOO 0 0

Coal Fossils 20 0 0

Vertical Atmosplieric Move-
ments 20 0 0

Dredging Shetland 75 0 0

Dredging Northumberland 25 0 0

Balloon Committee 200 0 0

Carbon under pressure 10 0 0

Standards of Electric Resistance 100 0 0

Analysis of Rocks 10 0 0

Hydroida 10 0 0

Askham's Gift 50 0 0

Nitrite of Aniyle 10 0 0

Nomenclature Committee 5 0 0

Rain-Gauges. 19 15 8

Cast-Iron Investigation 20 0 0

Tidal 01)servations in the llumber 50 0 0

Spectral Kays 45 0 0

Luminous Meteors 20 0 0

£128'jT5 8

18G5. """^

Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory 600 0 0

Balloon Committee 100 0 0

Hydroida 13 0 0

GENERAL STATEMENT.

Ixxxi

£ s. d.

Raiu-Gauges 30 0 0

Tidal Observations in the number 6 8 0

Hexylic Compounds 20 0 0

Aravl Compounds 20 0 0

Irish Flora 25 0 0

American Mollusca 3 9 0

Organic Acids 20 0 0

Lingula Flags Excavation 10 0 0

Eurypterus 50 0 0

Electrical Standards 100 0 0

Malta Caves Researches 30 0 0

Oyster Breeding 25 0 0

Gibraltar Caves Researches ... 150 0 0

Kent's Hole Excavations 100 0 0

Moon's Surface Observations ... 35 0 0

Marine Fauna 25 0 0

Dredging Aberdeenshire 25 0 0

Dredging Channel Islands 50 0 0

Zoological Nomenclature 5 0 0

Resistance of Floating Bodies in

Water 100 0 0

Bath Waters Analysis 8 10 0

Luminous Meteors 40 0 0

£1591 7 10

1866. ^
Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory 600 0 0

Lunar Committee 64 13 4

Balloon Committee 50 0 0

Metrical Committee 50 0 0

British Rainfall 50 0 0

Kilkenny Coal Fields 16 0 0

Alum Bay Fossil Leaf-Bed 15 0 0

Luminous Meteors 50 0 0

Lingula Flags Excavation 20 0 0

Chemical Constitution of Cast

Iron 50 0 0

Amyl Compounds 25 0 0

Electrical Standards 100 0 0

Malta Caves Exploration 30 0 0

Kent's Hole Exploration 200 0 0

Marine Fauna, &c., Devon and

Cornwall 25 0 0

Dredging .\berdeenshire Coast... 25 0 0

Dredging Hebrides Coast 50 0 0

Dredging the Mersey 5 0 0

Resistance of Floating Bodies in

Water 50 0 0

Polycyanides of Organic Radi-
cals 20 0 0

Rigor Mortis 10 0 0

Irish Annelida 15 0 0

Catalogue of Crania 50 0 0

DidineBirdsofMascarene Islands 50 0 0

Typical Crania Researches 30 0 0

Palestine Exploration Fund 100 0 0

£1750 13 4

1867. =^==
Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory 600 0 0

Meteorological Instruments, Pa-
lestine 50 0 0

Lunar Committee 120 0 0

£ s. cl.

Metrical Committee 30 0 0

Kent's Hole Explorations 100 0 0

Palestine Explorations 50 0 0

Insect Fauna, Palestine 30 0 0

British Rainfall 50 0 0

Kilkenny Coal Fields 25 0 0

Alum Bay Fossil Leaf-Bed 25 0 0

Luminous Meteors 50 0 0

Bournemouth, &c. Leaf-Beds ... 30 0 0

Dredging Shetland 75 0 0

Steamship Reports Condensation 100 0 0

Electrical Standards 100 0 0

Ethyle and Methyle series 25 0 0

Fossil Crustacea 25 0 0

Sound under Water 24 4 0

North Greenland Fauna 75 0 0

Do. Plant Beds ... 100 0 0

Iron and Steel Manufacture ... 25 0 0

Patent Laws 30 0 0

£1739 4 0

1868. "
Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory 600 0 0

Lunar Committee 120 0 0

Metrical Committee 50 0 0

Zoological Record 100 0 0

Kent's Hole Explorations 150 0 0

Steamship Performances 100 0 0

British Rainfall 50 0 0

Luminous Meteors 50 0 0

Organic Acids 60 0 0

Fossil Crustacea 25 0 0

Methyl series 25 0 0

Mercury and Bile 25 0 0

Organic remains in Limestone

Rocks 25 0 0

Scottish Earthquakes 20 0 0

Fauna, Devon and Cornwall ... 30 0 0

British Fossil Corals 50 0 0

Bagshot Leaf-beds 50 0 0

Greenland Explorations 100 0 0

Fossil Flora 25 0 0

Tidal Observations 100 0 0

Underground Temperature 50 0 0

Spectroscopic investigations of

Animal Substances 5 0 0

Secondary Reptiles, &c 30 0 0

British Marine Invertebrate

Fauna 100 0 0

i:i940 0 0

1869. '~~
Maintaining the Establishment

of Kew Observatory 600 0 0

Lunar Committee 50 0 0

Metrical Committee 25 0 0

Zoological Record 100 0 0

Committee on Gases in Deep-
well Water 25 0 0

British Rainfall 50 0 0

Thermal Conductivity of Iron,

&c 30 0 0

Kent's Hole Explorations 150 0 0

Steamship Performances 30 0 0

Ixxxii

REPORT 1871.

£ s. d.
Chemical Constitution of Cast

Iron 80 0 0

Iron and Steel Manufacture ... 100 0 0

Methyl Series 30 0 0

Organic remains in Limestone

Rocks 10 0 0

Earthquakes in Scotland 10 0 0

British Fossil Corals 50 0 0

Bagshot Leaf-Berls 30 0 0

Fossil Flora 25 0 0

Tidal Observations 100 0 0

Underground Temperature 30 0 0

Spectroscopic Investigations of

Animal Substances 5 0 0

Organic Acids 12 0 0

Kiltorcan Fossils 20 0 0

Chemical Constitution and Phy-
siological Action Relations ... 15 0 0
Mountain Limestone Fossils ..i... 25 0 0

Utihzation of Sewage 10 0 0

Products of Digestion 10 0 0

£1622 0 0

1870.

Maintaining the Establishment of

Kew Observatory 600 0 0

Metrical Committee 25 0 0

Zoological Record 100 0 0

Committee on Marine Fauna ... 20 0 0

Ears in Fishes 10 0 0

Chemical nature of Cast Iron ... 80 0 0

Luminous Meteors 30 0 0

Heat in the Blood 15 0 0

British Rainfall 100 0 0

Thermal Conductivity of Iron &c. 20 0 0

British Fossil Corals 50 0 0

Kent's Hole Explorations 150 0 0

Scottish Earthquakes 4 0 0

£ s. d.

Bagshot Leaf-Beds 15 0 0

Fossil Flora 25 0 0

Tidal Observations 100 0 0

Underground Temperature 50 0 0

Kiltorcan Quarries Fossils 20 0 0

Mountain Limestone Fossils ... 25 0 0

Utilization of Sewage 50 0 0

Organic Chemical Compounds... 30 0 0

Onny River Sediment 3 0 0

Mechanical Equivalent of Heat 50 0 0

JE1572 0 0

1871.

Maintaininglhe Establishment of

Kew Observatory GOO 0 0

Monthly Reports of Progress in

Chemistry 100 0 0

Metrical Committee 25 0 0

Zoological Record 100 0 0

Thermal Equivalents of the

Oxides of Chlorine 10 0 0

Tidal Observations 100 0 0

Fossil Flora 25 0 0

Luminous Meteors 30 0 0

British Fossil Corals.... 25 0 0

Heat in the Blood 7 2 6

British Rainfall 50 0 0

Kent's Hole Explorations 150 0 0

Fossil Crustacea 25 0 0

Methyl Compounds 25 0 0

Lunar Objects 20 0 0

Fossil Corals Sections, for Pho-
tographing 20 0 0

Bagshot Leaf-Beds 20 0 0

Moab Explorations 100 0 0

Gaussian Constants 40 0 0

£1472 2 6

GENERAL MEETINGS. Ixxxiii

General Meetings.

On "Wednesday Evening, August 2, at 8 p.m., in the Music Hall, Professor
T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.E.S., F.L.S., President, resigned the office of Pre-
sident to Professor Sir William Thomson, LL.D., F.E.S., who took the C'haii",
and delivered an Address, for which see page Ixxxiv.

On Thursday Evening, August 3, at 8.30 p.m., in the Music Hall, F. A.
Abel, Esq. F.E.S., Director of the Chemical Department, Eoyal Arsenal,
Woolwich, delivered a Discourse on " Some Eecent Investigations and Ap-
plications of Explosive Agents."

On Friday Evening, August 4, at 8 p.m., a Soiree took place in the Uni-
versity Library.

On Monday Evening, August 7, at 8.30 p.m., in the Music Hall, E. B.
Tylor, Esq., delivered a Discourse on " The llelation of Primitive to Modern
Civilization."

On Tuesday Evening, August 8, at 8 p.m., a Soiree took place in the Museum
of Science and Art.

On Wednesday, August 9, at 2.30 p.m., the concluding General Meeting
took place, when the Proceedings of the General Committee, and the Grants
of Money for Scientific purposes, were explained to the Members.

The Meeting was then adjourned to Brighton*.

* The Meeting is appointed to take place on Wednesday, August 14, 1872.

ADDRESS

OF

Sir WILLIAM THOMSON, Knt., LL.D., F.R.S.,

PRESIDENT.

For the third time of its forty years' history the British Association is
assembled in the metropolis of Scotland. The origin of the Association is
connected with Edinburgh in undying memory through the honoured names
of Robisou, Brewster, Eorbes, and Johnston.

In this place, from this Chair, twenty-one years ago, Sir David Brewster
said : — " On the return of the British Association to the metropolis of Scot-
" land I am naturally reminded of the smaU band of pilgrims who carried
" the seeds of this Institution into the more genial soil of our sister land."

" Sir John Robison, Professor Johnston, and Professor J. D.

" Forbes were the earliest friends and promoters of the British Association.
" They went to York to assist in its establishment, and they found there the
" very men who were qualified to foster and organize it. The Rev. Mr.
" Vernon Harcourt, whose name cannot be mentioned here without grati-
" tude, had provided laws for its government, and, along with Mr. Phillips,
" the oldest and most valuable of our office-bearers, had made aU those
" arrangements by which its success was ensured. Headed by Sii' Roderick
" Murchison, one of the very earliest and most active advocates of the
" Association, there assembled at York about 200 of tlie friends of science."

The statement I have read contains no allusion to the real origin of the
British Association. This blank in my predecessor's historical sketch I am
able to fill in from words written by himself twenty years earlier. Through
the kindness of Professor PhiUips I am enabled to read to you part of a
letter to him at York, written by David Brewster from AUerly by Melrose,
on the 23rd of February, 1831 :—

" Dear Sir, — I have taken the liberty of writing yon on a subject of con-
" siderable importance. It is proposed to establish a British Association of
" men of science similar to that which has existed for eight years in Gcr-
" many, and which is now patronized by the most powerful Sovereigns of that
" part of Europe. The arrangements for the first meeting are iu progress ; and
" it is contemplated that it shall be held in York, as the most central city for
" the three kingdoms. My object in writing yoir at present is to beg that you
•' would ascertain if York will furnish the accommodation necessary for so

ADDRESS. IXXXV

" large a meeting (which may perhajis consist of above 100 individuals), if
" the Philosopl^ical Society would enter zcalouslj' into the plan, and if the
" Mayor and influential persons in the town and in the vicinity would be
" likely to promote its objects. The principal object of the Society would
" be to make the cultivators of science acquainted Avith each other, to stimu-
" late one another to new exertions, and to bring the objects of science more
" before the public eye, and to take measures for advancing its interests
" and accelerating its progress."

Of the little band of four pilgrims from Scotland to York, not one now
survives. Of the seven first Associates one more has gone over to the
majority since the Association last met. Yernon Harcourt is no longer witli
us ; but his influence remains, a beneficent and, surely therefore, never dying
influence. He was a Geologist and Chemist, a large-hearted lover of science,
and an unwearied worker for its advancement. Brewster was the founder of
the British Association ; Yernon Harcourt was its law-giver. His code re-
mains to this day the law of the Association.

On the eleventh of May last Sir John Herschel died, in the eightieth year of
his age. The name of Herschel is a household word throughout Great Britain
and Ireland — yes, and through the w^hole civilized world. We of this genera-
tion have, from our lessons of childhood upwards, learned to see in Herschel,
father and son, a ivcesidium et dulce deems of the precious treasure of British
scientific fame. When geography, astronomy, and the i;se of the globes were
still taught, even to poor children, as a pleasant and profitable sequel to "read-
ing, writing, and arithmetic," which of us did not revere the great telescope
of Sir William Herschel (one of the Hundred Wonders of the World), and
learn with delight, directly or indirectly from the charming pages of Sir John
Hersehel's book, about the sun and his spots, and the fiery tornadoes sweeping-
over his surface, and about the planets, and Jupiter's belts, and Saturn's rings,
and the fixed stars with their proper motions, and the double stars, and
coloured stars, and the uebulaj discovered by the great telescope ? Of Sir
John Herschel it may indeed be said, nil tetitjitqvod non ornavit.

A monument to Faraday and a monument to Herschel, Britain must have.
The nation will not be satisfied with any thing, however sjjlendid, done by
private subscription. A national monument, the more humble in point of
expense the better, is required to satisfy that honourable i^ride with which
a high-spirited nation cherishes the memory of its great men. But for
the glory of Faraday or the glory of Herschel, is a monument wanted ?
No!

What needs my Shakespere for his honoured bones
The labour of an age in piled stones ?
Or that his hallowed rcliques should be liid
Under a star-ypointing pyramid ?
Dear son of memory, great heir of fame,
What need'st thou such weak witness of thy name !
Thou, in our wonder and astonishment,
Hast built tliyself a live-long monument.
* » * *

And, so sepulchred, in such pomp dost lie,
That kings for such a tomb would wish to die.

With regard to Sir John Hersehel's scientific work, on the present occa-
sion I can but refer briefly to a few points which seem to me salient in his
physical and mathematical writings. First, I remark that he has put
forward, most instructively and profitably to his readers, the general theory
of periodicity iu dynamics, and has urged the practical utilizing of it, espe-

1871. g

Ixxxvi REPORT — 1871.

cially in meteorology, by the harmonic analysis. It is purely by an appli-
cation of this principle and practical method, that the British Association's
Committee on Tides has for the last four years been, and sliU is, working
towards the solution of the grand problem proposed forty-eight years ago by
Thomas Young in the following words : —

" There is, indeed, little doubt that if we were provided with a sufficiently
" correct series of minutely accurate o'jservations on the Tides, made not merely
" with a view to the times of low and high water only, but ratlicr to the heights
" at the intermediate times, we might form, by degrees, with the assistance
" of the theory contained in this article * only, almost as perfect a set of tables
" for the motions of the ocean as we have already obtained for those of the
" celestial Ijodies, which are the more immediate objects of the attention of
" the practical astronomer."

Sir John Herschel's discovery of a right or left-handed asymmetry in the
outward form of crystals, such as quartz, which in their inner molecular
structure possess the heli^oidal rotational property in reference to the plane
of polarization of light, is one of the notable points of meeting between
Natural History and Natural Philosophy. His observations on " epipoHc di-
spersion ". gave Stokes the clue by which he was led to his great discovery of
the change of periodic time experienced by light in fiiUiug on certain substances
and beiug dispcrsively reflected from them. In respect to pure mathematics
Sir John Herschel did more, I believe, than any other man to introduce into
Britain the powerful methods and the valuable notation of modern analysis.
A remarkable mode of symbolism had frcslily appeared, I believe, in the
works of Laplace, and possibly of other French mathematicians ; it certainly
appeared in Fourier, but whether before or after Herschel's work I cannot
say. "With the French writers, however, this was rather a short method of
writing formuhe than the analytical engine whicli it became in the hands
of Herschel and British followers, especially Sylvester and Gregory (com-
petitors with Green in the Cambridge Mathematical Tripos struggle of 1837)
and Boole and Cayley. This method was greatly advanced by Gregory, who
first gave to its working-power a secure and pliilosophical foundation, and so
prepared the way for the marvellous extension it has received from Boole,
Sylvester, and Cayley, according to which symbols of operation become the
subjects not merely of algebraic combination, but of differentiations and in-
tegrations, as if they were symbols expressing values of varying quantities.
An even more marvellous development of this same idea of the separation of
symbols (according to which Gregorj* separated the algebraic signs 4- and —
from other symbols or quantities to be chai-acterized b}- them, aud dealt with
them according to the laws of algebraic combination) received from Hamilton
a most astonishing generalization, by the invention actually of new laws of
combination, and led him to his famous " Quaternions," of which he gave
his earliest exposition to the Mathematical and Physical Section of this As-
sociation, at its meeting in Cambridge in the year 1845. Tait has taken up
the subject of quaternions ably and zealously, and has carried it into phy-
sical science with a faith, shared by some of the most thoughtful mathematical
naturalists of the day, that it is destined to become an engine of perhaps
hitherto uuimagined power for investigating and expressing results in
Natural Philosophy. Of Herschel's gigantic work in astronomical observa-
tion I need say nothing. Doubtless a careful account of it will be given
in the ' Proceedings of the Eoyal Society of London ' for the next anniver-
sary meeting.

* Young's; written in 1823 for the Supplement to ti:e ' Encyclopjifdia Eritannica.'

ADDRESS. IxXXvii

In the past year another representative man of British science is gone.
Mathematics has had no steadier supporter for hjlf a century than De
Morgan. His great book on the differential calculus was, for the mathema-
tical student of thirty years ago, a highly prized repository of all the best
thiiags that could be brought together under that title. I do not believe
it is less valuable now ; and if it is less valued, may this not be because it
is too good for examination purposes, and because the modern student,
labouring to win marks in the struggle for existence, must not suffer himself
to be beguiled from the stern path of duty by any attractive beauties in the
subject of his studj'^ ?

One of the most valuable services to science which the British Association
has performed has been the establishment, and the twenty-nine years'
maintenance, of its Observatoiy. The Royal Meteorological Observatory of
Kew was built originally for a Sovereign of England who was a zealous
amateur of astronomy. George the Third iised continually to repair to it
when any celestial i)henomenon of peculiar interest was to be seen ; and a
manuscript book still exists filled with observations written into it by his
own hand. After the building had been many years unused, it was
granted, in the year 1842, by the Commissioners of Her Majesty's Woods
and Forests, on application of Sir Edward Sabine, for the purpose of con-
tinuing observations (from which he had already deduced important results)
regarding the vibration of a pendulum in various gases, and for the purpose
of promoting pendulum observations in all parts of the world. The
Government granted only the building — no funds for carrying on the work
to be done in it. The Boyal Society was unable to undertake the main-
tenance of such an observatory; but, happily for science, the zeal of in-
dividual Fellows of the Eoyal Society and Members of the British Asso-
ciation gave the initial impulse, supplied the necessary initial funds, and
recommended their new institution successfully to the fostering care of the
British Association. The work of the Kew Observatory has, from the
commencement, been conducted under the direction of a Committee of the
British Association ; and annual grants from the funds of the Association have
been made towards defraying its expenses up to the present time. To the
initial object of pendulum research was added continuous observation of the
phenomena of meteorology and terrestrial magnetism, and the construction
and verification of thermometers, barometers, and magnetometers designed
for accurate measurement. The magnificent services which it has rendered
to science are so well known that any statement of them which I could at-
tempt on the present occasion would be superfluous. Their value is due in a
great measure to the indefatigable zeal and the great ability of two Scotchmen,
both from Edinburgh, who successively held the office of Superintendent of
the Observatory of the British Association — Mr. Welsh for nine years, until
his death in 18-59, and Dr. Balfour Stewart from then until the present
time. Fruits of their labours are to be found all through our volumes of
Reports for these twenty-one years.

The institution now enters on a new stage of its existence. The noble
liberality of a private benefactor, one who has laboured for its welfare with
self-sacrificing devotion unintermittingly from within a few years of its crea-
tion, has given it a permanent independence, under the general management
of a Committee of the Royal Society. Mr. Gassiot's gift of £10,000 secures
the continuance at Kew of the regular operation of the self-recording instru-
ments for observing the phenomena of terrestrial magnetism and meteorology,
without the necessity for further support from the British Association.

i/2

ISLXXviii REPORT 1871.

Tho success of the Kew Magnetic and Meteorological ObseiTatory affords
ah example of the great gain to be earned for science by the founda-
tion of physical observJitories and laboratories for experimental research,
to be conducted by qualified persons, whose duties should be, not teach-
ing, but experimenting. Whether we look to the honour of England, as a
nation v>iiich ought always to be the foremost in promoting physical science,
or to those vast economical advantages which must accrue from such esta-
blishments, we cannot but feel that experimental research ought to be made
with us an object of national concern, and not left, as hitherto, exclusively
to the private enterprise of self-sacrificing amateurs, and the necessarily
inconsecutive action of our present Governmental Departments and of casual
Committees. The Council of the Royal Society of Edinburgh has moved for
this object in a memorial presented by them to the Eoyal Commission on
Scientific Education and the Advancement of Science. Tlie Continent of
Europe is referred to for an example to be followed with advantage in this
country, in the following words: — -

" On the Continent there exist certain institutions, fitted with instruments,
" apparatus, chemicals, and other appliances, which are meant to be, and
" which are made, available to men of science, to enable them, at a moderate
" cost, to pursue original researches."

Tliis statement is fuUy corroborated by information, on good authority,
Avhich T have received from Germany, to the effect that in Prussia " every
" university, every polytechnical academy, every industrial school (Realschule
" and Gewerbeschule), most of the grammar-schools, in a word, nearly all the
" scliools superior in rank to the elementary schools of the common people, are
" supplied with chemical laboratories and a collection of philosophical in-
" struments and apparatus, access to which is most liberally granted by the
" directors of those schools, or the teachers of the respective disciplines, to
" any person qualified, for scientijic experiments. In consequence, though
" there exist no particular institutions like those mentioned in the me-
" morial, there wiU scarcely be found a town exceeding in number 5000
" inhabitants but offers the possibility of scientific explorations at no other
" cost than reimbursement of the expense for the materials wasted in the
" experiments."

Eurther, with reference to a remark in the Memorial to the effect that, in
respect to the promotion of science, the British Government confines its
action almost exclusively to scientific instruction, and fatally neglects the
advancement of science, my informant tells me that, in Germany, " professors,
"preceptors, and teachers of secondary schools are engaged on account of
" their skilfulness in teacMng ; but professors of universities are never engaged
"unless they have already jjroved, hy their oxvn investigations, that they are
" to be relied upon for the advancement of science. Therefore every shilling
'•'spent for instruction in iiniversities is at the same time profitable to the ad-
" vaneement of science."

The lAysical laboratories which have grown up in the Universities of
Glasgow and Edinburgh, and in Owens College, Manchester, show the want
felt of Colleges of Eesearch ; but they go but infinitesimally towards sup-
plying it, being absolutely destitute of means, material or personal, for ad-
vancing science except at the expense of volunteers, or securing that volunteers
shall be found to continue even such little work as at present is carried on.

The whole of Andrews' splendid work in Queen's College, Belfast, has
been done under great difficulties and disadvantages, and at great personal
sacrifices ; and up to the present time there is not a student's physical

ADDRESS. IxXXix

laboratory in any one of the Qneen's Colleges in Ireland — a want which
surely ought not to remain unsupplied. Each of these institutions (the
four Scotch Universities, the three Queen's Colleges, and Owens College,
Manchester) requires two professors of Natural Philosophy — one who shall
be responsible for the teaching, the other for the advancement of science by
experiment. The University of Oxford has already established a physical
laboratory. The munificence of its Chancellor is about to supply the Univer-
sity of Cambridge with a splendid laboratory, to be constructed under the
eye of Professor Clerk Maxwell. On this subject I shall say no more at
present, but simply read a sentence which was spoken by Lord Milton in the
first Presidential Address to the British Association, when it met at York in
the year 1831 : — " In addition to other more direct benefits, these meetings
" [of the British Association], I hope, will be the means of impressing on the
" Government the conviction, that the love of scientific pursuits, and the
" means of pursuing them, are not confined to the metropolis ; and I liopc
" that when the Government is fuUy impressed with the knowledge of the
" great desire entertained to promote science in every part of the empire, they
" wiU see the necessity of affording it due encouragement, and of giving every
" proper stimulus to its advancement."

Besides abstracts of papers read, and discussions held, before the Sec-
tions, the annual Reports of the British Association contain a large mass
of valuable matter of another class. It was an early practice of the Associa-
tion, a practice that might weU be further developed, to call occasionally for
a special report on some particular branch of science from a man eminently
(jualified for the task. The reports received in compliance with these invita-
tions have all done good service in their time, and they remain permanently
useful as landmarks in the history of science. Some of them have led to
vast practical results ; others of a more abstract character are valuable to
this day as powerful and instructive condensations and expositions of the
branches of science to which they relate. I cannot better illustrate the two
kinds of efiicieucy realized in this department of the Association's work than
by referring to Cayley's Report on Abstract Dynamics * and Sabine's Report
on Terrestrial Magnetism t (1838).

To the great value of the former, personal experience of benefit received
enables me, and gratitude impels me, to testify. In a few pages full of
precious matter, the generalized dynamical equations of Lagrange, the
great principle evolved from Maupertuis' " least action " by Hamilton, and
the later developments and applications of the Hamiltonian principle by
other authors are described by Cayley so suggestively that the reading of
thousands of quarto pages of papers scattered through the Transactions of the
various learned Societies of Europe is rendered superfluous for any one who
desires only the essence of these investigations, with no more of detail than is
necessary for a thorough and practical understanding of the subject.

Sabine's Report of 1838 concludes with the following sentence : — " Yiewed
" in itself and its various relations, the magnetism of the earth cannot
" be counted less than one of the most important branches of the physical
" history of the planet we inhabit ; and we may feel quite assured tliat the
" completion of our knowledge of its distribution on the surface of the earth

* Eeport on the Recent Progress of Theoretical Dj'naiuics, by A. Cayley (Report of tlie
British Association 1857, p. 1).

t Eeport on tlio Variations of the Magnetic Intensity observed at different points of (lie
Earth's Surface, by Major Sabine, F.E.S. (forming part of the 7th Eeport of the Biitish
Association).

XC REPORT — 1871.

" would bo regarded by our contemporaries and by posterity as a fitting
" enterprise of a maritime people, and a worthy achievement of a nation
" which has ever sought to rank foremost in every arduous and honourable
" undertaking." An immediate result of this lleport was that the enterprise
which it xjroposed was recommended to the Government by a joint Committee
of the British Association and the lloyal Society with such success, that
Capt. James Eoss was sent in command of the ' Erebus ' and '■ Terror ' to
make a magnetic survey of the Antarctic regions, and to plant on his way
three Magnetical and Meteorological Observatories, at St. Helena, the Cape,
and Yan Diemen's Land. A vast mass of precious observations, made
chiefly on board ship, were brought home from this expedition. To deduce
the desired results from them, it was necessary to eliminate the disturbance
produced by the ship's magnetism ; and Sabine asked his friend Archibald
Smith to work out from Poisson's mathematical theory, then the only avail-
able guide, the formulae required for the purpose. This voluntary task
Smith executed skilfully and successfully. It was the beginning of a series
of labours carried on with most remarkable practical tact, with thorough
analytical skill, and with a rare extreme of disinterestedness, in the intervals
of an arduous profession, for the purpose of perfecting and simplifying the
correction of the mariner's compass — a problem which had become one of
vital importance for navigation, on account of the introduction of iron ships.
Edition after edition of the ' Admiralty Compass Manual ' has been pro-
duced by the able superintendent of the Compass Department, Captain
Evans, containing chapters of mathematical investigation and formulaj by
Smith, on which depend wholly the jsractical analysis of compass-obser-
vations, and rules for the safe use of the compass in navigation. I firmly
believe that it is to the thoroughly scientific method thus adopted by the
Admiralty, that no iron ship of Her Majesty's Navy has ever been lost
through errors of the compass. The 'British Admiralty Compass Manual'
is adopted as a guide by all the navies of the world. It has been translated
into llussian, German, and Portuguese ; and it is at present being translated
into French. The British Association may be gratified to know that the
possibility of navigating ironclad war-ships with safety depends on applica-
tion of scientific principles given to the world by three mathematicians,
Poisson, Airy, and Archibald Smith.

Eeturning to the science of terrestrial magnetism, we find in the Eeports
of early years of the British Association ample evidence of its diligent culti-
vation. Many of the chief scientific men of the day from England, Scotland,
and Ireland found a strong attraction to the Association in the facilities which
it afforded to thom for cooperating in their work on this subject. Lloyd,Phillips,
Eox, Eoss, and Sabine made magnetic observations all over Great Britain ;
and their results, collected by Sabine, gave for the first time an accurate and
complete survey of terrestrial magnetism over the area of this island. I am
informed by Professor Phillips that, in the beginning of the Association, Her-
schel, though a '•' sincere well-wisher," felt doubts as to the general utility and
probable success of the plan and purpose proposed ; but his zeal for terrestrial
magnetism broiight him from being merely a sincere well-wisher to join actively
and cordially in the work of the Association. " In 1838 he began to give efi"ec-
" tual aid in the great question of magnetical Observatories, and was indeed
" foremost among the supporters of that which is really Sabine's great work.
" At intervals, until about 1858, Herschel continued to give effectual aid."
Sabine has carried on his great work without intermission to the present
day ; thirty years ago he gave to Gauss a large part of the data required

ADDRESS. XCl

for working out the spherical harmonic analysis of terrestrial magnetism over
the whole earth. A recalculation of the harmonic analysis for the altered
state of terrestrial magnetism of the present time has been undertaken by
Adams. He writes to me that he has " already begun some of the iutroduc-
" tory work, so as to be ready when Sir Edward Sabine's Tables of the values
" of the Magnetic Elements deduced from obseryation are completed, at once
" to make use of them," and that he intends to take into account terms of
at least one order beyond those included by Gauss. The form in which
the requisite data are to be presented to him is a magnetic Chart of the
whole surface of the globe. Materials from scientific travellers of all
nations, from our home magnetic observatories, from the magnetic obser-
vatories of St. Helena, the Cape, Van Diemen's Land, and Toronto, and
from the scientific observatories of other countries have been brought to-
gether by Sabine. Silently, day after day, night after niglit, for a quarter
of a century he has toiled with one constant assistant always by his side
to reduce these observations and prepare for the great work. At this moment,
while we are here assembled, I believe that, in their quiet summer retirement
in Wales, Sir Edward and Lady Sabine are at work on the magnetic Chart
of the world. If two years of life and health are granted to them, science
will be provided with a' key which must powerfully conduce to the ultimate
opening up of one of the most refractory enigmas of cosiuical physics, the
cause of terrestrial magnetism.

To give any sketch, however slight, of scientific investigation performed
during the past year would, even if I were competent for the task,_far ex-
ceed the limits within which I am confined on the present occasion. _A
detailed account of work done and knowledge gained in science Britain
ought to have every year. The Journal of the Chemical Society and the
Zoological Eecord do excellent- service by giving abstracts of all papers
published in their departments. The admirable example afforded by the
German "Fortschritte" and "Jahresbericht" is before us; but hitherto, so far
as I know, no attempt has been made to foUow it in Britain. It is true that
several of the annual volumes of the Jahresbericht were translated ; but a
translation, published necessarily at a considerable interval of time after the
original, cannot supply the want. An independent British publication is for
many obvious reasons desirable. The two publications, in German and
English, would, both by their differences and by their agreements, illustrate
the progress of science more correctly and usefuUy than any single work
could do, even if appearing simultaneously in the two languages. It seems
to me that to promote the establishment of a British Year Book of Science is
an object to which the powerful action of the British Association would be
thoroughly appropriate.

In referrhig to recent advances in several branches of science, I simply
choose some of those which have struck me as most notable.

Accurate and minute measurement seems to the non-scientific imagination
a less lofty and dignified work than looking for something nev/. But nearly
all the grandest discoveries of science have been but the rewards of accurate
measurement and patient long-continued labour in the minute sifting of
numerical results. The popular idea of Newton's grandest discovery is that
the theory of gravitation flashed into his mind, and so the discovery was
made. It was by a long train of mathematical calculation, founded on
results accumulated through prodigious toil of practical astronomers, that
Newton first demonstrated the forces urging the planets towards the Sun,
determined the magnitudes of those forces, and discovered that a force fol-

Xcii REPORT — 1871.

lowing the same law of variation with distance urges the Moon towards the
Earth. Then first, we may suppose, came to him the idea of the universality of
gravitation ; butwhen he attempted to compare the magnitude of the force on the
Moon with the magnitude of the force of gravitation of a heavy body of equal
mass at the earth's surface, he did not find the agreement which the law he
was discovering required. Not for years after would he publish his discovery
as made. It is recounted that, being present at a meeting of the Royal Society,
he heard a paper read, describiug geodesic measurement by Picard which
led to a serious correction of the previously accepted estimate of the Earth's
radius. This was what Newton required. He went home with the result,
and commenced liis calculations, but felt so much agitated that he handed
over the arithmetical work to a friend : then (and not when, sitting in a
garden, he saw an apple fall) did he ascertain that gravitation keeps the Moon
in her orbit.

Faraday's discovery of specific inductive capacity, which inaugurated the
new philosophy, tending to discard action at a distance, was the result of
minute and accurate measurement of electric forces.

Joule's discovery of thermo-dynamic law through the regions of electro-
chemistry, electro-magnetism, and elasticity of gases was based on a delicacy
of thermometry which seemed simply impossible to some of the most dis-
tinguished chemists of the day.

Andrews' discovery of the continuity between the gaseous and liquid states
was worked out by many years of laborious and minute measurement of phe-
nomena scarcely sensible to the naked eye.

Great service has been done to science by the British Association in pro-
moting accurate measurement in various subjects. The origin of exact
science in terrestrial magnetism is traceable to Gauss' invention of methods
of finding the magnetic intensity in absolute measure. I have spoken of
the great work done by the British Association in carrying out the ap-
plication of this invention in all parts of the world. Gauss' colleague in
the German Magnetic Union, AVebcr, extended the practice of absolute
measurement to electric currents, the resistance of an electric conductor,
and the electromotive force of a galvanic element. He showed the rela-
tion between electrostatic and electromagnetic units for absolute mea-
surement, and made the beautiful discovery that resistance, in absolute elec-
tromagnetic measure, and the reciprocal of resistance, or, as we call it, " con-
ducting power," in electrostatic measure, are each of them a velocity. He
made an elaborate and difficult series of experiments to measure the velocity
which is equal to the conducting power, in electrostatic measure, and at the
same time to the resistance in electromagnetic measure, in one and the same
conductor. Maxwell, in making the first advance along a road of which
Faraday was the pioneer, discovered that this velocity is physically related to
the velocity of light, and that, on a certain hypothesis regarding the elastic
medium concerned, it may be exactly equal to the velocity of light. Weber's
measurement verifies approximately this equality, and stands in science
monumentmn cere perennius, celebrated as having suggested this most grand
theory, and as having afforded the first quantitative test of the recondite
properties of matter on which the relations between electricity and light
depend. A remeasurcment of Weber's critical velocity on a new plan by Max-
well himself, and the important correction of the velocity of light by Fou-
cault's laboratory experiments, verified by astronomical observation, seem to
show a still closer agreement. The most accurate possible determination of
Weber's critical velocity is just now a primary object of the Association's

ADDRESS. XCllI

Committee on Electric Measurement ; and it is at present premature to specu-
late as to the closeness of the agreement between that Telocity and the
velocity of light. This leads me to remark how much science, even in its
most lofty speculations, gains in return for benefits conferred by its applica-
tion to promote the social and material welfare of man. Those who perilled
and lost their money in the original Atlantic Telegraph were impelled and
supported by a sense of the grandeur of their enterprise, and of the world-
wide benefits whicli must flow from its success ; they were at the same time
not unmoved by the beauty of the scientific problem directly, presented to
them ; but they little thought that it was to be immediately, through their
work, that the scientific world was to be instructed in a long-neglected and
discredited fundamental electric discovery of Faraday's, or that, again, when
the assistance of the British Association was invoked to supply their elec-
tricians with methods for absolute measurement (which tliey found necessary
to secure the best economical return for their expenditure, and to obviate
and detect those faults in their electric material which had led to disaster),
they were laying the foundation for accurate electric measurement in every
scientific laboratory in the world, and initiating a train of investigation whicli
now sends up branches into the loftiest regions and subtlest ether of natural
philosophy. Long may the British Association continue a bond of union,
and a medium for the interchange of good offices between science and the
world !

The greatest achievement yet made in molecular theory of the proper-
ties of matter is the Kinetic theory of Gases, shadowed forth by Lucretius,
definitely stated by Daniel Bernoulli, largely developed by Herapath, made
a reality by Joule, and worked out to its present advanced state by Clausius
and Maxwell. Joule, from his dynamical equivalent of heat, and his expe-
riments upon the heat produced by the condensation of gas, was able to
estimate the average velocity of the ultimate molecules or atoms composing
it. His estimate for hydrogen was 6225 feet per second at temperature 60°
Fahr., and 6055 feet per second at the freezing-point. Clausius took fully
into account the impacts of molecules on one another, and the kinetic energy
of relative motions of the matter constituting an individual atom. He in-
vesfigated the relation between their diameters, the number in a given
space, and the mean length of path from impact to impact, and so gave the
foundation for estimates of the absolute dimensions of atoms, to which I shall
refer later. He explained the slowness of gaseous diffusion by the mutual
impacts of the atoms, and laid a secure foundation for a complete theory of
the diffusion of fluids, previously a most refractory enigma. The deeply
penetrating genius of MaxweU brought in viscosity and thermal conductivity,
and thus completed the dynamical explanation of aU the known properties
of gases, except their electric resistance and brittleness to electric force.

No such comprehensive molecular theory had ever been even imagined
before the nineteenth century. Definite and complete in its area as it
is, it is but a well-drawn part of a great chart, in which aU physical
science wiU be represented with every property of matter shown in dyna-
mical relation to the whole. The prospect we now have of an early
completion of this chart is based on the assumption of atoms. But there
can be no permanent satisfaction to the mind in explaining heat, light, elas-
ticity, diffusion, electricity and magnetism, in gases, liquids, and solids, and
describing precisely the relations of these different states of matter to one
another by statistics of gxeat numbers of atoms, when the properties of the
atom itself are simply assumed. When the theory, of which we have the first

xciv REPOKT— 1871.

instalment in Clausius and Maxwell's work, is complete, wo are but brought
face to face with a superlatively grand question, what is the inner me-
chanism of the atom ?

In the answer to this question we must find the explanation not only
of the atomic elasticity, by which the atom is a chronometi-ic vibrator ac-
cording to Stokes's discovery, but of chemical affinity and of the differences
of quality of different chemical elements, at present a mere mystery in
science. Helmholtz's exquisite theory of vortex-motion in au incompressible
frictionlcss liquid has been suggested as a finger-post, pointing a way
which may possibly lead to a fall understanding of the properties of atoms,
carrying out the grand conception of Lucretius, who " admits no subtle
" ethers, no variety of elements with fiery, or watery, or light, or heavy
" principles ; nor supposes light to be one thing, fire another, electricity a
" fluid, magnetism a vital principle, but treats all phenomena as mere pro-
" perties or accidents of simple matter." This statement I take from
an admirable paper on the atomic theory of Lucretius, which appeared in
the ' North British Eeview ' for March 1868, containing a most interesting
and instructive summary of ancient and modern doctrine regarding atoms.
Allow me to read from that article one other short passage finely describing
the present aspect of atomic theory : — " The existence of the chemical
" atom, already quite a complex little world, seems very probable ; and
" the description of the Lucretian atom is wonderfully applicable to it. "VVe
<' are not wholly without hope that the real weight of each such atom may
" some day be known — not merely the relative weight of the several atoms,
<' but the number in a given volume of any material ; that the form and
" motion of the parts of each atom and the distances by which they are
" separated may be calculated ; that the motions by which they produce heat,
" electricity, and light may be illustrated by exact geometrical diagrams ; and
" that the fundamental properties of the intermediate and possibly constituent
" medium may be arrived at. Then the motion of planets and music of the
" spheres will be neglected for a while in admiration of the maze in Avhich
" the tiny atoms run."

Even before this was written some of the anticipated results had been par-
tially attained. Loschmidt in Vienna had sho^wn, and not much latter Stoncy
independently in England showed, how to deduce from Clausius and Max-
well's kinetic theory of gases a superior limit to the number of atoms in a
given measurable space. I was unfortunately quite unaware of what Loschmidt
and Stoney had done when I made a similar estimate on the same founda-
tion, and communicated it to ' Nature ' in an article on " The Size of
Atoms." But questions of personal priority, however interesting they may be
to the persons concerned, sink into insignificance in the prospect of any gain
of deeper insight into the secrets of nature. The triple coincidence of inde-
pendent reasoning in this ease is valuable as confirmation of a conclusion
violently contravening ideas and opinions which had been almost universally
held reo-arding the dimensions of the molecular structure of matter. Che-
mists and other naturalists had been in the habit of evading questions as to
the hardness or indivisibility of atoms by virtually assuming them to bo in-
finitely small and infinitely numerous. We must now no longer look upon
the atom, with Boscovich, as a mystic point endowed with inertia and the
attribute of attracting or repelhng other such centres with forces depending
upon the intervening distances (a supposition only tolerated with the tacit
assumption that the inertia and attraction of each atom is infinitely small and
the number of atoms infinitely great), nor can wo agree with those who have

ADDKESS. XCt

attributed to the atom occupation of space with infinite hardness and strength
(incredible in any finite body) ; but we must realize it as a piece of matter
of measurable dimensions, with shape, motion, and laws of action, intelligible
subjects of scientific investigation.

The prismatic analysis of light discovered by Newton was estimated by
himself as being " the oddest, if not the most considerable, detection which
" hath hitherto been made in the operations of nature."

Had he not been deflected from the subject, he could not have failed
to obtain a pure spectrum ; but this, with the inevitably consequent
discovery of the dark lines, was reserved for the nineteenth century.
Our fundamental knowledge of the dark lines is due solely to Praun-
hofer. Wollastou saw them, but did not discover them. Ijrewster laboured
long and well to perfect the prismatic analysis of sunlight ; and his observa-
tions on the dark bands produced by the absorption of interposed gases and
vapours laid important foundatioiis for the grand superstructure which he
scarcely lived to see. Piazzi Smyth, by spectroscopic observation performed
on the Peak of Tenei-iffe, added greatly to our knowledge of the dark lines
produced in the solar spectrum by the absorption of our own atmosphere.
The prism became an instrirment for chemical qualitative analysis in the
hands of Fox Talbot and Herschel, who first showed how, throirgh it, the
old "blowpipe test" or generally the estimation of substances from the
colours which they give to flames, can be prosecuted with an accuracy
and a discriminating power not to be attained when the colour is judged
by the unaided eye. But the application of this test to solar and stellar
chemistry had never, I believe, been suggested, either directly or indirectly,
by any other naturalist, when Stokes taught it to me in Cambridge at some
time prior to the summer of 1S52. The observational and experimental
foundations on which he built were : —

(1 ) The discovery by Praunhofer of a coincidence between his double dark
line D of the solar spectrum and a double bright line which he observed in
the spectra of ordinary artificial flames.

(2) A very rigorous experimental test of this coincidence by Prof. W. H,
Miller, which showed it to be accurate to an astonishing degree of minuteness.

(3) The fact that the yellow light given out when salt is thrown on burning
spirit consists almost solely of the two nearly identical qualities which con-
stitute that double bright line.

(4) Observations made by Stokes himself, which showed the bright line D
to be absent in a candle-flame when the wick was snuffed clean, so as not to
project into the luminous envelope, and from an alcohol flame when the spirit
was burned in a watch-glass. And

(5) Poucault's admirable discovery (L'Institut, Peb. 7, 1849) that the
voltaic arc between charcoal points is "a medium which emits the rays D
" on its own account, and at the same time absorbs them when they come
" from another quarter."

The conclusions, theoretical and practical, which Stokes taught me, and
which I gave regularly afterwards in my public lectures in the University of
Glasgow, were : —

(1) That the double line D, whether bright or dark, is due to vapour of
sodium.

(2) That the ultimate atom of sodium is susceptible of regular elastic vi-
brations, like those of a tuning-fork or of stringed musical instruments ; that
like an instrument with two strings tuned to approximate unison, or an ap-
proximately circular clastic disk, it has two fundamental notes or vibrations

XCvi KEPORT 1871.

of approximately equal pitch ; and that the periods of these vibrations are
precisely the periods of the t'wo slightly different yellow lights constituting
the double bright line D.

(3) That when vapour of sodium is at a high enough temperature to be-
come itself a source of light, each atom executes these two fundamental
vibrations simultaneously ; and that therefore the light proceeding from it is
of the two qunlitics constituting the double bright line D.

(4) That when vapour of sodium is present in space across which light
from another source is propagated, its atoms, according to a weU-known
general principle of dynamics, are set to vibrate in either or both of those
fundamental modes, if some of the incident light is of one or other of their
periods, or some of one and some of the other ; so that the energy of the
waves of those particular qualities of light is converted into thermal vibra-
tions of the medium and dispersed in all directions, while light of all other
qualities, even though very nearly agreeing with them, is transmitted with
comparatively no loss.

(5) That Fraunhofers double dark line D of solar and stellar spectra is due
to the presence of vapour of sodium in atmospheres surroiinding the sun
and those stars in whose spectra it had been observed.

(G) That other vapours than sodium are to be found in the atmospheres
of sun and stars by searcliing for substances producing in the spectra of
artificial flames bright lines coinciding with other dark lines of the solar
and stellar spectra than the Fraunhofer line D.

The last of these propositions I felt to be confirmed (it was perhaps
partlj' suggested) by a striking and beautiful experiment admirably adapted
for lecture illustrations, due to Foucault, which had been shown to me by
M. Duboscque Soleil, and the Abbe Moigno, in Paris in the month of
October 1850. A prism and lenses were arranged to throw upon a screen
an approximately pure spectrum of a vertical electric are between charcoal
poles of a powerful battery, the lower one of which was hollowed like a cup.
When pieces of copper and pieces of zinc were separately thrown into the
cup, the spectrum exhibited, in perfectly definite positions, magnificent well-
marked bauds of difiercnt colours characteristic of the two metals. AVlien
a piece of brass, compounded of copper and zinc, was put into the cup,
the spectrum showed all the bands, each precisely in the place in which
it had been seen when one metal or the other had been used separately.

It is much to be regretted that this great generalization was not pub-
lished to the world twenty years ago. I say this, not because it is to bo

o

regretted that Angstrom should have the credit of having in 1853 pub-
lished independently the statement that " an incandescent gas emits lumi-
" nous rays of the same refrangibility as those which it can absorb " ; or that
Balfour Stewart should have been unassisted by it when, coming to the
subject from a very different point of view, he made, in his extension of the
"Theory of Exchanges"*, the still wider generalization that the radiating
power of every kind of substanee is equal to its absorbing power for every
kind of ray ; or that KirchhofF also should have in 1859 independently dis-
covered the same proposition, and shown its application to solar and stellar
chemistry ; but because we might now be in possession of the inconceivable
riches of astronomical results which we expect fi-om the next ten years'
investigation by spectrum analysis, had Stokes given his theory to the
world when it first occurred to him.

To Kirchhoff belongs, I believe, solely the great credit of having first
* Edin. Transactions, 1858-59.

ADDRESS. XCVll

actually souglit for and found other metals than sodium in the sun by the
method of spectrum analysis. His publication of October 1859 inaugurated
the practice of solar and stellar chemistry, aud gave spectrum analysis an
impulse to which in a great measure is due its splendidly successful cultivation
by the labours of many able investigators within the last ten years.

o

To prodigious and wearing toil of Kirchhoff himself, and of Angstrom, wc
owe large-scale maps of the solar spectrum, incomjjarably superior in minute-
ness and accuracy of delineation to any thing ever attempted previously. These
maps now constitute the standards of reference for all workers in the field.
Pliickcr and Hittorf opened ground in advancing the physics of spectrum
analysis and made the important discovery of changes in the spectra of
ignited gases produced by changes in the physical condition of the gas. The
scientific value of the meetings of the British Association is well illustrated
by the fact that it was through conversation with Pliicker at the Newcastle
meeting that Lockyer was first led into the investigation of the eftects of varied
pressure on the quality of the light emitted by glowing gas which he and
Frankland have prosecuted with such admirable success. Scientific wealth
tends to accumulation according to the law of compound interest. Every addi-
tion to knowledge of properties of matter supplies the naturalist with new
instrumental means for discovering and interpreting phenomena of nature,
which in their turn aff'ord foundations for fresh generahzatious, bringing
gains of permanent value into the great storehouse of philosophy. Thus
Frankland, led, from observing the want of brightness of a candle burning in
a tent on the summit of Mont Blanc, to scrutinize Davy's theory of fiame,
discovered tliat brightness Avithout incandescent solid particles is given to a
purely gaseous flame by augmented pressure, and that a dense ignited gas
gives a spectrum comparable with that of the light from an incandescent solid
or liquid. Lockyer joined him; aud the two found that every incandescent
substance gives a continuous spectrum — that an incandescent gas under
varied pi'essure gives bright bars across the continuous spectrum, some of
which, from the sharp, hard and fast hues observed where the gas is in a
state of extreme attenuation, broaden out on each side into nebulous bands
as the density is increased, and are ultimately lost in the continuous spec-
trum when the condensation is pushed on till the gas becomes a fluid no
longer to be called gaseous. Moi-c recently they have examined the influence
of temperature, and have obtained results which seem to show that a highly
attenuated gas, which at a high temperature gives several bright lines, gives
a smaller and smaller number of lines, of sufiiciont brightness to be visible,
when the temperature is lowered, the density being kept unchanged. I cannot
refrain here from remarking how admirably this beaiitiful investigation har-
monizes with Andrews' great discovery of continuity between the gaseous
and liquid states. Such things make the life-blood of science. In contem-
plating them we feel as if led out from narrow waters of scholastic dogma to
a refreshing excursion on the broad and deep ocean of truth, where we learn
from the wonders wc see that there are endlessly more and more glorious
wonders still unseen.

Stokes' dynamical theory supplies the key to the i^hilosophy of Frank-
land and Lockyer's discovery. Any atom of gas when struck and left to
itself vibrates with perfect purity its fundamental note or notes. In a
highly attenuated gas each atom is very rarely in collision Avith other
atoms, and therefore is nearly at all times in a state of true vibration.
Hence the spectrum of a highly attenuated gas consists of one or more
perfectly sharp bright lines, with a scarcely perceptible continuous gradation

xcviii REPORT — 1871.

of prismatic colour. In. denser gas each atom is frequently in collision, but
still is for much more time free, iu intervals between collisions, than engaged
in collision ; so that not only is the atom itself thrown sensibly out of tuue
during a sensible proportion of its whole time, but the confused jangle of
vibrations in every variety of period during the actual collision becomes more
considerable in its influence. Hence bright lines in the spectrum broaden
out somewhat, and the continuous spectrum becomes less faint. In still
denser gas each atom may be almost as much time in collision as free, and
the spectrum then consists of broad nebulous bauds crossing a continuous
spectrum of considerable brightness, "\^^hen the medium is so dense that
each atom is alwaj's in collision, that is to say never free from influence of
its neighbours, the spectrum wiU. generally be continuous, and may present
little or no ap])earance of bands, or even of maxima of brightness. In this
condition the fluid can be no longer regarded as a gas, and we must judge
of its relation to the vaporous or liquid states according to the critical
conditions discovered by Andi'cws.

While these great investigations of properties of matter were going on,
naturalists were not idle with the newly recognized power of the spectro-
scope at their service. Chemists soon followed the example of Bunsen
in discovering new metals in terrestrial matter by the old blow-pipo and
prism test of Fox Talbot and Herschel. Biologists applied spectrum analysis
to animal and vegetable chemistry, and to sanitary investigations. But
it is in astronomy that spectroscopic research has been carried on with
the greatest activity, and been most richly rewarded with results. The
chemist and the astronomer have joined their forces. An astronomical ob-
servatory has now, appended to it, a stock of reagents such as hitherto was
only to be found in the chemical laboratory, A devoted corps of volunteers
of all nations, whose motto might well be ^ibique, have directed their artil-
lery to every region of the universe. The sun, the spots on his surface,
the corona and the red and yellow prominences seen round him during
total eclipses, the moon, the planets, comets, auroras, nebulae, white
stars, yellow stars, red stars, variable and temporary stars, each tested by the
prism was compelled to show its distinguishing colours. Earely before in
the history of science has enthusiastic perseverance directed by penetra-
tive genius produced within ten years so brilliant a succession of dis-
coveries. It is not merely the chemistry of sun and stars, as first sug-
gested, that is subjected to analysis by the spectroscope. Their whole laws
of being are now subjects of direct investigation ; and already we have
glimpses of their evolutional history through the stuj)endous power of this
most subtle and delicate test. We had only solar and stellar chemistry;
we now have solar and stellar physiology.

It is an old idea that the colour of a star may be influenced by its motion
relatively to the eye of the spectator, so as to be tinged with red if it moves
from the earth, or blue if it moves towards the earth. William Allen Miller,
Huggins, and JIaxwell showed how, by aid of the spectroscope, this idea may
be made the foundation of a method of measuring the relative velocity with
which a star approaches to or recedes from the earth. The principle is, first to
identify, if possible, one or more of the lines in the spectrum of the star, with a
line or lines in the spectrum of sodium, or some other terrestrial substance,
and then (by observing the star and the artificial light simultaneously by
the same spectroscope) to find the difference, if any, between their refran-
gibilities. From this difference of refrangibility the ratio of the periods of
the two lights is calculated, according to data determined by Fraunhofer from

ADDRESS. XCIX

comparisons between the positions of the dark lines in the prismatic spectrum
and in his own " interference spectrum " (produced by substituting for the
prism a fine grating). A first comparatively rough application of the test by
Miller and Huggins to a large number of the principal stars of our skies,
including Aldcbaran, a Ononis, ft Pegasi, Sirius, n Lyras, CapeUa, Arcturus,
Pollux, Castor (which they had observed rather for the chemical purpose than
for this), proved that not one of them had so great a velocity as 315 kilometres
per second to or from the earth, which is a most momentous result in respect
to cosmical dynamics. Afterwards Huggins made special observations of
the velocity test, and succeeded in making the measurement in one case,
that of Sirius, which he then found to be receding from the earth at the rate
of G(j kilometres per second. This, corrected for the velocity of the earth at
the time of the observation, gave a velocity of Sirius, relatively to the Sun,
amounting to 47 kilometres per second. The minuteness of the difference to
be measured, and the smallness of the amount of light, even when the brightest
star is observed, renders the observation extremely difficult. Still, with
such great skill as Mr. Huggins has brought to bear on the investigation,
it can scarcely be doubted that velocities of many other stars may be
measured. "What is now wanted is, certainly not greater skill, perhaps not
even more 2}owerful instruments, but more instruments and more ohservers.
Lockyer's applications of the velocity test to the relative motions of different
gases in the Sun's photosphere, spots, chromosjihere, and chromosphcric pro-
minences, and his observations of the varying spectra presented by the same
substance as it moves from one position to another in the Sun's atmosphere,
and his interpretations of these observations, according to the laboratory
results of Frankland and himself, go far towards confirming the conviction
that in a few years all the marvels of tlie Sun will be dynamically explained
according to known properties of matter.

During six or eight precious minutes of time, spectroscopes have been ap-
plied to the solar atmosphere and to the corona seen round the dark disk of
the Moon eclipsing the Sun. Some of the wonderful results of such obser-
vations, made in India on the occasion of the eclipse of August 1808, were
described by Professor Stokes in a previous address. Yaluablo results have,
through tlie liberal assistance given by the British and American Govern-
ments, been obtained also from the total eclipse of last December, notwith-
standing a generally unfavourable condition of weather. It seems to have
been proved that at least some sensible part of the light of the "corona" is a
terrestrial atmospheric halo or dispersive reflection of the light of the glow-
ing hydrogen and " helium"* round the sun. I believe I may say, on the
present occasion when preparation must again be made to iitilize a total
eclipse of the Sun, that the British Association confidently trusts to our
Government exercising the same wise liberality as heretofore in the interests
of science.

The old nebular hypothesis supposes the solar system, and other similar
systems through the universe which we see at a distance as stars, to have
originated in the condensation of fiery nebulous matter. This hypothesis
was invented before the discovery of thermo-dynamics, or the nebulic v\'ould
not have been supposed to be fiery ; and the idea seems never to have
occurred to any of its inventors or early supporters that the matter, the con-
densation of Avhich they supposed to constitute the Sun and stars, could have

* Frankland and Loekyer find the yellow prominences to giire a very decided bright line
not far from D, but liitherto not identified with any terrestrial flame. It seema to indicate
a new substance, wliieh they propose to call Helium.

C REPORT — 1871.

been other than fiery in the beginning. Mayer first suggested that the heat
of the Sun may be due to gravitation : but he supposed meteors falling in
to keep always generating the heat which is radiated year by year from the
Sun. Helmholtz, on the other hand, adopting the nebular hypothesis, showed
in 1854 that it was not necessary to suppose the nebulous matter to have
been originally fiery, but that mutual gravitation between its parts may
have generated the heat to which the present high temperature of the Sun is
due. Turther he made the important observations that the potential energy
of gravitation in the Sun is even now far from exhausted ; but that with
further and further shrinking more and more heat is to bo generated, and
that thus we can conceive the Sun even now to possess a sufficient store of
energy to produce heat and light, almost as at present, for several million
years of time future. It ought, however, to be added that this condensation
can only follow from cooling, and therefore that Helmholtz's gravitational
explanation of future Sun-heat amounts really to showing that the Sun's
thermal capacity is enormously greater, in virtue of the mutual gravitation
between the parts of so enormous a mass, than the sum of the thermal capa-
cities of separate and smaller bodies of the same material and same total
mass. Eeasons for adopting this theory, and the consequences which follow
from it, are discussed in an article " On the Age of the Sun's Heat," published
in ' Macmillan's Magazine ' for March 1862.

For a few years Mayer's theor}- of solar heat had seemed to me probable ;
but I had been led to regard it as no longer tenable, because I had been in
the first place driven, by consideration of the very approximate constancy of
the Earth's period of revolution round the Sun for the last 2000 years, to
conclude that " The principal source, perhaps the sole appreciably eftective
" source of Sun-heat, is in bodies circulating round the Sun at present inside
" the Earth's orbit"* ; and because Le Verricr's researches on the motion of
the planet Mercury, though giving evidence of a sensible influence attributable
to matter circulating as a great number of small planets within his orbit
round the Sun, showed that the amoimt of matter that could possibly be as-
sumed to circulate at any considerable distance from the Sun must be very
small ; and therefore " if the meteoric influx taking place at present is
" enough to pi-oduce any appreciable portion of the heat radiated away, it
" must be supposed to be from matter circulating round the Sun, within very
" short distances of his surface. The density of this meteoric cloud would
" have to be siipposed so great that comets could scarcely have escaped as
" comets actually have escaped, showing no discoverable effects of resistance,
" after passing his surface within a distance equal to one-eighth of his radius.
" All things considered, there seems little probability in the hypothesis that
" solar radiation is compensated to any appreciable degree, by heat generated
" by meteors falling in, at pi-esent ; and, as it can be shown that no chemical
" theory is tenablef, it must be concluded as most probable that the Sun is
" at present mere an incandescent liquid mass cooling "J.

Thus on purelj- astronomical grounds was I long ago led to abandon as
very improbable the hypothesis that the Sun's heat is supplied dynamically
from year to year by the influx of meteors. Eut now spectrum analysis gives
proof finally conclusive against it.

Each meteor circulating round the Sun must fall in along a very gradual

* "On the meclianical energies of the Solar System." Transactions of the Eoyal Society
of Edinburgh, 1854 ; and Phil. Mag. 1854, second half year,
•j- " Mechanical Energies " &c.
X "Age of the Sun's Heat" (MacmilLan's Magazine, March 1862).

ADDRESS. CI

spiral path, mid beforo roacliing the Sim must liave been for a long time
exposed to an cuorinoiis heating effect from liis radiatiou when very near,
and must thus have been driven into vapour before aetuall}^ falling into the
Sun. Thus, if Mayer's hypothesis is corroyt, friction between vortices of
meteoric vapours and the Sun's atmosphere must be the immediate cause of
solar heat ; and the velocity with which these vapours circulate round equa-
torial parts of the Sun must amount to 435 kilometres per second. The
spectrum test of velocity applied by Lockyci' sliowed but a twentieth part of
this amount as the greatest observed relative velocity between different
vapours in the Sun's atmosphere.

At the first Liverpool Meeting of the British Association (1854), in ad-
vancing a gravitational theory to account for all the heat, light, and motions
of the universe, I urged that the immediately antecedent condition of the
matter of which the Sun and Planets were formed, not being fiery, could not
have been gaseous ; but that it probably was solid, and may have been like
the meteoric stones which we still so frequently meet with through space.
The discovery of Huggins, that the light of the nebute, so far as hitherto
sensible to us, proceeds from incandescent hydrogen and nitrogen gases, and
that the heads of comets also give us light of incandescent gas, seems at first
sight literally to fulfil that part of the nebular hypothesis to which I had
objected. But a solution, which seems to me in the highest degree probable,
has been suggested by Tait. He supposes that it may be by ignited gaseous
exhalations proceeding from the collision of meteoric stones that Nebnlte and
the heads of comets show themselves to us ; and he suggested, at a former
meeting of the Association, that experiments should be made for the purpose
of applying spectrum analysis to the light which has been observed in
gunnery trials, such as those at Shoeburyuess, when iron stiikes against iron
at a great velocity, but varied by substituting for the iron various solid
materials, metallic or stony. Hitherto this suggestion has not been acted
upon ; but surely it is one the carrying out of which ought to be pi'omoted
by the British Association.

Most important steps have been recently made towards the discovery of the
nature of comets, establishing with nothing short of certainty the truth of a
h)'pothesis which had long appeared to me probable, that they consist of groups
of meteoric stones, accounting satisfactorily for the light of the nucleus,
and giving a simple and rational explanation of phenomena presented by
the tails of comets which had been regarded by the greatest astronomers as
almost preternaturally marvellous. The meteoric hypothesis to which I have
referred remained a mere hypothesis (I do not know that it was ever even
published) until, in 1866, Schiaparelli calculated, from observations on the
August meteors, an orbit for these bodies which he found to agree almost
perfectly with the orbit of the great comet of 1802 as calculated by Oppolzer ;
and so discovered and demonstrated that a comet consists of a group of
meteoric stones. Professor Xewton, of Yale College, United States, by examin-
ing ancient records, ascertained that in periods of about thirty-three years,
since the year 902, there have been exceptionally brilliant displays of the
November meteors. It had long been believed that these interesting visi-
tants came from a train of small detached planets circulating round the Sun
all in nearly the same orbit, and constituting a belt analogous to Saturn's
ring, and that the reason for the comparatively large number of meteors
which we observe annually about the 14th of November is, that at that
time the earth's orbit cuts through the supposed meteoric belt. Professor
Newton concluded from his investigation that there is a denser part of

1871. h

p>'

REPORT— 1871.

the group of meteors which extends over a portion of the orbit so great
as to occupy about one-tenth ,or one-fifteenth of the periodic time in
passing any particular point, and gave a choice of five different periods for
the revolution of this meteoric stream round the sun, any one of which would
satisfy his statistical result. He further concluded that the line of nodes
(that is to say, the line in which the plane of the meteoric belt cuts the plane
of the Earth's orbit) has a progressive sidereal motion of about 52"-4 per
annum. Here, then, was a splendid problem for the physical astronomer ;
and, happily, one well qualified for the task, took it up. Adams, by the
application of a beautiful method invented by Gauss, found that of the five
periods allowed by Newton just one permitted the motion of the line of nodes
to be explained by the disturbing influence of Jupiter, Saturn, and other
planets. The period chosen on these grounds is 33| years. The inves-
tigation showed further that the form of the orbit is a long ellipse, giving
for shortest distance from the Sun 145 million kilometres, and for longest
distance 2895 million kilometres. Adams also worked out the longitude
of the perihelion and the inclination of the orbit's plane to the plane of the
ecliptic. The orbit which he thus found agreed so closely with that of
Temple's Comet I. 1866 that he was able to identify the comet and the
meteoric belt *. The same conclusion had been pointed out a few weeks
earlier by Schiaparelli, from calculations by himself on data supplied by
direct observations on the meteors, and independently by Peters from calcu-
lations by Lcverrier on the same foundation. It is therefore thoroughly
established that Temple's Comet 1. 1806 consists of an eUiijtic train of minute
planets, of which a few thousands or millions fall to the earth annually about
the 14th of November, when we cross their track. We have probably not
yet passed through the very nucleus or densest part ; but thirteen times, in
Octobers and Novembers, from October 13, a.d. 902, to November 14, 1866
inclusive (this last time having been correctly predicted by Prof Newton),
Ave have passed through a part of the belt greatly denser than the average.
The densest part of the train, when near enough to us, is visible as the head
of the comet. This astounding result, taken along mth Huggins's spectro-
scopic observations on the light of the heads and tails of comets, confirms
most strikingly Tait's theory of comets, to which I have already referred ;
according to which the comet, a group of meteoric stones, is self-luminous
in its nucleus, on account of collisions among its constituents, while its " tail "
is merely a portion of the less dense part of the train illuminated by sunlight,
and visible or invisible to us according to circumstances, not only of density,
degree of illumination, and nearness, but also of tactic arrangement, as of a
flock of birds or the edge of a cloud of tobacco-smoke ! "Wliat prodigious diffi-
culties are to be explained, you may judge from two or three sentences which

* Signer Schiaparelli, Director of the Observatory of Milan, who, in a letter dated Slst
December LS66, pointed out that the elements of the orbit of the Angust Meteors, calcu-
lated from the observed position of their radiant point on tlic supposition of the orbit
being a very elongated ellipse, agreed very closely veith those of the orbit of Comet II. 1862,
calculated by Dr. Oppolzer. In the same letter Schiaparelli gives elements of the orbit
of the November meteors, but these veere not suiTiciently accurate to enable him to identify
the orbit vrith that of any knovfn comet. On the 21st January, 1867, M. Leverrier gave
more accurate elements of the orbit of the November Meteors, and in the ' Astronomiscbo
Nachricliten ' of January 9, Mr. C. F. W. Peters, of Altona, pointed out that these elements
closely agreed with those of Temple's Comet (I 18G6), calculated by Dr. Oppolzer; and
on February 2, Schiaparelli having recalculated the elements of the orbit of the meteors,
himself noticed the same agreement. Adams arrived quite independently at the conclusion
that the orbit of 33^ years period is the one which must be chosen out of the five indi-
cated by Prof. Nevrton. His calculations were sufficiently advanced before the letters

ADDRESS. cm

I shall read from Herschd's Astronomy, and from the fact that even SchiapareUi
seems still to believe in the repulsion. " There is, beyond question, some
" pi-ofound secret and mystery of nature concerned in the phenomenon of
" their tails. Perhaps it is not too much to hope that future observation,
" borrowing every aid from rational speculation, grounded on the progress of
" physical science generally (especially those branches of it which relate to
" the ethereal or imponderable elements), may enable us ere long to penetrate
'' this mystery, and to declare whether it is really matter in the ordinary
" acceptation of the term which is projected from their heads with such
" extraordinaiy velocity, and if not impelUcl, at least directed, in its course,
" by reference to the Sun, as its point of avoidance " *.

" In no respect is the question as to the materiality of the tail more for-
" cibly pressed on us for consideration than in that of the enormous sweep
" which it makes round the sun in perihelio in the manner of a straight and
" rigid rod, in defiance of the laiu of gravitation, nay, even, of the receivedlaws
"of motion"*.

" The projection of this ray . . . to so enormous a length, in a single day,
" conveys an impression of the intensity of the forces acting to produce such
'•■ a velocity of material transfer through space, such as no other natural phe-
" nomenon is capable of exciting. It is clear that if weJiave to deal here with
" matter, such as we conceive it (viz. possessing inertia^, at all, it must be under
" the dominion of forces incomparably more energetic than gravitation, and
" quite of a different nature " t.

Think, now, of the admirable simplicity with which Tait's beautiful " sea-
bird analogy," as it has been caUed, can explain all these phenomena.

The essence of science, as is weU illustrated by astronomy and
cosmical physics, consists in inferring antecedent conditions, and an-
ticipating future evolutions, from phenomena which have actually come
under observation. In biology the difficulties of successfully acting up
to this ideal are prodigious. The earnest naturalists of the present day
are, however, not appalled or paralyzed by them, and are struggling boldly
and laboriously to pass out of the mere " ISTatural History stage " of
their study, and bring zoology within the range of Xatural Philosophy.
A very ancient speculation, stiU clung to by many naturalists (so much so
that I have a choice of modern terms to quote in expressing it), supposes that,
under meteorological conditions very different from the present, dead matter
may have run together or crystallized or fermented into "germs of life,"
or " organic cells," or " protoplasm." But science brings a vast mass of in-
ductive evidence against this hypothesis of spontaneous generation, as you
have heard from my predecessor in the Presidential chair. Careful enough
scrutiny has, in every case up to the present day, discovered life as antecedent
to life. Dead matter cannot become living without coming under the influ-
ence of matter previously alive. This seems to me as sure a teaching of science
as the law of gravitation. I utterly repudiate, as opposed to all philosophical
uniformitarianism, the assumption of " different meteorological conditions " —
that is to say, somewhat different vicissitudes of temperature, pressure,

referred to appeared, to show that the other four orbits offered by Newton were inadmissible.
But the calculations to be gone through to find the secular motion of the node in such an
elongated orbit as that of the meteors were necessarily very long, so that they were not
completed till about March 1867. They were communicated in that mouth to the
Cambridge Philosophical Society, and in the month following to the Astronomical
Society.

* Herschel's Astronomy, § 599.

t Herschel's Astronomy, 10th edition, § 589.

7i2

civ KEPOllT— 1871.

moisture, gaseous atmosphere — to produce or to permit that to take place by
force or motion of dead matter alone, which is a direct contravention of what
seems to us biological law. I am prepared for the answer, " our code of
" biological law is an expression of our ignorance as weU as of our know-
" ledge." And I say yes : search for spontaneous generation out of inorganic
materials ; let any one not satisfied with the purely negative testimony, of
which we have now so much against it, throw himself into the inquiry. Such
investigations as those of Pasteur, Pouchet, and Bastian are among the most
interesting and momentous in the whole range of Natiu'al History, and their
results, whether positive or negative, must richly reward the most careful
and laborious experimenting. I confess to being deeply impressed by the
evidence put before us by Professor Huxley, and I am ready to adopt, as an
article of scientific faith, true through all space and through all time, that
life proceeds from life, and from nothing but life.

How, then, did life originate on the Earth ? Tracing the physical history
of the Earth backwards, on strict dynamical principles, we are brought to a
'red-hot melted globe on which no life could exist. Hence when the Earth
was first fit for life, there was no living thing on it. There were rocks solid and
disintegrated, water, air all round, warmed and illuminated bj^ a brilliant Sun,
ready to become a garden. Did grass and trees and flowers sjiring into exist-
ence, in all the fulness of ripe beauty, by a fiat of Creative Power? or did vege-
tation, growing up from seed sown, spread and nniltii^ly over the whole Earth ?
Science is bound, by the everlasting law of honour, to face fearlessly every pro-
blem which can fairly be presented to it. If a probable solution, consistent
with the ordinary course of nature, can be found, we must not invoke an abnor-
mal act of Creative Power. "When a lava stream flows down the sides of Vesu-
vius or Etna it quickly cools and becomes solid ; and after a few weeks or
years it teems Avith vegetable and auimal life, which for it originated by the
transport of seed and ova and by the migration of individual living creatures.
When a volcanic island springs up from the sea, and after a few years is
found clothed Avith vegetation, we do not hesitate to assume that seed has
been wafted to it through the air, or floated to it on rafts. Is it not possible,
and if possible, is it not probable, that the beginning of vegetable life on the
Earth is to be similarly explained ? Every year thousands, probably mil-
lions, of fragments of solid matter fall upon the Earth — Avhcnce came these
fragments ? What is the jn-cA-ious history of any one of them ? Was it created
in the beginning of time an amorphous mass ? This idea is so unacceptable
that, tacitly or explicitly, all men discord it. It is often assumed that all,
and it is certain that some, meteoric stones are fragments which had been
broken off' from greater masses and laimched free into space. It is as sure
that collisions must occur between great masses moving through space as it
is that ships, steered without inteUigcnce directed to prevent colhsion, could
not cross and recross the Atlantic for thousands of years Avith immunity from
collisions. When tAvo great masses come into collision in space it is certain
that a large part of each is melted ; but it seems also quite certain that in
many cases a large quantity of debris must be shot forth in all directions,
much of Avliich may have experienced no greater violence than individual
pieces of rock experience in a land-slip or in blasting by gunpowder. Should
the time Avhen this Earth comes into collision Avith another body, comparable
in dimensions to itself, be Avhcn it is i-lill clolhed as at present with vege-
tation, many great and small fragments carrying seed and living plants and
animals would undoubtedly be scattered throueh space. Hence and lecanse
Ave all confidently believe that there ore at pre.'^cnt, and have been frcm time

ADDRESS. CV

immemorial, many worlrls of life besides our own, wc must rcp,'ard it as pro-
bable in the highest degree that there are countless seed-bearing meteoric
stones moving about through space. If at the present instant no life existed
upon this Earth, one such stone falling upon it might, by what we blindly
call natural causes, lead to its becoming covered with vegetation. I am fully
conscious of the manj'^ scientific objections which may be urged against this
hypothesis ; but I believe them to be all answerable. I have already taxed
your patience too severely to allow me to think of discussing any of them on
the present occasion. The hypothesis that life originated on this Earth
through moss-grown fragments from the ruins of another world may seem
wild and visionarj^ ; all I maintain is that it is not unscientific.

From the Earth stocked with such vegetation as it could receive meteorieally,
to the Earth teeming with all the endless variety of plants and animals which
now inhabit it, the step is prodigious ; yet, according to the doctrine of conti-
nuity, most ably laid before the Association by a predecessor in this Chair
(Mr. Grove), all creatures noAV living on earth have proceeded by orderly
evolution from some such origin. Darwin concludes his great work on ' The
Origin of Species ' with the following words : — " It is interesting to contem-
" plate an entangled bank clothed with many plants of many kinds, with
'' birds singing on the bushes, with various insects flitting about, and with
" worms crawling through the damp earth, and to reflect that these elabo-
" rately constructed forms, so different from each other, and dependent on
*' each other in so complex a manner, have all been produced by laws acting
" around us." . . . . " There is grandeur in this view of life with its
" several powers, having been originally breathed by the Creator into a few
" forms or into one ; and that, whilst this planet has gone cycling on accord-
" ing to the fixed law of gravity, from so simple a beginning endless forms,
" most beautiful and most wonderful, have been and are being evolved."
With the feeling expressed in these two sentences I most cordially sympathize.
I have omitted two sentences which come between them, describing briefly
the hypothesis of " the origin «f species by natural selection," because I
have always felt that this hypothesis does not contain the true theory of
evolution, if evolution there has been, in biology. Sir John Herschcl, in
expressing a favourable judgment on the hypothesis of zoological evolution
(with, however, some reservation in respect to the origin of man), objected to
the doctrine of natural selection, that it was too like the Laputan method of
making books, and that it did not sufficiently take into account a continually
guiding and controlling intelligence. This seems to me a most valuable and
instructive criticism. I feel profoundly convinced that the argument of
design has been greatly too much lost sight of in recent zoological specula-
tions. Eeaction against the frivolities of teleology, such as are to be found,
not rarelj% in the notes of the learned commentators on Paley's ' Natural
Theology,' has I believe had a temporary eftcct in turning attention from the
solid and irrefragable argument so well put forward in that excellent old book.
But overpoweringly ■•■trong proofs of intelligent and benevolent design lie
all round us ; and if ever perplexities, whether metaphysical or scientific, turn
us away from them for a time, they come back upon us with irresistible
force, showing to us through Kature the influence of a free will, and teaching
us that all living beings depend en one ever-acting Creator and Euler.

REPORTS

ON

THE STATE OF SCIENCE.

E E P 0 R T S

ON

THE STATE OF SCIENCE.

Seventh Report of the Committee for Exploring Kent's Cavern, Devon-
shire,— the Committee consisting of Sir Charles Lyell, Bart.,
F.R.S., Professor Phillips, F.R.S., Sir John Lubbock, Bart,,
F.R.S., John Evans, F.R.S., Edward Vivian, George Busk,
F.R.S., William Boyd Dawkins, F.R.S., William Ayshford
Sanford, F.G.S., aracf William Pengelly, F.R.S. (Reporter).

During the year which has elapsed since the Sixth Eeport was sent in
(Liverpool, 1870), the Committee have without intermission carried on
their researches, and have strictly followed the mode of working with which
the exploration was commenced in 1865. The Superintendents have con-
tinued to visit the Cavern, and to record the results daily ; they have, as
from the beginning, sent Monthly Reports to the Chairman of the Com-
mittee ; the work has been carried on by the same workmen, George Smerdon
and John Farr, who have discharged their duties in a most efficient and
satisfactory manner ; and the Cavern is as much resorted to as ever by visitors
feeling an interest in the researches.

In June 1871, Mr. Busk, a Member of the Committee, spent some time
at Torquay, when he visited the Cavern accompanied by the Superintendents,
who took him through all its branches, explored and vinexplored. Having
carefuUy watched the progress of the work, and made himself familiar with
all its details, he spent some time at the Secretary's residence, examining and
identifying a portion of the mammalian remains which had been disinterred.

In November 1870 the Superintendents had also the pleasure of going
through the cavern with Mr. W. Morrison, M.P., who takes so active an
interest in the exploration of the caves near Settle in Yorkshire.

Besides the foregoing, and exclusive of the large number attended by the
guide appointed by the proprietor, Sir L. Palk, Bart., M.P., the Cavern has
been visited during the year by the Earl and Countess Russell, Sir R. Sin-
clair, Bart., Sir C. Trevelyan, Mr. C. Gilpin, M.P., Governor Wayland, U.S.,
Colonel Ward, Major Bryce, U.S., Rev. Mr. Dickenson, Rev. E. N. Dumble-
ton, Rev. J. P. Foster, Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing, Dr. Ashford, Dr. Tate, and
Messrs. S. Bate, R. BeUasis, L. Bowring, W. R. A. Boyle, W. Bridges,

1871. B

2 REPORT 1871.

C. Busk, A. Champernowne, Channing, Chaplin, F. A. Fellows, T. Fox,
T. Glaisher, J. Harrison, Howard, W". Jones, C. Pannel, Eichie, W. Spriggs,
E. B. Tawuey, G. H. Wollaston, and many others.

Smerdons Passaije. — The Committee stated in their last Report that, in
excavating the "North Sally-port," they had been led to a third External En-
trance to the Cavern, in the same limestone cliff as the two Entrances known
from time immemorial, but at a considerably lower level, where it was com-
pletely buried in a great talus of debris. After adding that it had not been
thought necessary, or desirable, or even safe to dig through the talus to the
open day, they stated the facts which left no doubt of their having pene-
trated to the outside of the Cavern. During the winter of 1870-71, the
question of the existence of the third Entrance was put beyond all doubt ;
for, after a considerable rainfall, that portion of the talus which the workmen
had undermined fell in, and thereby laid open the Entrance. This cavity
was at once filled up, in order to prevent any one from intruding into the
Cavern.

It was also stated last year that the new or low-level opening was the
External Entrance not only of the North SaUy-port, but of another and
unsuspected branch of the Cavern, to which had been given the name of
" Smerdon's Passage," the exploration of which had been begun.

This Passage was found to consist of two Reaches, the first, or outermost,
being about 25 feet long, from 3 to 10 feet wide, and having a northerly
direction. Near its entrance, or southern end, there are in the roof a few
circular holes, from 6 to 12 inches in diameter, apparently the mouths of
tortuous shafts extending for some distance into, or perhaps through, the
limestone rock. The roof itself and the adjacent portions of the wall bear
traces of the long- continued erosive action of running water, but below the
uppermost 12 or 18 inches the walls have many sharp angular inequa-
lities. Further in, the roof has an irregular fretted aspect, apparently the
result of the corrosive action of acidulated water, whilst the walls retain the
angular appearance just mentioned.

The Second lleach runs nearly east and west, is about 32 feet long, some-
what wider than the first, and its roof is several feet higher. At its outer or
eastern end the roof and walls are much fretted ; further in, there are holes
in the roof similar to those just mentioned, with the exception of being
larger. Some of them contain a small quantity of soil, resembling
Cave-earth, and firmly cemented to the wall ; whilst adjacent to others
there is a considerable amount of stalactitic matter. Still further in, the
roof, which has the aspect of a watercourse, is covered with a thin veneer
of white stalactite ; and near the inner cud there is a considerable hole in
the roof containing a large accumulation of the same material.

At the western or inner end of this Second Ecach, the limestone roof gave
place to one consisting of angular pieces of limestone cemented with carbo-
nate of Ume into a very firm concrete. In breaking this up, the workman
thrust his iron bar up through it, and found he had thereby opened a pas-
sage into the easfern end of that branch of the Cavern known as the " Sloping
Chamber," the concrete floor of which was at the same time the roof of the
Passage,

At the outer or eastern end of the Second Eeach there was found another
Low-level Entrance, about 20 feet from that previously mentioned, and
having no marks of the action of water.

Narrow ramifications extend through the limestone rock from both Reaches
of Smerdon's Passage (westward from the first, and southwards from the

ON Kent's cavern^ Devonshire. 3

second) and intersect one another ; their roofs are also perforated with holes,
and exhibit traces of the action of running water.

Throughout both Reaches there were in certain places strips of Stalag-
mitic Floor extending continuously across from waU to waU, and varying
from a quarter of an inch to 6 inches in thickness. The most important
of these strips was about 8 feet long. Elsewhere the Cave-earth was either
completely bare, or had on it here and there what may be called conical
scales of stalagmite, from 3 to 12 inches in diameter at the base, and from
1 to 4 inches in thickness at the centre. From them, and generally near
the middle, there not unfrequently rose one or more rudely cylindi-ical
masses of the same material, sometimes 9 inches high, 6 inches in circum-
ference, and locally known as " Cow's Paps." In almost every instance of
the kind there depended from the limestone roof, vertically over them, a
long, slender, quill-like tube of stalactite, occasionally reaching and uniting
with the " Paps." Such tubes occurred also in certain places where there
were no " Paps," and in some spots there was quite a forest of them, ex-
tending from the roof to the Stalagmitic Floor. Wherever it was possible
to excavate the deposit beneath without breaking them, they were left
intact. In some cases the Stalagmitic Floor, or the Cave- earth where the
latter was bare, reached the roof ; and where this was not the case, the unoc-
cupied space was rarely more than a foot in height.

About midway in the Second Reach there was on each wall a remnant
of an old floor of stalagmite, about 8 inches above the floor found intact,
fuUy 6 iaches thick, about 6 feet in length, and within a few inches of the
roof.

The mechanical deposit in the Passage was the ordinary red Cave-earth,
in some places sandy, but occasionally a very compact clay. It contained a
considerable number of angular fragments of limestone, numerous blocks of
old crystalline stalagmite, and a few well-rolled pebbles of quartz, red grit,
and flint. The masses of limestone were not unfrequently of considerable
size ; indeed one of them required to be blasted twice, and another three
times, in order to effect their removal ; and some of the blocks of stalagmite
measured fully 15 cubic feet.

From the entrance of the First Reach to about 10 feet within it, the
upper surface of the Cave-earth was almost perfectly horizontal ; but from
the latter point it rose irregularly higher and higher, until, at the inner end
of the Second Reach, the increased height amounted to about 9 feet. There
were no tunnels or burrows in the deposit, such as occurred in both the
Sally-ports, and were described in the Fifth and Sixth Reports (1869 and
1870). Near the inner end of the Second Reach the Cave-earth adjacent to
the walls was cemented into a concrete.

The deposit in the lateral ramifications of the Passage was the same typi-
cal Cave-earth, containing blocks of old crystalline stalagmite and angular
pieces of limestone, but -without any Stalagmitic Floor.

It was stated in the Sixth Report (1870), p. 26, that at the third External
Entrance, i. e. the first of the low-level series, the deposits were of two
kinds — the ordinary Cave-earth, with the usual osseous remains, below ; and
small angular pieces of limestone, with but little earth and no fossils, above.
Materials of precisely the same character, and in the same order, were found
at the new low-level Entrance, at the eastern end of the Second Reach of
Smerdon's Passage, as already stated.

Besides a large number of bones, portions of bones, and fragments of
antlers, a total of fully 2900 teeth were found in the Passage and its rami-

b2

4 REPORT 1871.

fications, of which 700 were reported at Liverpool*. The remaining 2200,
exhumed since the end of August 1870, belonged to different kinds of animals,
in the ratios shown in the following list : —

Hysena 335 per thousand.

Horse 295 „

Hhinoceros .... 161 „

« Irish Elk ".. .. 55

Ox 35

Deer 27 „

Badger 22 „

Elephant 20 „

Bear 18 per thousand.

Fox 12 „

Lion 6 „

Reindeer 5 „

Wolf 4 „

Bat 2 „

Rabbit 1 „

Dog (?) . . less than 1 „

On comparing the foregoing list with those given for the Sally-ports in
the Sixth Report (pp. 19 and 24), it will be found to differ from them in
containing neither Sheep nor Pig, and in the diminished prevalence of Rabbit
and Badger.

Many of the teeth are in fragments of jaws, which have, in most cases,
lost their condyles and their inferior borders. They belong to individuals of
all ages, from the baby Elephant, whose molar crown was no more than -8
inch long, and the Hyaena, whose second set had made their appearance
before the dislodgement of the first, to the wasted remnant of an adult tooth
of the Mammoth, and the canine of the Bear worn quite to the fang.

Many of the bones and teeth are discoloured, a large number are gnawed
(generally, no doubt, by the Hysena, but occasionally by some smaller animal),
and a considerable proportion of them, at all levels, are more or less covered
with films of stalagmitic matter. On some of the specimens are peculiar
markings, produced perhaps by fine rootlets of trees having grown round
them. Some marked in this way were found with living rootlets surround-
ing them.

Coprolitic matter was by no means abundant, only one example of it
having been met with in the entire Passage.

In various parts of the Passage considerable heaps of small bones, some-
times agglutinated, were found here and there on the surface, or but little
below it. In one instance as many as 8400 were picked out of 120 cubic
inches of material.

At the junction of the two Reaches of the Passage, a large ledge or cur-
tain of limestone projected downwards from the roof considerably below the
TTSual level. On the inner or northern side of it there was found a wheel-
barrow full of bones, fragments of bones, and teeth, of a considerable variety
of animals, all huddled together.

It was stated in the First Report (Birmingham, 1865 1) that the Cave-
earth was excavated in " Parallels," the length of which was the same as
the width of the Chamber &c., where this was not excessive, breadth in-
variably 1 foot, and depth 4 feet, where this gave the men siifiicient height
to work in comfort, or 5 feet where it did not ; that each parallel was
divided into successive horizontal " Levels," a foot in depth ; and that each
level was subdivided into lengths or " Yards," each 3 feet long and, from
what has been stated, a foot square in the section, thus rendering it easy
to define and record the position of every object discovered.

Smerdon's Passage and its lateral branches contained 78 "Parallels " of

* See Sixth Eeport, 1870, p. 27.

+ See pp. 19, 20.

ON KENT S CAVERNj DEVONSHIRE. 5

Cave-earth, and, as it was necessary to excavate to the depth of 5 feet*, a
total of 390 separate " foot-levels." The following Table shows the distri-
bution of the teeth of the different kinds of animals in the various " Paral-
lels" and " Levels."

a
W
71

£

O

w

68

2

a
1

1— 1

o

1

be

1

t

1

a
o

3

I

pq

■*s

1

ft

Parallels

60

29

43

23

14

27

29

14

11

11

9

1

2

3

1st Levels

2nd

3rd ,

4th „

5th „

44
53
43
29
19

44
51
37
28
16

32
42
33
22
10

10

11

16

9

3

16
23
13
13
6

9

7
7
7
3

11
2
2

10

11

9

5

5

6
9
10
5
4

3

5
4
4
2

4
6
2

1

1

1

4
5
3

1
2

4
3

1

2

1
2

Total Levels ...

188

176

139

49

71

33

15

40

34

18

13

14

10

1

2

3

By way of explanation, it may be stated that teeth of Hyaena, for exam-
ple, were found in 71 of the 78 "parallels," at aU "levels," and in 188
"foot-levels," or very nearly one half of the total number; and so on for the
other kinds of animals.

A glance at the Table shows that, in the case of the most prevalent
animals — Hyaena, Horse, and Khinoceros — their teeth were most frequently
met with (not necessarily met with in greatest numbers) in the second
" foot- level," below which they were less and less frequent as the level was
lower ; that the Badger was most frequently met with in the uppermost
" foot-level," and never found below the third ; that teeth of Lion were not
found in the uppermost " level," and occurred most frequently in the third;
that those of Wolf did not present themselves in the lowest or fifth " foot-
level ; " that Bat and Babbit were restricted to the uppermost " level," the
former to one " parallel " and the latter to two ; and that the Hyaena had
the widest distribution, both as regards " parallels" and "levels."

Twelve Flint flakes and chips were found in the Second Beach of the
Passage — 3 in the first or uppermost " foot-level," 3 in the second, 3 in the
third, and 4 in the fourth ; there were none in the Pirst Beach, or in the
lateral branches. Compared with the fine specimens met with in previous
years in other parts of the Cavern, they are perhaps of but little value.
Some of them are rather chert than flint, and with one exception (No. 3554)
— a weU-designed but roughly finished lanceolate implement — they are all
of the prevalent white colour.

In the Second Beach there was also found a lance-shaped bone tool
(No. 3428), 2-7 inches long, 1-1 inch broad at the butt end, flat on one face and
uniformly convex on the other, reduced to a thin edge all round the margin
except at the butt end, where it was cut off sharply but somewhat obliquely,
tapering gradually to a rounded point, and '4 inch in greatest thickness. In
short, it closely resembled in form and size many of the lanceolate flint im-
plements of the Cavern series, with the single exception that it was not cari-
nated on the convex face. It was found on October 5th, 1870, in the first
"foot-level" of Cave- earth, lying with 6 teeth of Hyaena, 1 of Bhinoceros,

* In two or three " Parallels " it was requisite to go to the depth of 6 feet, in order to
pass under the " Curtain" of limestone mentioned above.

6 . REPORT — 1871.

1 of Bear, 1 of Horse, 1 of " Irisli Elk," 2 jaws of Badger containing four
teeth, bones and fragments of bone, some of which were gnawed and some
invested with films of stalagmite.

It has been already stated that at its eastern extremity the Second Reach
of Smerdon's Passage terminated in a " low-level " External Entrance, filled
with true Cave-earth below, above which lay an accumulation of smaU an-
gular stones with but little earth. In the lower deposit the ordinary mam-
malian remains were found, including teeth and bones of Hyasna, Horse,
Rhinoceros, " Irish Elk," Ox, Elephant, Bear, and Reindeer ; but the only
thing met with in the materials above was an amber bead, ellipsoidal in form,
but somewhat thicker on one side than the other, -9 inch in greatest dia-
meter and -5 inch in least, and having at its centre a cylindrical perforation
about -2 inch in diameter.

The excavation of Smerdon's Passage was completed on December 31st,
1870, after very nearly five months having been expended on it. From its
prevalent narrowness, the labour in it had been attended with much dis-
comfort ; but probably no branch of the Cavern had, on the whole, yielded
a larger number of mammalian remains.

Minor Ramifications of the North Salh/-port. — -It was stated in the Sixth
Report (1870)*, that there were one or two ramifications of the North Sally-
port which had not been excavated, having been passed intentionally in the
progress of the work. To these attention was given on the completion of
Smerdon's Passage, and they were taken in the order of their proximity to
the " Third External Entrance," — the first discovered of the low-level series.

The first was a small opening in the east wall of the last Reach of the
North Sally-port, having its limestone floor veiy slightly above the top of
the deposit in that Reach. It proved to be a tunnel in the limestone, having
a rudely triangular transverse section, from 2-5 to 3 feet in height and
breadth, and extending eastwards or outwards towards the hill-side for
about 8 feet, where it terminated in material of the same character as that
found above the Cave-earth in the first and second low-level External En-
trances, from the first of which it was about 12 feet distant. There is no
doubt that it is a third of these low-level Entrances, and, to use the time-
honoured phraseology in descriptions of Kent's Hole, it may be termed the
" Oven " Entrance. It contained but little deposit, and the only noteworthy
objects found in it were one tooth of Horse, a few bones and bone fragments,
and a grit pebble.

The second of these small lateral branches was in the south wall of the
immediately preceding or penultimate Reach of the Sally-port, and was
too narrow to admit of being excavated in " Parallels " and " Levels." In
it were found 7 teeth of Hyaena, 10 of Horse, 3 of Rhinoceros, 1 of Bear,
1 of Lion, 1 of " Irish Elk," 1 of Ox, 16 of Badger in parts of 4 jaws, 10 of
Rabbit in parts of 2 jaws, portion of an antler, a right femur of Beaver,
bones and fragments of bone, a bit of charcoal, and a grit pebble. It is
noteworthy, perhaps, that the fine specimen of Beaver's jaw mentioned last
yearf was found about 4 or 5 feet from the femur just named, and in the
fourth " foot-level."

The third and last of these lateral ramifications was near that part of the
SaUy-port termed the " Islands "+. It yielded 2 teeth of Hyaena, 1 of
Horse, 3 of Rhinoceros, 1 of Bear, 3 of « Irish Elk," 4 of Deer, 2 of Badger,
4 of Rabbit, an astragalus of Ox, bones and bone fragments, and, in the
uppermost " foot-level," 2 land-sheUs.

* See p. 25. f See Sixth Eeport, 1870, p. 24. f Ibid. p. 2L

ON rent's cavern^ DEVONSHIRE. 7

On January 17th, 1871, the workmen finally and gladly emerged from the
labyrinth of low narrow passages in which they had been engaged from day
to day from November 13th, 1869, or upwards of 14 months. In this time
they had not only excavated and taken to the day the deposits, to the depth
of 5 feet, in aU the extensive and ramifying branches known as the North
Sally-port and Smerdon's Passage, and exhumed cartloads of the remains of
various animals, including 5900 of their teeth, as well as 20 flint implements
and flakes, but, beyond the first Reach of the SaUy-port (27 feet long), they
had actually discovered the whole of these branches, including three new
entrances to the Cavern itself, and had thus added greatly, not only to the
extent of Kent's Hole, but to a knowledge of its structure.

The completion of these branches concluded the excavation, to the depth
of 4 feet generally, and 5 feet in some instances, below the Stalagmitic Floor,
of the whole of the Eastern Division of the Cavern.

The Cavern Entrances. — Before proceeding to a description of the branch
which next engaged attention, it may be of service to devote a few words to
the Entrances of the Cavern, of which there are now known to be five (two
at a high and three at a low level), aU in the eastern side of the hill, and
within a horizontal distance of 53 feet. Those at the high-level (known
from time immemorial) are about 53 feet apart, almost exactly on the same
level, and about 189 feet above mean tide. The most northerly of them is
that invariably spoken of in all early descriptions of the Cavern as " The
Entrance." Those of the lower series are also at very nearly the same level
with one another, but from 18 to 20 feet below the former two. Being
lower in the sloping hill-side, they are about 24 feet outside or east of the
vertical plane passing through the higher entrances. The most southerly
ones in the two series are nearly in the same east and west vertical plane^

In order to distingiiish them, they are respectively termed : —

1. "The Entrance," = the more northerly of the upper series, and, from its
form, sometimes termed the " Triangular Entrance." It opens into the
" Vestibule."

2. The " Arched Entrance," =the more southerly of the upper series.
It opens into the " Great Chamber."

3. The " First Low-level Entrance,"=the middle one of the lower series —
the first discovered. It opens into the " North Sally-port " and the " First
Reach of Smerdon's Passage."

4. The " Second Low-level Entrance," =the most northerly of the lower
series— the second discovered. It opens into the " Second Reach of Smerdon'9
Passage,"

5. The "Oven Entrance," = the most southerly of the lower series — the
last discovered. It opens into the " North Sally-port."

The Sloping Chamber. — That branch of the Cavern termed the " Sloping
Chamber " by Mr. M'Enery was, prior to the Committee's exploration of
the " Great Chamber," the largest apartment in it, and is still, perhaps, more
calculated than any other to impress visitors. It is the only connexion of
the two great divisions of the Cavern, and measures 80 feet from east to
west, 25 in greatest breadth, and, since the excavation of its deposits to the
depth of 4 feet below the base of the Stalagmitic Floor, 25 in greatest
height. Its name was derived from its floor, which, from 20 feet from its
eastern side, sloped rapidly towards its western side, falling as much as 14
feet in 60, or at an average angle of 13°-5. Its ceiling sloped more
rapidly still, being, as already stated, 25 feet high near the eastern wall, but
not more than 6 feet at the western. This ceiling, though representing the

8 REPORT 1871.

dip of the limestone strata in a general way, is extremely rugged, — here re-
treating into deep cavities whence huge masses of limestone have fallen, and
there ornamented with numerous and heavy masses of Stalactite. Indeed
the finest Stalactites in the Cavern occur in it ; and one known as the " Chan-
delier" has always been much admired. A very strong light is required,
however, to bring out all the features of the ceiling.

During the autumn of 1866, the upper, or eastern, or level portion of this
Chamber was explored, and the results were described in the Third Eeport
(Dundee, 1867). Mr. M'Enery, too, had made extensive, no doubt his most
extensive, diggings near the foot of the incline, where he " succeeded in sink-
ing a shaft to the depth of 30 feet at the bottom of the slope, with the view
of reaching the original floor "*, which, however, was not realized. Having
broken the floor for his shaft, and finding the work very laborious, he availed
himself of the opening thus made to extend his diggings eastward, keeping
just beneath the floor, which he left spanning his broken ground like an
arch.

As it was obvious that a very considerable amount of deposit still remained
intact, it was decided, on the completion of Smerdon's Passage, to resume the
excavation, not only in the hope of obtaining some of the palseontological
treasures with which, according to Mr. M'Enery, the Chamber abounded, but
also as a pre-requisite to the exploration of the " Wolf's Den " and the " Long
Arcade," into which it opened on the north and south respectively.

The uppermost deposit, as in the adjacent parts of the Cavern, was the
Black Mould so frequently mentioned in all previous Reports ; and as the
Chamber was the only capacious apartment near the Entrance, and the only
road to the Western Division of the Cavern, which, from some cause, seems
to have been more attractive than the Eastern to visitors in, at least, all
recent times t, it might have been expected that many comparatively modern
objects of interest would have been found in the Mould. In reality,how-
ever, such objects were by no means abundant — a fact which may be ex-
phcable, perhaps, on the hypothesis that they had been collected by Mr.
M'Enery and other early explorers. The only things found in this deposit
(which, it may be stated, was of inconsiderable depth) were shells of cockle,
limpet, and pecten ; two potsherds — one black and of coarse clay, the other
brown, in which the clay was finer ; a flint chip and a core of the same ma-
terial; a spindle-whorl of fine-grained micaceous grit, 1'5 inch in diameter,
•5 inch in thickness, and having its external edges rounded off'; and a bone
awl, 3-7 inches long, -7 inch broad at the butt end, and partially covered
with a film of stalagmite.

Beneath the Black Mould came the ordinary floor of granular and lami-
nated stalagmite, in which, as well as in the deposit beneath, the rugged
character of the ceiling suggested that a considerable number of large masses
of limestone would be found. Their presence in the floor, moreover, was
indicated by the nature of its upper surface, which, though a continuous
sheet, with one exception to be noticed hereafter, was so very uneven
as to induce an early guide to the Cavern to confer on it the appellation of
the " Frozen BiUows." Accordingly, the Floor proved to be, with an excep-

* See Trans. Devon. Assoc, vol. iii. p. ^8 (1869).

t The following fact seems to be confirmatory on this point : — There are in the various
branches of the Western Division (sometimes in places of diiBciUt access) numerous
initials and dates on the limestone walls and on bosses of stalagmite — some engraved,
some smoked, and some merely chalked — while there are extremely few in the Eastern
Division,

ON Kent's cavern, Devonshire.

9

tion here and there, a brecciated mass composed of large and small pieces of
limestone and blocks of the well-known old crystalline stalagmite, all ce-
mented together and covered with a sheet of the cementing material.

Near the upper part of the slope, and on its southern margin, a space about
14 feet long and varying from 3 to 12 feet broad was without any trace of
floor, but occupied with large loose pieces of limestone. Elsewhere the sheet
was perfectly continuous until reaching the area in which Mr. M'Enery had
dug his shaft. The Floor commonly measured from 12 to 30 inches in thick-
ness, but adjacent to the southern wall it was fuUy 3 feet, and contained few
or no stones.

On being broken into small pieces and carefully examined, it was found
to contain 2 teeth of Horse, a portion of a jaw, 2 bones, and half of a frac-
tured flint nodule. About 30 feet down the slope, a series of dark parallel
lines were observed in the Floor, the uppermost being about 2 inches below
the upper surface. On the advance of the work, they proved to be continuous
downward, and to have a greater and greater thickness of stalagmite over
them. On careful examination, it was found that each represented what for
a time had been the upper surface of the Stalagmitic Floor of the Chamber,
and was due to the presence of comminuted charcoal and other dark-coloured
extraneous matter. Such a " charcoal streak " also occurred, according to
Mr. M'Enery, in the " Long Arcade," within a few feet of the same spot*.
The workmen were directed to detach a specimen of the Floor where the
streaks were well displayed, and in doing so were so fortunate as to make
their fracture at a place where a large cockle-shell lay firmly imbedded in
the lowest streak, at a depth of about 8 inches below the surface. Whilst
splitting up the Stalagmite on May 16th, 1871, two specimens of well-marked
iern-impressions were found in it, about 3 inches below the surface. Nothing
of the kind had ever been noticed before.

Below the Stalagmite, as iisual, lay the Cave-earth, in which, as was an-
ticipated, pieces of limestone were unusually abundant. Some of them
"leasured several feet in length and breadth, and were fully 2 feet thick.
There were also numerous blocks of the old crystalline stalagmite, measuring
in some instances upwards of 4 cubic yards, and not unfrequently projecting
from the Cave-earth into the overlying granular floor. Though they were
carefully broken up, nothing was found in them.

In that portion of the Cave-earth which was found intact, there occurred,
as usual, remains of the ordinary Cave-mammals, including about 550 teeth,
which may be apportioned as in the following Ust : —

Hyaena 39 per cent.

Horse 28-5 „

Rhinoceros 14 „

Deer 4 „

"Irish Elk" 2-5

Bear 2-5 „

Reindeer 2 per cent.

Ox 2

Elephant 1-5 „

Lion 1 „

Wolf 1

Dog (?) only one tooth.

It is, perhaps, worthy of remark that though wild animals still frequent
Kent's Hole, and there is reason to believe that some of them have in recent
times carried in the bones of others on which they preyed, though the Sloping
Chamber is near and between the two high-level Entrances, though the
Floor was broken up and thus gave the readiest access to the Cave-earth, and
though Mr. M'Enery discontinued his labours upwards of 40 years ago, of
which more than 30 were years of quietude in the Cavern, there is in the

* See Trans. Devon. Assoc, vol. iii. pp. 236, 261, 262 (1869).

10 RtePORT~187L

foregoing list not only neither Sheep nor Pig, but neither Badger, Rabbit,
Hare, nor Vole, all of which have been found in other branches, in deposits
accessible to buiTowing animals.

In the Cave-earth there wez-e also found 52 flint implements, flakes, and
chips, — 3 of them in the fii'st or uppermost foot-level, 16 in the second, 15 in
the third, and 18 in the fourth or lowest. Though none of them are equal
to the best the Cavern has yielded in previous years, there are some good
lanceolate implements amongst them.

No. 3693 is of light broAvn translucent flint> 1'85 inch in length, '9 inch in
greatest breadth, -175 inch in greatest thickness, nearly flat on one side, and
carinated on the other. It vras found with a few bones in the first foot-
level, amongst loose stones, where there was no Stalagmitic Floor over it ;
hence it may be doubted whether it belongs to the Palffiohthic series — a doubt
strengthened by the modern aspect of the implement.

No. 3754, of the usual white flint, is 4-2 inches long, -9 inch in greatest
j^ -N breadth, -3 inch in -greatest thickness, both longitudinally and transversely
^ ■ ' concave on one side, has a medial ridge on the other, from which, at about
an inch from one end, a second ridge proceeds, and has a thin but uneven
edge. It was probably pointed at each end, but has unfortunately been
broken at one of them. It was found on March the 6th, 1871, in the second
foot-level, with splinters of bone, beneath a Stalagmitic Floor 18 inches
thick.

No. 5430, also of white flint, is Somewhat irregular in form, but may be
termed rudely lanceolate; it is 2*7 inches in length, 1-5 inch in extreme
breadth, -3 inch in greatest thickness, slightly concave on one face and ir-
regularly convex on the other. It was found on March 30th, 1871, with 2
teeth of Horse, 1 of Hyasna, and fragments of bone, in the second " foot-
level," withont any Stalagmitic Floor over it.
^ No. 3732, a whitish flint, is 2-3 inches long, 1-1 inch in breadth, which is

N nearly uniform from end to end, slightly concave on one face, convex on the
other, on which there are three slight, parallel, longitudinal ridges, sharply
truncated at both ends, but primarily thin at the sides. It was found on
February 27th, 1871, in the third " foot-level," with a tooth of Hyaena and
fragments of bone, without any Stalagmitic Floor over it.
.17 o,. j^Q 5435^ a slightly mottled white flint, is 2-1 inches long, 1-1 inch broad,
•4 inch in greatest thickness, flat on one face, strongly ridged on the other,
abruptly truncated at one end, but thin everywhere else, and retains its width
almost to the opposite end, which is bluntly rounded. It was found on 31st
March, 1871, with a portion of Deer's jaw and fragments of bone, in the
third " foot-level," beneath a Stalagmitic Floor, 2 feet thick.

No. 3687, a mottled flint with white prevailing, is 2-6 inches long, 1-2
inch in greatest breadth, -3 inch in greatest thickness, broadest near the
middle, whence it tapers in both directions, somewhat pointed at one end
but not at the other, nearly flat on one face and convex on the other, on
which there are two ridges — one subcentral and the other nearly marginal.
It was found on February 7th, 1871, in the fourth or lowest foot-level, with
1 tooth of Horse, 1 of Hyaena, and a fragment of bone, without any Stalag-
mitic Floor over it.

No. 5475 so closely resembles No. 3732, mentioned above, jis to need no
further description. It was found February 27th, 1871, with 1 tooth of Hyaena
and fragments of bone, in the fourth " foot-level," but had no Stalagmitic
Floor over it.

In this connexion may be mentioned a piece of calcareous spar, which

ON Kent's cavern, Devonshire. 11

appears to have been used as a polishing-stone. It was found March Bth,
1871, with 2 teeth of Hyaena, 2 of Horse, 3 of Rhinoceros, gnawed bones,
and a flint flake, in the fourth " foot-level," having over it a Stalagmitic Floor
18 inches thick. No such specimen had been noticed before.

A piece of burnt bone was found on the 22nd of the same month, with
fragments of bone and faecal matter, in the second " foot-level," having a
Stalagmitic Floor over it.

Mr. M'Enery appears to have excavated beyond the limits of his shaft, not
only in an easterly direction, as has been already stated, but also, at least,
north and south of it. So far as can be determined, the shaft was first sunk,
and the material taken out lodged between it and the western wall of the
Chamber, after which he undertook what may be called the adjacent hori-
zontal diggings, and fiUed up the shaft with a portion of the excavated matter,
thereby rendering it impossible to determine the exact site of the shaft itself.
He does not appear to have taken outside the Cavern any portion of the deposit
in order to ensure its more complete examination ; hence it is not probable
that all its contents were detected. Indeed, when speaking of his researches
in this Chamber, he says, " It was feared that in the ardour of the first search,
facts of importance might have been overlooked. The mass of mould thrown
up on the former occasion was therefore a second time turned over and care-
fully searched, but nothing new was brought to light "*.

This mass the Superintendents decided on taking out of the Cavern,
partly to facilitate the excavation of deposits certainly intact beyond, and
also because it was thought likely to be lodged on unbroken ground. Though
there seemed but httle prospect of finding any thing by subjecting it to a
third search, such a search was nevertheless made, and did not go unre-
warded. The heap, though mainly of Cave-earth, included fragments of the
granular Stalagmitic Floor and portions of the Black Mould, and yielded
hundreds of bones and portions of bones (one having an artificial hole lined
with stalagmitic matter), fragments of antlers, the largest fragment of an Ele-
phant's tusk that the Committee have met with, 143 teeth of Hysena, 153 of
Horse, 45 of Rhinoceros, 27 of Deer, including " Irish Elk " and Reindeer, 6
of Bear, 5 of Ox, 5 of Sheep, 3 of Elephant, 3 of Wolf, 3 of Dog (?), 2 of Fox,
2 of Pig, and 1 of Lion, a few marine sheUs, several fragments of black pot-
tery, 4 pieces of stalagmite with fern-impressions, and 13 flint implements
and flakes, — aU, with one exception, of the prevalent white colour, and two
of them decidedly good specimens of the strongly ridged lanceolate forms.
In short, the virgin soil, in some parts of the Cavern, has been less pro-
ductive than was this mass which had been twice carefully searched, but by
candle-light only.

As was thought probable, the mass of dislodged materials proved to be
lying on ground which had never been broken. Between Mr. M'Enery's
shaft and the west wall of the Chamber there was a space of at least 17
feet ; and at 14 feet from the wall the Cave-earth was found to have not
only the ordinary granular Stalagmitic Floor overlying it, but to be de-
posited on another and necessarily an older Floor of the same material, but
which, instead of being granular, was made up of prismatic crystals — posses-
sing, in short, the characters both of position and structure of the Old Crys-
talline Floor found in the " Lecture Hall" and " South-west Chamber," and
described in the Fourth Report (Norwich, 1868), — a remnant, in situ, of the
Floor which had furnished the large blocks of stalagmite found in the Cave-

* See Trans. Devon. Assoc, vol. iii. p. 289 (1869).

13 REPORT 1871.

earth in the Sloping Chamber, as already stated. From the point where it was
first seen, it was everywhere continuous up to the western wall. Its thickness
has not been ascertained ; for though it was partially broken up in cutting
the four-feet section, the bottom of it was not reached. No objects of any
kind were found in it. Had Mr. M'Euery's excavations been carried but a
yard further west he must have encountered it, and would have been enabled
to solve the problem of the blocks which he so often found in the Cave-
earth.

The Committee are most anxious to guard against the impression that, in
any of the foregoing remarks, they have been unmindful of the service which
Mr. M'Enery rendered to science, or have the most remote wish to depre-
ciate the value of his long-continued labours. Indeed, when they remember
that the means at his disposal must have been very limited, and that he was
amongst the pioneers in cavern searching, they cannot but feel that the
extent and results of his investigations are richly entitled to the warmest
praise.

They venture, however, to take this opportunity of stating that, in order
to a thorough and satisfactory investigation, cavern-deposits should be ex-
cavated, not by sinking occasional shafts, but continuously in a horizontal direc-
tion, to a uniform depth not exceeding 5 or at most 6 feet at first ; that
the material should be carefully examined in situ, and then taken to day-
light for re-examination. Through not following the first, Mr. M'Enery
failed to understand the exact historical order of the Cavern-deposits ; and
through not being able to accomplish the second, he passed over many speci-
mens calculated to have modified his conclusions, and which he would have
been delighted to have found. For example, when speaking of the Sloping
Chamber, he says, " The [Stalagmitic] crust is thickest in the middle ....
for opening the excavation, the same means were employed as to break up
a mass of ancient masonry. Flint blades were detected in it at all depths,
even so low as to come in contact with the fossil bones and their earthy
matrix, but never below them" *. During the last six months, however, the ex-
cavations made in the same Chamber, and in the immediate neighbourhood of
his, have brought forth Flint implements from every level of the Cave-earth
to which the work has been carried, and they were actually found in
greatest numbers in the lowest levels. To this may be added the fact that
in his heap of refuse-matter, which he had twice examined, there were, as
has been already said, upwards of a dozen flint blades, such as he stated
never occurred in the Cave-earth. Had the soil been examined in daylight,
they could not have been overlooked ; for, instead of being specimens of
little value, they are better far than some of those which he figured ; and it
is but right to add that many of those found by the Committee were thus
detected.

Again, Mr. M'Enery was keenly watchful for extraneous objects in the
Stalagmitic Floor ; and, from his silence on the question, it may be safely
concluded that he never saw fern-impressions in it ; nevertheless his refuse-
heap contained four small slabs of the floor, in each of which was a
weU-marked impression, requiring not additional manipulation, but simple
daylight for their detection. Indeed every specimen of this kind has been
recognized outside the Cavern only.

The four slabs just mentioned, as well as the two found by the Committee
in the Floor they broke up, have been submitted to Mr. "W. Carruthers,

* See Trans. Devon. Assoc, vol. iii. p. 247 (1869).

I

ON Kent's cavern, Devonshire. 1j>

F.R.S., of the British Museum, who has kindly furnished the following note
respecting them : —

"British Museum, 10 July, 1871,

" The ferns are specimens of Pteris aquilina, Linn., and have belonged to
very luxuriant plants ; they do not diifer from those now growing in Eng-
land. It is possible that the fragment -^^-f may be another species, but it
is too imperfect to determine, and it may only be a barren portion of the
Pteris, with shorter and broader pinnules than the other specimens.

(Signed) " Wm. Cabbxjtheks."

Returning for a moment to the Old Crystalline Stalagmitic Floor beneath
the Cave-earth, it was observed that, like the modern and granular one, it
had here and there on its upper surface conical bosses rising above its gene-
ral level, and that there were corresponding protuberances vertically above
them on the upper floor. The same fact had been noticed in the other
branches of the Cavern where the two Floors occurred in the same vertical
sections, — a fact apparently warranting the conclusion that the drainage
through the Cavern-roof underwent no important change during the entire
period represented by the two floors and the intervening Cave-earth.
When to this it is added that such bosses are, at least in most cases, verti-
cally beneath Stalactitic pendants on the ceiling, it may be further inferred
that the ancient and modern lines of drainage are, in the main, identical.

On the completion of the work in the Sloping Chamber, on July 11,
1871, the excavation of the "Wolf's Den," which opens out of its northern
side, was begun. It was in this Den that Mr. M'Enery found the canines
of Machairodus latidens, which have excited so much attention. No such
specimens have been met with during the present investigation up to this
time.

The Committee, believing it possible that the subject might prove to be
connected with their researches, have from time to time mentioned the
-occasional occurrence of living animals in the Cavern*. Indeed, Kent's
Hole is not better known to the palaeontologist as a store-house of mamma-
lian remains, than to the Devonshire naturalist as a home of the Great
Horseshoe Bat {Ehinolophus ferrum-equinum, Leach) ; and every visitor, be-
fore the present exploration, must have frequently seen them hanging from
the walls of the more retired branches. The following facts have presented
themselves during the last twelve months : —

Whilst the excavation of one of the lateral branches of Smerdon's Passage
was in progress, a considerable number of fresh spindle-shaped faeces, about
•6 inch long and -2 inch thick, were observed lying on the surface of the
Cave-earth, whUe between it and the roof there was an interspace just
sufficient to allow an animal about the size of a Badger to pass.

The workmen having observed that the candles were much nibbled during
their absence, that the greasy wooden candlesticks were sometimes carried off
and some of them, after a few days, found secreted in small holes, set a suit-
ably baited gin for the suspected offender. Their efforts were rewarded the
next morning by finding a rat dead in the trap.

Old newspapers &c. are occasionally sent to the Cavern for the purpose of
wrapping up small boxes of specimens, or such delicate objects as need more
than ordinary care. On November 28th, 1871, the workmen, using in this way
a part of a copy of the ' Saturday Review,' unintentionally left one complete
.and sound sheet, i. e. two leaves, near the spot where they had been at work.

* See Eeports Brit. Assoc. 1869, p. 204, and 1870, p. 27.

14 REPORT 1871,

The next morning they found the paper precisely where they had left it,
but with about one-fifth of one of the leaves gone, and the broken margin
of the remainder apparently nibbled. There was nothing to prevent the
whole from being taken off, and it was noted that, though left in a preca-
rious position, it had not fallen down. The broken leaf was then torn oif
and preserved, whilst the unbroken one was allowed to remain as a further
experiment. The next morning no trace of it was to be seen. That even-
ing a rat-trap was set at the spot, and very near it another leaf of paper was
placed, having on it a small stone, which it was supposed a rat, but not
a smaller animal, might be capable of moving. The next morning the
paper was found where it had been put, but very much nibbled, whilst the
trap and the grease with which it was baited appeared to have not been
touched. Before leaving work, the men baited the trap with a tempting end
of candle, and placed it on a leaf of paper ; whilst another leaf, weighted
with a lump of earth, was placed near. On the following morning both
pieces of paper were found to be considerably eaten or torn ; and it was
noted that the injury done to the former was within the margin of the trap
placed on it, whilst the trap itself, as well as its bait, remained unaffected,
further than that there were on it a few spindle-shaped fteces about a quar-
ter of an inch long. There can be no doubt that some animal, probably
smaller than a rat, carried off the missing leaf to a recess in the Cavern,
where it may serve to make its nest comfortable, and perhaps hereafter to
puzzle a cavern searcher who may discover it.

Fourth Report of the Committee for the purpose of investigating the
rate of Increase of Underground Temperature downwards in vari-
ous Localities of Dry Land and under Water. Drawn up by Prof.
Everett, at the request of the Committee, consisting of Sir Wm.
Thojison, F.R.S., Sir Charles Lyell, Bart., F.R.S., Prof. J. Clerk
Maxwell, F.R.S., Prof. Phillips, F.R.S., G. J. Symons, F.M.S.,
Dr. Balfour Stewart, F.R.S., Prof. Ramsay, F.R.S., Prof. A.
Geikie, F.R.S., James Glaisher, F.R.S., Rev. Dr. Graham,
E. W. BiNNEY, F.R.S., George Maw, F.G.S., W. Pengelly,
F.R.S., S. J. Mackie, F.G.S., Edward Hull, F.R.S., and Prof.
Everett, D.CL. (Secretary).

In last year's Report, the intention was expressed of boring down at the
bottom of Rosebridge Colliery, if the Association would provide the necessary
funds. The circumstances were exceptionally inviting, and the Association
very liberally granted the sum asked. The Secretary thereupon paid two
visits to Eosebridge, descended and to some extent explored the coUiery, in
company with Mr. Bryham, and, after a careful study of the plans and sec-
tions, agreed upon a particular spot where the bore was to be sunk. Tra-
cings of the plans and sections were kindly sent by Mr. Bryham, who in
every way cooperated most cordially, and gave much valuable assistance in
arranging the scheme of operations. Several weeks elapsed, which were
occupied in making and testing a very large spirit thermometer, suitable for
reading in the bad light of a mine, and capable of being read, by estimation.

ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE. 15

to the hundredth of a degree, from 90° to 110° F. ; and on the 7th
November the Secretary wrote to Mr. Bryham requesting him to commence
operations. Unfortunately, during this brief interval, circumstances had
changed. In a neighbouring pit, where the workings were in the same seam of
coal as at Eosebridge, though less deep by 200 yards, a considerable quantity
of water was found in sinking into the strata underlying this seam. This
was a very unexpected circumstance ; and as any irruption of water at the
bottom of Eosebridge pit, which is now quite dry, would be a most serious
affair, Mr, Bryham was afraid to risk the experiment of boring do^vn. Sub-
sequent reflection has only confirmed him in the opinion that such a step
would bo hazardous, and the Committee have accordingly been most reluc-
tantly compelled to renounce the plan. Mr. Bryham's final refusal was
received on the 28th February.

Professor Ansted read a paper last year, in the Geological Section of the
Association, upon the Alpine tunnel, commonly called the Mont-Cenis tuii-
nel, and in that paper some interesting statements were made regarding its
temperature. Since that time, Professor Ansted has interchanged very
numerous letters with the Secretary, and has furnished mxxch valuable in-
formation, gathered from Prof. Sismonda, of Turin, and from M. Borelli, the
resident engineer of the tunnel. Observations which appear to be reliable
have been made in bore-holes in the sides of the tunnel, and the tempera-
tures thus observed have been compared with the estimated mean tempera-
ture at the surface overhead, which in the highest part is a mile above the tun-
nel, or 2905 metres above sea-level. It is directly under this highest part that
the highest temperature is foimd in the walls of the tunnel, namely 29°-5 C,
or 85°"1 F., which is 9° F. lower than the temperature found at the bottom
of the Eosebridge shaft at the depth of only 815 yards. But though the
tunnel is at more than double this depth fi'om the crest of the mountain
over it, we must bear in mind that the surface-temperatures are very dif-
ferent. In a paper pubKshed by the engineer of the tunnel, M. F. Giordano,
the mean temperature of the air at the crest of the mountain (Mont Frejus)
is calculated to be — 2°-6 C, or 27°'3 F. Assuming this estimate to be
correct, we have a difference of 57°-8 F. between the deepest part of the tun-
nel and the air at the surface vertically over it ; assuming further, as we did
in the case of Eosebridge in last year's Eeport, that the surface of the hill itself
has a mean temperature 1° F. lower than that of the air above it, we have a
difference of 56°-8 F., and the thickness of rock between is 1610 metres, or
5280 feet (exactly a mile). This gives, by simple division, a rate of increase of
1° F. for 93 feet ; but a very large correction must be applied for the con-
vexity of the ground ; for it is evident that a point in the ground vertically
under a steep crest is more exposed to the cooling influence of the air than
a point at the same depth beneath an extensive level surface. No correction
for convexity would be needed if the temperature of the air decreased up-
wards as fast as the temperature of the internal rock ; but this is very far
from being the case, the decrease being about 3| times more rapid in the
rock than in the air. To form an approximate notion of the amount of this
correction, we must determine, as well as we can, the forms of the succes-
sive isothermal surfaces in the interior of the mountain. The tendency is
for all corners and bends to be eased off as we descend, so that each suc-
ceeding isothermal surface is flatter than the one above it. Accordingly, if
we have a mountain rising out of a plain, without any change of material, the
isothermals will be further apart in a vertical through the crest of the moun-
.tain than under the plain on either side ; they will also be further apart

16 REPORT — 1871.

at the highest part of this vertical, that is close under the crest, than at a
lower level in the same vertical. It would be absurd to pretend to fix the
amount of the correction with accuracy ; but it seems not unreasonable to
estimate that, in the present case, the numer of isothermals cut through by a
vertical line descending from the crest of the ridge to the tunnel itself is
about seven-eighths of the number which wovdd be cut through in sinking
through an equal distance in level ground, other circumstances being the same.
Instead of 1° in 93 feet, we should thus have 1° in ^ of 93, that is, in 81 feet.

This is a slow rate of increase, and is about the same as Mr. Fairbaim
found at Dukenfield. The rocks penetrated by the tunnel consist of highly
metamorphosed material, and are described as belonging to the Jurassic
series. No fossils have been found in them. For two-thirds of the length
of the tunnel, beginning from the Italian end, they are remarkably uniform,
and it is in this part that the observations have been taken. The following
account of them has been given by Prof. Ansted (Pop. Sci. Review, Oct.
1870, p. 351) : — " The rocks on which the observations have been made are
absolutely the same, geologically and otherwise, from the eatrance to the
tunnel, on the Italian side, for a distance of nearly 10,000 j'^ards. They
are not faidted to any extent, though highly inclined, contorted, and sub-
jected to slight slips and slides. They contain little water and no mineral
veins. They consist, to a very large extent indeed, of silica, either as
quartz or in the form of silicates, chiefly of alumina, and the small quantity
of lime they contain is a crystalline carbonate."

This uniformity of material is very favourable to conduction, and the high
inclination of the strata (in which respect these rocks resemble those at
Dukenfield) also appears to promote either conduction proper or aqueous con-
vection, which resembles conduction in its effects. As regards Mons. Gior-
dano's estimate of the mean air- temperature at the crest, it is obtained in
the following way : — The hill of San Theodule is 430 metres higher, and
the city of Turin is 2650 metres lower than the crest ; the temperature of
the former has been determined by one year's observations to be — 5°'l C,
and that of the latter is 12°-5 C. If a decrease of 1° C. for every 174 metres
of elevation be assumed (1° F. for 317 feet), we obtain, either bj' com-
parison with San Theodule or with Turin, the same determination — 2°-6
for the air-temperature at the crest of the ridge over the tunnel.

This mode of estimating the temperature appears very fair, though of
course subject to much uncertainty ; and there is another element of uncer-
tainty in the diff'erence which may exist between the air-temperature and
the rock-temperature at the summit.

These two elements of uncertainty would be eliminated if a boring of
from 50 to 100 feet were sunk at the summit, and observations of tempera-
ture taken in it. The uncertain correction for convexity would still remain
to be applied. It would therefore be desirable also to sink a boring, of about
the same depth, in the plateau which extends for about a quarter of the
length of the tunnel, beginning near the Italian end, its height above the
tunnel being about a third of a mile.

In November last, when very little information had reached this country
respecting the temperature-observations in the tunnel, an urgent appeal was
addressed, jointly by your Committee and by the Geographical Society (of
which Prof. Ansted is Foreign Secretary), to M. Sismonda, requesting him
to use his influence with the Italian authorities to -secure a series of accu-
rate observations of the temperature in the sides of the tunnel, before time had
been allowed for this temperature to undergo sensible change from its original

ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE.

17

value. It was also suggested that the mean temperature of the surface
overhead should be examined by boring.

M. Sismonda speedily replied, stating that he fully recognized the impor-
tance of such experiments, and had already made arrangements with the
Government at Turin, and with the contractors for the railway works, to
have them carried out as fully and fairly as possible. Had the communica-
tion reached him at a time of year when he could have travelled without
great inconvenience, he would have gone to the spot himself; but as that
was now impossible, the Government Commissioner for the works, M. Salva-
tori, had undertaken to see the experiments carried through by employes
under his orders. M. Sismonda further stated that, from the commence-
ment of the tunnel, the Academy of Sciences of Turin had instituted a series
of scientific observations in it, in which observations of temperature were
included. The results of these observations he promised to forward as soon
as they were completed and tabulated.

On the receipt of the final refusal to bore down at the bottom of Eosc-
bridge Colliery, inquiries were instituted as to the feasibility of executing a
similar operation in the deepest part of the Alpine tunnel. The contractors
have, however, declined to grant permission, as the operation would involve
additional encumbrance of the very narrow space in which their works are
proceeding. It appears that a length of a mile or more in the deepest part
of the tunnel has not yet been opened out to the full width, so that oppor-
tunity niay yet be given to excavate a lateral heading and bore down, if the
Association encourage the plan.

Mr, G. J. Symons has repeated his observations in the Kentish Town
weD, at every fiftieth foot of depth, from 350 to 1100 feet, which is the
lowest point attainable. As the water begins at the depth of 210 feet, all
these observations may be regarded as unaff'ected by the influence of the
external air, and they have now been sufficiently numerous at each depth
to render further verification needless. The following are the results finally
adopted, and they do not diifer materially from those first published (Report
for 18693.

18^

Depth, in

Tempera-

Difference

Difference

Difference

Peet per

feet.

ture.

for 50 feet.

from 69°-9.

from 1100 ft.

degree.

ft.

o

ft.

ft.

350

56-0

400

57-9

1-9

13-9

750

54-0

450

59-0

1-1

12-0

700

58-3

500

60-0

1-0

10-9

650

59-6

550

60-9

•9

9-9

600

60-6

600

61-2

•3

9-0

550

61-1

650

61-3

•1

8-7

500

57-5

700

62-8

1-5

8-6

450

52-3

750

63-4

•6

7-1

400

56-3

800

64-2

•8

6-5

350

53-8

850

65-0

•8

5-7

300

52-6

900

65-8

•8

4-9

250

51-0

950

66-8

1-0

4-1

200

48-8

1000

67-8

1-0

3-1

150

48-4

1050

69-0

1-2

2-1

100

47-6

1100

69-9

•9

•9

50

55-6

1.

r*

18 REPORT 1871.

The uumbers in the last column are the quotients of those in the two pre-
ceding, and denote the average number of feet of descent for 1° F. of in-
crease, as deduced from comparing the temperature at each depth of obser-
vation with the temperature at the lowest depth. The earlier numbers in
this column of course carry more weight than the later ones. The amount
of steadiness in the increase of temperature of the water is best seen by
inspecting the third column, which shows that the freest interchange of heat
occurs at about the depth of 600 feet. This must be due to springs. The
soil, from the depth of 569 to that of 702 feet, is described as " light-grey
chalk, with a few thin beds of chalk-marl subordinate." The soil consists
in general of chalk and marl, from 325 to 910 feet, and below this of sandy
marl, sand, and clay (see list of strata in last year's Report, p. 41). The
mean rate of increase in the former is a degree in 56 feet, and in the latter
a degree in 49 feet. The mean rate of increase from the surface of the
ground to the lowest depth reached is certainly very nearly 1° F. in 54 feet.

Mr. David Burns, of H.M. Geological Survey, has furnished observations
taken in the W. B. lead-mines, at and near AUenheads, Northumberland, by
the kind permission of Thomas Sopwith, Esq., F.ll.S., and with the valuable
assistance of Mr. Ridley, Underground Surveyor, who continued the obser-
vations after Mr. Burns had Isft.

The mineral for which these mines are worked is galena. There are very
extensive old workings at a lower level than the present workings, and filled
with water, which is kept down by pumping ; but the quantity daily pumped
out is very small in comparison with the whole, so that the change of water
is slow.

From the offices of the lead-mines a small windlass with a supply of fine
brass wire was obtained, which enabled the thermometer to be lowered
steadily and quickly.

The first observations were taken in Gin-Hill shaft, 3rd June, 1871. The
observers proceeded as far down in the works as they were able, and took
their station in a level leading from the shaft, 290 feet from the surface of
the ground, and 38 feet above the surface of the water in the shaft.

The following observations were then made : —

Depth under Depth in Temperature,

ground. water. Fahr.

ft. ft.

340 12 49-3

340 12 49-2

390 62 51-

390 62 51-

440 112 51-3'

440 112 51-

}

The mean temperature at the shaft mouth for the year ending 31 st May
1871, was 44°-3, as derived from daily obsei'vations of maximum and mini-
mum thermometers, without applying a correction for diiirnal range. Add-
ing 1° to this, to obtain the probable mean temperature of the surface of
the ground, and taking the temperature at 400 feet of depth as 51''-3, Mr.
Burns computes that the rate of increase downwards is 6° in 400 feet, or 1°
in 66'6 feet. The data for this calculation are obviously in many respects
very uncertain.

On the 21st June Mr. Ridley took observations in another shaft in the
same workings, called the High Underground Engine Shaft. It is sunk

ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE. 19

from a level at the depth of 398 feet below ground, and the surface of the
water in it is 399 feet down the shaft, or 797 feet below the surface of the
ground. There are pumps in the shaft, but they had been stationary for more
than 24 hours before the observations were made. Immediately after the
observations they were started, and when they had been working for some
time the temperature of the water lifted was found to be 65°-2. They draw
their water at a depth of 957 feet below the surface of the ground.
The following were the observations : —

Depth under Depth in Temperature,

ground. water. Fahr
ft. ft.

807 10 65-n

807 10 64-9 f

857 60 65-41

857 60 65-7 f

807 10 65-4

The thermometer could not be lowered beyond 857 feet without risk of
losing it, by getting fast in the wooden framework with which the pumps
were secured. Mr. Burns thinks that some of the temperatures here re-
corded are too low, from the index being shaken down by reason of the im-
pediments presented by the upper portions of the framework. The surface
of the ground over this shaft is about 300 feet higher than over Gin-Hill
shaft. If we allow 1° for this increase of height, and call the temperature of
the surface of the ground 44°-3, as against 45°-3 at Gin Hill, we have, by
comparison with the observed temperature 65°-7 at the depth of 857 feet,
an increase of 21°-4 in 857 feet, or 1° in 40 feet.

On the 6th July Mr. Eidley took observations in another sump or under-
ground shaft at Slitt mine, Weardale. This shaft is sunk from the lowest
level in the working, and had been standing full of water during the five
months which had elapsed since it was sunk. The only source of disturbance
was a little water running along the level across the top of the shaft, so as
to enter the shaft (so to speak) on one side and leave it on the other. This
may affect the temperature at 3 feet, but could scarcely affect the tempera-
ture at 53 feet, which may be regarded as veiy reliable.

The following are the observations ; —

Depth under Depth in Temperature,

ground. water. Fahr.

ft. ft.

610 3 64-51

610 3 64-5 f

660 53 65-li

660 53 64-9/

Mr. Burns says " the surface-temperature at Slitt mine will be nearly the
same as that at Gin-Hill shaft, judging from their relative elevations,
aspects, and [exposure to the winds." Assuming it then to be 45°-3, and
reckoning the temperature at 660 feet as 65°, we have an increase down-
wards of 19°-7 in 660 feet, or 1° in 33-5 feet. The only datum that seems
doubtful here is the surface-temperature. If, instead of 45°'3, it be assumed

f 44°-3 ) f ^1 Q 1

as j 4go.3 y , it gives an increase of 1° in i g^'^ I feet.

Mr. Eidley has also taken observations in Breckon-Hill shaft, which is
near the river Allen, about 1^ mile from Gin-HiU shaft, and at an elevation

c2

}

20 REPORT 1871.

not much above the bottom of the valley, but 1174 feet above sea-level. It
was sunk some years ago, and has since stood nearly fuU of water. At the
time of the observations the surface of the water was 24 feet down the
shaft. The following are the observations taken in this shaft on June
13th :—

Depth under Depth in Temperature,

ground. water. Fahr.

ft. ft.

50 26 47-2 1

50 26 47-2 1

100 76 46-9"

100 76 46-8

150 126 46-8)

150 126 46-7 J

200 176 46-6

250 226 46-8

300 276 46-8

350 326 46-9

These observations were taken early in the morning, when the air and
springs were so cold as to allow the maximum thermometer to be cooled below
the temperature of the shaft. In order to test more thoroughly the apparent
uniformity of temperature from 100 feet down to 350 feet, Mr. Ridley took
a second series of observations, extending from the 22nd to the 27th June.
In these observations the thermometer was lowered in a tin case fiUed with
water colder than that of the shaft. The thermometer was supported within
the case in a vertical position by a wooden frame, and prevented from shak-
ing about. It was allowed to remain at each depth several hours, was then
lifted, and read with all possible care. The following are the observations
thus obtained : —

Depth under
ground,
ft.
42

Length of
immersion,
h m
... 10 40 . .

Temperature before
immersion.

42-0 ....

Temperature after
immersion.

. . . . 46 5

92

. .. 11 20 ..

44-0 ....

. . . . 46-5

142

... 11 40 . .

42-4 ....

. . . . 46-6

192

... 12 20 . .

461 ....

. . . . 46-6

242

... 34 0 . .

44-0 ....

. . . . 46-6

292

... 13 40 . .

45-4 ....

. . . . 46-6

342

... 10 25 . .

45-4 ....

. . . . 46-6

Here the temperature is even more uniform than in the first series. As
to the causes of this uniformity, Mr. Burns remarks that the shaft is not
connected with any working, but is cut through solid strata. It is a
few yards to the east of the Allen, while, in the bed of that stream, and
making a great spread on the west side of the valley, is a bed of hmestone
nearly 70 feet thick, and dipping at an angle of about 10^ to the east. The
top of this limestone was cut in the shaft about 40 feet down, which occa-
sioned a great influx of ivater into the shaft, and drained a strong spring on
the other side of the river.

It will be observed that the chief difference between the two sets of ob-
servations is just at the place where this limestone was cut. The second set
were taken after and during much rain, and the first set after a week of very
little rain. It appears probable that the difference of temperature at this

ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE. 21

depth was due to the difference of temperature of the surface-water which
soaked in through the limestone in the two cases. As regards the tempera-
tures at depths exceeding 200 feet, it would appear that, in times of compa-
rative drought (as in the first set), the heat of the soil at the greater depths
has time to produce a little augmentation in the temperature of the water
before it soaks away.

This shaft is obviously not adapted for giving any information as to the
rate of increase downwards. Collecting the best determinations from the
other shafts we have : —

Depth of Temperature. Calculated

thermometer. Fahr, increase,

ft. „ „ ft.

Gin-Hill Shaft 400 51-3 1 in 66-6

High Underground Engine 857 65-7 1 in 40

Slitt Mine 660 65-1 1 in 33-5

Mr. Burns considers that little or no weight should be attached to the first
of these determinations, as a pumping-engine was working in a neighbouring
shaft communicating with it at the time when the observations were taken.
The jump of 2° in descending from 340 to 390 feet also renders the inter-
pretation of these observations difficult.

The closeness of the temperatures in the other two shafts, at depths differ-
ing by about 200 feet, suggests the idea that they are both fed by the same
spring, and that the temperatures indicated are the temperature of the origin
of the spring slightly modified by the different temperatures of the strata
through which it has passed ; but their positions appear to render this im-
possible.

Mr. Burns's opinion from all the observations is that the mean rate of in-
crease downwards at Allenheads is about 1° in 35 feet ; but this cannot at
present be held as proved.

The strata consist mainly of alternate beds of sandstone and shale, with a
few beds of limestone intermixed. In Slitt mine there is also a bed of
basalt 158 feet thick, overlying the vein of fluor-spar in which the workings
are carried on, the workings being 55 feet down in this vein.

Preparations are being made for taking observations in the dry part of the
mines, by making shallow bores at different levels, inserting the thermometer,
plugging up the hole for a few days, and then reading.

Another gentleman connected with H.M. Geological Survey, Mr. R. L.
lack, has taken observations in a bore at Crawriggs, Kirkintilloch, near
Cilasgow. They were taken on the 29th November 1870, the temperature
of the air being 34°. The surface of the water in the bore was 6 feet below
the surface of the ground, the latter being 200 feet above sea-level. The
Poilowing were the observations : —

Depth from surface Time of lowering lime of withdrawing Temperature.

of ground. thermometer. thermometer. Fahr.

feet. h m h m o

50 12 52P.M 1 7p.m 47

100 1 10 „ 1 28 „ 48|

150 1 33 „ 1 52 „ 49|

200 1 58 „ 2 14 „ 50

250 2 22 „ 2 43 „ 50

300 3 15 „ 3 34 „ 50|

350 3 40 „ 3 50 „ 51

A few feet below 350 feet an obstruction in the bore prevented further

22 REPORT— 1871.

observations ; but tbe bore continues for aboiit 70 feet further. We have
here a total increase of 4° in 300 feet, which is at the rate of 1° in 75 feet ;
but the intermediate steps are so irregular that not much weight can be
attached to this determination.

The Secretary has corresponded with the Smithsonian Institution respect-
ing the great bore at St. Louis, which was described in last year's Report,
and also respecting the Hoosac Tunnel which passes under a mountain and
will be 4| miles long, but the correspondence has not yet led to any definite
result.

It was stated in last Report that application had been made to General
Helmersen, of the Mining College, St. Petersburg, for information regarding
the temperature of a very deep bore in course of sinking at Moscow, as well
as regarding underground temperatures in Russia generally. A long delay
occurred, owing to the General being absent from home for seven months,
and not receiving the communication till his return ; but shortly after his
return he dispatched a very polite answer, from which the following passages
are extracted: — " We have an artesian well in St. Petersburg, bored in the
Lower Silurian strata. At the depth of 656 English feet this well stops at the
granite, a granite which perfectly resembles that of Finland. The lowest
portion of these Silurian strata is merely a degraded granite, a grit combined
with debris of felspar. About 353,000 hectolitres of water flow from the
well per diem, and this water issues with a constant temperature of 9°-8

Reaumur You are doubtless aware of the existence of a series

of observations on the temperature of the soil at the bottom of a well which
was sunk in the town of Yakoutsk in Eastern Siberia. This well has shown
us that the soil of Siberia, at least in this part of its great extent, is frozen
to a depth of 540 English feet. The mean temperature of Yakoutsk is
— 8°-2 R. At the depth of 100 feet the temperature of the soil was found to
be — 5°-2. Prom this depth to the bottom the temperature increased at the
rate of 1° R. for every 117 feet; whence it would follow that the soil at
Yakoutsk is frozen to the depth of about 700 feet.

" It appears to me a very interesting circumstance that, according to ac-
counts just received by the Icademy of Sciences from Baron Maydel, traveller
in the country of the Tchukchees [des Tschouktschi], there are found in
those regions layers of ice, quite pure, alternating with sand and clay. The
interesting letter of the Baron will shortly be printed in the publications of
the Academy. It was in making excavations in search of mammoths that
Maydel made this discovery."

If we assume the temperature of the surface of the soil at St. Petersburg
to be 39°- 17 F., which, according to ' Herschel's Meteorology,' is the mean
temperature of the air at the Magnetic and Meteorological Observatory, and
if we take the temperature of the water as that of the bottom of the well,
we have an increase downwards of 14°-88 F. in 656 feet, which is at the rate
of 1° F. in 44-1 feet. If, on the other hand, we suppose the surface of the
ground to be 4° F. warmer than the air (and the difference at Yakoutsk ap-
pears to be greater than this), we deduce an increase at the rate of 1° F. in
60 feet.

The rate of increase at Yakoutsk from the depth of 100 feet to the bottom
of the frozen well at 540 feet is given above by General Helmersen as 1° R,
in 117 feet. This is 1° F. in 52 feet.

An account of the Yakoutsk well is given in ' Comptes Rendus,' tome vi.
1838, p. 501, in an extract from a letter by Erman (fils), who visited Ya-
koutsk when the well had attained a depth of 50 feet. He gives the tem-

ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE. 23

perature at this depth from his own observations, and the temperatures at
77, 119, and 382 feet from the subsequent observations of the merchant to
whom the well belonged. His figures differ very materially from those given
above ; but it may fairly be presumed that General Helmersen's account is
the more accurate.

Before the receipt of General Helmersen's letter, <;he following communi-
cation respecting the Moscow boring had been received by the Secretary from
Mons. N. Lubimoff, Professor of Natural Philosophy in the University of
Moscow.

" December ^^, 1870.

" Dear Sir, — I beg your pardon for not having replied sooner to your letter.
I am sorry to say that the information which I can now communicate is very
deficient. The great bore of Moscow is not yet terminated, and the experi-
ments on temperature which have been made hitherto are but of a preli-
minary kind. It was in the hope of renewing the measurements under more
satisfactory conditions that I delayed my answer ; but as certain circum-
stances did not permit me to resume the observations, which are therefore
deferred to the spring of 1871, 1 must restrict myself to describing the old ones.

" These were made, on my commission, by M. Schiller, B.A., in April 1809.
The bore was then about 994 feet deep, and, from 56 feet to the bottom,
full of water. A mercury thermometer of a peculiar kind was constructed,
on an idea of my own. It consisted of a capillary tube of thick glass, ter-
minating below in a large reservoir ; at the upper end a funnel-like piece
was adjusted, into which the mercury flowed off as soon as the temperature
rose above a certain value [sketch annexed]. The whole was placed within
a closed case, which was plunged to a chosen depth into the bore, and re-
versed by means of a special arrangement. It was then brought again to the
right position and drawn up to the surface, a poftion of mercury having
flowed away. Here the thermometer was plunged into a water-bath, the
temperature of which was so regulated that the mercury attained the end of
the capillary tube ; this was then the temperature required.

" The measurements were made at the depths of 175, 350, 525, 700, 875,
and 994 feet. From 350 feet to the bottom the temperature throughout the
bore was found to be nearly constant, namely 10°'l C, with deviations of
+ 0°-l. The temperatures of the upper parts of the bore were not quite
precisely ascertained, the chief attention being given, in these first experi-
ments, to the deeper parts. The air-temperature at the surface for the time

(

11 April to ?^4^^ varied between -f-7°-5 and -l°-9 C.
29 ^ 5 May /

" As soon as the boring is completed, and the present impediments removed
from the bore, the observations will be resumed, and perhaps some new
methods will be applied for the sake of verification, though the above de-
scribed apparatus, previously tried, seemed to give very exact results.

" I shall be very glad to communicate to you, as soon as possible, the re-
sults of the new experiments. As to underground temperatures for Russia
in general, there is, so far as I know, no place where regular and trustworthy
observations have been made {^should be made in original] except the Central
Physical Observatory at St. Petersburg, the results of which are published by
Dr. Wild, Director of the establishment, in his printed Annual Reports."

From the sketch annexed to the description in Professor Lubimoff's letter,
it appears that the enlargement at the open end of the capillary tube is quite
sudden, and not likely to retain any mercury when inverted. The idea of
error from this cause may therefore be dismissed ; but the instrument is en-

24 REPORT 1871.

tirely unprotected against the pressure of the water in which it is immersed,
and it is important to consider what effect this pressure will have.

In thermometers of the ordinary construction this pi'essure acts only ex-
ternally, and produces much greater diminiition of the internal volume than
when, as in Prof. Lubimoff's thermometer, it acts both externally and in-
ternally, a mode of action with which we are familiar in the case of CErsted's
piezometer.

From Eegnault's experiments it appears that the apparent compression of
mercury in glass, when the pressure is thus applied, is -000001234 per atmo-
sphere, whereas the apparent expansion of mercury in glass for heat is -0000857
per degree Fahi-enheit. The latter number is 69 times the former ; it there-
fore appears that a pressure of 69 atmospheres would be required to falsify
the indications of Prof. Lubimoff's thermometer to the extent of 1° F. The
actual pressure at the bottom of the well is less than the half of this, and
therefore should only produce an error of a few tenths of a degree. This,
however, is on the assumption that the glass undergoes no change of figure, a
condition which may easily fail of being fulfilled, owing to the want of perfect
uniformity in the glass.

Mr. Donaldson has written from Calcutta to the effect that the thermo-
meter which was sent to him has been entrusted to a competent observer,
who has taken numerous observations with it, which will be sent shortly.

M. Erman's letter above referred to is immediately followed in the ' Comptes
Rendus' by an account, by M. Walferdin, of some observations, which appear
to be very reliable, taken in artesian weUs in the basin in which Paris is
situated. They were taken with maximum thermometers of the kind in-
vented by Walferdin himself, in which the mercur3' overflows into a reservoir
when the temperature exceeds a certain limit, the thermometers being her-
metically sealed in glas^ tubes to protect them from pressure.

The observations which he first describes were taken in a well, newly
sunk to the depth of 263 metres, at St. Andre, about 50 miles to the west of
Paris, and which failed to yield a supply of water. The temperature was
carefully observed at the depth of 253 metres by means of two thermometers,
which were allowed to remain at that depth for ten hours. Their indications
agreed to -03 of a degree Centigrade, and gave a mean of 17°-95 C. For the
sake of comparison, M. Walferdin observed the temperature at the bottom of
a well 75 metres deep, situated at a distance of only 13 metres from the other
well, and found it 12°-2C., showing a difference of 5°-75C. in 178 metres, which
is at the rate of 1° C. in 30-95 metres, or 1° F. in 56-4 feet. He mentions that
he also employed two Six's thermometers (deux thermometrographes) enclosed
in copper tubes to protect them from pressure, but both of these gave erroneous
indications. The copper case of one was imperfect, and allowed a little water
to enter. This one read l°-25 too high, owing probably to the effect of
pressure ; the other read 2°-15 too low, owing probably to the index being
shaken down.

The temperature at the depth of 400 metres in the puits de Grenelle at
Paris was observed on two difierent occasions. The indications were 23°-5
on the first and 23°-75 on the second occasion; and these M. Walferdin com-
pares with the constant temperature ll°-7 in the caves of the Observatory at
the depth of 28 metres. Taking the mean of the two observations, 23°-6, we
have a difference of ll°-9 in 372 metres, which is at the rate of 1° C. in 31-2
metres, or 1° F. in 56-9 feet.

Observations in the well of the Military School, at a distance of 600 metres
from the puits de Grenelle, showed a temperature of 16°-4 C. at the depth of

ON UNDERGROUND TEMPERATURE. 25

173 metres. This gives, by comparison with the Observatory caves, au in-
crease at the rate of 1° C. in 30-85 metres, or 1° F. in 56-25 feet.

These three determinations are in wonderfully close agreement with each
other. All three wells are sunk in the chalk of the Paris basin. In the
case of the St. Andre well the thicknesses of the different strata were : —

metres.

Plastic clay 13-52

White chalk 122-46

Marly chalk 29-24

Glauconie 13-64

Greensand 84-36

263-22

The thermometer which the Committee have been employing for the last
three years is a Phillips's maximum, having so fine a bore that the detached
column of mercury which serves as the index is sustained in the vertical
position by capillary action, and will bear a moderate amount of shaking
without slipping down. Numerous instances, however, have occurred in
which the index has slipped in consequence of jerks or concussions sustained
by the thermometer in hauling it up from a depth. During the past six
months the Secretary has been in correspondence with Messrs. Negretti and
Zambra respecting a proposed modification of the maximum thermometer
known by their name, which occurred to him more than a year ago, and was
described by him privately to some meteorological friends at the last Meeting
of the Association. It was then supposd to be new, but it now appears that
Messrs. Negretti and Zambra have made something of the kind for the last
fourteen or fifteen years. Several changes, however, were necessary before
the thermometer was adapted to the uses of the Committee, and the first
complete instruments were received in June last. They are enclosed, like the
thermometers previously used, in hermetically sealed tubes, for protection
against pressure, and they have the advantages (1) of being able to bear
more severe jolts without derangement of their indications, and (2) of pre-
senting to view a much broader column of mercury, so as to be more easily
read in a dim light.

The instrument is to be used in a vertical position, with the bulb uppermost.
Between the bulb and the stem there is a contraction, through which the
mercury will not pass except under pressure. It is set by holding it with
the bulb end lowest, and tapping this end on the palm of the hand, tiU the
part between the contraction and the bulb is fuU of mercury. It can then
be held with the bulb up, and the mercury in the stem wiU run down to the
lower end, from which the graduations begin. In this position, the top of
the column indicates the temperature of setting, which must be lower than
the temperature intended to be observed.

The instrument is then to be lowered into the bore to any required depth,
and allowed to remain there for about half an hour, to ensure its taking the
temperature of the surrounding water. The expansion of the mercury in
the bulb with heat will force a portion of the liquid through the contraction,
and subsequent cooling in hauling up will not cause any of it to return.
The portion which has thus escaped from the bulb into the stem will usually
be found rem^iining close to the contraction, when the thermometer has been
hauled up. The instrument must then be gently inclined, so as to make the
bulb end slightly the lowest, when the mercury in the stem wiU all unite
into one column, which will run down to its place on again raising the bulb.
The head of the column will then indicate the required temperature.

26 REPORT— 1871.

Report on Observations of Luminous Meteors, 1870-71. By a Com-
mittee consisting of James Glaisher, F.R.S., of the Royal
Observatory, Greenwich, Robert P. Greg, F.R.S., Alexander
S. Herschel, F.R.A.S., and Charles Brooke, F.R.S., Secre-
tary to the Meteorological Society.
The object of the Committee being, as in the previous year, to present a
condensed Report of the observations which they have received, and to indi-
cate the progress of Meteoric Astronomy during the interval vrhich has
elapsed since their last Eeport, the reviews of recent publications relating to
ileteoric Science which will be found in the sequel are preceded by a state-
ment of the results obtained by the observers, who have during the past
year contributed a valuable list of communications on the appearances of
luminous meteors and regular observations of star-showers to the Com-
mittee. The real heights and velocities of thirteen shooting-stars obtained
by the cooperation of Mr. Glaisher's staff of observers at the Royal Obser-
vatory, Greenwich, during the simultaneous watch for meteors on the nights
of the 5th to 12th of August last, are sufficiently accordant with the real
velocity of the Perseids (as already previously determined by similar means,
in the year 1863) to afford a satisfactory conclusion that the results of direct
observation are in very close agreement with those derived from the astro-
nomical theory of the August meteor-stream. Shooting-stars were observed
to be more than usually frequent on the nights of the 17th of August and
24th of September last, accompanying on the latter night a rather brilliant
display of the Aurora. On the nights of the 18th-20th of October last the
sky was bo generally overcast as to conceal the view of any meteoric shower
which may have taken place on that well-established meteoric date. But on the
mornings of 13th-loth of November last a satisfactory series of observations of
the November star-shower (so far as its return could be identified) recorded
at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, and at several other British stations,
concurs with very similar descriptions of its appearance in the United States
of America in showing the rapid decrease of intensity of this display since
the period of greatest brightness, which it attained in the years 1866 and
1867. Notices of the extreme brightness with which it was visible in the
following year (1868) are extracted from astronomical and meteorological
journals kept in Switzerland and Scotland. A short view of the sky on the
night of the 12th of December last was obtained at Birmingham, where the
accurate divergence of the meteors observed by Mr. Wood from the radiant
point in Gemini of the December meteors sufficed to verify the periodical
return of that meteoric current. The state of the sky was not favourable
for observations of meteors on the first two nights of January ; but during
two hours, when the sky was clear, on the night of the 20th of April last,
the well-known group of April meteors was noted, on the periodical date,
diverging in considerable numbers, and with the characteristic features of
brightness, and leaving a persistent streak from the direction of a nearly fixed
centre in the constellation Lyra. One meteor of the shower, simultaneously
observed at Birmingham and Bury St. Edmunds, afforded sufficiently accu-
rate materials for calculating its real distance from the observers, and the
length and velocity of its visible flight relatively to the earth. The com-
bined observations of the regularly recurring meteor-showers during the
past j'ear having at present proved successful in contributing some valuable
materials to their history, the Committee propose to resume during the
coming year a systematic watch for their return, and to provide observers

OBSEKVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 27

of the regular star-showers of August and November, and those of smaller
interest and abundance in January, April, October, and December, with
suitable maps and instructions to enable them to obtain, without unnecessary
pains bestowed in preparations or expense, the most careful and complete
records of their extraordinary displays. In order that the operations of the
Committee may thus continue to be systematically directed towards the
objects which have acquired important interest from the discovery of the as-
tronomical connexion of shooting- stars with the orbits of comets, introducing
the strictest methods of inquiry into the laws of their appearance, the Com-
mittee earnestly desire the r^ewal, in the coming year, of the support which,
since its first formation, by their correspondence and cooperation, observers
have hitherto freely contributed to the British Association.

Notices of the appearance of twenty-two fireballs and smaU bolides have
during the past year been received by the Committee, fourteen of which
were compared to the apparent size and brightness of the moon, and the
latter include three detonating meteors of the largest class. Descriptions of
some of the largest of these meteors are contained in the accompanying list
and in the following paragraphs of the Report. No notice of the fall of an
aerolite during the past year has been received, although the occurrences of
large meteors during the months of autumn and spring, preceding April last,
were more than ordinarily frequent. Of one of these, which appeared with
unusual brilliancy in Cornwall, Devonshire, and the south-western counties
of England on the evening of the 13th of February, it is possible to estimate,
at least approximately, the locality and the real elevation of its flight.
Careful observations of such phenomena when they appear are, however,
again recommended by the Committee to all observers who may have the
necessary astronomical skill, and the rare opportunity to note their brilliant
courses by the stars.

In the discussion of some papers on Meteoric Astronomy which follow the
foregoing observations, it will be seen that in the hands of its talented origi-
nator. Prof. Schiaparelli, the cosmical theory of periodical shooting-stars has
received fresh and valuable illustrations, and the apparently inexplicable
grouping of radiant-points for several successive days in the neighbourhood
of a general centreof divergence, if not explained, appears to depend upon effects
of planetary disturbances of a single meteoric stream from which the parasitic
radiant-points have been derived. The discussion of such examples is sim-
plified, and their complete explanation is, perhaps, not beyond the reach of
the persevering application with which skilled astronomers in every country
are now bent on the solution of the complicated and intricate geometrical
problems presented to them by the distribution and features of the known
radiant-points of shooting-stars. To a brief description of this interesting
memoir are added, at the close of the Eeport, some notices of works which
have recently appeared on the more general branches of meteoric science.

I. MeTEOES DOtTBLT OBSERVED.

1. A Table of the real heights of sixteen shooting- stars doubly observed in
England during the meteoric shower of August 1870, independently of the
observations recorded at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, was presented
in the last volume of these Reports. A comparison of the observations made
on that occasion at the Royal Observatory, (jreenwich, with those recorded
at the other stations, enables the real paths of thirteen meteors (ten of
which are new to the former list), seen by Mr. Glaisher's staff of observers,
to be satisfactorily determined j and the real heights and velocities of the

28

REPORT 1871.

meteors thus identified, together with the particulars of the ohservations
from which they are concluded, are entered in the Table opposite.

The accompanying diagram (drawn on the same scale as that in the last
Eeport) readily exhibits to the eye the actual heights at appearance and dis-
appearance (or the heights of the centres of the visible paths of the meteors
Nos. 1, 4, 9) above the earth's surface. The last vertical line on the right
represents (as in the last Report) the average height at first appearance and
that at disappearance of all the meteors regarded as identified in the present
list, of which the approximate heights of those points have been satisfactorily
ascertained. The resulting average heights are : —

At first appearance. At disappearance.
74-1 B. S. miles. 47-6

Of 16 meteors in the last Heport . .

Of 10 meteors in the present list . . 71 "7

Of 20 meteors observed in Aug. 1863 81-6

54-4
57-7

1 2

Fig. 1.

Eeferenee nvimbera.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

120

100

I

•43

t

W

80

60

40

20

1

1

1

1

120

100

80

I

CD

'u

m

60

40

20

Heights at appearance and disappearance of tliirteen shooting-stars simultaneously ob-
served at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, and at other stations in England, August
6th-llth, 1870. (Nos. 1, 4, 9 are calculated heights at the centres of the real paths.)

The present average heights are somewhat less than those observed in the
year 1863 ; but they agree more closely with the general average height at
first appearance, 70-05 miles, and that at disappearance, 54-22 miles (as given
in the Report for 1863, footnote on p. 328), of nearly all the shooting-stars

1

[^To face pcu/e 28.

-(B.) Birmingham ; (H.) Hawkhurst, Kent ; (L.) Eegent's Park,
:ust, 1870.

3

|Zi

o
o

Velocity

inB. S.

miles

per

second.

Position of the radiant-point.

E. A.

N.
Decl.

0

0

195

+64

26

+ 58

50

+ 54

23

+ 58

27

+ 62

40

+ 71

45

+ 62

40

+ 57

54

+67

Ajjproximate by
the stars.

Obserrers, Eemarks, &c.

3'
4

5i
6,

7
8

9
10
II
12
13

IS

123?

73?

123?

92?

27

39
52

K Draconis

e Cassiopei;B . . .

a Persei

e Cassiopeia; ...
e Cassiopeia^ ...

Gustos Messiuin

B Camelopardi

ij Persei

B Camelopardi

G. L. Schultz.
W. il. Wood.
W. C. Nash.

E. P. Greg.

W. Barber. f Course apparently

F. Hewlett. \ ascending?
W. C. Nash, r A rery doubtful
T. Crumplen. \ accordance.
W. Marriott, W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

W. C. Nash.

A. S. Herschel.

W. Marriott, W. Barber.

T. Cruinplen.

T. Wright, W. Marriott, W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

T. Wright, W. Marriott.

A. S. Herschel.

W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

T. V/right, W. Marriott, W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

T. Wright, W. Marriott. W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

3.7

miles

per see.

46

-62

I Average velocity and position of the
/3 Camelopardi ... < radiant-point of the Perseids,
[ Nos. 11, 12, 1.3.

[Tofaci i><ujf as.

JU-al Heights unci Velocities of Shooting- stars simultuueously observed at the Roynl Observatory, Greenwich ((Jr.), and at other stations in England — (B.) liirmingham ; (H.) Hawkhurst, Kent ; (L.) Itegent's Park,

London ; (M.) Manchestci- ; (T.) East TiBted, HanU— on the nights of the Cth-llth August, 1870.

1

(Approii-

Apparent
mngnitudo,

Hour;)
0. U. T.

fixed stars.

§

B.

h m •

Gr.

II II :8

2

».

(11 II ij)

Or.

10 10 6

,

U.

(.0 10 ol

Venn..

10 as IS

3

(10 »s «)

(ir.

10 19 X
(10 .! 30)

>i

L.

I)

10 33 10

1

(10 3. 0)

X

Ur.

10 49 4s

Jupitur.

(,0,9 0)

>CBp«Ua.

10 ss 19

*

(.<, s6 «!

3

II I 40

X

U.

{11 0 0)

3

Or.

10 37 so

(10 36 o]

X

10 39 10

(10 37 0)

H.

2

Or.

II i 18

n. !(ii . oi

■ Lvnr

Or, M 38 >6

1

H. (11 36 30]

3

Oj.l 11 « 0

a

H.

Cli +3 30)

3

Bluiah.

YoUow.
Bluish wJiitc.
Dluiiil) nliiW.

While.

White.

BliiiMi wliito.

W^ito.

Tclluwisli.

Orftngo-rt'd.

Blui»h wliilc.

Wiiilo.
Bluish white.

Yellow.
Yellowiah.

Wliit*.

Bluish.

Ornnce-yellow.

Yollowuh.

Whit*.

Bluuh.

Streak, und
ltd duration.

Bright etrcalc.

Btreuk.

^ wcund.

Fine alrciik.

\ eccutid.

Bright Btroab.

Streak,
1 seoood,

Nono.

Fine strcok,

3 seconds.

Pine streak.

Bright, 3 woiinds,

Fine strmk.

Kono.

Stroak.

Nono.

Obsoryed points of

Disappear-

R. A.

N.
Detil.

a A.

(,o

+70

centre

a3

+40

16

17s

+ SI.

170

,08

+4S

,18

X7

+ SS

+41

6

160

+6!

!«

+80

|«S

+60

3'S

11

+ k7

X40

60

+67

140

88

+6,

'SS

+ 59

ao

+ S8

a

7

+st.

344

a7

+7>

18

+ (9

33a

+68

317

X4.1

+66

'!7

X15

+ S8

«3»

347

+4!

333

34S

+71

30s

IS

+6S

3X5

■H

+8.

'93

llli

+4S

J»7

+ 78

•87

path.)

Average heights imd length of pitth (omitting doubtful vqIun, nmrked thiis?}, in British statute niilo^

"io"

8

06

6

0-6

*o

•S

»S

09

0-8

7

07

11

OS

Computjjd heights and places of

Appearance.

(10
147!
90

'35*
95
(4+

Sa so
S3 "
S' 39
5' 43
Sx 17
53 4
sa 30
sa a
5' 33

0 aoE.

1 49 W.

a 3E.
I xsE.

centre

56

SI sa
51 z6

o soE.
o 23 £,
o 41 E,

centre

of
S3 8
S6

of
SI 37

51 S4

S" 3+

S

s' 37

path.)
\ 31 W.
I 19 E.
path?)
3 20 E.
3 7W.
o 57 E.
o 43 E.
path ?)
o 57 W.
o 28 E.
o 5E.
o isE.

Length
of path

n fe. S.

miles.

Velocity

'35?

(One centre of
S** puth. 71 miles.)

Position of the radiant' point.

miles
per sec.

eCossiopeix' ....

a Persei

E CB£sio|>eiii' . . .
eCaMiopeiit ....
Gustos Messiuin .

Observers, Remarks &c.

B Camelupardi.

II Persei

B Camelupardi.

( Course apparently
( ascending?
J A very doubtful

aocordaiice.

G. L. Schuliz.

W. H. Wood.
J W.C.Nash.
1 R.P.Greg.
' W. Barber

F. Eowlott,

W. C. Nash.

T. Crumplen.

W. Harriott. W. Barbt]

A. S. Hersohel.

W. C. Noah.

A. S. Herschel.

W. Marriott. W. Barber.

T. Crumplen.

T. Wright. W. Marriott. W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

T. Wright. W. Marriott,

A. S. Hersehel.

W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

T. Wright, W. Marriutt, W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

T. Wright. W. Marriott. W. Barber.

A. S. Herschel.

AV. Barber.

. A. S. Herschol.

0 Camelopnrdi .

(Average Telocity and position of the
radiant-poiot of the Per^eide,
Nos. U, 12, 13.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS,

29

simultaneously observed until the beginning of that year. The average
velocity of the Perseids, relatively to the earth, observed in the year 1863
was 34-4 miles per second, and that of the three Perseids satisfactorily well
observed in the present list is 37 miles per second. In his original letters to
Father Secchi on their connexion with Tattle's comet (Comet III., 1862),
now universally accepted as a true basis of their cosmical theory, Prof.
Schiaparelli calculated, from the known elements of the comet's orbit, that
the velocity with which the Perseids enter the earth's atmosphere (allowing
for a very minute influence of the earth's attraction) is 38 miles per second.
That the direct determination of the velocities of the August shooting-stars
which were made last year should, in this instance, so exactly agree with the
value found by calculation (although from the small number of identifiable
meteors the probable error of the determination is rather large), is, from the
great scale and general excellence of the observations, at least provisionally,
a successful confirmation of the astronomical theory of the August meteors,
and a satisfactory conclusion from the simultaneous watch.

2. During the corresponding observations of the meteor-shower of No-
vember last, in which the observers of Mr. Glaisher's staff at the Eoyal
Observatory, Greenwich, also took an important share, the coincidence of
the times of appearance and of the other particulars of a single meteor only
of the shower simultaneously observed at Greenwich and at Tooting, near
London, could be established, the descriptions of which, as given by the
observers at those stations, were as follows : —

No.

in

Lists.

Date.

Approximate

hour.

G. M. T.

Place of
observation.

Magnitude
as per stars.

Colour.

Duration.

Apparent course.

Appearance,
streak, &c.

7

1870
Not. 15

h m B

1 5 56

A.M.

Eoyal
Observatory,
Greenwich.

= Istmagni-
tnde star.

Bluish
white.

07 seconds.

FromflUrssEMa-
joris, passed a
little belowPo-
laris, in the di-
rection of p
Cephei.

Left a streak.

(8)

„ 15

1 5 0
A.M.

Tooting,

London,

S.W.

= 8irius.

White.

Short
duration.

From between
the 'Pointers'
of the Great
Bear, shot one-
third of the
way towards o
Cygni.

Left a long streak
lasting a second
or two.

7
(8)

„ 15
„, 15

1 5 56
15 0

Greenwich...
Tooting

Length of path 15°. Observer, Wm. Maeriott.
Meteor fairly well observed. Observer, H. W. Jacksox.

The apparent paths of the meteor among the constellations present a con-
siderable parallax in the right direction of displacement, as seen from the
two observers' stations, to lead to a positive determination of its real altitude
above the earth. The concluded path of the meteor is nearly horizontal at
a height of about fifteen miles above the earth's surface. The small distance
(only seven miles) between the two stations, greatly increasing the effect of
the errors most difficult to avoid in the observation and description of such
transitory phenomena, must, however, for the present be regarded as pre-
cluding certainty from the conclusion, which would otherwise attach to this
unusually low elevation of a meteor's real path.

30

REPORT 1871.

3. Preparations for observing the meteors of the 20th of April last were
also made at many stations in England and Scotland with only partial
success. A meteor of the April shower was, however, observed simul-
taneously at Birmingham and Bury St. Edmunds, of which the following
descriptions were recorded : —

No.

Date.

Approximate

hour.

G. M. T.

Place of
observation.

Magnitude
as per stars.

Colour.

Duration.

Apparent course.

Appearance,
streak, &c.

(6)

1871.
Apr. 20

h m

U 8 P.M.

Birmingham

= 1st magni-
tude star.

Blue.

1'23 second.

From Af Hercu-
lis to y Draco-
ni8-8°.

The meteor in-
creased in size.

(9)

„ 20

h m s

11 10 15

P.M.

Thurston,
near
Bury St. Ed-
munds.

= 1st mag-
nitude

star.

White.

3 seconds.

Krom i a Draoo-
nis.f UrsseMa-
joris, crossing
rUrsaeMajoris,
to i (k 12)
Lyncis.

Small in the
first, growing
brighter in the
last half of its
course. Left a
slender streab
at first, which
remained 2 se-
conds on the
last half of its
course.

f6)
(9)

„ 20

„ 20

11 8 Birmingham

11 10 1.5... Thurston ...

Length of path 11°. One-third of the sky overcast. Observer, W. H. Wood.
Length of path 45». Sky very clear. Observer, A. S. HebSCHEL.

Although the times at both the stations were uncertain to rather more
than a minute from true Greenwich time, and the approximate times of the
meteor's appearance recorded at the two stations differ from each other by
rather more than two minutes, yet the very similar descriptions of its ap-
pearance at the two stations, and the fact that no other meteor at either
station preceded it or foUowed it within a quarter of an hour, during a very
attentive watch, as well as the good agreement together of the apparent
paths recorded by the two observers, render it scarcely possible to doubt that
the same meteor was simultaneously observed. The apparent length of path
and duration are, however, much longer at Bury St. Edmunds than at Bir-
mingham, where the meteor was seen foreshortened near the radiant-point ;
and on this peculiar circumstance Mr. Wood (in a letter to Mr. Herschel)
makes some important remarks, which offer a veiy interesting field for fur-
ther observations. " My view of the meteor's course was evidently very
oblique, and yours, very direct (nearly at right angles), would obscure a faint
tail to me. There is also another peculiarity which I have observed in
oblique-visioned courses, that they appear to endure about half the time of
that obtained by direct vision, which I fancy arises from its invisibility to
one observer, whilst it is visible to the other in the earliest portion of its flight,
and the amount of the invisible course to bear some proportion to the recorded
differences in the durations." In perfect agreement with this explanation the
point of disappearan ce of the meteor is well fixed (by combining the observations)
at a height of about sixty-five miles above a place near Bourne, in Lincolnshire.
The observations, on the other hand, do not agree in determining the point of
first appearance. The first and faint half of the meteor's apparent path, as
recorded at Bury St. Edmunds, is placed too far from the north pole of the
heavens to be nearly comformable to the radiant-point near Z Lyrse (from
some point near and below which the apparent course of the meteor, as seen

OBSEKVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS, 31

at Birmingham, was directed), while this portion of the meteor's flight
appears to have entirely escaped observation at Birmingham. Prolonging
the meteor's visible flight at Birmingham 7° backwards towards the radiant-
point, and approaching the point of first appearance at Bury St. Edmunds
about the same distance towards the north pole of the heavens, the agree-
ment of the observations in fixing the point of first commencement at a
height of about eighty miles over the neighbourhood of Norwich is nearly
as exact as the determination of the place of the meteor's disappearance.
The length of its visible path was about seventy-five miles, and its radiant-
point in Taurus Poniatovii, on the same meridian, was about 40° south of
the usual radiant-point (QHJ of the April meteors. Although its apparent
course, as observed at Bury St. Edmunds, evidently denoted it as an erratic
member of the group, its general resemblance to the other Lyraids observed
on the same evening was a remarkable feature in its long and striking course.
Adopting Mr. "Wood's suggestion of (provisionally) increasing the duration,
as observed at Birmingham, from 1-25 to 2 seconds in the simple proportion
of the increased length of the apparent course, prolonged towards the radiant-
point, and adopting 2^ seconds (the average between this duration and that
recorded at Bury St. Edmunds) as the time of flight, the resulting velocity,
relative to the earth, of this single member of the April meteoric stream
doubly observed on the night of the 20th of April last, was, within very few
miles, about thirty miles per second. The theoretical velocity of the same
meteors (see the Note on the last page of this Eeport) is not quite thirty miles
per second.

4, Several observations of the very brilliant firebaU observed in Devon-
shire and in the south-western counties of England on the evening of the
13th of February last were collected and compared together by Mr. Wood,
the result of whose investigation will shortly be given, with descriptions of
that meteor, as the most probable conjecture, from the materials at present
at their disposal, arrived at by the Committee respecting its real height and
the locality of its nearest approach to the British isles.

II. Large Meteoes.
In addition to the conspicuous meteors described in the accompanying list,
the following descriptions of remarkable meteors have appeared, or were
communicated to the Committee by the observers : —

1. 1870, Nov. 1, 11^ 30"" P.M., London. "I saw a splendid meteor last
night, at 1 1*" 30", through the blind of my bedroom windoiu. The whole room
was illuminated, and the meteor must have been at least half as large as the
moon. I went to the window quickly, but could see no trail. The path
must have been, say, 5° to the right of a Aurigae, ending 10° to left of a, /3
Geminorum. I only saw the end.

" T. Ceumplen, London, N.W., Nov. 2nd, 1870."

2. 1870, Nov. 4, shortly before S*" a.m. (local time), Agra, India :—
Extraordinary Meteor. — " The following account of an extraordinary me-
teor occurs in a letter I received from a brother who is a missionary stationed in
Agra. He does not give the exact place where he was at the time, but it
must have been very near to Agra. The letter is dated Agra, 24th November,
1870. A missionary from Allahabad was with him when he saw it.

" MUls Hill, Chadderston, near Manchester. Robert Getson.

" Agra, Nov. 24, 1870. — I recently saw a marvellous meteor. I was in
camp, and had risen for an early march a few minutes before 3 a.m. on

32

REPORT ISri.

November 4th. I was standing under the shade of a cluster of trees, when
a sudden flash of light fell around. Two or three camp fires were blazing
near, and at first I thought it might be a sudden flare up from one of them ;
but on casting my eyes up towards the heavens, I saw a large oval light,
stationary. It appeared to be composed of a large number of irregularly
shaped, differently sized stars, yet so closely packed as to form one light, yet
giving the whole a sort of dappled appearance. At first I was struck dumb
with amazement — thought it must be some mental illusion, or that my eyes

were playing me false. But as I gazed it remained steadily fixed. ,

of Allahabad, was with me. I roused him ; he was soundly asleep, and some
seconds passed in waking him up. In the interval it appeared to have been
lengthened, nearly, though not quite, by a straight line, and as we gazed it
assumed the shape of a large magnet, with the upper limb rather shorter than
the other. It then gradually expanded, diminishing in brightness as it in-
creased in size, assuming a wavy, serpentine form, though keeping much to
a horseshoe shape, until it became so attenuated as to be no longer visible.
It must have continued in sight five minutes. It was seen by all the ser-
vants ; and one of them cried out, ' Bhagwauka seela hae,' by which he ap-
peared to mean that in his opinion the Almighty was amusing Himself with
fireworks ; literally, ' It is God's sport or amusement.' " — Nature, Jan. 12th,
1871.

3. 1870, Dec. 20, &" 40"" p.m., Hawkhurst. Kent.—" This evening at
gh 4(jni J noticed the descent of a beautiful meteor. It appeared to start
almost from the zenith towards the S.S.E., and it was visible for about three
seconds. It had very much the appearance of a sky-rocket in its flight, but
without any explosion, and it displayed vivid red and orange colours. The
evening was very dark, but the stars were visible ; the meteor did not in-
crease the amount of light in the place where I was walking. According
to my ' star-map,' I should lay down its course as follows." [See the sketch
of the meteor's course.]— T. HrurHKEY, Hawkhurst, Dec. 20th, 1870.

o

Andvo -
medu

0 o
Cefus

j-egasus
04 "

00!

Pi sees

4. 1871, Feb. 13, 9"^ 4™ p.m., Bristol.— "I saw a very briUiant meteor
last evening, February 13th, at 9^ 4™. During the time that it continued
visible the whole of the sky was illuminated by the light it emitted. The
first appearance of the meteor was not witnessed, but the direction and
situation of the latter portion of its path was approximately determined. It
passed through the S. part of Orion, just under Eigel, so [see sketch] : —

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 33

It disappeared near B, which is equal to about R.A. 4'' 10™, Decl. S. 15°.
At A it left a train about 2° in length, -which endured for ten minutes. In
that portion of the sky near which the meteor disappeared many stratus
clouds were visible.

" P.S. — I omitted to state that the brilliancy of the meteor excelled that
of any of the planets. When at its brightest the light was about equal to that
of a clear full moon. I only saw the disappearance." — William F. Denning,
Bristol, February 14th, 1871.

HeteX
(fcuse ^

At Rugby the meteor was observed very bright at about %^ 10™ p.m., and
it was described as " starting from near 0 Orionis, and proceeding towards a
point a little north of y Eridani, when it was lost behind a belt of cloud."
(Communicated to 'Nature,' February 16th, 1871, by J. M. Wilson.)

These two descriptions of its visible path (apparently from the relative
positions of the stations) are so similar that little can be certainly concluded
from them regarding the real distance of the meteor.

At Exeter " a briUiant meteor traversed the constellation of Orion, ap-
pearing near the Belt and passing from south to west. The direction was
south-west, altitude 35°. Its light equalled or exceeded that of fuU moon,
and it left a train of colours for some time." (' English Mechanic,' Feb. 24th.)

At Torquay, " The meteor started near BeUatrix in Orion, altitude 35°,
passing due west, leaving in its track a brilliant train of colours, green pre-
dominating." (Ibid., March 3rd.)

The meteor was also seen at Callington, in Cornwall, casting a brilliant dif-
fused light, and occupjdng two seconds in its transit. (Ibid.)

By comparing together the foregoing observations of its course, and obtain-
ing an approximate estimation of its real height, Mr. Wood is led to adopt
the following provisional positions of its visible track. The meteor first
appeared at an elevation of fifty-five miles over the English Channel, seventy
miles S.S.W. from Torquay. It thence descended, with an inclination of
16°, to a height of thirty-five miles over a point sixty-four miles west of
Torquay, thus describing, from S.E. by S. to N.W. by N., a path of eighty
miles in two seconds, across the centre of the county of Cornwall, terminating
at its western coast, near St. Columb Minor. The radiant of the meteor was
near a Hydras. As the meteor was probably distinctly seen in Cornwall, the
Scilly Isles, and in the south of Ireland, additional descriptions of its appa-
rent course from those places, as seen from points considerably west of the
place where it appears to have approached the earth, would afford the best
materials for verifying the present approximate conjecture of its real path.
As seen at Torquay, it was .notably described by an observer to Mr. Greg as
lighting up the whole bay and presenting a magnificent appearance.

1871. D

34

REPORT — 1871.

5. 1871, July 31st, 9^ 27"^ p.m., Bristol.—" I observed a meteor of some
briliiancy on Monday evening last, July 31st, at 91^ 27=^. It was first seen a
little above /3 Pegasi, and passing downwards obliquely, it went about 3° east
of a Pegasi, and disappeared when it reached a point somewhere near E. A. 13°,
N. Declin. 29°. It left no train of light that was perceptible, and I suppose
that the meteor was visible for about three seconds. As far as could be

i\

Observations oi

Date.

1870.
Sep. 12

23

Oct. 2

Hour.

h m

10 25 p.m

8 10 p.m,

10 8 p.m

Caraden Town,
Loudon.

Birmingham

29

Nov. 13

12 15 a.m
9 37 59

» 21
„ 20

1871.
Mar. 1

Place of
Observation.

Ibid,

Glasgow

Royal Observa
tory, Green-
wich.

9 35 p.m.
9 0 p.m

10 10 p.m.

17

About 10 40

p.m.
(local time).

Apparent Size.

3x I|, large disk...

One-third diameter
of the full moon,
or 2 X $ .

■V-

Colour.

Blue.

Duration.

Slow moving.,

Pale blue About 2 sees,

Silvery-white.

3 seconds .

Red

Yellowish .

Glasgow

Scarborough

Charing Cross,
London.

Paris, Rochelle,
&c., France.

= V--

Apparent shape and
size of the half-
moon.

Splendid meteor .

White 3 seconds

0-4 second
3 seconds..

Apparent Course.

Began near a Ursi
Majoris, and en
ed near Cor C;
roll.

Commenced at
a=66, 5=-t-3&

From 92° -1-44°
to 116 +37

Bluish

Brilliant white

Green

About 3 sees.

20 seconds

'

Commenced at Cd
Caroli.

Passed midway be;
tween « and
Draconis, ai
continued iti
path parallel to ^
and T] Ursae Mj
joris.

From i (/3, S)
rigse to o Ural
Majoris.

Descended from aci
point about 15
above the S.WjJ
horizon. il

From near /3 Caini||
Minoris to aboni
5° or 6° east of,
and at the sami
altitude as, « On\
onis.

104
Mm

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS.

35

judged it was of a red colour, and somewhat star-like in appearance. At the
time of its appearance the sky was rather cloudy and misty, and the meteor
was not, therefore, seen advantageously. It did not seem to explode at the
time of its extinction. I have sent the ahove particulars thinking they may
be useful for comparison with other results." — William F. Denning, Gotham
Park, Bristol, August 2nd, 1871.

irge Meteors, 1870-71.

Appearance; Train or
Sparks.

very large globular nu-
cleus. Seen through
haze, -which dimmed its
light.

globular nucleus, with-
out tail or streak.

ucleus pear-shaped, with
short adhering white
tail, projecting dull-red
fragments forwards on
its course ; increasing
and exploding at maxi-
mum brightness.

Length of Path and
Direction.

25° ; downwards to left..

»10° ; directed from Ca-
pella, radiant Fj.

Remarks.

Observer and
References &c.

;ft a very fine streak

ft no streak .

e meteor only seen as it
passed behind the edge
of a cloud.

icleus pear-shaped, fol-
lowed by a short train
"or a second. Point of
irst appearance near
louses, which concealed
:he neighbouring star
?rocyon.
explosion ; but many
parks projected from
he nucleus. Left a lu-
ninous track, which re-
aained visible for more
ban an hour.

From radiant Fj

5° while in sight ; directed

from 6 Ursae Majoris.
40°

15° J from radiant in Taurus

Fell perpendicularly

The stars scarcely visible through
haze, but recognized sufficiently
near the meteor's path.

View of the end of its course in-
tercepted when at an altitude
of 4° or 5°.

From radiant a Tauri. End
path hidden by houses.

of

T. Crumplen.

W. H. Wood.
Id.

Robert Maclure.
T.Wright.

Pro-
cyon

a Ori-
^ onis

Appeared with two flashes, which
lit up all the heavens.

Sky clear. The meteor appeared
extremely bright in the full
moonlight.

Seen also at Chichester, 10'» 30""
p.m., > ? , from near the ze-
nith, with a remarkably long
duration, to near the S.W'. hori-
zon. Bright gold colour at
last, leaving a brilhant train
visible for 3 or 4 minutes (' The
Times,' Mar. 21st).

Robert Maclure.

T. H. WaUer.

F. H. Ward.

Messrs. Prevost,
Samberg, and
other obser-
vers (' Comp
tes Rendus,'
March 20th,
1871).

d2

36

REPORT 1871.

Date.

Hour.

1871.
Mar.18

23

m

20 a.m
(local time),

24

Apr. 11

h
12

Place of
Observation.

6 35 p.m

4 25 a.m.
(local time).

Turin and other
places in Pied-
mont.

Broadstairs
(Kent).

Volpeglino, and
other stations
in Piedmont.

Apparent Size.

Colour.

Apparent diameter
of full moon.

Disk of apparent
size of Sirius, in-
cluding his rays.

Nucleus 25' diame
ter.

9 46 p.m. Ibid, Moncalieri
(local time). Piedmont.

„ 12

„ 14

„ 22

15 p.m
(local time)

Lodi; Moncalieri,
Piedmont.

11 39 p.m.TheObservatory,
(local time).] Naples

10 37 30

p.m.
(local time).

Moncalieri,
Piedmont.

Nucleus 10' diame.
ter.

Very large and bril-
liant.

Duration.

Brilliant white

Nucleus green,
with red
train.

Brilliant white

Apparent Course.

About 2 mi-
nutes. Very
protracted
course, and
slow speed

Bluish white.

Slow and
stately mo-
tion.

■n.

■n.

Reddish, then
bright blue.

White

Passed directly over
the townof Turin
from the moun-
tains near Susa,
towards the op
posite horizon.

First appearance at.
a point about 30°
above the N. J E.
horizon.

From

a Cygni, a-

cross a

Andro-

medoe, tc

) near ?

Piscium,

or

a =

8=

From 309°

+45°

to

10

+ 7

a =

S=

From 21 r

-10°

to

223

+ 28

[From

221

-11

to

111

+ 28

From

175

+ 15

to

111

+ 32]

From

HI

+ 7

to

105

+ 2

From

98

+ 70

to

15

+ 39

From 233

+23

to

18 + 88

(Polaris)

[From

212

+ 20

to

87

+ 45]

6. Meteors of the largest class, as described in the foregoing list of such
occurrences, were more than ordinarily frequent during the months of March
and April last, ajjpearing principally on the nights of the 17th-18th and
23rd-24th of March, and on those of the 11th and 12th of April last. On
the first of these dates two fireballs were observed in France and Italy, the
former of which was also seen in the south of England, at Chichester. A
large meteor was seen in Kent and Essex, on the second date, a few minutes
after sunset ; and two detonating meteors were observed at Urbiuo, and were
generally visible in Italy on the same night. The third detonating meteor
of which accounts have reached the Committee, made its appearance in Pied-
mont on the evening of the 12th of April last. Professor Serpieri and Mr.
Denza, at the Observatories of Urbino and Moncalieri, near Turin, are collect-
ing sufficient details of these large meteors to calculate their real course.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS.

37

Appearance ; Train or
Sparks.

Length of Path and
Direction.

Remarks.

Observer and
References &c.

Nucleus an elongated mass Horizontal, from W.N.W,
of stars. Left an ini-j to E.S.E.
mensely broad and
bright streak, which re-
mained visible for 10"'
or 15™.

Mucleus followed by a 15°
train of red sparks. Ex-
ploded, projecting many
luminous fragments.

lieft a few bright red sparks
and a very persistent
ruddy streak on its whole
course.

lucleus very brilliant. At
TT Bootis it paused for
an instant, and advanced
with irregular motion
towards its termination.
Left a brilliant streak.

descending towards
the east, at an inclina-
tion of about 45°.

ieft a reddish streak for
20 seconds.

lucleus followed by a
bright streak, which re-
mained visible for 3^
minutes.

The meteor was also seen at Ley
ton, Essex, a few minutes after
sunset, appearing in the E.N.E.,
and taking a southerly direction
(J. F. Dutliie, 'Nature,' Mar.
30th, 1871.)

Burst with a violent detonation ;
heard about J a minute after
its disappearance. [Seen and
heard at Urbino, where it was
preceded at 2'' a.m. by a per
fectly similar detonating meteor
equally brilliant, and leaving a
persistent streak. — A. Serpi

ERI.]

[The last two apparent positions
are those at Alessandria, and
Volpeglino, where the meteor
was also observed.]

Burst with a detonation, which
was heard in houses with closed
doors.

Letter in Turin
newspaper (by
F. Denza) of
Mar. 31st.

Communicated
by Jas. Chap.

Letter in Turin
newspaper of
March 31st,
1871, by F.
Denza.

Communicated
by F. Denza.

Id.

Id.

[The last apparent position is that Id.
observed at Volpeglino (Tor-
tona), where tlie meteor was
also seen, and its bright streak
remained visible for one minute.]

III. Aerolites.

The following dates of aeroKtic falls appear to have escaped notice in the
Catalogue (Report for 1860) and in subsequent Reports : —
Date.

1804, November 24 San Luis Potosi, Mexico.

1864, June 26 Yolynia, Russia.

186-5, February or March . . Gorruckpore, India.

1866, October 5 Ahmednuggur, Eombay.

1867, January 19 Khetrie, Rajpootana, India.

1868, May 22 Slavetic Croatia.

1868, November Danville, Alabama, U.S.

1868, December Frankfort, Alabama, U.S.

Date unknown Goalpara, Assam.

38

REPORT 1871.

The analysis of the last of these meteorites by Mr. Tschermak (Jahrbuch
fiir Mineralogie, for 1871, p. 412) shows approximately the following com-
position : —

Iron. Ilydrocarbon. Olivine. Enstatite. Magnetic Pyrites.

8-49 +0-85 +61-72 +30-01 +(traces) =101-07.

The occurrence of carbonaceous matter in the meteorites of Hessle, Upsala

(1st January, 1869), was recently also recognized by Nordenskjold, who

found in them a black flocculent substance, containing 71 per cent, of

carbon. (The ' Academy,' August loth, 1871.)

IV. Meteoeic Showers.
1. Meteor-sliowers in January and February 1837. — From the tracks of
meteors recorded in the last annual Catalogue of the British Association, and
in the ' Bulletin of the Moncalieri Observatory' for November 1869, observed
during the months of January and February of that year, Mr. Greg has
established the existence of the following old, and of one new radiant-point,
which made their appearance in those months : —

Duration of meteoric
shower in 1869.

Position of radiant-
point.

If umber of
meteors
mapped.

Symbols, durations, and positions of the same
meteor-showers in the British Association
Report for 186?, p. 401.

Sym-
bol.

Duration.

Position.

a.

«.

By the stars.

a.

S.

By the stars.

Jan. 9-19, and Jan. ■>
30 to Feb. 6 /

Jan. 29 to Feb. 6

Feb. U-20 (chiefly) ...

Feb. 11-16 (chiefly) ...

72°

223
194
103

o
+ 2

+54
+ 15
-25

«, z, Orionis...

In Quadrans...

eVirginis

S Canis Majo-
ris.

14 (Italian)..

7 (Italian)...

8 (English)..

10 (English
and Italian).

(AGi

K3

S4

Dec. 20 to Feb. 6.
Jan. 2-3

63

232
190

105

105

+20aTauri)?

+49 c Quadrantis.

+ l,yVirginis.

— 27'* Canis Majoris.

March 5-17

January

1

A succession of radiant-points near the apex of the earth's way following
the appearance of the November shower, of which the general meteor-shower
LH (Report for 1868, p. 403) from the head of Hydra, lasting until the
12th of December, presents a parallel instance, is remarkably described in the
following MS. note, recorded by the late Sir J. Herschel during his residence
at the Cape:—" Cape of Good Hope, 1837, January 2nd, I'' 30" M. T. [_i. e.
from midnight]. A me teor= second-magnitude star crossed the zenith, leav-
ing a train. Course right from the (qje.v in the east, whence they have all
come since November 12th. N.B. This has been extremely remarkable and
well-sustained ; really very few exceptions.

" February 1-5. — The meteors now chiefly go from S.W. to N.E."
The tendency of radiant-points to group themselves in families so as to
make newly observed centres difficult to distinguish from older ones appear-
ing nearly on the same date, is well seen by the examples of the new radiant-
poiut in Orion, and of the extensions (apparently) of old radiant-points, pointed
out by Mr. Greg. Some attempts to explain this singular peculiarity and
the striking instances of groups of radiant-points in the months of January
and February have recently been published by Professor SchiapareUi, a fur-
ther account of whose speculations on their probable history wUl be found at
the close of this Report.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. -89

2. The Meteor-shower of November 1868, which was seen in its greatest
brilliancy in the United States of America, and which was also partially
recorded at Glasgow, by Professor Grant, between 5 and 6 o'clock on the
morning of the 14th of November, was observed at the same hours in the
north of Scotland, and described in the ' Journal of the Scottish Meteorolo-
gical Society' (for December 1868) : — ^^ Meteors and Falling-stars. — The star-
shower of the 13th and 14th of November was observed at many of the
stations. In the north it was very fine. Mr. Clark, the observer at North
Unst, writes : — ' On the morning of the 14th there was a great falling of
shootiug-stai's from all directions of the sky ; it was something like a shower
of stars.' And the Rev. Dr. Hamilton observes that at Bressay ' There
was an extraordinary meteoric shower, which continued from 3"" 30™ a.m. of
the 13th [? 14th] till the sun rose, and the number of stars or meteors falling
was innumerable.' " The following descriptions of its appearance in Swit-
zerland are given by Dr. Rudolf Wolf in his 'Astronomical Contributions': —
'« 1868, November 13th : from 12'' 5"> to 12'^ 15"" I saw four, from 12'^ IS"
to 12" 30" nine, and from 12'^ 30" to 12'^ 40" two brilliant meteors radia-
ting from the constellation Leo. The sky (up to the latter time quite clear)
then clouded over from the east, and all further view of the meteors at
Ziirich was prevented. Mr. Rieder, at Klosters, reports: — 'As an unusual
phenomenon I have to state that at 4*^ 15" on the morning of the 14th of
November, 1868, an extraordinary number of shooting- stars were visible in
the western sky ; from five untU six o'clock a real rain of shooting-stars took
place, diffusing such great brightness that one might easily have read by
their light. Several of the meteors left streaks of bright light in the sky,
which remained visible for two or three seconds.' At Eugelberg ' from five
until after six o'clock a.m. on the morning of the 14th of November, repeated
flashes of lightning were perceived, and shortly before five o'clock a swiftly
passing flash, like a ball of light, was observed, whilst the sky was com-
pletely overcast.' " An admirably compiled history of the November pheno-
menon in the year 1868, comprising the exact details of observations at aU
the places where it was well observed, and notices of its general description
at places in all parts of Europe, the United States of America, and the
Atlantic, where it was witnessed, is published in his Memoirs V. and VI., on
' Shooting-stars of November 1868 and August 1869,' by Sig. F. Denza. The
same volume contains (in the sixth memoir) an equally full collection of obser-
vations and theoretical deductions of great value regarding the appearance of
the August meteor-shower in the year 1869. Among the latter may be cited
the suggestion of Professor Newton *, borne out by the observations of the
shower made in America, and by those of Professor Serpieri at Urbino in
that yearf, that the radiant-region of the Perseids is in reality a narrow,
elongated space extending from near the cluster at ^ Persei to the star B
(B. A. C. 1058) Camelopardi. The radiant-region of the Leonids in the pre-
vious year was similarly observed by Professor Newton to be better repre-
sented by a short line extending between the stars e, y Leonis, from about the
star .r, in the centre of the Sickle (B. A. C. 3423), to the latter star, than by a
single point. The direction of elongation of the radiant-region is towards the
sun's apparent place, a conclusion which is regarded by Prof. Newton as throw-
ing light of some importance upon the theory of the November meteor-stream.

* Bulletins of the Eoyal Academy of Sciences of Belgium, ser. 2. vol. xxvi. 1868,
pp. 450, 451.

t Letter from Prof. Serpieri to Prof. Scliiaparelli, January 5th, 1870 ; communicated
to the Royal Institute of Sciences of Lombardy.

40 REPORT 1871.

3. TJie August Shower in 1870. — In the 'Meteorological Bulletin' of the
Moncalieri Observatory for October 1870, the first results of observations in
Piedmont on the star-shower of the 10th and 11th of August last are com-
municated. As already observed in the last Report, the frequency of the
meteors did not exceed the ordinary average of the shower, and they were
somewhat more frequent on the night of the 10th than on that of the 11th
of August. They appeared to proceed from several radiant-points, besides
the principal one of the shower, in Perseus. Among the contemjjoraneous
radiant-points, T^, Pj (the former occurring in August in Pegasus, and the
latter usually appearing in Auriga in the latter part of September) were
observed to be conspicuous.

4. The November Shower in 1870. — The preparations made for recording
the return of the November meteors in 1870 were in a great measure disap-
pointed by the cloudy state of the sky at several of the English stations.

The following letter from Mr. Backhouse announced a more favourable
condition of the sky at Sunderland on the morning of the 14th of November
than that which prevailed at Manchester, Birmingham, York, and London,
where no meteors of the shower could be observed : —

" Between 2" 20"° and 3'' 42"^ a.m., on the 14th, I watched for meteors ; I
only saw seven in fifty-six minutes, watching in a cloudless sky. Of these
only four belonged to the shower. I enclose the particulars. I did not
watch much on the morning of the 15th. It was mostly cloudy, and I saw
no meteors." — Of the conformable meteors two left trains, one was station-
ary close to, and the others radiating very nearly from, the small star x
Leonis. The unconformable meteors appeared with short courses in and near
the constellation Taurus, and of these one was as bright as Sirius. It was
of a yellow colour, describing a path of 3°, near e Arietis, from the direction
of the Pleiades, and it left no streak.

Five meteors, from undetermined radiant-points, were seen through breaks
in the clouds by Mr. J. E. Clark, at York, on the morning of the 14th, and
two Leonids of some brightness, in a watch of one hour (interrupted by the
clouds), on the morning of the 1.5th of November.

On the morning of the 14th of November the sky was clear at Glasgow
from 2^ lO™ until 5'' 15"" a.m., and twenty-six meteors were recorded by
Mr. A. S. Herschel, of which twenty-one were conformable. Of the latter
the paths of eleven, prolonged backwards, crossed, and of five passed close to
the curve of Leo's sickle. Seven meteors left persistent streaks, which were
faintly visible in the full moonlight. The proportion of magnitudes of the
conformable meteors was :—

Of meteors equal to or brighter than a ist-mag. » ; 2nd do. ; 3rd do. ; 4th do.
Number of meteors seen 3 675

Meteors of smaller magnitudes were rendered invisible by the moon's light ;
and the most striking conformable meteor of the shower, recorded at
4'' 25" A.M., was as bright as Sirius. It described a course of 25°, directed
nearly from fi Leonis, in three-quarters of a second, and left a broad streak
on its whole path for two seconds. The following numbers of conformable
and unconformable meteors were recorded in the half-hours ending at

hm hm hm hm hm hm

1870, November 14th, a.m 2 40 3 10 3 40 4 10 440 5 10

Conformable meteors 146253

Unconformable meteors i o o 4 o o

In the fii'st and last half-hours the sky was partially concealed by clouds ;
at 3** 38" A.M. a group of three first-, second-, and third-magnitude meteors,

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 41

leaving streaks directed from Leo, appeared almost together. In the next
half-hour two meteors, directed apparentlj'' from Cor Caroli, appeared to be
unconformable to the Leo radiant. The remaining unconformable meteors
aU proceeded from the direction of a radiant-point in Taurus. At 5'' 15™ a.m.
the sky became completely overcast ; but a shooting-star from the direction
of Leo, of first magnitude, was observed by Mr. E,. Maclure, at 6'' 20™ a.m.,
through an opening of the clouds. On the morning of the 15th the sky at
Glasgow was again completely overcast.

On the evening of the 13th a bright meteor (described in the above List)
was seen at the Eoyal Observatory, Greenwich, and three vivid flashes of
light, between 12"^ 15™ and 12'' 30™ a.m., on the 14th, which must have pro-
ceeded from large meteors, at an altitude of about 20°, due S. were seen
through the clouds, which from this time overspread the sky during the
remainder of the night. On the morning of the 15th a clear sky enabled
Mr. Glaisher's staff of observers to make continuous observations of the
meteors visible in the bright moonlight, from midnight until 5'' 33™ a.m.,
when the sky was again quite obscured bj" clouds. Fifty-three meteors were
recorded, in this interval by the five observers, the apparent paths of forty-
five of which were traced upon a map. Of the meteors so recorded, twenty-
eight proceeded from the usual radiant-point in Leo, eight from a radiant-
point situated apparently not far from Cor Caroli, seven from a radiaut-point
between Taurus and Musca, and two meteors from uncertain radiant-points.

The following were the numbers of the meteors observed in the successive
half-hours ending at

hm hhm h hm h hm h hm h hm
1870, November 15th, A.M. ... 1230 i 130 a 230 3 3 30 4 4 30 5 530 Total
Number of meteors seen 2 232217687 13 53

A very beautiful meteor of bluish-white colour, and of the apparent size and
brightness of Jupiter, proceeding apparently from the direction of the radiant-
point in Musca, descended towards the east, at 4'' 45™ 25* a.m., through an
arc of more than 25°, in about three seconds, leaving a streak of light upon
its course. Most of the conformable meteors left a persistent train, but none
of those observed rivalled this fine meteor in brightness or in length of
course. The proportion of apparent magnitudes of the remaining meteors,
seen during the watch is shown in the following list : —

Brighter tban first-magnitude stars ; =i8tdo. ; =2nd do. ; = 3rd do. Total
Number of meteors seen 6 24 17 5 52

From these descriptions of the meteor-shower it appears that, on both the
mornings of the 14th and 15th of November, the number of the conformable
meteors considerably exceeded that of the unconformable meteors which
appeared duiing the hours of the continued watch ; but that the scale of the
shower, as it was observed iu England, was very far inferior to the brightness
with which it was recorded in the preceding year.

At Tooting, near London, Mr. H. W. Jackson observed on the mornings of
the 14th, 15th, and 16th of November, and noted one shooting-star on the
night of the 13th, but failed, on account of haze and clouds, followed by rain
during the morning of the 14th, in securing another observation. Between
midnight and 1^ 55™ a.m., on the morning of the 1.5th, eight meteors were
carefully observed and mapped, and four or five smaller meteors were seen,
all but two of which (of short course, near the radiant-point in Taurus) were
conformable to the Leo radiant-point. Of these, the brightest, at l** 5™ a.m.,
which left a long streak, was simultaneously observed at Greenwich. Of the
two unconformable meteors, that which appeared at 12'' 7™ a.m. was white

42 REPORT 1871.

and nearly as bright as Jupiter, moving for two seconds in a slightly curved
course from r to \p Orionis, and leaving a short streak upon its track.
Flashes of faint reddish lightning were perceived at 12'' 28" and 12'' SS" a.m.
Between 12'' 30"" and 1" 30"" a.m. on the morning of the 16th some meteors
were observed, but did not appear to present features worthy of special note.
At Newhaven, in the United States, three observers noted, in three hours,
thirty-one meteors, of which only six were conformable to the radiant-point
in Leo. On the following morning (the 14th) Professor Newton, with five
other observers, obtained the following enumeration of the meteors visible in
the half-hours ending at 1870, November 14th, a.m. : —

hm h hmhhmhhmhhmhm

(1870, November 1 3tb, P.M.... 1 1 30 12) 1230 i 130 2 230 3 330 345* Totals

Conformable meteors o i 5 10 12 9 15 8 12 7 79

Unconformable meteors 6 8 4 7 810157 7 2 74

After 3'' 45"" the sky was so nearly overcast that regular counting was
abandoned, while in open spaces of the sky it was still apparent that up to
six o'clock no marked increase in the number of the meteors had taken place.
After half-past five, however, the clouds already began more nearly to cover
the sky. (American Journal of Science and Arts, vol. i., January 1871.)

5. Meteor-shower of December 12t7i, 1870. — The state of the sky was not
generally favourable for observations, Mr. H. W. Jackson reporting from
Louth that on the nights of the 12th and 13th the sky was overcast, with
frequent rain from 8" 30"" p.m. on the night of the 12th. At Glasgow, York,
and Manchester it was equally obscured. At Birmingham Mr. "W. H. Wood
was more fortunate in securing a short view of the sky on one of the periodic
nights, and the following is his description of the shower : — •

"The overcast state of the skies from the 10th to the 13th permitted only
of a partial view of the character of the shower, which occurred during a
temporary clearance of the sky for one hour only, from 11'' 30"" p.m. on the
12th to 12'' 30'" A.M. on the 13th. Five meteors were recorded in three-
quarters of an hour, radiating accurately from radiant G (6 Geminorum).
Meteors white or blue, and trainless (one observer)." A list of the recorded
paths, and a description of the meteors seen, accompanies Mr. Wood's report.
The position of the radiant-point from which the meteors approximately
diverged was near the stars k- and g, in Gemini.

No observations were recorded, owing to a cloudy state of the sky, on the
shower-meteor nights of the 1st and 2nd of January, 1871.

6. Meteor-shower of April 20th, 1871. — The last weU-marked appearance
of the ApiH meteor-shower, to the annual occurrence of which attention
was first drawn by Herrick, in the United States, took place on the morning
of the 21st of April, 1863 1, when, for a few hours, meteors were observed
by Mr. Wood, at Weston-super-Mare, to be as frequent as in a moderately
bright August star-shower. Two Julian intervals of four years each having
elapsed since that occurrence, the astronomical conditions of its reappearance
suggested special preparations and a simultaneous watch, which were ac-
cordingly made for its return. Besides the staflp of observers at the Eoyal
Observatory, Greenwich, Mr. Glaisher's son, Mr. James Glaisher, volunteered
to take part in the observations at Cambridge, where Professor Adams also
offered his aid, to join in recording the shooting-stars which might be visible at
the Obsei-vatory. The other observers who awaited the display were those
who have most frequently assisted the Committee by their recorded observa-
tions at Glasgow, York, Manchester, Birmingham, and London. Such, how-

* In a quarter of an hour. t. Eeport for 1863, p. 325.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 43

ever, was the unfavourable state of the sky which prevailed during the
forty-eight hours intended to have been devoted to the watch (and which
continued to prevent further observations during the last remaining nights
of the months of April), that with the exception of a few meteors of the
shower observed by Mr. Wood at Birmingham, and of the corresponding
group of meteors recorded by Mr. Herschel at Bury St. Edmunds, no un-
broken series of observations were received. The sky first became quite clear
at the latter place at 9*^ 30" p.m., and the following numbers of meteors were
seen in the half-hours ending at —

h m h h m h h m h h m

1871, April 20 p.m. 9 30 10 1030 11 11 30 12 (12 30 a.m. April 21). Total.

Number of meteors seen ...31 31 11 6 25

All but eight of their apparent paths, projected upon a map, when prolonged
backwards, pass across a circular area about 15° in width, of which the
centre is at a point in R. A. 267°, N. Decl. 35°. Nine of these conformable
meteors left bright trains. Of the eight unconformable meteors, four are
widely erratic meteors of the same shower, and the remaining four moving
in the opposite direction were directed from an unknown radiant-point in the
south. The path of one of the latter was remarkably serpentine in the latter
portion of the meteor's course. The following are the numbers of meteors of
the different magnitudes observed : —

As bright as Jupiter or Sirius. As 1st mag. star. 2nd. Srd. 4th. 5t.h. Total.
3 4 S 5 4 4 25

The last meteor was observed at 12'' 35™ a.m. on the 21st. The sky then
rapidly clouding over did not permit the progress of the shower, at Bury St.
Edmunds, to be further watched. On the previous and on the following
night the sky was also cloudj\

At Birmingham Mr. W. H. "Wood recorded the appearance of nine
shooting-stars between the hours of lO"" 20™ and 11''30™ p.m. on the night of
the 20th of April, five of which were noted in the fii'st, and four in the latter
half of the watch ; five meteors diverged from the constellation Lyra, three
from that of Corona, and the remaining meteor moved transversely to the
former ones from the neighbourhood of Polaris. The numbers of meteors
seen of different magnitudes were, l = Sirius, 2 = lst mag.*, l = 3rd do.,
5 = 4th do. : total 9 meteors. The brightest meteor of the shower moved with a
nucleus of briUiaut blue, flickering light, about the brightness of Sirius, from the
direction of Corona. Soon after half-past 11 o'clock the sky became over-
cast, and remained so at I'' and 2^ a.m. on the morning of the 21st, when
regular watching was abandoned. The maximum, as far as could be ascer-
tained from these observations, occurred after midnight on the morning of
the 21st ; the rate of apparition for one observer, while the sk)'^ was clear,
being seven or eight per hour between ten and eleven o'clock, and twelve or
fifteen per hour during the half-hour immediately before and that imme-
diately after midnight. Between ll** 15™ and 11'' 45™ p.m. on the night of
the 2ist, Mr. Wood observed no meteors at Birmingham, although one-third
of the sky was visible, quite clear, through the broken clouds. The appear-
ance of the April shower in this year appears, therefore, to have taken place
on the date and at about the hour expected for its return, from the time
of its last conspicuous appearance.

7. Meteor-shower of July 1871. — At sea, between Norway and England,

Mr. A. S. Herschel watched for the periodical meteors (first pointed out by

. Capocci, at Naples) on the night of the 16th of July. The sky was perfectly

clear from ll** p.m. until 2'' a.m. on the morning of the 17th of July, and

44 REPORT 1871.

seventeen meteors were observed, six in the first, six in the' second, and
five in the third hour of the watch. On the night of the 17th the sky was
again clear ; but three meteors only were observed in three-quarters of an
hour, between 10'' 55" and ll*" 40" p.m. The meteors observed on both
nights were small, and appeared generally with short courses near a radiant-
region around tt Herculis, from which they appeared to diverge. The num-
ber of meteors seen of the different magnitudes were, 2 = 1st mag.*, 4=2nd,
4= 3rd, 6= 4th, 4 = 5th : total 20 meteors seen in 3| hours by one observer,
in a clear sky, with no moon.

V. Papers relating to Meteoric AsTROifOMT.

1. Under the title * Alcuni Resiiltati Preliminari tratti dalle osservazioni
di SteUe Cadcnti publicate neUe Effemeride degli anni 1868, 1869, 1870;'
Professor Schiaparelli communicates, in connexion with the three Catalogues
of Shooting-Stars observed in Italy, published in the Ephemeris of the Milan
Observatory for the years 1868, 1869, and 1870, a first report on the radiant-
points obtained by mapping the meteor-tracks contained in them from Janu-
ary to June. For a convenient nomenclature of the radiant-points, the year
is divided into seventy-two pentads, of five days each, of which six are con-
tained in every month. While the first five pentads in every month are
complete, the sixth, and last, consists of three, four, five, or six days, ac-
cording to the length of the month to which it belongs. Since, however, the
observations for a single night of the year only (collected from all the years)
are combined together to detect the radiant-points, of which several may
occur in each pentad, the letters of the alphabet added to the Roman num-
ber of a pentad (thus, XIX. a) designate the radiant-points in those pentads in
the order in which they were successively discovered by Professor Schia-
parelli. Besides a strict separation of meteors observed on one from those
observed on the next following or on the next preceding night, to avoid the
risk of confusing together meteors belonging to different radiant-points under
a false assemblage of two radiant-points into a single meteoric-shower. Pro-
fessor Schiaparelli distinguishes as different meteor-currents those whose
radiant-points, as shown by laying down the recorded paths, are more than
10° apart. The precision with which the radiant-points must be determined
(from the shooting-star observations of a sinr/le night) is necessarily very
great, in order that this rule may be rigorously appUed. Even omitting the
errors of observation (which are frequently considerable), it is found that
different meteoric showers present different characters of radiation. In some
the radiant-region is small, and the meteor-tracks prolonged backwards meet
nearly in a point, when it is caUed " exact "; in others it is larger, the meteor-
tracks prolonged backwards crossing each other in a confused manner over a
considerable apparent space, in which case it is called " diffuse." The
shooting -stars which make their appearance witliin the radiant-region (when
this is rather large) may appear to be moving in every variety of opposite direc-
tions, and their paths are usually noticed to be extremely foreshortened by
perspective in this position. Lastly, if they diverge from two or more points
the character of the radiation is said to be double or multiple ; and it ap-
pears probable, on certain theoretical grounds, which will be shortly stated,
that a diffuse radiant-region in general arises from the close assemblage of
many radiant-points togetherinto a multiple group. The November meteor-
shower is an example of exact, and the August star-shower an instance
either of multii^le or of diffuse radiation, according to the various descriptions
of the observers who have examined the direction of its radiant-point most

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 45

attentively. Meteoric showers composed principally of very smaU shooting-
stars are confined to the parts of the heavens immediately surrounding the
radiant-point ; while those consisting of large meteors spread far from the
centre of divergence, the meteors (apparently from their brightness) being as
plainly visible when they are seen by transverse as when they are seen fore-
shortened by very oblique vision. Meteor- showers of the former kind are
called "contracted"; and of the latter kind "extended" (stretta; larga). The
foregoing are the principal terms employed by Professor Schiaparelli in de-
scribing the meteor-showers of which the positions of the radiant-points have
now been published. The explanation of the phenomena of " diffuse " and
" multiple " radiant-points is ingeniously supplied by Professor Schiaparelli
in the following manner. A very small nebular mass of meteoroids or of
cometoids having been deflected from its original parabolic (or very excen-
tric) into an orbit of moderate period round the sun by the attraction of some
powerful planet in its path, the foremost and swiftest particles of the stream
produced by this disturbance gradually gaining, and the slowest losing
ground on the central particles of the mass, an elongated form of the mass is
gradually assumed directed along the line of the meteoric orbit. The dif-
ference of velocity, or of periodic time, between the foremost and hindmost
particles of the row is sufficient to ensure the gradual lengthening of the line,
until the foremost particle joins with the last in forming a continuous ring or
wreath of meteoric substance closing the orbit of the original meteoric clond.
Should the two ends, before meeting each other (as must usually be the case),
have undergone different pertui'bations from the action of the planets, in-
stead of exactly overtaking the retreating end, the foremost end of the wreath
will overlap it, and the meteor-stream will begin to assume the form of a
spiral curve of a single coil. When the foremost end has gained two revolu-
tions upon the retreating one, a spiral of two coils wiU be produced ; and
continuing this process during many revohitions gained by one end of the
coil upon the other, the wreath of meteoroids, without losing its continuity,
wiU at last form an endless hoop, or belt, of many strands overlying and
interlacing with each other in as many convolutions as the fastest particles
have gained revolutions in their course upon the slower ones. The direction
and velocity of the particles in one of the strands wiU also differ as widely as
their positions from those of particles in a neighbouring strand, and the whole
wreath, without ever losing its perfect continuity from end to end, will cross
and recross itself in constantly going and returning waves. In these stages
of transformation a meteoric stream woiild si;ccessively exhibit the characters
of double and multiple radiant-points. Supposing the same process to con-
tinue,, and new perturbations of the stream to be constantly deflecting par-
ticles fi'om the front or rear into different courses, these particles overtaking
each other at the point where the earth passes through the stream would
produce the mixed assemblage of radiant-points and of dii'ections of the
meteors of the August shower, which give it the character of multiple or of
diffuse radiation. In the following list of radiant-points those marked with
an asterisk (*) were described in the last Eeport (1870, p. 98) ; those at the
end of the list are not included by Prof. Schiapai'elli in his present list, which
only represents the most important radiant-points observed, at present, in the
first half of the year. In the cases where their identity with radiant-points
in Heis's list, or in that of the British Association t, is suggested by Pro-
fessor Schiaparelh, the position and duration of those radiant-points are
added for comparison in the same columns of the Table.

t Eeport for 1868, p. 401 et seq.

46

REPORT 1871.

List of the Principal Meteoric showers occurring in the first half of the year whose radian
points are derived from observations of shooting-stars in Italy, published in the Ephemerid
of the Milan Observatory, for the years 18G8, 1869, and 1870. By G. V. SchiapareUi.

Sign or
Symbol.

Date and

duration of

shower.

Apparent
Position.

Cliaracter of
radiation.

Characters of the Meteors,
General Remarks, &c.

Authority.

a,.

h.

0

0

[act.

II «.

.Jan. 6

199

+ 58

Contracted and ex-

Observed in 1868 and 1869

SchiapareUi

II A.

Jan. 6

7 7

175
J'i84
I182
(172
I187

+48
+ 28
+ 29

+ 31I
+40/

Ill a*.

Jan. 11-12

,, ,j ,, ••

Jan. II, j869'1

[MG,.

Jan. 1-25...

dan, 12, 1 6 09 J

Maximum Jan. 24

R. P. Greg.

III^..

Jan. 12 ...

197

+ 59

Contracted and ex-
act.

Jan. 12, 1869 (traces on Jan. 11,
1869), possibly a continuation of

TT n

SchiapareUi

lYa*.

Jan. 18 ...

232

+ 36

Most certain and
exact.

A splendidly well-defined meteor-
shower. Jan. 18 (traces on Jan.
19), 1869.

ii

IV A.

.Jan. 19 ...
Jan. 19 ...

198

220

+28
+40

Jan. 19 (traces on the i8th), 1869 .
Many small meteors Jan. 19 {no
trace on the i8th), i86g.

IV c.

1)

»

IV d.

Jan. 19 ...

200

+ 58

Contracted and ex-
act.

Jan. 19 (no traces on i8th), 1869;
apparently independent of II a,
III A, and Yb from absence of
intermediate meteors.

>»

Ya.

Jan. 21 ...

205

4-49

Jan. 2 1 (no trace on 1 9th and 20th),
1869. Independent of the ra-

)»

diants IV fZ, Via.

Yb.

Jan. 24 ...

200

+ 56

Uncertain to 5 ° ;
diffuse, perhaps
multiple.

Jan. 24, 1868, many meteors. ?Con-
nected with VI a, VI b: see
the following Table (p. 48).

»J

Yla.

Jan. 25-27

205

+47

Uncertain to 5° ...

Chiefly Jan. 27, 1868. (Perhaps
identical with the last ?)

»»

VI 5.

Jan. 29 ...

198

+ 54

Extended ; diffuse,
perhaps multiple.

Jan. 29, 1868. No traces of this
shower on Jan. 28.

)t

Vic*.

Jan. 28 ...

236

+^5

Extended ; confus-
ed, but distinct.

Jan. 28, 1868. ? If connected with
VI d Jan. 30 ; no intermediate
meteors.

1

Ylg*.

Jan. 28 ...

67

+25

Diffuse

Jan. 28, 1868. [Probably identical
with the next.]

■

J

/

" ■

[AGj.

Dec.2o-Feb.

68

+20

Elongated and dif-
fuse.
Extended, uncer-

Maximum Dec. 24

R. P. Greg.;

Y\d.

6.
Jan. 30 ...

225

+ 34

Jan. 30, 1868. ?Connected with

tain to 10°.

VI c, VI e ; but no intermediate
meteors with IV a.

Vie.

Jan. 31 ...

221

+ 28

Contracted ; well-
defuied.

Jan. 31, 1868. ?Connected in one
group with IV a, IV c, VI c and

VI d : see following Table (p. 48).'

^H

viy*.

Jan. 31 ...

134

+40

Few meteors

Jan. 31, 1868. Traces on preced-
ing evenings.

^1

[Ml, ,.
Vila.

Jan. a-Peb.

9-
Feb. 3

128

153

+40
+21

Maximum Jan. 25—31

R. P. GreJ

Contracted and ex-

Feb. 3, 1869 ; a few traces on pre-

SchiapareB

act.

ceding nights.

^M

Xa*.

Feb. 16 ...

74

+48

Apparently double

Feb. 16, 1868. Traces on the 15th.

~^^H

(71

+41)

and exact.

A few meteors only from the se-
cond radiant-point. Identical
with the next.

[A3, 4-

Feb. 9-17 .

73

4-40

Well-defined and
limited.

R. P. Grej

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS.

47

Date and

duration of

shower.

Apparent
Position.

Cliaracter of
radiation.

Characters of the Meteors,
General Remarks, &c.

Authority.

Feb. 15-28
Mar. 20 ...

Mar. 16-31
Mar. 31-
Apr. 2.

Apr. 2-3 .

nil a*.

^Pr- 9

Apr- 9

Apr. 10 ..

Apr. II ..

Apr. 1-15
Apr. 20 ..
Apr. 20 ..

Apr. 14 ..

Apr. 45 ...

Apr. 30-
May I.

Apr. 23-
June 4.
May I -3 1 .
June 13-14

May 6-
June 20.

76

144

150
260
262

258
260

246
163

+40
+48

+47
+ 46

+49

+ 36

+40
+ 36

+46
+47

193 +11

18s
199
160

167

142

237

237
23s

232
280

2S0

+22
+ '4
+49

+47

+ 53

+ 35

+ 35
+ 50

+27
+ 3S

+ 39

Centre of an elon-
gated radiant-re
gion.

Mar. 20, 1868. From a = 130°
5= +46° to a = 162° 5= -1-60°;
evidently identical with the next.

Extended; unexact

Mar. 31, 1868 1 Endures three days.

April 2, 1868 I Perhaps connected
and 1 8 69... J as a twin-radiant
■with the next.

Apr. 2, 1868 1 Distinct from but
and 1S69 I may belong to the

Apr. 3, 1868 I same family as Greg's

Apr. 9, 1869 J QHj with centre near
TT Herculis.

Apr. 9, 1869. Twin -radiant with
the last.

Apr. 10, 1869. Traces on Apr. 9
?If connected with XXI b ; no in-
termediate meteors.

Apr. II, 1869; no traces on adja-
cent nights : belongs to tlie same
family as the two next.

Well - determined
and exact.

Apparently belonging to the same

family as XX c and XXI b.
Apr. 14, 1868 and 1869. Connect

ed by no meteors with XX c,

among many observed on inter

mediate nights.
Apr. 25, 1868. Appears to have no

connection with any other me

teoric shower.
Apr. 30, 1867 1 Apparently con

and 1868... I nected or identical
May I, 1868 J with the two next.

Well-defined

June 13, 1869. On this and pre-
vious evening some meteors from
direction of Vega (ZezioH).

June 14, 1869. Perhaps identical
or of the same system with the
next.

Heis.]
Schiaparelli.

Heis.]
Schiaparelli

Heis.

Heis.]
Schiaparelli.

E. P. Greg.]

Heis.]
Schiaparelli.

E. P. Greg.]

adiant-points contained in the former and omitted in the present list (see Eeport for 1870, p. 98.)

Feb. 6 ..
Apr. 13
May 22
June 30

183

+56^

231

+ ^7.
+ 25 ^
+ 19J

232

240

SchiaparelH.

many of the foregoing radiant-points, although separated from each other in position, or

•ghts in -which no intermediate meteors were observed, nevertheless possess in common

features of very close resemblance, they are regarded by Professor SchiapareUi

48

REPOKT 1871.

as forming, in some cases, distinct meteor-systems or families of radiant-
points, of which the principal, occurring in the first half of the year, may be
grouped as follows : —

Families or groups of Radiant-points.

Sym-
bol.

Date.

Position.

General ^
centre. .

S 0
^g

Sym-
bol.

Date.

Position.

General
centre.

Eefer-
ence.

a.

S.

a.

S.

II a.
III*.
IV d.

Ya.

Yb.
Via.
VI 6.

Jan. 6 ...

„ 12...

„ 19-
„ 21 ...

„ 24...

,. 25-^7
„ 29...

0
199

197

200

205

200

205

198

0

+ 58

+ 59
+ 58
4-49
+ 56
+47
+ 54

Between
jj and 5

Ursae
Majoris.

• &
u

XIX «.

XIX 6.
XXa.

XX*.

Mar. 31-
Apr. 2.

Apr. 2-3

Apr. 9 ...

Apr. 9 ...

Mar. 15-
Apr. 23

0
261

259

^55
246
268

0

+48

+ 38

+ 36
+46

+25

■ S 2 r

In Cerbe-
rus.

Scliiapa-
relli. j
1

R. P.
Greg.]

IV a.
IV c.
Vic.
Yld.
Vie.

Jan. 18...
„ 19...

„ 28...
„ 30...
.. 31-

232 +36

220 +40
236+25

Between
a Coronje

and
5 Bootis.

XXI a.

[84-

[«5-

Apr. 1 1 .
Apr. 1-15
Apr. 20 .

193
185
199

+22
+ 14

Between

S and e

Virginis

Schiapn.

Heis.]

Heis.]

225
221

+28

XX c.

XXI *.

Apr. 10 .
Apr. 14 .
Apr. 20 .

163
167
160

+47
+47
+49

1

Schiapa-

relli.
Heis.]

:::::::::)

Should the effect of planetary perturbations, which retarded the retiirn of
Halley's comet in the year 1859 nearly one month from the time of its perihelion
passage, as calculated by D'Alembert and Clairault, also explain the wide differ-
ence between the separate coils of spiral meteoric streams apparently encoun-
tered by the earth in the meteor-systems of which the above groups or families
of radiant-points appear to present unmistakable examples, a new field of
investigation in meteoric astronomy, and of future observation and reseai'ch,
is beginning to unfold itself in these new and interesting discoveries.

2. On Comets and Meteors, by Professor Kirkwood, Indiana University,
U.S. (read before the American Philosophical Society, November 19, 1869).
In an able treatise on " Meteoric Astronomy," already noticed in these
Eeports (for 1868, p. 418), a short Appendix (B) at the end of the volume
on " Comets and Meteors " expresses the views on their connexion which
Professor Kirkwood communicated, so long ago as Jidy 1861, to the ' Danville
Quarterly Review' for December in that year. "Different views are enter-
tained by astronomers in regard to the origin of comets, some believing them
to enter the solar system ah extra, others supposing them to have originated
■within its limits. The former is the hypothesis of Laplace, and is regarded

with favour by many eminent astronomers Now, according to

Laplace's hypothesis, patches of nebulous matter have been left nearly in
equilibrium in the interstellar spaces. As the si;n in his progress ap-
proaches such clusters, they must, by virtue of his attraction, move towards
the centre of our system, the nearer portions with greater velocity than the
more remote. The nebulous fragments thus drawn into our system would
constitute comets ; those of the same cluster would enter the solar domain at
periods not very distant from each other. ... If we adopt Laplace's hy-
pothesis of the origin of comets, we may suppose an almost continuous fall of
primitive nebular matter toward the centre of our system — the drops of
which, penetrating the earth's atmosphere, produce sj)oradic meteors, the
larger aggregations forming comets. The disturbing influence of the planets

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 49

may have transformed the original orbits of many of the former as well as of
the latter into ellipses. It is an interesting fact that the motions of some
luminons meteors (or cometoids, as, perhaps, they might be called) have been
decidedly indicative of an origin beyond the limits of the planetary system.
But how are the phenomena of periodic meteors to be accounted for in ac-
cordance with this theory?

" The division of Biela's comet into two distinct parts suggests several
interesting questions in cometary physics. The nature of the separating
force remains to be discovered ; ' but it is impossible to doubt that it arose
from the divellent action of the sun, whatever may have been the mode of
operation. A signal manifestation of the influence of the sun is sometimes
afforded by the breaking up of a comet into two or more separate parts, on
the occasion of its approach to the perihelion ' *. No less than six such in-
stances are found distinctly recorded in the Annals of Astronomy, viz. : — 1.
Ancient bipartition of a comet. — Seneca. 2. Separation of a comet into a
number of fragments, 11 B.C. — Dion Cassius. 3. Three comets seen simul-
taneously pursuing the same orbit, a.d. 896. — Chinese Records. 4. Probable
sejDaration of a comet into parts, a.b. IQIS.—Hevelius. 5. Indications of
seimration, 1661. — HeveVms. 6. Bipartition of Biela's Comet, 1845-46.

" In \dew of these facts it seems highly probable, if not absolutely certain,
that the process of division has taken place in several instances besides that
of Biela's Comet. May not the force, whatever it is, that has produced one
separation again divide the parts ? And may not this action continue until
the fragments become invisible ? According to the theory now generally
received, the periodic phenomena of shooting-stars are produced by the inter-
section of the orbits of such nebulous bodies with the earth's annual path.
Now there is reason to believe that these meteoric rings are very elliptical,
and in this respect wholly dissimilar to the rings of primitive vapour which,
according to the nebular hypothesis, were successively abandoned at the solar
equator ; in other words, that the matter of which they are composed moves
in cometary rather than in planetary orbits. May not our periodic meteors
be the debris of ancient but now disintegrated comets, whose matter has be-
come distributed round their orbits ? "

These views, announced in the year 1861, were afterwards completely
established by the calculations of Professor Newton and Professor Schia-
pareUi regarding the real orbital velocities of shooting-stars, proving them
to move, generally, in parabolic, or cometic, rather than in planetary orbits ;
and by the astonishing discovery in the year 1866, by Professor Schiaparelli,
of the almost absolute identity of the orbit of Tuttle's Comet (III. 1862) with
that of the August, and of the orbit of Temple's Comet (I. 1866) with that
of the November meteor-stream, supposing (as the researches of Professor
Newton and Professor Adams amply prove) that the latter, and presumably
also the former of those meteor-clouds revolve in elliptic orbits of such
considerable length, as not to differ much from the comets in their times
of revolution. In his communication to the American Philosophical Society,
Professor Kirkwood retraces the recent researches of Hoek, Leverrier, and
SchiapareUi respecting the probable circumstances of the introduction of
comets and periodical shooting-stars ab extra into the limits of the planetary
system. The disturbing force by which their cosmical orbits were converted
into elliptic ones of short periods (it is found in harmony with the preceding
theory) was probably the overpowering attraction of one of the larger planets
near to which the cosmical bodies first entered the limits of the solar system.

* Grant's ' History of Physical Astronomy,' p. 302.
1871. I

50

REPORT 1871.

In the following Table Professor Kirkwood compares together the aphelion
distances of the several known comets of short periods with the mean dis-
tances of the several larger planets from the sun : —

2 a

Comets.

Encke's . . .
1S19, IV....
De Vice's. . .
Pigott's "1

(1783)/
1867,11....

1743. 1

1766,11. ...

8. :i8i9, III...

9. Brorsen's .

10. D'Arrest's ,

11. Faye's

12. Biela's

409
4-81

5'02

5-28

5-29
5-32

5 '47
5-55
5-64

575
5"93
619,

2.

P-1 o

-g

^ a

«.2

1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

6.

Comets.

Peter's (1846, VI.).
Tattles (1858, I.) .

9 '45
10-42

Saturns's mean
distance 9' 54.

1. 1867,1

2. November Meteors.

1866,1.

i9'28
1965
19-92

Westphal's (1852, IV.)

Pons' (1812)

Gibers' ('1815)

|De Vice's (1846,1V.)..
Brorsen's (1847, V.) ..
Halley's

31-97
33-41
34'o5
34-35
35-07

35-37

Uranus's mean
distance 191 8.

Neptune's mean
distance 30-04.

It is also evident that the passage of the solar system through a region of
space comparatively destitute of cometie clusters would be indicated by a
corresponding paucity of comets. Such variations of frequency are, indeed,
found not only in the records of comets, but also of meteoric showers which
have been accidentally recorded, the greater number of the latter having
been observed during the five centuries between TOO a.d. and 1200 a.d., and
again in those following a.d. 1700, suggesting that dm-ing the former and,
perhaps, again during the present period the solar system is passing through
a cosmical or meteoric cloud of very great extent, — not less, indeed, on the
received speed of the sun's proper motion, than fourteen times the -width of
Neptune's orbit. Professor Kirkwood adds, in particular reference to the
August meteor-system, " The fact that the Aiigust meteors, which have been
so often subsequently observed, were first noticed in 811 [see M. Quetelet's
Catalogue of Star-showers] renders it probable that the cluster was intro-
duced into the planetary system not long pre-viously to the year 800. It may
be also worthy of remark that the elements of the comet of 770 a.d. are not
very different from those of the August meteors and of the third comet of
1682 " *. With regard to the sun's passage through
a meteoric cloud of the above-considered dimen-
sions and constitution it is noticed that the num-
ber of coraetary perihelia found in the two qua-
drants of longitude towards and from which the sun
is moving is 159, or 62 per cent., and that of peri-
helia in the two other quadrants is 98, or .38 per
cent., shoAving their tendency to crowd together
about the direction of the sun's proper motion in space. The large excess of

260^

* The interval bet-ween tbe perihelion passage of 770 and that of 1862 is equal to 9
periods of 121-36 years. Oppolzer's determination of the period of 1862, III., is 121-5
years. Hind remarks that the elements of the Comet of 770 are " rather uncertain," but
says " that the general character of the orbit is decided." It may be worthy of remari
that a great meteoric sbo-wer, the exact date of which has not been preserved, occurred ir
770.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUMINOUS METEORS. 51

the number of the cometary perihelia closest to the sun in the forward qua-
irants, relatively to the direction of his proper motion in space, is also re-
garded as indicating the direction of the sun's motion through the meteor-
;loud in a manner which the facts of observation evidently corroborate.

3. On the Periods of certain Meteoric rings. By Professor Kirkwood (read
;o the American Philosophical Society, March 4, 1870).— According to the
iomputed elements of the Comet I. 1861 (by Oppolzer), first shown by Dr.
Edmund Weiss (Astron. Kachr. no. 1632) to agree very closely with those of
he April meteor-stream, its periodic time of revolution is 415-4 years. On
he other hand, Professor Kirkwood points out that, without accepting a shorter
)eriodic time of revolution, the former April displays recorded in ancient
imes do not agree with the time of revolution of the comet. Adopting a
)eriod of about 28^ years for the cycle of returns of the April shower, the
vhole of the dates of its appearance selected by Professor ll^ewton as agre'eing
veil with those of its most recent appearance in the present century are re-
iresented with perfect accuracy by the following scheme : —

Dates of former appearances. Interval in years.

'>om B.C. 687 to B.C. 15 672-000=24 periods of 28-000 years each.

B.C. IS to A.D. 582 597-000 = 21 „ 28-429

A.D. 582 to A.D. 1093-714 (between]

1093 and 1096) jSii7i4=i» „ 28-429 „

A.D. 1093-714 to 1222-143 28-429:^1 „ 28-429

A.D. 1222-143 to 1803 680-857=24 „ 28-369 „

The periodical time of 28^ years corresponds to an ellipse whose major
xis is 18-59, and whose aphelion distance is very nearly equal to the mean
listance of the planet Uranus. A remark of Mr. Du Chaillu is here believed
to be rightly recalled, that he observed the April meteors in the equatorial
parts of Africa almost as brilliant, and leaving streaks more enduring than
those of the great November meteor-shower (of which he was also an ob-
server in England, in the year 1866). If the date of Mr. Du ChaiUu's obser-
vation was about the year 1860, a corroboration of Professor Kirkwood'a
cycle of 28^ years repeated twice since the great display of those meteors in
the year 1803 would be thence derived. The April meteor-shower was also
sufficiently bright in the year 1863 to make its approach to an epoch of
maximum brilliancy in about that year a somewhat probable conjecture.

Among the formerly recorded star-showers which appear to have certainly
been connected with the December meteor-system. Professor Kirkwood points
out a notice of such an occurrence in the year a.d. 901. Others are found
to have taken place in the years 930, 1571, 1830, 1833, and 1836, with an
apparent maximum in the year 1833, when as many as ten meteors were
seen simultaneously. Finally, pretty abundant displavs of the shower were
observed in the years 1861, 1862, and 1863, with a jprobable maximum in
the year 1862. These dates indicate a period of about 29^ years, thus^

901 to 930 I period of 29000 years.

930 to 1571 22 „ 29136 „

1571 to 1833 9 „ jg-iii ,,

1833 to 1862 1 „ 29-000 „

A third meteoric shower, that of the 15th-21st of October, presents, again,
a similar period of revolution. The recorded dates of apparitions which cor-
respond m the times of their appearance with the present meteor-showers of
the 15th-21st of October are the years a.d. 288, 1436 and 1439, 1743, and
1798, on each of which occasions a great number of shooting-stars were

e2

52 REPORT 1871.

seen. The periodic time of 27| years is well indicated by these dates,
thus : —

A.D. 288 to 1439 42 periods of 27-405 years each.

1439 to 1743 II 1. 27-636 „

1743 to 1798 2 „ 27-500 „

" If these periods are correct, it is a remarkable coincidence that the
aphelion distances of the meteoric rings of April 18th-20th, October 15th-
21st, November 14th, and December llth-13th, as well as those of the
comets 1866 I., and 1867 I. are all nearly equal to the mean distance of
Uranus."

4. Beitriige zur Kenntniss cler Sternschnuppen, von Dr. Edmund Weiss
(Sitzungsberichte of the Imperial Academy of Vienna for January 16, 1868)
presents a short summary of the mathematical problems required to be
solved in the determination of the parabolic orbit, and the actual relative
speed of the meteors' course in the atmosphere, from the known position of
the radiant-point ; and shows how approximate calculations of the velocities
of shooting-stars have led to discoveries, in proving certain periodical meteor-
currents to be intimately connected with comets of which the orbits have
recently been determined*.

5, The Fuel of the Sun, by W. Mattieu WiUiams, F.C.S. (8vo, 222 pp.
Simpkin and Marshall). — An attempt to explain convulsions of the sun's sur-
face by planetary disturbances of a universal atmosphere collected in greatest
density about the larger bodies of the solar system, and agitated by tides
arising from their several attractions, is the theory for the establishment of
which a collection of the greatest interest of recent observations of solar
physics has been brought into a small compass by the author of the work,
and is well directed to explain the chief phenomena of solar physics. The
corona is regarded (Chapter XIII.) as originating in solar projectiles driven
from its surface with eruptive violence. In the following chapter the source
of meteorites is conjectured to be the solar projectiles which thus pass beyond
the boundaries of the zodiacal light ; some of which being confined to revolve
in two principal orbits outside of that luminary, and in several intermediate
zones of irregularly and more thinly scattered projectiles, may be regarded
as giving rise to the August and November, as well as to other minor and
more or less regular meteoric displays. Somewhat more important specu-
lations and descriptions of the meteorology of the moon and planets, as well
as of the distribution of the nebulae, suggesting the stellar origin of some of
those bodies, occupy the greater portion of the remainder of the work.

* The velocity of the April meteors, or Lyraids, of the 20th of April meteoric shower,
relatively' to the earth, is given in Dr. Weiss's list of radiant-points and relative velocities of |
coraetary orbits, in the above paper, as 1-585, that of the earth in its orbit being unity.
Adopting the value of 18-6 miles per second for the earth's mean orbital velocity, this gives
the relative velocity of the Lyraids, or April shower-meteors, 29-5 miles per second ; very
nearly that observed (30 miles per second) in the case of the only shooting-star of the shower
doubly observed, as described in this Eeport, on the night of the 20th of April last.

ON FOSSIL CRUSTACEA. 53

Fifth Report of the Committee, consisting o/Henry Woodward, F.G.S.,
F.Z.S., Dr. Duncan, F.R.S., and R. Etheridge, F.R.S., on the
Structure and Classification of the Fossil Crustacea, drawn up by
Henry Woodward, F.G.S., F.Z.S.

Since I had last the honour to present a Report on the Structure and Clas-
sification of the Fossil Crustacea, I have published figures and descriptions of
the following species, namely : —

Decapoda Bbacittuka.

1. liJuichiosoma hispinosa, H. Woodw. Lower Eocene, Portsmouth.

2. echinata, H. W. Lower Eocene, Portsmouth.

3. Palceocorystes glabra, H. "W. Lower Eocene, Portsmouth. All figured
and described in Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvii. p, 90, pi. 4.

Decapoda Maceuea.

4. Scyllaridia Belli, H. W. Loudon Clay, Sheppey. Geol. Mag. 1870,
vol. vii. p. 493, pi. 22. fig. 1,

Amphipoda.

5. Necrogammarus Sahueyi, H. W. Lower Ludlow, Leintwardine. Figured
and described Trans. Woolhope Club, 1870, p. 271, pi. 11.

ISOPODA.

6. Pcdcega Carteri, H. W. Lower Chalk, Dover, &c. Geol. Mag. 1870,
vol. vii. p. 493, pi. 22. fig. 1.

7. Prcearctun(s gigas, H. W. Old Red Sandstone, Rowlestone, Hereford-
shire. Trans. Woolhope Club, 1870, p. 266.

Merostomata.

8. Eurgpterits Brodiei, H. W. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1871, August.
Trans. Woolhope Club, 1870, p. 276.

Phyilopoda.

*9. Dlihyrocaris tenuistriatus, M°Coy. Carboniferous Limestone, Settle,
Yorkshire.

10. Dithyrocaris Belli, H. W. Devonian, Gaspe, Canada.

11. Ceratiocans Ludensis, H. W. Lower Ludlow, Leintwardine.

12. Ceratiocaris Oretonensis, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Oreton,
Worcestershii-e.

13. Ceratiocaris truncatus, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Oreton, Worces-
tershire.

Figured and described in the Geol. Mag. 1871, vol. viii. p. 104, pi. 3.

14. Cyclus bilobatus, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Settle, Yorkshire.

15. torosus, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Little Island, Cork.

16. Wrightii, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Little Island, Cork.

17. ■ Harhnessi, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Little Island, Cork.

*18. radialis, Phillips. Carboniferous Limestone, Settle, Yorkshire,

Vise, Belgium.
*19. Cyclus Rankini, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Carluke, Lanarkshire.
[*20. " Brongniartianus," De Kon. Carboniferous Limestone, York-
shire, Belgium.]

21. Cyclus Jonesiamis, H. W. Carboniferous Limestone, Little Island,
Cork. (These latter figured and described in the Geol. Mag. 1870, vol. vii.
pi. 23. figs. 1-9.)

[Those marked with an asterisk have been already figured, but have been
redrawn and redescribed in order to add to or correct previous descriptions.

54 REPORT 1871.

Thus, for example, " Cydus Brongniartianus " proves upon careful examina-
tion to be only the hypostome of a Trilobite belonging to the genus Phillijjsia.
Ditliyrocaris tenuistratus is identical with Avicula pco-adoxides of De Koninck,

&c.]'

Since noticing the occurrence of an Isopod, Palcega Carteri, from the
Kentish, Cambridge, and Bedford Chalk, Dr. Ferd. Eoemer, of Breslau, has
forwarded me the cast of a specimen of the same crustacean from the Chalk
of Upper Silesia. This, together with the example from the Miocene of
Turin, gives a very wide geographical as weU as chronological range to this
genus.

A still more remarkable extension of the Isopoda in time is caused by the
discovery of the form which I have named Prceardurus in the Devonian of
Herefordshire, apparently the remains of a gigantic Isopod resembling the
modern Arcturus Bcrffinsii.

I have also described from the Lower Ludlow a form which I have referred
with some doubts to the Amphipoda, under the generic name of Necrogam-
marus.

Bepresentatives both of the Isopoda and Amphipoda vrill doubtless be
found in numbers in our Palaeozoic rocks, seeing that Macruran Decapods
are found as far back as the Coal-measures*, and Brachyurous forms in the

Oolites f.

Indeed the suggestion made by Mr. Billings as to the Trilobita being fur-
nished with legs (see Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi. pi. 31. fig. 1), if
established upon further evidence, so as to be applied to the whole class,
would carry the Isopodous type back in time to our earliest Cambrian rocks.

I propose to carry out an investigation of this group for the purpose of
confirming Mr. Billings's and my own observations, by the examination of a
longer series of specimens than have hitherto been dealt with. In the mean
time the authenticity of the conclusions arnved at by Mr. Billings having
been called in question by Drs. Dana, Verrill, and Smith (see the American
Joum. of Science for May last, p. 320 ; Annals & Mag. Nat. Hist, for May,
p. 366), I have carefully considered their objections, and have replied to
the same in the Geological Magazine for July last, p. 289, pi. 8 ; and I may
be permitted here to briefly state the arguments p>-o and con, seeing they are
of the greatest importance in settling the systematic position of the Trilo-
bita among the Crustacea.

Until the discovery of the remains of ambulatory appendages by Mr. Bil-
lings in an Asaphus from the Trenton Limestone (in 1870), the only appen-
dage heretofore detected associated with any Trilobite was the hypostome or
lip-plate.

From its close agreement with the lip-plate in the recent Apus, and also
from the fact of the number of body-rings exceeding that attained in any
other group save in the Entomostraca, nearly all naturahsts who have paid
attention to the Tiilobita in the past thirty years have concluded that they
possessed only soft membranaceoiis giU-feet, similar to those of BrancMpus,
Apiis, and other Phyllopods.

The large compound sessile eyes, and the hard, shelly, many-segmented
body, with its compound caudal and head-shield, diifer from any known
PhyUopod, but offer many points of analogy with the modem Isopods J ; and

* Anfkrapalamon Grossartii, Salter, Coal-measures, Glasgow,
t Palminachus longipes, H. Woodw., Forest Marble, Wilts.

J It should always, howerer, be borne in mind that as the Trilobita offer, as a group, no
fixed number of body-rings and frequently possess more than twenty-one segments, they

I

ON FOSSIL CRUSTACEA. 55

one would be led to presuppose the Trilobites possessed of organs of loco-
motion of a stronger texture than mere branchial frills.

The objection raised by Drs. Dana and VerriU to the special case of ap-
pendages in the AsapJius assumed by Mr. Billings to possess ambulatory legs,
is that the said appendages were merely the semicalcified arches in the inte-
gument of the sternum to which the true appendages were attached.

A comparison, which these gentlemen have themselves suggested, between
the abdomen of a Macruran Decapod and the TrUobite in question is the
best refutation of their own argument.

The sternal arches in question are firmly united to each tergal piece at the
margin, not along the median ventral line. If, then, the supposed legs of the
Trilobite correspond to these semicalcified arches in the Macruran Decapod,
they might be expected to lie irregularly along the median line, but to unite
with the tergal pieces at the lateral border of each somite. In the fossil we
find just the contrary is the case ; for the organs in question occupy a definite
position on either side of a median line along the ventral surface, but diverge
widely from their corresponding tergal pieces at each lateral border, being
directed forward and outwards in a very similar position to that in which we
should expect legs {not sternal arches) to lie beneath the body-rings of a fos-
sil crustacean. The presence, however, of semicalcified sternal arches pre-
supposes the possession of stronger organs than mere foliaceous giU-feet ;
whilst the broad shield-shaped caudal lA&te suggests most strongly the posi-
tion of the branchiae. In the case of the Trenton Asaphus I shall be satis-
fied if it appears, from the arguments I have put forward, that they are most
prohahly legs — 'feeling assured that more evidence ought to be demanded be-
fore deciding on the systematic position of so large a group as the Trilobita
from only two specimens*.

With regard to the embryology and development of the modern King-
Crab (Limulus polyphaimus), we must await the conclusions of Dr. Anton
Dohrn before deciding as to the affinities presented by its larval stages to
certain of the Trilobita, such relations being only in general external form.
Dr. Packard (Reports of the American Association for the Advancement of
Science, August 1870) remarks, " The whole embryo bears a very near resem-
blance to certain genera of Trilobites, as TrinucJeus, Asaphus, and others ;"
and he adds, " Previous to hatching it strikingly resembles Trinucleus and
other TrQobites, suggesting that the two groups, should, on embryonic and
structural grounds, be included in the same order, especially now that Mr. E.
Billings has demonstrated that Asaphus possessed eight pairs of 5-jointed
legs of uniform si^e."

Such statements are apt to mislead unless we carefully compare the cha-
racters of each group. And first let me express a caiition against the too
hasty construction of a classification based upon larval characters alone.

Larval characters are useful guide-posts in defining great groups, and also in
indicating affinities between great groups ; but the more we become acquainted
with larval forms the greater will be our tendency (if we attempt to base our
classification on their study) to merge groups together which we had before
held as distinct.

have, as a matter of course, been considered as belonging to a much lower group than the
Isopoda, in which the normal number of somites is seven. Wliilst admitting the justice of
this conclusion, we do not think it affords any good ground for rejecting the proposition
that the Isopoda may be the direct lineal descendants of the Trilobita.

* One in Canada and one in the British Museum, both of the same species.

56

REPORT 1871.

To take a familiar iustance : if w^'compare the larval stages of the Com-
mon Shore-Crab {Carcinus 7noenas) with. Ptert/r/otus, we should be obliged
(according to the arguments of Dr. Packard) to place them near to or in the
same group.

The eyes in both are sessile, the functions of locomotion, prehension, and
mastication are all performed by one set of appendages, which are attached
to the mouth ; the abdominal segments are natatory, but destitute of any
appendages.

Such characters, however, are common to the larvae of many crustaceans
widely separated when adult, the fact being that in the larval stage we find
in this group what has been so often observed by naturahsts in other groups
of the animal kingdom, namely, a shadowing forth in the larval stages of
the road along which its ancestors travelled ere they arrived from the remote
past at the living present.

If we place the characters of Limulus and Pterygotus side by side, and
also those of TrUobita and Isopoda, we shall find they may be, in the present
state of our knowledge, so retained in classification.

1.
2.
3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8,

Pterygotus (Fossil, extinct).

Eyes sessile, compound.

Ocelli distinctly seen.

All the limbs serving as mouth-
organs.

Anterior thoracic segments bear-
ing branchiae or reproductive
organs.

Other segments destitute of any
appendages.

Thoracic segments unanchylosed.

Abdominal segments /reeancZ well
developed.

Metastoma large.

1.

2.
3.

4.

6.

Limidus (Fossil, and living).

1. Eyes sessile, compound.

2. Two ocelli distinctly seen.

3. All the limbs serving as mouth-

organs.

4. All the thoracic segments bear-

ing branchiae or reproductive
organs.

5. Other segments destitute of any

appendages.

6. Thoracic segments anchylosed.

7. Abdominal segments anchylosed

and rudimentary.

8. Metastoma rudimentary.

II.

Trilohita (Fossil, extinct).

Eyes sessile, compound.

No ocelli visible.

Appendages partly oral, partly
ambulatory, arranged in pairs.

Thoracic segments variable in
number, from 8 even to 28, free
and movable (animal sometimes
rolling into a ball).

Abdominal series coalesced to
form a broad caudal shield,
bearing the branchiae beneath.

Lip-plate tuell developed.

Isopoda (Fossil, and living).

Eyes sessile, compound.

No ocelli visible.

Appendages partly oral, partly
ambulatory, arranged in pairs.

Thoracic segments usually seven,
free and movable (animal
sometimes rolling into a ball).

5.

Abdominal somites coalesced, and
forming a broad caudal shield,
bearing the branchiae beneath.
G. Lip-plate small.

Should our further researches confirm Mr. Billings's discovery fully, we may
propose for the second pair of these groups a common designation, meantime
we give the above as representing the present state of our knowledge.

ON THE CENSUS. 57

Rej}0)'t of the Committee appointed at the Meeting of the British
Association at Liverpool, 1870, consisting of Prof. Jevons, R.
Dudley Baxter, J. T. Danson, James Heywood, F.R.S., Dr.
W. B. Hodgson, and Prof. Waley, with Edmund Macrory as
their Secretary, "for the purpose of urging upon Her Majesty's
Government the expediency of arranging and tabulating the results
of the approaching Census in the three several parts of the United
Kingdom in such a manner as to admit of ready and effective
comparison."

Your Committee after their appointment held meetings in London, and
agreed upon the following Memorial : —

" TJnifoemitt of Plan for the Census of the United Kingdom.

"To the Right Honourable Henry Austin Bruce, M.P., &c. &c., Her Ma-
jesty's Princi]3al Secretary of State for the Home Department.

" Memorial of the Committee of the British Association, appointed in Liver-
pool, September 1870, for the purpose of urging upon Her Majesty's
Government the expediency of arranging and tabulating the results
of the approaching Census in the three several parts of the United
Kingdom in such a manner as to admit of ready and effectual com-
parison.

" Your memorialists beg respectfully to represent that the value of statistical
information depends mainly upon the accuracy and expedition with which
comparisons can be made between facts relating to different districts.

"They also consider that the ease and rapidity with which researches in the
census tables can be made is one principal object to be held in view in de-
termining the form of their publication. They therefore desire that not
only should the enumeration of the jjeople be conducted in all places in an
exactly uniform manner, so far as is compatible with the terms of the
several Census Acts, biit that there should be no divergence in the modes of
tabulating and printing the results. They wish that the tables for England,
Scotland, and Ireland should form as nearly as possible one uniform and
consistent whole.

" Your memorialists could specify a great many points in which there was
divergence between the tables for 1861, but they will mention only a few
of the more important cases.

" 1. The detailed population tables of England, Scotland, and Ireland differ
as regards the periods of age specified. The Scotch report gives twenty-one
intervals of age, the Irish report generally twenty-two, and the English
only thirteen. Either one-third of the printed matter in the Scotch and
Irish tables is superfluous, or that in the English tables deficient.

" 2. The classification of occupations is apparently identical in the three
reports, but there is much real discrepancy between the Irish and English
reports, rendering exact comparison difficult.

"3. In the Irish report there is no comparison and classification of occupa-
tions according to age, classification according to religions being substituted,
although such a classification could not be made in England or Scotland.

" 4. In the appendix to the English report appears a table (No. 56), giving

58 REPORT 1871.

most important information as regards the numbers of the population at
each year of age. Inconvenience has been felt from the want of similar in-
formation concerning the populations of Scotland and Ireland.

" 5. In the appendix to the Irish report they find some interesting Tables
(II., III., and IV.), to which there is nothing exactly corresponding in the
other reports, so far as they have been able to discover.

" 6. The tables, even when containing the same information, are often
stated in different forms and arrangements, seriously increasing the labour
of research.

" Your memorialists therefore beg to suggest : —

" I. That the principal body of tables relating to the numbers, age, sex,
birthplace, civil condition, and occupation of the people should be
drawn up and printed in an exactly identical form for the three
parts of the United Kingdom.
" II. That while the Commissioners may with great advantage continue
to exercise their free discretion in drawing up such minor tables
as appear to have si)ecial interest for distinct localities, they should
agree to prepare in a uniform manner such minor or summary
tables as may be of importance as regards aU the parts of the
United Kingdom.
" III. That a general Index of Subjects should be prepared for the whole
of the reports, appendices, and tables, so that an inquirer can readily
ascertain where the corresponding information for different parts
of the United Kingdom is to be found, without making, as hitherto,
three independent searches through a mass of comjjlex and
almost unindexed information.
" It would appear that the officers engaged in superintending the Census of
1861 acted to a certain extent in concert and agreement.

" Your memorialists beg respectfully to request that those officers be in-
structed, on the present occasion, to confer with each other prior to drawing
up the tables for 1871, with a view of preserving perfect uniformity in their
operations, and avoiding all such divergencies in the three reports as are not
required by the Census Acts or the essential differences of the three
Kingdoms.

" Signed on behalf of the Committee, 8th December, 1870.

"W. Stanlet Jevons, F.S.S.,

President of the Statistical Section of the British Association for
the Advancement of Science, Liverpool, 1870.
"James Hexwood, M.A., F.R.S.,

Vice-President of the Statistical Society.
" Jacob Walet, F.S.S.,

One of the Secretaries of the Statistical Society.
"■ Edmd. Mackoet, M.A.,

Secretary of the Committee of the British Association for a Uni-
formity of Plan in the Census Tables of the United
Kingdom."

The above memorial was immediately presented to the Eight Hon. H. A.
Bruce, M.P., Her Majesty's Principal Secretary of State for the Home De-
partment, and has been by him referred to the Registrars General for their
report thereon.

ON ABSTRACTS OF CHEMICAL PAPERS. 59

The returns of the Census having only recently been collected, too little
time has as yet elapsed for the perfect arrangements of the tables to be
completed, but your Committee have reason to believe that the recommenda-
tions contained in the above memorial wUl ultimately be, to a considerable
extent, adopted by Her Majesty's Government.

Postscript. — Since the above Report was drawn up, the Committee have
received a formal reply from the Home Office (dated 26th September, 1871),
informing them that the Home Secretary " has desired the Registrar General
for Scotland, and has requested the Lord Lieutenant to desire the Census
Commissioners in Ireland, to frame their tables in conformity with those
submitted by the Registrar General for England and Wales, and approved
by Mr. Bruce, as far as circumstances will admit ; and that with this view
he has instructed the above-mentioned officers to place themselves in com-
munication with the Registrar General for England and Wales."

Report of the Committee appointed for the purpose of Superintending
the Publication of Abstracts of Chemical Papers. The Committee
consists o/Prof. A. W. Williamson, F.R.S., Prof. H. E. Roscoe,
F.R.S., Prof. E. Fkankland, F.R.S.

The Committee are glad to be able to announce that regular monthly re-
ports of the progress of Chemistry have been published since April 1st, 1871,
by the Chemical Society. These Repoits have been rendered, as far as pos-
sible, complete by abstracts, more or less full, of all papers of scientific in-
terest, and of the more important papers relating to applied chemistry. The
abstracts have been made by chemists, most of whom are members of the
Societj% whose zeal for the science has induced them to undertake the work
for the small honorarium which the Council has been able to offer. A
numerous Committee of Publication has been formed, whose Members gra-
tuitously undertake the revision of the proofs and a comparison of the ab-
stracts with the original papers.

The Reports are edited by Mr. Watts, each monthly part being bound up
with the corresponding number of the Chemical Society's Journal. Each
volume wiU be furnished with a full index, and will give a complete view of
the progress of Chemistry during the year.

The Committee feel that their thanks are due to aU those gentlemen en-
gaged in the work for having already so far succeeded in accomplishing a
task of such difficulty and importance, and they confidently hope that their
continued exertions wiU still further perfect the details of the scheme so as
gradually to increase the usefulness of the Reports.

It is right to state that the funds of the Chemical Society available for
the purpose of the Reports, although so opportunely aided by a grant of
£100 from the British Association, were insufficient to defray the necessary
expenses, and that voluntary contributions to the amount of upwards of

60 REPORT 1871.

^200 have been received towards the cost of publication for the first year,
up to April 1872.

There is good reason to believe that the expectations entertained of the
usefulness of these Reports will be fully realized by their continuance on the
present system, and that they wiU be found largely to conduce to the pro-
gress of the science wherever the English language is spoken.

Report of the Committee for discussing Observations of Lunar Objects
suspected of Change. The Committee consists of the Rev. T. W.
Webb and Edward Crossley, Seci'etary.

The Committee have much pleasure in presenting their first Eeport on the
above subject. Though much attention has been given of late years to a
large number of lunar objects, your Committee felt that they could not
accomplish their purpose better than by confining their Report to the discus-
sion of a limited and weU-observed portion of the lunar surface. No person
seeking to discover evidence of geologic change would be constantly travel-
ling over the whole surface of our globe, but would of necessity confine his
attention to a small area for a considerable period of time. This has been
the course adopted on the moon. Plato, a vast crater, containing 2700
square miles, in 51° N. lat. and 10° E. long., has presented a most interest-
ing and important variety of features, which we have endeavoured to photo-
graph, so to speak, with pen and pencil, with a view, if not at once to obtain
our iiltimate object, at least to lay out the groundwork for future observers.

The Report has been carefully drawn up by Mr. "W. R. Birt on behalf of
the Committee. Time has only permitted the discussion of the observations
of the bright spots and craterlets seen on the floor of Plato ; whereas your
Committee consider that it is equally important that the observations of the
Humerous streaks, with the faults and other peculiar features noticed on the
floor and walls of this fine formation, should be likevdse discussed, in order
that something like a complete description of this object as observed at the
present time may be presented to the Association for the use of future sele-
nographers.

Your Committee would therefore request that a further grant of £20 may
be placed at their disposal for this purpose during the ensuing year.

Report on the Discussion of Observations of SjJOts on the Surface of the
Lunar Crater Plato. By W. R. Birt.

In executing the task confided to me of discussing certain observations of
the spots on the lunar crater Plato, one of the first points which I deemed
it important to ascertain was the eifect which the intensity of the sun's
light as a function of his altitude might produce on the visibility of the spots.
The number of spots actually observed between April 18G9 and April 1871
inclusive, amounted to 37, the greater portion (21) having been discovered in
this interval. In order to become acquainted with phenomena possibly con-
nected with an increase of light on the floor of the crater, the observations
have been arranged under intervals of twelve hours, from suni-ise to sunset
on Plato, and a ledger formed for each interval, the number of which
is 31. Erom these ledgers the restdts in Table II. have been deduced,
viz. the mean number of spots visible during each interval, and the actual
number of spots observed during each interval. For illustrating the results

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS.

61

the curves in fig. 1 have been projected. The first curve is that of solar
altitudes at the moon, epoch the equinoxes, locality 50° north or south lati-
tude. The second curve is that of the mean number of spots visible during
each interval.

Fig. 1.

1 3 .5 7 9 11 13 l.=i 17 19 21 23 2.5 27 29 31

No. 1 0'

No. 2 0'

3 5 7 a ii Id io ii ly 21 iij 2o zi zy
Curve No. 1. Solar altitudes. Latitude 50° at equinoxes.
Curve No. 2. Curve of mean number of spots visible each interval.

0° No. 1

0" No. 2.

Table I.

Solar Altitudes

at Moon.

Latitude 50°.

Latitude 55°.

Inter-
val.

Winter.

Equinoxes.

Summer.

Winter.

Equinoxes.

Summer.

Inter-
val.

h
0

O 1 </

o

1 H

o
1

id So

O ( i<

O 1 II

o
1

15
45

28
6

h
0

12

12

2

44

4

3

64 60

5

5 35

2 13

52

3 29

32

4

24

6

.?6

48

7

48 6

8

59 17

5 41

19

6 57

29

8

13

24

24

36

10

26

0

11

38 10

12

£0 6

9 6

19

10 22

6

11

33

48

36

48

14

10

0

15

23 20

16

36 30

12 24

10

13 42

0

14

59

30

48

60

17

46

50

19

2 0

20

16 20

15 35

50

16 55

0

13

13

40

60

72

21

14

40

22

31 20

23

47 SO

18 38

40

19 69

0

21

19

20

72

84

24

31

0

25

49 30

27

7 50

21 30

30

22 52

30

24

14

20

84

96

27

33

30

28

54 20

30

14 £0

23 4

50

25 33

0

26

56

40

96

108

30

19

30

31

42 40

33

5 30

26 32

40

27 58

20

29

23

40

103

120

32

46

0

34

11 30

35

36 40

28 38

30

SO 5

40

31

32

0

120

132

34

.50

0

36

17 30

37

45 0

30 24

0

31 .53

0

33

21

50

132

144

36

23

20

37

57 50

39

27 20

31 47

10

33 17

40

34

47

50

144

1.56

37

38

30

39

9 10

40

40 40

32 46

30

34 17

50

35

49

20

156

168

38

18

30

39

50 30

41

22 20

.33 20

0

34 52

0

36

24

0

163

Mcr.

88

27

51

40

0 0

41

32 9

33 27

51

35 0

0

36

32

9

Mer.

62

REPORT 187] .

Table II, Ordinates of Curve of Spot frequency.

No.

Interval.

Altitude.

Mean.

Number.

Observa-
tions.

h h

O 0

1.

0 to 12

— to 5

10

1

1

2.

12 „ 24

— « 5

4-6

15

7

3.

24 „ 36

3 ;, 9

5-9

14

6

4.

36 „ 48

7 „ 13

5-9

14

8

5.

48 „ 60

11 „ 17

6-4

15

9

6.

60 „ 72

15 „ 21

7-1

13

7

7.

73 „ 84

18 „ 24

120

27

7

8.

84 „ 96

22 „ 28

101

27

7

9.

96 „ 108

25 „ 31

11-6

27

9

10.

108 „ 120

28 „ 34

10-7

21

6

11.

120 „ 132

31 „ 36

7-5

13

4

12.

132 „ 144

33 „ 38

12-4

33

8

13.

144 „ 156

35 „ 40

7-4

17

5

14.

156 „ 168

37 „ 41

9-2

19

6

15.

168 „ Mer.

38 „ 42

8-5

19

8

16.

Mer. „ 168

42 „ 38

50

9

4

17.

168 „ 156

41 „ 37

9-3

21

9

18.

156 „ 144

40 „ 35

12-2

23

5

19.

144 „ 132

38 „ 33

91

25

8

20.

132 „ 120

36 „ 31

6-3

9

3

21.

120 „ 108

34 „ 28

60

8

3

22.

108 „ 96

31 „ 25

9-0

20

6

23.

96 „ 84

28 „ 22

5-2

12

5

24.

84 „ 72

24 „ 18

13-0

23

3

25.

72 „ 60

21 „ 15

11-0

21

4

26.

60 „ 48

17 „ 11

10-0

15

2

27.

48 „ 36

13 „ 7

6-3

11

3

28.

36 „ 24

9 „ 3

5-8

13

6

29.

24 „ 12

5 „ —

8-0

13

2

30.

12 „ 0

5 „ —

50

7

2

31.

- „ 12

30

3

1

We may regard the various maxima of the spot-curve as indicative :— First,
of a greater number of observations during the intervals which furnish the
maxima. It is true the column of observations may countenance this view ;
but it does not hold in all cases, neither are the greater number of observa-
tions so pronounced as the maxima of the curve. Second, of a clearer state
of the earth's atmosphere than usual, enabling us to see more spots than
when it is ordinarily translucent. This may to some extent explain the
occurrence of maxima separated by several intervals, and probably those in-
stances where we have a larger number of spots with a smaller number of
observations. Third, of an actual increase of visibility of the spots them-
selves at different and widely separated epochs, the observations of such
increased visibility falling at those intervals at which the maxima were re-
corded. The following are the epochs at which the greatest number of spots
were observed corresponding with the maxima of the curve :—

First maximum. Interval 2. 1870, Jan. 10, 12 spots, 15 for the whole
interval, from 7 observations.

To/

seepage li3.]

[Tl

0 spoto mnrkod

« we

Tablk III.

_

1

1

No.

Tiiicrvnl.

AlUtudo.

o-

!■

2'

(
6
7

4*

8
8

5'

8*

7-

8'

9'

10

11*

12

13

14

15'

16

17'

18

19

20

21 22'

I

23

24

25

26 1 27

1

28

29

30-

31'

32

33

34

3d

36

3uin*,jMettn9.

Spots.

1"
I 3-
, 4-

! 5-

! 6.
7-
8-
9-

10.
13.

>3-
14-

h ll

O to 13

(3 „ H

^ .. JS
56 .. +8
48 .. 60

Sums

Visibilitj-,..

60 to 7>

ll :: It
dl : III

Sums

Tisibiiity...

130 to 131
13a .. 144

:-1J :: '.ll

■ 68 ,.Mer.

Bma

Tiiibilitj..,

Sums before

^Jndor"!
.. 5
3 to 9
7 .. 13
11 .. 17

■ S .. "
i« .. "4
i> ., >8

:i::U

"1
8

I
a

I
I

a

a
1

X

a

I

I
a

:::

...

".'.:

-111

1
•07

3

1
8

aa

■79

S-

•07

■04

1

a
1

t

I

I

I

:::

1

a
I

3

■.'.■.'

..."

I
3a
3S
47
S8

I'O

4-6
S'9

I
'S

14
'4
IS

1

aS

39

■91

■41

;

•07

—

8
■99

■04

6

•04

10

■j6

■04

■o5

Z

1
•07

■04

•04

8

•39

"4

■07

1
■04

173

as 1

I

7
7

7

I

1
a

7
7
7

I

7
7
7

1

i

7
4
I
6

3

1

a
7
1

I

".'.:

4

3
5

a

a
I

3

4

a

2

3

a
I

'";

3
4

7
4

7

7
7

1

1

X

I

I
3

z

I
I

3

a
a

1

a

3

I
a
a

'.'.'.

...

1
a
a
1

4

t

a

;;;

...

3
1
a
3

«

...

1:

7>

7'1
la-o

■ 1-6

107

•3

a?

17
a?

29

>3

33

• 7
19
■9

~l

36

100

3'
roo

3'
i-oo

T:

17
■47

4

■03

13
■36

4

10
•a8

9
■as

■7]

■06

■56

36
100

■i

8

S
■14

S
■14

8
• -as

I
■03

4
■11

8

S

1
3
3

13

•37

6
-17

'7
■47

9
■»5

4
•11

373

i;::iS

3S " 40
37 .. 4>
3« .. 4"

Ueridian

4
9

1

3

1

S

4

~4
1

1

s

■

3

5

a
a

J

1
5

I

3

a

1
I

a

3
a
I
I

3

4
3

t

4
)
s

s

7

t
1
I

a

J

4

3

a

3

t

<

' 3

1

4
'1*

...

I

1
S

a
a

1

I

I

I

'

30
tia

37

U

7-5
u-4

74

r;

■06

3«

■06

'il

3"
■97

.;i

■3'

~l

■ol

8
■*5

-.1

6
■19

'06

8

■»s

■66

--

■63

4>

»9
■9'

~8^

•o(
9

7

3
•09

I
■03

■03

'34

4

7
-aa

I
■03

■03 -03

■03

3« 1

33

8

96

7

9.

93

«s

"7

■'

~

39

10

IS

'■

18

58

_.7^

6

I)

7

8

aa

"

8

36| si 18

I

t

1

848

1:1"

Mvr.to 168
168 .. .56
156 .. >44
"44 .■ »3a
131 .. 120

4a 10 3I
41 .. 37
45 ,. 3S
38 .. 33
3« ., 3.

I

1

i

7
J

a

...

4
a
3

...

1
a

4

I

1
a

a

3

a

5
S

5

2

1

7

4

4
1

3
9
S

7
3

I
a

a
a

".'.:

3

1

1

""3

1
I

i

3

a
a

"

I

...

a
3
3

a

I

a

::'

ao
84
61
73
19

50
9"3

123

2?
23

as
9

g

2
•07

28

I-oo

■04

27
■96

a6
■93

■7S

9
•32

4

■>4

9
■32

■04

4
*I4

. fi

18
■64

>7
■61

■;!

4
-.4

S
■18

I
■04

10

■36

5
-i8

3
■11

9
•32

I
■04

1
•04

8
■ag

3
■II

3
•II

a
•07

!!!

aS7

29

Visibility...

no to 108
108 „ 96
96 ,. 8,
84 .. 7»
7" ., 60

Sums

Vidbait;..

60 to4«
48 .. 3«
36 .. =4
H .. "
la „ 0

Sim.

Tulbilitr...

Sum. after

34 ..as
31 .. as

28 .. aa
a4 .. -8
ai .. 15

■07

■a I

2

I

S
3
4

-.

1
S
S
3
4

4

a

4

I

3

1

a

...

a
4

a
a

I

a
3

I

2

t

1
I
3

a
I
3
3

1
I

I
z
I

a

3

s

3
3
3

I

3

3

a
a
3

I

I

a

3

3

1
I

■■■;

1

I
1

"■

...

18

S4
26
39
44

6-0
90
S"a
130

II^O

8

23
31

31 a'
■I4| roo

•OS

17
■8.

iS

•86

57

S

■14

4
■19

It
Sa

■OS

9
■43

1 6
■osl '29

9
•43

■09

7
•33

17
-81

5

■24

S
'^4

9
•43

■05

■OS

2
■09

8
■38

■09

4

1
■05

181

37

17 .. n
■3 .. 7

•' s

Meridian

:::

1

1

a
3

I
3

a
I

I

2
2

a

I
a

I
I

1

I

a
1

1
a
I

a

a
3

S
2
3

I
1

I

"■i

:::

1

t

I
3

1

2

:::

'.'.'.

ao
"9

?l
J3

lo'o

H
43

'S
11

'3

■3

7

;;;

16
I-oo

■06

■87

7
•41

6

■37

4
■as

3

S
■31

a

■12

I
•06

4
■as

. 4

■?s

•ol

3
■'9

'5

■94

3
•'9

■12

a

■12

--

I

■q6

-06

-06

S
3'

a
•la

103

23

s

-«!

3

r s8

"JL

39

.8j .^

as

2

'S

4

16

31

3

27

59

12

12

'

ai

6

4

2

I

-

at

7

6

3

54*

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 63

Second maximum. Interval 7. 1870, March 13, 17 spots, 27 for the
whole interval, from 7 observations.

Third maximum. Interval 12. 1870, May 13, 27 spots, 33 for the whole
interval, from 8 observations.

Third maximum. Interval 12. 1870, Jan. 15, 22 spots, 33 for the whole
interval, from 8 observations.

Fouith maximum. Interval 19. 1869, Dec. 20, 19 spots, 25 for the
whole interval, from 8 observations.

Fifth maximum. Interval 22. 1870, Nov. 11, 13 spots, 20 for the whole
interval, from 6 observations.

Sixth maximum. Interval 24. 1870, Sept. 14, 16 spots, 23 for the whole
interval, from 3 observations.

When we take the mean numbers of spots seen at each intcn^al, the curve
is comparatively flat, rising but little above the mean line of 7-9 spots
visible at any interval, and this is about the mean number visible on any
evening. The flatness of the curve is not accordant with an increase of
spots dependent on an increase of solar altitude or greater angle of illu-
mination, otherwise the apex would be much more decided. We may, how-
ever, trace from the number of spots actually seen and contributing to
the maxima of the spot-curve, as weU as from the observations adduced
above, that the change of iUuminating angle does exercise an influence on
the appearance of spots, inasmuch as on a few occasions the largest number
of spots have been seen with higher illuminations. The actual curve, how-
ever, derived from two years' obsei-vations is not sufficiently decided to refer
the appearances of the spots to this agency.

By dividing the whole of the twelve hourly intervals into six series or
groups, and taking spot No. 1 as the standard of comparison, we have the
data for computing Tables III. and IV. containing the visibilities of each
spot for each group of intervals : sunrise, or 0 to 60 hours, altitudes 0° to 17° ;
60 to 120 hours, altitudes 15° to 34° ; 120 hours to meridian passage, alti-
tudes 31° to 42°; meridian passage to 120 hours, altitudes 42° to 31°; 120 to
60 hours, altitudes 34° to 15°; and 60 to 0 hours, or sunset, altitudes 17° to 0°.
From the results in these Tables, Table V. has been formed, in which we
have a bird's-eye view of the visibilities during the luni-solar day. Gene-
rally the visibilities are low during the first 60 hours, i. e. compared with
spot No. 1, the smaller spots are but seldom seen ; and this is so far indica-
tive of solar light in some way developing or bringing the spots into visi-
bility. During the next 60 hours some spots have risen considerably in
visibUity, while others have been seen more frequently during the afternoon
hours of the luni-solar day. The numbers are, however, too irregular to
allow us to conclude that the smaller and less frequently seen spots are in-
fluenced in their visibility by further changes of illuminating angle beyond
theii- first development ; and this is very strikingly manifested by the curves
which these numbers furnish ; for example, the diurnal curves of spots
Nos. 5, 14, and 16 in fig. 2 generally agree in exhibiting greater visibilities
from 60 hours to meridian passage, while spots Nos. 9 and 11 are more
frequently seen from 120 to 60 hours before sunset. These, as well as the
peciiliarities of the other curves, strongly suggest that the variations of visi-
bility of certain spots are not to any great extent dependent upon an increase
of intensity of solar light, but rather upon some agency more particularly
connected with the spots themselves. It is important to remark that another
series of observations 7nay furnish totally diflferent diurnal curves, should
the variations in visibility depend upon local lunar action.

64

REPORT 1871.

In nearly every case the spots seen during the first 60 hours of the luni-
solar day have increased durmg the day in visibility, i. e. they were seen less

frequently during this group of
intervals than during the succeed-
ing sixty hours. This increase,
however, has not been regular,
which it would have been from
changes of illuminating angle
alone, some spots having been
seen, as before stated, more fre-
quently during the second group
of intervals, while others have de-
clined in visibility and not at-
tained their maxima until the
period 120 to 60 hours before sun-
set. The diurnal curves of spots
Nos. 14, 5, and 16 in the first
category, and those of Nos. 9 and
11 in the second, have already
been refeiTed to ; that of spot No.
22 (fig. 3) diff'ers from the others
by its showing an increase of visi-
bihty from sunrise to 120 hours
before sunset. The visibilities of
many spots are lower during the
last 60 hours of the luni-solar
day.
The

curves of visibility
are

durinj

Diurnal Curves of Visibility.
Plato.

Spots on

the luni-solar day are essentially
difl^erent from the curves of visi-
bility as deduced from the obser-
vations of twenty-four lunations,
although both lead to the same
result ; and from both a very im-
portant conclusion may be drawn,
viz. that upon assuming other agen-
cies to be in operation than changes
of illuminating angle, such as present activity, the epochs at which such
activity was manifested varied to such an extent, and were so far separated
from each other in time, as to coincide, in the case of spots Nos. 14, 5, and 16,
with the period in the luni-solar day of 60 to 120 hours after sunrise, while
the activity manifested by spots Nos. 9, 11, and 22 occurred at a later period
of the luni-solar day, 120 to 60 hours before sunset. So far as the varia-
tions of visibility of spots Nos. 14, 5, 16, 9, 11, and 22 are concerned,
they do not appear to depend exclusively on changes of illuminating angle,
even if a certain intensity of solar light contributes generally to render the
spots visible.

While the four craterlets Nos. 1, 3, 30, and 17 are visible during the whole
of the luni-solar day, the spots on their sites are seldom seen until the sun
attains an altitude of about 30°, and then they appear as " bright round
disks ;" and this characteristic attaches as well to the craterlets as to other
spots when the sun attains this altitude. With altitudes between 30° and
40° a different class of phenomena is manifested ; the sharp and distinct cha-

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS.

65

Table V.

Visibility.

No.

h h

h h

h

h

h h

h h

0to60

GO to 120

120 to Mer.

Mer. to 120

120 to 60

60to0

0.

•04

•14

•00

•07

•14

1.

100

1^00

1^00

1-00

1^00

100

2.

•14

•06

•04

•05

■06

3.

104

1^00

•84

•96

•81

•87

4.

•93

100

•97

•93

•86

•44

6.

•43

•83

•72

•75

•57

•37

6.

•11

•47

•22

•32

•24

•25

7.

•07

■11

■28

•14

•19

•19

8.

•03

•03

, ,

9.

•29

•36

•25

•32

•52

•31

10.

•04

•11

•16

•04

•05

11.

•21

■2S

•19

•14

•43

•12

12.

, ,

, ,

•06

•07

•05

•06

13.

•04

•2.5

•25

•21

•29

•25

14.

•36

•75

•66

•64

•43

■25

15.

, ,

•06

, ,

•09

•06

16.

•07

■m

•63

•ei

•33

•19

17.

■79

I'OO

•91

•96

•81

•94

18.

•19

•06

•14

•24

•19

19.

•07

•22

•22

•18

•12

20.

•04

•14

•09

•04

21.

•14

•03

22.

•04

•22

•28

••36

•43

•i2

23.

•07

•03

•12

•18

•05

24.

•11

•12

•11

•05

25.

•07

•22

•37

•32

•09

,

26.

, ,

, ,

•04

•00

27.

•04

'06

28.

•04

■06

29.

•04

•17

•6.3

30.

•29

•47

•34

•29

•38

•31

31.

•04

, ,

•12

•11

•09

•12

32.

•07

•25

•22

•11

•14

33.

, ,

•03

•07

•05

34.

•04

•11

■03

35.

■03

36.

■03

racter of the craterlets is no longer observed. Some put on a hazy appearance,
and they all assume the same aspect as those spots which have not been
observed as craterlets. This state of things continues until the declining
latitudes approach the limit at which the crater form was lost in the advan-
cing day, then it once more appears accompanied by a disappearance of most
of those spots which came into visibility as the sun rose higher. We have
an analogous phenomenon to this in the well-known crater Aristarchus.
Shortly after sunrise its outline is sharp and distinct, while its interior is
partly covered •with a well-marked shadow and partly glowing in strong
sunlight. As the sun rises above its horizon these characteristics are lost ;
the ridge extending from it to Herodotus becomes brighter, and to some eyes,
and with some instruments, it is confounded with the interior, the whole ap-
pearing as a very vivid brush of light. The exact solar altitude at which the
1871. r

66

REPORT 1871.

cliangc takes place is as yet undetermined ; but there can be no question
tliat it is of the same nature as that of the appearance of the spots on Plato
greatly intensified.

The result of the discussion may be briefly stated as being very strongly
suggestive of the existence of present lunar activity, the exact nature of
which requires further aud more extensive observations to determine. In-
timately connected with the spot-changes are the variations of appearance
and intensity of reflective power of the streaks and markings on the floor of
Plato. In the obsei-vers' and other notes which form the Appendix to this
Report will be found allusions to the connexion between the spots and streaks ;
but it manifestly requires a similar discussion of the streaks and markings to
arrive at a definite conclusion on the subject. Most of the observers have
furnished observations of these interesting phenomena, so that a discussion
of them could at once be proceeded with if it should be the pleasure of the
Association to carry on the inquiry. The principal results of the discussion
of the spot-observations relative to visibility, irrespective of solar altitudes,
and treated in pairs of lunations from April 1869 to November 1870, based
on 1594 observations during 20 lunations, are contained in Lunar Map Cir-
cular VIII. ; and some further remarks occur in a paper on the subject,
published in the Philosophical Magazine, March 1871. This discussion, on
an entirely difl'erent principle to that employed in the preparation of the
present Report, and leading to a similar result, tends to confer on both a
character in which confidence may be placed, for either without the other is
incomplete ; together they point to present lunar action as the originating
agency producing the phenomena.

Although measurements for position of such delicate objects as the spots
on Plato are difiicult to execute, Mr. Gledhill has succeeded in obtaining
three sets of micrometrical measures, on September 13 and December 9,
1870, and on May 1, 1871, a combination of which has enabled me to draw
the outline of the crater, and to insert from these measurements four streaks
and the sector as seen generally by Mr. Gledhill. The streaks are ^, e, a,
and /3. The streaks ^ and e are rather westward of their places as given on

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 67

the tinted plate in the 'Student' of April 1870,. p. 161. The spots whose
positions have been determined by measures are Nos, 1, 4, 3, and 17. The
effect of the measures is to bring them eloser together and more towards the
centre of the crater than in the printed plans. On each occasion that the
measures were made, a diameter of the crater passing through spots Nos. 1
and 4, from A to B, was measured, also one at right angles to this from C
to D, passing through N"o. 1. All the remaining measures of spots and
streaks were referred to these diamet6;rs, spot No. 1 being the origin of
the coordinates, and the longest diameter being considered as unity. The
ratios of the means of the measvu'es were determined to be as follows : —

Spot or Streak.

Longest diameter A to B = 1000 No. 3

„ 17

Spofr No. 1 . Sector east end

To east border B = -SIO „ west end

„ west border A = -481 Both on border.

southborder C ... = -309 Streak? -055

north border D ... = -309 „ e

spot No. 4 = -182 „ base on A B . .

Streak a W. end . .

Parallel

Parallel

to AB.

to CD.

•060

•126

•179

•130

•409

•168

•181

•247

•055

•317

•158

•123

...

•412

•158

•119

•306

•337

„ a E. end ...
„ /3 on border

In order to plot the spots that have been laid down by alignment and
estimation, it is necessary to aUgn \vith the measured spots, and particularly
with objects on the border, a process that will be adopted in the preparation
or a monogram of Plato.

APPENDIX.

Obseetees' Notes.

These are arranged in each interval of 12 hours according to season, so as
to give increasing altitudes of the sun from ©—53 =270°. Winter in the
northern hemisphere.

Interval 0 to 12 hours.

1869, Oct. 13, 7'> (O- S =76°24'-8, Oct. 12^ 21*^).— Ten hours after the
epoch of sunrise at the equator in E. long. 4° ©'•6, the first streak of sun-
light was seen by Mr. Gledhill to faU on the floor of Plato through the gap
in the west wall between B. & M.'s peaks S and e, the W. extremity lying
on or near the fault from N.W. to S.E., and bringing into visibility the cra-
terlet No. 3, which is seen earliest of all the spots. Mr. Gledhill gives the
sun's azimuth equal to 87° 31', the altitude being equal to the angle formed
by the height of the depression in the wall between the peaks above the
point of the floor on which the sun's rays first impinge.

Interval 12 to 24 hours.

1870, July 6, 8''. — Twelve hours and a half after epoch of sunrise at the
equator, E. long. 4° ll'^o, 0- Q , July 5, 19, 30 = 354° 54'^4. Mr. Gledhill
again witnessed the first streak of sunlight fall on the floor of Plato, and
observed spot No. 3 just within it, and remarked that the streak lay parallel
with the longest diameter, and did not incline from No. 3 as it did in January.
[On the 13th of October, 1869, at 7", Mr. Gledhill remarked that the streak
was a little inclined to the N., and not quite parallel with the rim.] At 9*^
of July 6, 1870, Mr. Gledhill remarked that a line through the two gaps or

f2

68 REPORT 1871.

breaks in the S. and N. borders passed throngh the western ends of the
earliest streaks of light thrown on the floor. This line appears to be coinci-
dent with the great fanlt crossing Plato. With reference to this I have the
following note : — " This phenomenon, the western extremities of the streaks
falling in a line with the breaks in the N. and S. borders, was well observed
in January 1870. An elevation of the gronnd in the direction of this fault
has been seen. It would, however, appear that diiferences in the lengths of
the streaks would depend not on any unevenness of the ground, but on the
relative depths of the gaps in the W. border."

1870, January 10, 2'' to 8''. — From ten to sixteen hours after epoch of sun-
rise at the equator, E. long. 4° 6'-l , 0 — £3 , Jan. 9, 16'', equal to l70°27'-8.
This was by far the finest observation of sunrise on Plato by no less than
seven observers, viz. Messrs. Gledhill, Pratt, Elger, Neison, Birmingham,
Joynson, and liirt. Mr. GledhiU's rccoi'd is so full and so interesting that
a reproduction of it will convey a vivid impression of the progress of iUu-
minatiou of a lunar formation as the sun rises upon it.

Jan. 10, 2\ Cloudless. Terminator just on the E. border of Plato; can
just see the outline of the crater, which now lies in deep shadow. On the
E. side the lofty steep wall just jS". of a triangular formation marked II E'/'^
glowed intensely in the solar rays.

'3^. The E. waU from the great breaks in the S. and N. borders appeared
as a bright narrow band. The curved outline of the N.E. border was bright,
sharp, and narrow, but the lower slope within could not be seen. I could
fancy that the W. part of the floor is, if possible, deeper in shadow than the
E. half. [This phenomenon has often been witnessed, and has been attri-
buted to the reflection of the strong light of the eastern interior from the
dark floor. Upon attentively contemplating this degradation of shadow near
its eastern boundary, it will often be seen that it is not simply a reflection
from the floor, but apparently the illumination of a something above the
floor.— W. E. B.]

gh ^5m_ ^ bright narrow broken line was seen between the two breaks on
the £. and N.E. The outline of II &^ is not yet visible.

4" 18". At this moment (12 hours 18 minutes after epoch) the first streak
of light fell upon the floor. Within it and near its western extremity was
seen No. 3 as two elevated objects, very near each other, but quite distinct.
I could not detect shadow between them after hard gazing, although it was
easily seen to the N.E. of the lower object. The sti-eak was three times the
breadth of the two objects together where it enclosed them, and it became
broader near the N.E. border of Plato ; it was brightest about and to the
west of No. 3, and inclined a little downwards at the E. end. * * * The
two components of No. 3 are of the same size apparently, are equally but
not very bright ; they lie nearly E. and W. of each other, but the E. com-
ponent is a very little to the N. of the other.

^h gQm_ rpj^g streak widens. I could not detect motion in it. I now care-
fully placed the wire on the great gap in the west border ; the line passed
along the axis of the streak. The west angle of the streak is not sharp, but
rounded, and lies a little beyond No. 3. The lower of the cones of No. 3
touches the lower edge of the streak. It now assumed a fan shape, being
broadest at the E. end, which is now more than halfway to the E. border.

411 4Qni_ rpj^g streak is now much wider. I think I see a minute elevation
a little to the E. of No. 3 and in the streak. The two components of No. 3
are now bright and sharp, with shadow on the east. Another streak has
been barely visible or suspected for a few minutes; it lies to the S. of the

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 69

former and near the S. border. It runs parallel with the noi-thern streak,
is about lialf its length, and has its western extremity over a point a httle
E. of ]SI"o. 3. It is narrow, and extremely faint and difficult. A minute or
two later it was seen better, also a still fainter and narrower line to the
north of it, which is parallel with it and the northern streak. The most
southern streak produced to the E. would graze the southern edge of II E-As.

4" 50"". Now the shadows from the W. wall take shape. The south sha-
dow, which extends up to the S. border, goes directly into the gap at the S.
edge of II &'\ The next pointed shadow to the N. of this goes direct to
the middle of II E'/'2 ; it is extremely pointed at its E. end for more than
half its length, and is suddenly wider at the W. end. [This appears to indi-
cate that the peak which throws the shadow is very needle-like.] I cannot
be quite sure that this shadow for the next lO" or 15™ really extended up
to the E. border. It became so faint and narrow and line-like that it could
not be well seen near the border. Then, again, the floor for some distance
(say a distance equal to the width of II &-) lay in rather dark shadow.
The floor between the shadows was not bright up to the E. border of Plato ;
all along the foot of the E. slope a dark shadow lay, and this interfered with
an exact determination of extremities of shorter shadows from the W. wall.
The next shadow to the north was a broad paraUel-sided belt, which pro-
ceeded to the E. border as such. Its upper or S. edge extended to the N.
end of II E'A2^ and its lower or N. edge cut the border of Plato just below, or
to the north of II E'/'2. A line through No. 3 to the gap in the S.E. border
cuts the W. angles of the two southern bright spaces between the shadows.

5^. No. 3 lies on the lower edge of the lowest bright space or upper edge
of the lowest shadow. The shadow still clings to or is in contact with No. 3,
and either extends to the E. of it, or No. 3 throws a shadow to the E. The
floor along the E. border is stiU dusky ; it is brightest at that part in Une
with No. 3,

5" 5™. A very fine narrow shadow is now seen to stand off from the sha-
dow below and in contact with No. 3 ; it is this which touches No. 3.

5" IS". The upper shadow is now clearly pointed, and falls short of the
border. [This is probably the shadow of the peak between B. & M.'s y and
^.] I still see a minute elevation just to the N.E. of No. 3. It is now just
on the tip of the lowest pointed shadow, and about halfway from 3 to the
N.E. border. [This spot is No. 32 ; it was discovered in streak B by Mr
Elger on December 15, 1869.— W. E. P.]

5" 45™. Floor at the foot of the E. border is still dark, except at the ex-
treme N. The long broad shadow is now retiring from the E. border, and is
seen faintly bifui'cated ; the lowest or northern fork is the longer, but this
broad shadow stUl seems to have its N. and S. edges parallel.

6". Now the dark shadow on the S. border breaks up, and a fine pointed
shadow separates from its northern side, which if produced goes quite into
the gap at the southern edge of II &K The bright W. angle above this
shadow goes back towards the W. until under the great gap in the S. border.
The great central shadow is now easily seen bifurcated ; the lower peak is
the longest, and reaches nearly up to the east border. The tip of the shorter
shadow to the N. reaches just to No. 3 ; the next to the N. is rather lono-er

0" 20™. The object to the N.E. of 3 (32) is easy, elevated, and bright. Now
4 is seen, also a large elevated object (7) about halfway from it to the N.
extremity of II E'A^, and on this hne.

6" 30™. The great S. band of shadow goes straight into the gap at the S.
end of II E'/'2. The E. portion of the floor for some distance from the foot

70 REPORT— 1871.

of the slope is still dusky. The shadow of the N.E. component of No. 3 is
easy, and lies to the N^.E. A line from the lower edge of the shadow in the
great gap of the west border along the lower edge of the central shadow
goes into the gap at the N. end of II E'l'^. This shadow is now finely bifur-
cated ; the lower or northern peak is the longer.

8'\ Spot No. 1 is now seen as a large striking object. It seems to be in
the path of the upper fork of the central shadow, and looks like the shadow
of one of Jupiter's satellites on the disk. [In Mr. Birmingham's sketch of
May 19, 1869, ©— S8 =286° 37'-3, the upper or southern fork of the central
shadow is longest, while in the present series of observations the northern is
the longest. This is not a solitary instance of variation in the shadow of this
peak. Mr. Birmingham is in agreement with Mr. GledhiU in referring spot
No. 1 to the upper or southern fork. In my paper on the spots and shadows
of Plato (Transactions of Sections, p. 17, ' Report of British Association for
the Advancement of Science,' 1869), I remark that Rosse and Birmingham
have drawn No. 1 with the shadow of Z just receding from it. ChaUis's
shadow of h terminates by a straight line ; neither fork was visible, for he
carefully measured the two angular points. Rosse di'ew the termination of
the shadow as from two pinnacles upon the summit, with No. 1 between
them. These variations are doubtless azimuthal ; nevertheless they are of
great importance, as we hoi^e presently to show.]

8*^ 5'". Spot No. 1 is a large, lofty, very prominent cone. Close to the N.E.
component of No. 3, and to the N.E. of it, is seen a black shadow curved to
the N.E., with a bright elevated object close to the curve. I see the two
components of No. 3 as bright distinct objects ; then, close to the N.E. foot
of the N.E. component, comes a large circular shadow quite black, embracing
a bright object to the N.E.

8*^ 15™. Spot No 4 is already getting rather difficult and hazy, although it
lies far away in the bright eastern floor. Spot No. 17 is now seen just ou
the lower edge of the uppermost pointed shadow. No. 1 is bright aud large,
free from the long shadow. Shadow still lies on the eastern floor at the foot
of the slope. Mr. Pratt, the same evening, Jan. 10, noticed a peculiar feature
of the eastern part of the floor corroborative of Mr. Gledhill's observation of
the dip to the foot of the east border. He says, " A peculiar feature of the
eastern part of the floor in sunhght observed. Between what was probably
the eastern margin of the sector h and the foot of the interior slope of the
E. rim was a decidedly darker tint, as if that part of the floor was lower
than the rest, and perhaps falling towards the border ; the western margin
followed very closely the form it would have if the whole space between the
sector b and the border were depressed." In my own record, Jan. 10, 4*^ 48"',
the Crossley equatorial 7"3-in. aperture, eye-piece No. 4, power 122, with
slot, I say : — " The S. spire of sunlight apparent ; it is directed towards the
middle of II E'''^. Neither of the spires of light reach the border, indicating
the floor to dip near the border."

Mr. GledhiU summarizes his observations, under the head of " points de-
termined," as follows : —

First. The position, size, alignment, and order of development of tlic
streaks [of sunlight, as distinguished from those that make their aj^pear-
ance afterwards] which first fall on the floor. They are evidently the solar
rays passing through the gaps on the border.

Second. The floor on the E. at the foot of the inner slope lies in shadow
more or less deep until the giant shadows from the W. border have retreated
westward beyond the centre of the crater.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 71

Third. That spots I^os. 1, 3, 17, the object halfway between No. 4 and
the E. border (7), the object halfway + between No. 3 and the E. border
(32), the object (if any) just to the E. of No. 3 (31), and the object S.W. of
No. 1 at a considerable distance away are all elevated objects.

[Some time subsequently to these observations I received from Mr. Gled-
hill a drawing of nine crater cones seen on Jan. 10, 1870. They were Nos.
1, 3, 30, 4, 7, 9, 11, 17, and 32. I have not received any conhrmation of
the object a considerable distance S.W. of No. 1.— W. E. B.]

Fourth. The order in time of the apjiearance of the shadows.

Fifth. The time to a minute when light first falls on the floor.

[The discussion of the observations by intervals shows that the sun's light
first falls upon the floor of Plato from ten to thirteen hours after the sun has
risen at 4° &-1 of E. long, on the equator according to season ; a simple
computation of the epoch of sunrise at this longitude and © — S3 will be a
guide to ascertain the illumination of Plato within twenty-four hours of the
epoch.— W. E. B.]

Sixth. The interval between the appearance of light on the floor and the
distinct perception of the shadows from the W. border is about twenty-five
or thirty minutes.

Seventh. The great northern streak of sunlight is seen some fifteen minutes
before the southern streaks are detected. This may be caused either by dif-
ference in elevation of the gaps in the W. border, or diff'ercnce in level of the
floor, or both may unite to produce the effect.

AVhat can cause the duskiness of the eastern floor except depression of the floor ?

1870, Jan. 10, 9" 0°. Mr. Elger saw spot No. 1 close to the shadow of the
peak situated on the S. of the great gorge or opening in the W. wall. At
9'' 10"' the N. peak of this shadow was about clearing it ; at the same time
spot No. 4 could just be seen. Mr. Elger remarked that the shading round
spot No. 1 was much darker than the central portion of the floor, and that
this dark shading could be traced in an easterly direction to about one fourth
of the distance between the spots 1 and 4: " this," says Mr. Elger, " would
appear to indicate a fall in the surface of the floor from No. 1 towards
the E. in section" (fig. 5). Schroter, if I re- p- g

member rightly, alludes to some observations indi-
cating similar irregularities in the floor. Erom
Mr. Elger's observation, combined with one of Mr.
Gledhm's to be noticed under Feb. 9, 1870, it would

appear that spot No. 1 is situated on the ridge marking the great fault. (See
interval 24" to 36\)

1870, May 8, 8" to lO*". Close of first interval of twelve hours. Epoch
7d 21" 20"", Mr. Elger writes, " On the evening of the 8th, between 8" and
10", I had a fine view of sunrise ; the air was remarkably steady ; shadows
and minute details seen to perfection."

1870, May 18. Mr. Elger writes : — " Re your statement as to the dip of
the floor. Is there reliable evidence that the N.E. and S.E. areas of the
floor are lower near their respective borders than towards the spotless central
area ? In January last I saw spot No. 1 in contiguity with the shadow of
No. 2 peak (western wall) ; the surface of the floor east of No. 1 was then,
of course, seen under very oblique light. Judging from the shading and
general aspect of the surface in the neighbourhood of No. 1, there appeared
to be a veri/ rapid fall from spot No. 1 to spot No. 4 ; if this bo so, the
stem of the ' trident ' would be a depression in the surface."

1870, April 9. Twenty-three hours after epoch of sunrise at 4° 4'-7 on

72 REPORT 1871.

equator, E. loug., Mr. Elger records spots Nos. 1 and 17 in contiguity with
shadows of high peaks on west wall [y and ^] : Nos. 1, 3, 4 very plain [seen
also by Mr. Pratt], 17 faint, 25 only glimpsed, 7 suspected; no markings
seen. Mr. Pratt records on same day shadows of y, ?, and e on floor nearly
similar to 1809, Nov. 12, excepting that S showed a second point south of
chief one, and that of e did not exhibit a cleft.

The importance of such careful observations as those which have furnished
the data for this interval cannot admit of question. The determination of
the epoch at which the floor first becomes illuminated, as compared with the
epoch of an easily computed phenomenon (sunrise at a given longitude on
the equator), places at once within our reach the means of ascertaining when
the appearances witnessed during the interval 10 to 24 hours after sunrise,
at 4° E. long, on the equator, 'rtU be repeated*. This is, however, a small
result compared with the forms and progressions of the shadows ; for by their
aid, especially if well sketched, and their lengths carefully measured, or even
estimated in parts of those of the three measured peaks y, I, and c, the dis-
tance of the west wall from the terminator being at the same time ascer-
tained, the irregularities of the west wall at sunrise, and by a similar process
those of the cast wall at sunset, may be obtained with tolerable precision by
13. & M.'s method described in ' Der Mond,' § 65, p. 98, and in the Keport
of the Lunar Committee of the British Association, ' Eeport,' 1867, p. 15.
We have thus the power, by multiplying such observations, of becoming inti-
mately acquainted with the breaks and gaps, the elevations and towering
pinnacles of the wall, and are in a position for handing down to our suc-
cessors details that may enable them to detect changes, if such should occur,
of sufficient magnitude to become perceptible. The shadows which I enu-
merated on Jan. 10, 1870, were six, — the longest y, one between y and ?,
I with its two peaks or saddle form, one south of e, and e. Mr. Joynson, of
Liverpool, gives in his drawing of the same date two peaks to ^. The irre-
gularities both of the floor and border have come out by these observations
with marked distinctness, and tend greatly to settle for the present epoch
the main features. If, however, changes are in progress, they may be, as on
the earth, extremely slow.

The appearances recorded on January 10, 1870, being so different to that
witnessed by Bianchini, August 16, 1725, the following translation, by my
friend Mr. Kuott, from Bianchini's work ' Hesperi et Phosphori Nova Phe-
nomena' (Eomae, 1728), wUl doubtless be read with interest: —

" Under the auspices of the Cardinal de Polignac, two large telescopes, 94
and 150 Boman palms long, by Campini, were prepared and erected, and on
the 16th of xlugust, 1725, the following observations of Plato were made.

" Although on that night we were only able to turn the telescope 150
palms long, on the moon we detected, in the lunar spot named Plato, a
phenomenon not previously observed. The moon was at the time a little
past its first quadrature with the sun, which it had attained on the previous
day, and the spot Plato fell on the periphery of solar illumination, where is
the boundary of light and darkness in the lunar hemisphere exposed to the
sun. The whole of the very elevated margin, which on all sides surrounds
the spot like a deep pit, appeared bathed in the white rays of the sun. The
bottom of the spot, on the other hand, was stUl in darkness, the solar light
not yet reaching it ; but a track of ruddy light, like a beam, crossed the

* Tlie longitudes of the terminator at 60° N. latitude on the equator, and at 60° S. lati-
tude, G reemi-ich, midnight, during the lunation, are given monthly in the ' Astronomical
Register.'

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 73

middle of the obscure area, stretching straight across it from one extremity
to the other, with much the same appearance as in winter in a closed cham-
ber the sun's rays admitted through a window are wont to present, or as
they are seen in the distance when cast through openings in the clouds, or
like comets' tails at night in a clear sky stretched out at length in space, as
we remember to have seen in the one which in the years 1680 and 1681 was
80 conspicuous to all Europe. This appearance, never before seen by me in
this or any other lunar spot, is represented in the figure which I give below.

" 1, 2. The lunar spot named Plato, and the ruddy ray of the sun thrown
across its dark floor from the margin of the spot 1, white aiid turned towards
the sun. It was thus observed at Rome on the Palatine Mount, Aug. 16,
1725, at 1| hour after sunset, with the 150-palm telescope of J. Campini.

" It is proposed to astronomers and physicists, for their consideration and
judgment, whether this is to be taken as an indication of an aperture piercing
the border of the spot which is turned towards the sun, through which opening
the rays are cast and appear as through a window ; or whether it is rather to be
thought that they are refracted rays, which are bent from the top of the border
towards the bottom, and appear of a ruddy tint as they are wont to do in our
own atmosphere at sunrise and sunset, and so give reason for admitting the ex-
istence of some denser fluid like an atmosphere surrounding the lunar globe."

I have the following remarks on the above, dated June 4, 1867 : —

" Bianchini appears to have been one of the earliest observers who noticed
' detail ' more jiarticularly. Hevel, lliccioli, Cassini, and others aimed more
at delineating the entire surface, which of course included much detail that
is becoming more and more valuable every day ; still such observations as
Bianchini's, recorded in his ' Hesperi et Phosphori,' are of great value, espe-
cially as the appearances described and delineated could not find place in a
more general work."

Sclirciter, in his ' Selenotopographische Fragmente,' vol. i. p. 334, §§ 256,
257, refers to the observation of Bianchini, and also to one of Short's in 1751,
April 22. It would appear that Bianchini's suggestion of an aperture or hole
in the W. rim of Plato was not verified by Short, who seems to have observed

75) REPORT 1871.

the shadows of the three peaks y, I, and e of 13. & M., which are represented
by Schroter in t. xxi. The. shadows of these and other peaks on the W. waU
have been very frequently observed of late years.

I am not aware that liianchini's observation has been verified. The pecu-
liar ap2)earance which he has delineated depends not only on libration, but
also on the angle which the terminator makes with the meridian ; for it is
clear that the direction of the terminator must form a tangent to a line pass-
ing equally through the depression in the wall to produce the appearance
seen by Biauchini ; and it is highly probable that it is of very rare occur-
rence, as seen from the earth, the variation in the angle of terminator with
meridian being as much as 3°.

While transcribing the above (April 22, 1871) I have considered the Bian-
chini phenomenon more closely. During the year 1870 the opportimities
for observing sunrise on Plato were comparatively numerous, and certainly
not the slightest appearance of Bianchini's streak was detected ; on the other
hand, the positions of the earliest rays of sunlight on the floor have been
determined, with some degree of precision, for the portion of the luni-solar
year during the period of the observations. If the configiu'ation of the W.
wall is different now from what it was in Bianchini's time, the phenomenon
may be explained by the supposition that the gap or pass iS". of the peak h
was lower than at present, and has been raised \>y " landslips " on one or
both sides, which are of extensive occuiTence on the moon as recognized by
Nasmyth ; the absence of fui-ther observations by Biauchini on the same
evening, however, leaves the matter in doubt.

Short records, in the Phil. Trans, for 1751, p. 175, that on April 22,
1751, he saw a streak projected along the flat bottom of Plato. Soon after
he saw another streak parallel to the first, but somewhat lower [or northerly],
which in a very short time divided into two. He found a gap in the wall
opposite the first streak, and also one in the direction of the lower one.

Not only is Bianchini's observation at variance with modern observations,
but Short's also. The order of appearance of the streaks of sunlight on the
floor on Jan. 10, 1870, is, first, the broad streak through the wide gap ;
second, the southern streak north of the peak y. The appearances of Short's
streaks were in the reverse order.

The following record of observations by Schroter on July 30, 1789, at
O*" 48'", kindly translated by Mr. Gledhill, will illustrate Mr. Elger's obser-
vation on January 10, 1870 : —

' Selenotopographische Fragmeute,' § 250, vol. i. p. 329. " A difl^erent,
more beautiful, and more magnificent view of Plato is obtained when, with
the rising sun, the first traces of an extremely faint twilight are seen on the
grey fioor of the crater, and when the first beams of light are thrown over
the mountains into the plain below. This view of Plato, which lasts only
for a few minutes during the slow monthly rotation, and for which one may
wait for a year and yet not see it, I saw on the 30th of July, 1789, 9'' 48'".
As in the 8th figure of t. xxi., the terminator had advanced from W. to E. as
far as a, /3. To the W. of this the greatest part of the border lay in the
light of day [or on the day side], and only the small portion to the E. of a,
/3 was illuminated on the night side. The whole inner grey sin-face, on the
contrary, was still hidden by the shadows of the lofty mountains on the
border, and on the S. border there was also a low spot filled with shadow.
"Wliile I was observing the shadows of the inner surface with power 161, I
became aware of something to the E. of the middle of the floor, as if the dark
surface were in a kind of fermentation. A few seconds later I saw here in

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 75

two places an extremely distinct unveiling or brightening which closely re-
semhled a very faint tivilight. Both places appeared dark, blackish, and con-'
trasted so slightly with the other night-shadows, that at first I was uncertain
whether or not I perceived a real difference in the obscurity. Meanwhile,
after a few seconds both the liglit-spots became somewhat brighter, changed
their form continually, until they soon became larger and notably brighter,
and assumed the appearance given in fig. 8 ; and as no very marked change
occurred while the obsei'vation was being made, I was by this time able to
sketch them in their present clearer colour and increased size ; but even yet
they appeared a dark grey, so that, according to my arbitrary scale and a
very approximate estimation, they were placed at only ^°, or at most |°.

" Doubtless these present but always very dark colours were half-shadows,
and were found there because in these two places only a part of the rising-
sun was visible over the irregular elevations on the western border; and
these half-shadows I have often seen in the course of my observations when
the terminator passes across grey surfaces. Soon after, the surface threw off
the mask of night, and in a few minutes I could distinguish the line-like
shadows lying across the whole floor thrown by the peaks on the western
wall. If one, however, compares the shape of these two somewhat bright
spots on the map with the position and shadows of the west border, and re-
flects that these bright spots, as I saw them, were surrounded by the shadows
of night on the east, there can no longer be any doubt (if a different reflec-
tion of the light has no share in the matter) that the floor is not perfectly
flat, but that these two places are somewhat more elevated ; and with this
sujjposition the observations given before quite agree."

The following notes have been kindly furnished by Mr. Pratt, relative to
the foregoing description of sunrise : —

" Jan. 10, 3^. On 1870, March 10, 1 have notes of the same phenomenon,
which I believe I forwarded at the time, recording the inability I experienced
to rid myself of the idea that I was witnessing a true twilir/ht. My observa-
tion of it extended over twenty-five minutes, at the end of which time I
perceived the faintest trace of the formation of the spires."

"Jan. 10, 4"^ 18"*, spot No. 3. Query. Is the brightest spot of the streak,
here mentioned as seen inclined to the north of No. 3, and I presume in close
proximity to it, my spot No. 30 ? As far as I can understand the localities
are identical."

" Jan. 10, 4'' 50™, shadow of peak y. On a similar occasion I have ob-
served the thin thread of the shadow lying across II EV'S, and have watched
it slowly shortening and travelling down the interior slope of the rim, and had
a good view of it lying on the floor just in contact with the foot of the slope."

" Jan. 10, 8*", shadow of peak h. I do not remember to have ever seen
the shadow of d otherwise than with the northern fork the longest."

On Bianchini's light-streak Mr. Pratt remarks : — " Bianchini's ruddy spire
of light, which he observed at Rome, 1725, Aug. 16, and thought to be sun-
light shining through an aperture in the west wall, would the want of
achromaticity in his 150-palm telescope account for the colour ? Still his
unique view may prove valuable some day ; and it is stimulating to perse-
verance on our part to multiply observations with our comparativelj^ luxu-
rious instruments to find such unwieldy telescopes capable of so much in the
hands of a careful observer. I wonder if the crater G on the west exterior
slope was recorded so long since, as its clean-ciit form, as I have sometimes
seen it, is suggestive of recent formation, and its localitj' such as to easily
account for the fiUing-up of the aperture Bianchini supposed."

76 REPORT 1871.

[The crater G is not seen in Bianchini's drawing of 1725, August 16, nor
in that illustrating his observations of 1727, August 23 and September 22. —
W. 11. B.]

Mr. Pratt remarks, that in Short's observation of 1751, April 22, the first
streak of sunlight was on the upper part of the floor, followed soon after by
a parallel streak somewhat lower. " It is important," says Mr. Pratt, " to
learn what khid of telescope Short used during the observation ; for as he
was chiefly a maker of the Gregorian form, and as that construction does not
invert the image, it may be possible his term hwei- may mean southerly in-
stead of northerly, thus being in accord with modem observations."

" The very interesting translation of Schroter's notes of 17b9, July 30, and
his discovery of something on the eastern half of floor, as if a kind of fer-
mentation was going on, and his discovery a few seconds later of an unveil-
ing or brightening, closely resembUng twihght, remind me," says Mr. Pratt,
" very forcibly of my own observations before mentioned. The half-shadows
of Schroter also remind me of what 1 have very often seen, as he describes ;
but 1 cannot understand his explanation of them. As far as I can see, half-
shadows presuppose an atmosphere ; and a well-authenticated course of ob-
servations of them would be good proof of the latter's presence."

[If by the term " half-shadow" be meant the penumbral fringe of every
true shadow, the rays of light emerging from opposite limbs of the sun,
crossing beyond the object casting the shadow and then diverging, will fully
explain such a fringe. In the case of the sun rising above the mountains,
the reverse phenomenon occurs, viz. a gradual darkening fiinge skirting the
illuminated surface arising from less and less Hght arriving from the sun's
disk ; a true twilight is occasioned by the particles of an atmos^jheric medium
being illuminated by the sun's rays whUe the luminary is below the horizon,
and such I believe I have on several occasions witnessed. — W. E. B.]

Interval 24 to 36 hours.

1870, May 9. Mr. Gledhill describes spot Xo. 1 as easy ; a fine sharp
crater, with raised walls, much black shadow within, the east inner slope
bright : he also records 3 and 1 7 as presenting the same appearance as
No. 1. On October 3, at about IS"" earlier illumination, Mr. Gledhill did not
observe the crater character of these objects, but describes them as elevated
objects. This is remarkable, as on Oct. 3 the moon's latitude was 1° to 2° S.,
whUe on May 9 it was 3° N., libration carrying Plato further from the eye,
yet the crater character was more distinct. Mr. Elger records No. 17 as seen
by ghmpses.

As regards spots 13 and 19, the following remarks of Mr. Elger are inter-
esting : — '• The northern portion of the floor, including streak a, was noted
as equally hght ; the streak could not be traced." Mr. Gledhill writes, a not
to be distinguished from the bright floor all along the north border. Mr.
Elger found the same locahty " all light on the 10th."

1870', February 9. Mr. Gledhill first saw spot No. 4, its bright W. Avail
only. He says, "This object seems to have loiver walls than 1, 17, or 3."
Mr. Gledhill writes : " For a few minutes I saw what appeared to be a very
low ridge running from N. to S. across the floor of Plato. It runs from the
N. border to spot 3, then curves to N^o. 1 , and again bends back to the E.
and reaches No. 17, and thence goes on to the S. border." [The low ridge
mentioned by Mr. Gledhill is, so far as I know, new. It is not coincident
with the great fault from N.W. to S.E. From a drawing subsequently sent
to me by Mr. Gledhill, it would indicate a fracture, having its origin at spot

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. " Tt

No. 1, diverging N.E. and S.E. to spots Nos. 3 and 17, and extending from
them in opposite directions to the N. and S. horders.] At 5.30 Mr. Gledhill
recorded that spot No. 4 is already indistinct ; there is a dull yellow patch
about it. No. 3 at this early stage of illumination Mr. Gledhill found to be
single ; he looked in vain for the other two adjacent spots, Nos. 30 and 31.

1870, Oct. 3. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1, 3, 17, and 30 as elevated ob-
jects. Mr. Elger found no trace of 3.

1870, March 11, Mr, Gledhill describes spots Nos, 1 and 3 as bright, cir-
cular.

Interval 36 to 48 hours.

1870, April 10. Mr. Gledhill records spot No. 1 as a large, sharp, cir-
cular crater, with internal shadow on W. side ; also Nos. 3 and 17 as circular
craters. Mr. Elger records Nos. 16 and 25 as frequently glimpsed.

1870, July 7. Mr. Whitley observed Nos. 1, 3, and 17 as craterlets, 4 a
white spot, and glimpsed No. 11 very faint. On the same evening Mr. Neison
recorded the floor as very dark, the spots indistinct, not visible continuously ;
and Mr. Elger could just trace the " sector."

1870, Jan. 11, 7.20. Mr. Gledhill describes spot No. 1 as a large round
crater, larger than Linne, quite bright and circular, a very fine easy object.
At 7.30 the same evening, he says " Linne also is now seen as a crater, with
some shadow within on the west." At 7.45 Mr. Gledhill writes : " Now the
N.E. inner slopes of craters Nos. 1 and 3 glow in the bright sun, whUe the
S.W. inner slopes are in shadow. It is the N.E. inner slope which so often,
in bad definition, comes out as a bright disk or semidisk."

1869, August 16. Mr. Pratt thus >vrites : — "Of these difficult objects
[the spots], seven were seen many times during the hour; No. 1 often well
defined as a crater, Nos. 3 and 4 as well-defined craters as No. 1, but accom-
panied with a nebulous light, perhaps caused by the companion spots to each,
which, however, were never clearly defined owing to the minuteness of the
objects and the short periods of definition clear enough. They both had a
similar appearance."

1870, September 4. Mr, Neison records No. 4 as just observable, and 14
very faint.

Interval 48 to 60 hours.

1870, May 10. Mr. Gledhill records spots Nos. 1, 3, and 17 as elevated
craters with little internal shadows. Mr. Elger records No. 5 as seen only
by glimpses much fainter than 17; 16 and 14 easy.

1871, March 1. Mr. Gledhill records spot No. 1 as a crater brightest on
the inner E. wall.

1870, August 6. Mr. Elger noticed the west portion of the floor of an
even light colour. It is on this portion that the spots Nos. 13, 19, and 22,
which have decreased of late in visibility, are situated. On the 24th of
March, 1870, Mr. Gledhill observed the reverse, viz. the west part of the
floor exhibited the darkest tint. It was, however, less in extent than the
light portion given by Mr. Elger, and was seen under the opposite illumina-
tion. See intervals 108"^ to 96", and 12" to 0" *.

1870, October 4. Mr. Gledhill records No. 1 as an elevated object. Mr.
Elger found No. 14 more easy than 5 and 17 ; it was not seen by Gledhill.
Nos. 3, 30, and 17 were seen as bright disks by GledhUl.

* These reversed tints are quite in accordance with the surface of the floor dipping on
each side from the line of " fault" crossing Plato from N.W. to S.E.

78 REPORT — 1871.

Interval GO to 72 hours.'

1870, July 8. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1 and 17 as brioht spots badly seen.
Mr. Elgcr records No. 5 as seen only by glimpses, but brighter than No. 1.

18G9, August 17. Mr. Pratt inserted the positions of the spots observed
b}- him " by independent estimation," also " their relative positions with re-
spect to lif/Jit streahs " were very carefully determined as follows : —

No.
1. On the dark surface near the junction of two streaks.

3. In the middle of a light streak.

4. In the middle of a light streak (sector) *.

17. On the dark surface close to a light streak (W. edge of sector).
13 and 19. In the middle of a light streak.
14. Near the margin of a light streak.

Interval 72 to 84 hours.

1870, April 11. Mr. Elger records No. 5 nearly as bright as 17, which
he regarded as fainter than at last lunation ; 14 and IG were easy, 24 and
25 seen by glimpses. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1, 3, 30, and 17 as bright
circular disks. Mr. Pratt detected the six spots which he observed with
difficulty.

1870, March 13. Mr. Gledhill writes : " Unless I am very much mistaken
indeed, 34 was an easy object, i. e. No. 1 came out easUy ' double ; ' also, as
the E end of the floor slopes to the east, spots Nos. G and 7 may be seldom
seen on this account (?)." To this I add : "This may be the case while the moon
is passing from perigee to apogee." Mr. Gledhill says further : " No 3 (and
30) very easy, wide, double ; 3 is the larger, both equally bright : 30 is not
seen nearly so often as 3 ; when only one is seen it is 3."

1870, June 9. Mr. Elgcr recorded 5 as brighter than 17.

1870, February 11, 6.30. Mr. Gledhill found spots Nos. 1 and 17 as very
sharp bright disks, but could not detect interior shadows ; he describes Nos.
1, 17, and 3 as sparkling. Of No. 1, he says, it often comes out double;
last year I often saw it thus. I am now almost sure I see a minute object
close to the west of it (34).

Interval 84 to 96 hours.

1870, December 4. Mr. Elger writes : — " The marking connecting the
middle and east arm of trident, which was, I believe, first seen by Mr.
Pratt last spring, I found a very easy object, fully as bright as the brightest
portions of the ' trident ; ' it follows the curvature of the south border, and
crossing the last arm of the trident, terminates about halfway between the
latter and the west limit of the ' sector.' During the May and June luna-
tions, I had faint glimpses of it ; but it was then a very much more difficult
object than it is now."

The apparition of this streak appears in some way to be connected with
spot No. 5, the variations in -v-isibility of which are considerable. As, from
the discussion of visibility, the connexion of these variations with illumi-
nating, visual or atmospheric (terrestrial), changes appears to be untenable,
it maybe suggested that, if the first maximum, Aug.-Sept. 1869, resulted
from increased activity, ejecta may have been thrown out and jiroduced the
faint streak which was seen on the west of No. 5 by ttuo observers. At or
about the second epoch of increased activity, a larger quantity of ejecta

: * Mr. Gledhill has frequently observed spot No. 4 at the angle formed by the eon-
verging sides of the " sector."

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAK OBJECTS. 79

may have boon thrown out, producing a brighter streak, extending eastward
as well as westward. The most interesting circumstance connected mth
this streak is its conformity in direction to that of the south border, as if
some peciiliarity of the surfece existed in the neighbourhood of No. 5, of a
depressed character, which received the outflow or outthrow of the ejecta.
Another noteworthy circumstance is, that this streak was not recorded
caiiier than May 13, 1870.

1870, September 6. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1, 3, 17, and 30 as bright
disks, also that definition was good, and that the streaks and spots seemed to
stand out in rehef.

18G9, November 15. Mr. Gledhill writes : — "The spots Nos. 1, 17, and 3 do
not appear as a mere white s^jof on the floor of Plato would do. There is a
sharpness and clearness of contour and a brightness (uniform) of surface
which could only belong to a crater or peak. I have often been struck with
this. This remark appHes to them whenever they are well seen. I can
only liken them to the small round disks of bright stars seen in the transit-
instrument. Spot No. 4 never looks like Nos. 1, 17, or 3." To this I append
the following query : — Do the clearness and sharpness of the contour of spots
Nos. 1, 17, and 3 result from seeing the shadowless interiors of the craterlets?
If so, on what agency does the appearance of the mere white spots depend ?
Do Nos. 1,17, and 3 vary in this respect with good states of our atmosphere ?
Mr. Pratt records a spot new to him on the N.W. of 3, about half as far from
3 as is 4 on the opposite side, and aligning with 3 and 4 ; he speaks of it as
exceedingly small. I have numbered it 29. He also observed spot No. 8,
which he describes as fainter than 29, and situated about one third the dis-
tance from 3 towards 4. On this evening Mr. Pratt very carefully scru-
tinized No. 3 and its immediate neighbourhood ; the following are his notes
transmitted to rac : — " First. The second spot, which I have always ob-
served with 3 (and which I learn from Mr. Birt I have always placed in the
same relative position as has Mr. Dawes, who discovered it, and of whose
alignment I was before quite unaware), is exceedingly close to 3 on the
N.E. I estimate the distance at 2", and its position with respect to 1 was
very carefully judged to be 145" to 150°, reckoning from S. round by E.,
which I afterwards found by comparison to be about the angle represented
in my former sketches. Second. A third spot, S.E. of 3, and twice as far
from it as Mr. Dawes's, was observed. Its relative size was judged to be
one fourth, while that of the second spot was one third of 3. The direction
was from 3 towards 4." [This spot I take to be 8.— W. E. B.]. "Another
lieculiarity in 3. was, that it was just included by the light streak, but still
(piite on its edge, as was also its smallest companion. I now determined
very carefully the colour of the immediate localities of cdJ spots visible. After
independently noting it for each spot, I found on summing up that the
whole were upon the light streaks, with the exception of No. 1, around and
towards which the light streak was softly shaded off."

1870, July 9. Mr. Whitley glimpsed spot No. 17 with difllculty.

Interval 9G to 108 liours.

1870, April 12. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1, 3, and 30 as bright circular
disks, 1 7 as a bright disk, also 6, but seen only once or twice. Mr. Pratt records
No. 1 as very dense and bright, 3 and 4 as hazy, and 16 and 22 difficult.

1870, May 12. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1, 3, and 17 as fine bright disks,
No. 4 a spot, but seldom seen. Marking a, Mr. Gledhill records as the
brightest, and Mr. Elger mentions the part east of No. 16 as veiy bright

80 REPORT— 1871.

and well defined ; this, as well as the remarks of Mr. Elger on May 9, may
tend to throw some light on the decreased visibility of Nos. 13 and 19 (see
Interval 24 to 36 hours). On this evening Mr. Whitley observed and described
the markings, giving a sketch of the same. Mr. Elger's sketch of the north
part of Plato and Mr. Whitley's are not in accordance. The time at which Mr.
Whitley made his observations is not mentioned; Mr. Elger's 8.45 to 11.

1870, March 14. Mr. Elger writes : "The markings were not well seen;
the eastern arm of the ' trident' was the brightest, and could be traced from
the south rim to Jfo. 1, passing to the west of No. 5 : the marking y was
very plain, the rest of the markings were faint and difficult to make out." In
contrast with this indistinctness on Plato, Mr. Elger says, " [In spite of the hazi-
ness of the sky, the markings and minute details of the Mare Tnibnuni were seen
with unusual distinctness]." In the 'English Mechanic,' No. 312, March 17,
1871, p. 602, article "Mars," by E.R.A.S., the author speaks of the indi-
stinctness and partial dimming on the surface of the planet, accompanied by
the presence of dark lines in its spectrum, coincident with those referable
by Father Secchi to the vapour of water. The indistinctness and dimming
of detail are alike distinguishable on Mars and the Moon ; and in addition we
have on the Moon a number of spots becoming vividly bright with a high
sun. From Dr. Huggins's observations, the spectral lines of the vapour of
water are absent in the lunar spectrum.

1870, June 10. Mr. Elger recorded No. 17 decidedly brighter than No. 5 and
equal to No. 3; 14 only glimpsed once or twice ; 16 and 25 frequently seen.

1869, December 15. This evening Mr. Elger discovered spot No. 32. He
described it as N.E. of spot No. 3, nearly aligning with 17 and 4, and situ-
ated on a brush of light (GledhiU's streak /3), extending from No. 3 to the
N.E. rim of Plato.

1871, March 3. Mr. Pratt observed 16 spots, viz. 1, 3, 4, 5, 14, 17, 21,
20, 23, 29, 0, 18, 13, 19, 7, 6, arranged according to relative brightness.
Of these Mr. Pratt speaks of Nos. 20 and 21 as being far above their usual
brightness. Situated as they are near the north border, the Moon going
north in latitude, they were not in the most favourable position for observa-
tion ; their great brightness is therefore remarkable, and connected with this
is an increase of brightness in the streak a. The new streak between Nos. 5
and 17 Mr. Pratt saw with ease, joining the east arm of the "trident" with
the " sector" from closely south of 17 to opposite 5.

1870, October 6. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1, 17, and 30 as fine bright
disks ; Nos. 5 and 6 equal. Mr. Elger observed Nos. 14 and 16, not seen by
Mr. Gledhill ; 14 was equal to 5.

Interval 108 to 120 hours,

1870, September 7. Mr. GledhiU records Nos. 1 and 3 as fine sparkling
disks, and 4 as a hazy spot. Mr. Neison records Nos. 1, 3, 4, and 5 pretty
distinctly visible; 17 brilliant but not well defined; 14 and 16 faint and
very faint respectively.

1869, November 16. Mr. GledhUl says, " I never saw the floor so bright.
The spots 1, 17, 9, 3, and 30 appeared just like small stars in the transit-
instrument on a windy night." At 10, 11, and 12 hours Mr. Gledhill
remarked that spots Nos. 3, 1, 9, and 17 formed a sparkling curve, and were
fine easy objects, seen at a glance at any moment ; he says they were very
striking. On the contrary, he speaks of spots 23, 16, 19, 13, and 14 as very
difficult objects ; none were ever easy objects. Of 9 and 11 he says, " I
never saw them so easily and well as to-night." The following notes are

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS.

81

important : — " Nos. 1, 3, and especially 17 (which sni-passes all in sharpness,
and perhaps in brightness sometimes) are fine easy objects, "vvith moderate
altitudes. Now Linno never a2)pears like these except when near the even-
ing terminator. As to y Posidonius 1 never see it sharp and crater-Hke
(white and bright) when the sun is up. I could not see it at all the other
day when the morning terminator was a degree or two from it." Of ivhite
spots Mr. Gledhill remarks : " I called some spots mere white spots, because 1
have never seen them otherwise ; by-aud-by 1 may catch them near the
terminator, and have reason to change the term. I fancy that when the
terminator is a morning one the effect on objects diflfers from that given by

the evening terminator.''

Interval 120 to 132 hours.

1871, March 4. Mr. K'eison saw spot No. 14 very indistinct, and barely
brighter than a longitudinal steak running in a direction from No. 13 to past
No. 14, which was then situated upon it. It appeared to have its origin eX
the point of convergence of Gledhill's d and L On the same evening, Mr.
Gledhill recorded d but not c. On March 4, Mr. Neison saw No. 16 (once
only) as a pecuhar light-marked spot on a patch of broken light trending
westward. Mr. Neison also recorded parts of the N.W. and S.E. portions
of the floor indistinct from broken light and light streaks.

1870, June 11. Mr. Elger recorded spots Nos. 5 and 16 as seen only by
glimpses.

Intei-val 132 to 144 hours.

1870, April 14. Mr. Gledhill records Nos. 1, 3, 4, 17, 9, 11, and 30 as
bright round disks. Mr. Elger writes, under date of April 26, 1870, relative
to his observations of April 14, as follows : — " That the visibility of the spots
is connected with the position and brightness of the markings (as you sug-
gest) is, I think, most probable : it is clear that the spots at present known are
mainly confined to the districts occupied by the markings, and that the floor

Eic

of Plata is divided by the latter
into three nearly equal areas. A,
B, C, as on sketch. Areas A and C
are covered with markings, but
area B is devoid of them. If
we compare the number of spots
in area B with the number of
spots in areas A and C, we shall
find that there are only two spots
(23 and 11) in area B, while in
area A there are ten, and in area
C no less than twenty-three. It
is true that small portions of the
areas A and C ai'e without
markings ; but the spots within those areas are, without an exception, situ-
ated either tqmi the light streaks or close to their borders. These facts
seem to me very suggestive, and point to an intimate relation between the
spots and markings. As observations accumulate, your present behef in a
connexion between the phenomena will, I think, be placed beyond doubt."
In connexion with the above, the following quotation from a letter by Mr.
Pratt, dated 1870, April 22, is interesting: — "Very curious the difficulty
there is in observing such delicate detail ; possibly instruments and eyes will
show differently, independently of the mental bias and accumulation of pre-
1871. o

83 REPORT 1S71.

yious impressions ; and I rather fear that telescopes much larger than my
own cannot help us out of the difficulty."

The difficulty to which Mr. Pratt alludes is particularly felt with regard
to that indispensable method of determining positions " measirrement." Mr.
GledhUl has executed some measures of the positions of the principal spots
and the extremities of the light markings, and Mr. Pratt has aligned several
of the spots with objects on the border ; but so exceedingly delicate are the
details, and so seldom is the state of the atmosphere siifficiently translucent
and free from agitation, that to obtain an approximate plan of the spots and
markings from measurement is necessarily a work of time. Pending this,
in the above sketch both spots and markings have been inserted, partly on
alignment and partly bj' estimation. The two light regions are well sprink-
led with spots, as pointed out by Mr. Elger ; and it is not a Kttle interesting
to notice that the nearly spotless area coincides with the region between-
the "trident" and the " sector," with its prolongation to " Webb's Elbow"
near the X.W. border. In the absence of more accurate detail, which is likely
to be obtained from Mr. GledhiU's measurements, the sketch (fig. 7) will serve
as a guide for ascertaining if the spots and markings preserve their relative
positions ; and in this connexion the remarkable change of locality, if it be so,
of spot Xo. 5 may be mentioned, Mr. Elger having seen and recorded on three
occasions (1870, March 14, May 13, and October 10) its position on the eastern
edge of the eastern arm of the " trident." It is possible there may be two
neighbouring spots in this locality which have not yet been seen together. The
importance of recording with eveiy obsei'vation of spot Xo. 5 its position with
regard to the eastern ann of the "trident" is obvious. The light streak
supposed to be connected with No. 5 is too far south, or the sjjot is too far north,'
on the sketch.

1870, May 13. Vide " Indications of intermittent visibility" (p. 88).

1870, January 15. Mr. Gledhill observed as many as 22 spots, the second
greater number seen on any one occasion. Vide " Indications of inter-
mittent visibility." Spots Xos. 1, 3, and 17 are described as very easy, large,
bright, sharp objects ; Xo. 4 as jumping into view and not steadily seen.
Xo. 34 was discovered this evening ; it has not been observed since
March 13, 1870, when it was recorded as an easy object.

1869, August 20, 21, and 23. Mr. Gledhill gives thi-ee spots close to the
X.W. border, which he has marked 13, 19, and 16. No. 16 being too far
east for that spot, I have regarded it as 20 ; if, however, Mr. Gledhill really
saw 16, its degree of visibility would be shghtly increased. On August 23
Mr. Pratt gives 16 in its proper position, and he observed the same number of
spots as Mr. GledhiU ; but Mr. Gledhill saw No. 12 and 31, which Mr. Pratt
did not see, Mr. Pratt recording Nos. 7 and 30, not seen by Mr. Gledhill.

1870, September 8. Mr. Neison records spot No. 4 as a flat indistinct
spot; 17 sharp but bright, darkening on one side, and showing traces of a
crater-formation.

Interval 144 to 156 hours.

1870, August 10. Mr. Neison records spot No. 3 as apparently oval ; the
longer axis of the ellipse is in the direction of No. 31 .

1870, October 8. Mr. Elger mentions No. 14 as very easy, 16 easy, and
17 seen only occasionally.

Interval 156 to 168 hours.
1870, May 14. Mr. Elger recorded No. 16 easy; 5, 14, and 17 faint; 25
and 32 seen by glimpses. Mr. GledhiU records 1, 17, 3, and 6 as bright
disks. 4 not well seen, and 5 as a bright spot.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. ^^

1870, September 9. Mr. Elger recorded No. 5 faint, 17 especiially faint^
14 and 22 glimpsed, and 14 difficult.

Interval 168 hours to ileridiau Passage.
1870, June 13. Mr. Gledhill has this remark: "For some time I have
thought that when power 115 was used, spot No. 4 was almost at any time
to be seen, or at any rate a condensation of the ' sector' at its apex was
seen. On ajiplyiug 240, however, the appearance vanishes, and no con-
densation or spot is seen, or perhaps only sometimes and at intervals."

Interval Meridian Passage to 168 hours.

1870, July 13. Mr. Gledhill records No. 1 as very bright.

1870, September 10. Mr. Elger records Nos. 2-5 and 16 as easy, No. 14
as seen by glimpses.

Interval 168 to 156 hours.

1870, August 12. Mr. Neison records "a spot seen on the border of No.
3, very small and hardly visible except at intervals, but pretty bright on
edge only of the light marking." Mr. Neison suspected it to be No. 31,
which it undoubtedly is according to the position which he has accorded to
it on the diagram. Mr. Neison was the only observer who detected No. 31
during this lunation, on the 10th and 11th of August, as an elongation of
No. 3. Mr. Elger, Mr. Gledhill, and ili-. Pratt appear to have missed it. Query,
was the groixp Nos. 3, 30, and 31 in greater activity about this time ?
Mr. Neison has this note, " 3. Faint indications of its being a crater very
distinct." Mr. Pratt records: "During the long period since I last saw
the light streaks I have had little opportunity to study former sketches, and so
was free in a measure of the bias of them. Yet on sketching those seen,
the forms, positions, and directions coincide with former drawings, notably
the trident a, /S, rj, I." Mr. Pratt also notices a remarkable increase in
brightness of spot No. 22, so as to attract especial attention. Neither
Messrs. Elger, Neison, Ormesher, nor Gledhill noticed this spot, although
they were observing on the same evening as Mr. Pratt, who further re-
marks " that in moments of best definition the area comprised between
Nos. 19, 1, and 4 was not nearly so well displayed as the rest of the floor,
giving a strong impression of an obscuring medium located there." [This
observation of the streak 1, the existence of which has been questioned, is
perfectly independent of any suspicion of its non-existence, as it occurred
some months before the question was raised.]

1870, October 10. Mr. Elger found spot No. 5 on the E. edge of the E.
arm of the "trident;" its position, as given by Mr. Pratt, is on the W.
edge of the E. arm. He also found that Nos. 5 and 14 were far inferior
to 17. Spot No. 25 was easy. Mr. Elger did not see spots Nos. 9, 11, 18,
23, nor 30 recorded by Mr. Gledhill, nor did Mr. Gledhill see No. 14. For a
special note on the position of spot No. 5, which Mr. Elger also saw on the
E. edge of the " trident" on May 13, 1870, see Interval 132 to 144 hours.

1870. On the 12th of August, and on September 7, 11, and 12, Mr.
Neison made a series of observations with apertures varying from 4 to Sc-
inches, with differences of 5 of an inch.

Inches 4 4| 4^ 4| 5 5;^

Spots 4 4 5 5 6 7

The spots seen were Nos. 1, 3, 4, and 17 with 4 and 4| inch apertures, the
game and No. 6 with 4| and 4f ; with 5 inches aperture spot No. 14 was
detected and marked as faint, and with 5| inches No. 16 was discerned:

g2

84 REPORT 1871.

the last two, Nos. 14 and 16, were in all cases marked as " faint," some-
times extremely so.

These seven spots are precisely those which have the highest degrees of
visibility for 18 lunations, as under : —

Spots 1 3 4 17 5 14 16

YisibiHty .. 1-000 -897 -887 -830 -510 -433 -294

From these observations, it appears that spots Nos. 1, 3, 4, and 17 may
be detected with instruments between 4 and 41 inches of aperture, that spot
No. 5 requires an extra half inch, or 4| to 5, and that 5 and 5| will bring
out spots No. 14 (5 inches) and 16 (5| inches).

Aperture, of course, is an important element of visibility; and as these
spots are seen with apertures under six inches, as the observations increase,
and the normal degrees of visibility become well determined, variations in
the visibility of these spots may be detected with instruments of 6 inches
aperture, provided the observations extend over a sufficiently long period.

Elements of Visibilify.

Lunar. — Brightness and size of spots.
Terrestrial. — Clearness and steadiness of atmosphere.
Instrumental. — Goodness of figure of object-glass or mirror, and extent
of aperture.

Physiological. — Keenness of eyesight.

Interval 156 to 144 hours.

1870, July 14. Mr. Gledhill records No. 1 as a fine, large, bright spot,
No. 17 as a small bright spot, Nos. 3 and 30 as bright spots, and No. 5 a
bright spot, seen now and then. Mr. lugall records No. 1 as very plain
and sharp. No. 4 as steadily seen, and Nos. 3, 31, 30 a misty spot, piobably
consisting of these three.

1869, August 23. Mr. Pratt records that "spots Nos. 1, 3, 4, 17, 6, and 14
were very bright compared with their usual appearance, and aU easily seen.
No. 4 was not well defined; there was a persistent oval light round it (N.W.
and S.E), and I several times believed it to be double, but could not be positive
it was so. So remarkably clear was the vision that several times as many as
four or Jive spots were held in view at once, without looking directly for
them, and two or three times as many as six were so seen, viz. Nos. 1, 3,
4, 17, 5, and 14 ; again, Nos, 1, 3, 4, 17, 6, and 5. Nos. 4, 7, 6, 17 were
a group seen together, and Nos. 5, 14, 22, and 1 were a similar one ; yet
still so exceedingly delicate are the fainter spots and the fainter traces of
light on the floor that it needs a most concentrated attention to see cither.
In looking for the faint spots the faint traces of light will escape notice ;
again, when looking for the latter, the former are most likely not to be
seen. This exceeding delicacy too interposes a serious difficidty in cdigning
them with objects on or near the border : the eye cannot hold so wide a
view and at the same time retain a sufficiently correct impression of objects
at once so faint and small. These remarks do not apply to the easier spots
and light streaks. Once, for a few minutes, a narrow, dark, straight line,
like a pencil-mark, was visible from m towards liamlleta [i. e. from N.W.
to S.E.], probably the crack Mr. Birt has discovered. It was not seen
again this evening."

1870, September 11. Mr. Nelson records No. 1 as very distinct, No. 3 as
distinct and brilliant, Nos. 5 and 14 as faint, 5 as rather so.

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 85

Interval 144 to 132 hours.

1871, March 8. Mr. Ormesher records a spot near the S.W. border,
■which he queries " 14, a long way off " from its position. Is it a spot not
before recorded ?

1870, August 13. Mr. Gledhill records spots Nos. 3 and 17 as fine bright
disks. No. 1 as a fine, largo, bright disk, and No. 4 as a nebulous object.
Mr. Pratt remarks that " on this evening, as ivell as in 1870, August 12,
the tint of the dark portions of the floor was much intensified close to the
rim. It was the case all round, but especially so between 6 and ^, between
e and ^, and between /3 and rj."

1869, December 20. Mr. Pratt places a spot nearly due north of No. 1
on the diagram of this evening, wliich he queries as 23. I query it as un-
certain. Spots Nos. 1, 0, 23, and 16 very nearly align. The line passing
through Nos. 1, 0, and 23 passes slightly west of No. 16. Mr. Pratt's spot
is very decidedly east of this line. [1871, March 31. The spot registered
by Mr. Pratt on Dec. 20, 1869, not having been reobserved, it is probable
that it may have been, as Mr. Pratt queried, No. 23. I have now entered
it as such.— W. R. B.J

Interval 132 to 120 hours.

1870, September 12. Mr. Neison records of No. 22, " a spot very faint,
and difficult to make out in the midst of a patch of light."

Interval 108 to 96 hours.

1870, July 16. Mr. Gledhill records spot No. 1 as "a fine, large, bright disk;
looks like an elevation ;" also Nos. 3 and 17 as bright disks. I have made
the following note on the Form : — " 9 and 0. These do not appear in their
precise localities, especially 0. It may be that the spot thus marked by
Mr. Gledhill is a new one."

1870, December 12. Mr. Pratt writes : " A faint crepusciilar kind of
shade has crept over the western part of the floor, and is deepest near the
western border ; but the gradation is very delicate, 12 hours to 12 hours 40
minutes." [1870, March 24. Mr. Gledhill noticed a darker tint at the west
part of the floor, and furnished a tinted sketch : see remarks under this
date (p. 87) ; also Mr. Elger's observations of the same portion of the floor
being light, under date 1870, August 6, interval 48 to 60 hours.]

1870, November 11. Mr. Gledhill records spots Nos. 1, 3, 30, and 17 as
brk/ht S2)ots. On the 13 of September (same interval) he recorded them as
"bright or fine craters;" with the exception of Mr. Nelson's record on
August 12 of No. 3 as a suspected crater (interval 168 to 156 hours), this in-
terval (108 to 96 hours) is the earliest in the declining day that the four have
been seen as craters. The terminator is recorded as west of Fracastorius.

1870, September 13. Mr. Gledhill records spots Nos. 1, 17, and 30 as
bright or fine craters, and says of 17, " fine crater as 1 and 3; " but of 3
he says, " fine disk." I have marked 3 as a crater.

Interval 96 to 84 hours.
1870, August 15. Mr. Pratt records that the darker margins of the
sbiided parts of the floor are still visible as on the 12th and 13th August,
but not in such striking contrast.

1870, October 13. Mr. Pratt records spot No. 1 as brilliant, the others
dimmer than usual.

Interval 84 to 72 hours.
1869, August 26. Mr. Pratt remarked a decided difference in definition

ga REPORT — 1871.

in different parts of the floor, even in so contracted an area, the whole
northern half being less well defined, the south-east part the best so by
far. Traces of the line from m to Eambleta were caught, and the floor
appeared unlevel, the central and south parts appearing highest, and the
south-west part next so. This, Mr. Pratt says, requires confirmation.

1870, September 14. Mr. GledhiU records No. 3 as a fine wide double spot
(i.e. 3 and 30). Mr. Ncison (same day) remarks as follows of Nos. 1,
3, and 17, seen by Mr. Gledhill as craters : No. 1 not very distinct ; No. 3
sharp and shaded, not very bright ; No. 17 very distinct.

Interval 72 to 60 hours.

1870, August 16. Mr. Pratt observed 3 spots only this evening. On
October 14 (same interval) 16 were observed, 9 by Mr. Gledhill and 7 by
Mr. Pratt, in addition. They both record the definition of the border as
"good;" Mr. Pratt says, "with interruptions." On August 16, Mr. Pratt
records the definition of the border as "bad." The following remark of Mr.
Pratt is interesting in connexion with this paucity of spots : — " The darker
parts or shaded portions of the floor were just perceptible with attention.
' Tint of floor' medium, much paler than on the 13th inst."

Interval 48 to 36 hours.

1870, August 17. Mr. Gledhill records No. 1 as a fine, large, open crater,
3 and 30 as craters, 17 as a small crater, and 4 as a bright but not de-
finite spot.

Interval 36 to 24 hours.

1870, March 23. Mr. Gledhill writes : " The shadow of the elevated ob-
ject on the east border (the rock !!,), close to the N. of "W. II YJ''^, was on
the floor, and the adjacent floor to the N.W. was very bright, much brighter
than a or the ' sector,' and it extended one third of the distance from the
border to spot No. 4, as in sketch." Mr. Gledhill could not determine its
form, but considered that it was the streak tj intensified.

1870, July 19. Mr. Gledhill observed the four craters 1, 17, 3, 30 only;
he described No. 1 as a large circular crater with raised walls, but not
much brighter than the floor.

1869, August 28. Mr. Pratt writes : " The level of the floor was con-
spicuously divided by the line from m to c, the ground sloping east and
'west of this lino, the eastern part being brighter than the part on its west,
while the locality of spot No. 4 was judged to be the highest of the whole
floor." In connexion with this remark of Mr. Pratt it may be well to
"notice that, combined with Mr. Elger's observations on 1870, Jan. 10, of
■a depression in the floor east of No. 1 (see Interval 12 to 24 hours), the two
suggest that this depression does not extend so far as No. 4. Again, com-
paring this observation of the western part of the floor being darker than
the eastern, which is in accordance with Mr. GledhiU's on March 24, 1870
(see Interval 12 to 0 hours), it would appear that Mr. Elger's observa-
tion of the bright western area on 1870, May 9 and 10 and August 6, was
an intensified brightness of the ordinary brilliancy of the floor, sloping to the
west. The Intervals 24 to 36 and 48 to 60 hours, the season spring, with
the sun's altitude about 14°, seem to indicate that the increased brightness
was quite independent of illuminating angle.

Speaking of the ajiparent changes observed, not only on Plato, but over
a -wider range, between August 16 and 28, 1869, Mr. Pratt says : " Thus,
among apparent changes of a particular characterj and restricted to certain

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 87

small localities, there does appear to have been a wider and more gene-
ral disturbance in the brightness and definition of objects, all which dis-
turbance appears to be confined to the loiu-lying lands of that part of the
moon observed. Not that changes were not visible in high regions ; but
those are more easily referred to changes of illuminating and visual angle,
while the disturbances above mentioned are not so easily accounted for,
especially those changes in the visibUity of the light-streaks on the floor
and the striking differences of brightness of the spots."

1809, October 26. In connexion with Mr. Gledhill's return of this date
I remark, " 'Crater Eow' being so well seen, and the border of Plato so sharp
and distinct, it is remarkable that spots Nos. 5, 6, 7, 13, 14, and 16 should
not have been well and easily seen, although it appears they were seen, also
that spot No. 3 should have been seen single, and that only sometimes, when ifc
was seen double the previous night."

1870, November 14. Mr. Gledhill observed Nos. 1, 3, 30, and 17 as
craters, and says, " they look like bright elevated rings."

Interval 24 to 12 hours.
1870, March 23. See ante. Interval 36 to 24 hours.

1869, September 27. Mr. Gledhill recorded a broad band of brightness
parallel to the north border, enclosing spots Nos. 13, 19, and 16 ; he does
not say they were seen as well as the bright baud. I have, however, re-
corded them as having been seen.

Interval 12 to 0 hours or sunset.

1870, November 15. The four craterlets Nos. 1, 3, 30, and 17 are de-
scribed by Mr. Gledhill as elevated crater-cones.

1870, March 24. Mr. GledhiU writes :—" Terminator on N.E. end of
Apennines ; the eastern shadows lie on the floor. A line drawn along
the west edge of the ' sector,' and produced to the north border, separates
the bright east part of the floor from the darker west part ; the inner slope
of the west wall glows in sunlight, while the floor near it is the darkest
portion of the crater [Plato]." See ]}. 95, line 9.

Additional Notes.
Differences of Visibility of neighbouring Objects.

1869, August 26, 11 hours 30 minutes. Definition frequently exceed-
ingly good but disturbed, with much boiling at times. Mr. Pratt has fur-
nished the following record : —

" There was a marked difference between the M. Imbnum, the M.
Serenitatis, and the M. Frigoris, in respect of the visibility of minute objects
on their surfaces. The Mare Imbrium was literally covered with small white
sjwts and streaks. The three streaks from Aristillus to the south border of
Plato were again traced. Archimedes had roughly four light streaks E. and
W., and about nine or ten easily discerned white spots. Beer and Mddler
and neighbourhood looked invitingly for a close study.

" The Mare Serenitatis was of a dull grey, with few white spots and
comparatively few features visible. Gf those visible all were very indistinct,
EXCEPT THE MORE ELEVATED ONES ; thus, of the Small objects rouud Linne,
most were invisible, a few indistinct, even I E«i, I E^^, I Ev^ [the three small
craters N.W. of Linne] were almost obscured. Linne itself a cloudy white
spot, with knot of light in centre, but not nearly so bright as when seen
on the 23rd inst. Posidonius y was brighter and half the size of Linne.
Vessel was tolerably clear. About half the number of white spots S.E. of

88 REPORT — 1871.

Bessel were very indistinctly seen, the renifiinder invisible. Posidonius,
just -within the terminator, "was fairly defined. SuJpicius Gallus and one
or two near it on the pleateau were clear ; so that the moke an object was
RAISED above the general level of the Mare the clearer was its deiinition,
while those on the level of it were more or less obscured.

" The 3Iare Frigoris was very hazy indeed ; even close to the foot of the
north slope of Pluto objects could not be defined, while those raised a little
above the Mare were remarkably well defined indeed. The whole northern
slope of Plato appeared everywhere rugged and iineven."

Indications of intermittent Visibility and of possible volcanic Activity.

On the evening of the 13th of May, 1870, no less than tiventy-seven spots
were seen on the floor of Plato, 26 by Mr. Pratt, and an extra one by Mr.
Elger. This extraordinary display occurred between 132 and 144 hours
after the terminator had passed 4° E. long. It is, however, not a little
remarkable that, on the same evening, Mr. Gledhil!, at Halifax, observed
four spots only. The great number seen by Mr. Pratt, as compared with
the small niimber seen by Mr. GledhiU, is doubtless due to a fine state of
the earth's atmosphere at Brighton.

With regard to the streaks seen by Mr. Pratt on the same evening he
remarks — " I could not see the small streaks on the western part of the floor,
and sometimes even my old 'trident'. and the streak c were so indistinct as to
be difficult. What was the cause ? Surely not the earth's atmosphere ;
for at the same time spots could be seen. Perhaps we shall discover that
spots are raised at a higher level than light streaks, and thus visible when
streaks are obscured."

This remark of Mr. Pratt's is important : certainly the state of the earth's
atmosphere could not have affected the two classes of objects in different
ways. If the intensity of the spots depended upon the purity of our atmo-
sphere, one would think that the brightness of the streaks would also have
been increased ; but in Mr. Pratt's experience it was not so. Mr. Elger
speaks of some as bright and others faint. Mr. Gledhill, with a bad atmo-
sphere, speaks of them as bright ; but he saw only four spots. Are the spots
really brighter than the streaks ? But, then, why do both vary in brightness ?

Mr. Pratt having perused [carefully] the MS. has furnished me with the
following remarks : —

" May it not be well to mention that, on the occasion referred to, 1870,
May 13, I observed fifteen st reals, one of which was a new one. [This
was the streak from spot jS^o. 5 towards No. 14.] This number was much
above the average, the cm-ious fact being that although so many were per-
ceptible with attention, yet the increase in their brightness was in a lower
ratio than that of the spots. There are two possibilities which may aflfect the
discrepancy[diflerence]betw'een the notes of Mr. Gledhill and myself in relation
to thestreaks: — Eirst, the times at which ive observed, may have been different. As
for myself, I tested the chance of working with any thing like satisfaction once
at least every half hour during the whole of the evening, and before I tried for
the last time, at 1 1 hours, had been unable to perceive either one spot or streak.
Secondly, jjriority of observation bestowed on objects of one class may detract
from the estimated brilliancy of the other class. In my own case, immediately
I went to the telescope, at 11 hours, I saw several spots conspicuously, and in
consequence searched for spots alone for nearly an hour. A search for so long a
time for one class possibly may, in a slight measure, reduce the sensibility of
the eye for objects of the other class, whether spots or streaks."

The following extracts from Mr. Pratt's letter, dated 1870, May 19, are

OBSERVATIONS OP LUNAR OBJECTS. 89

interesting : — " Some spots having at different times been observed as cra-
terlets, their character as volcanic is settled in my own mind. Whether
all spots are analogous I should be glad to know ; but on the supposition of
such similarity existing, the suggestion naturally arises whether the light
streaks be not scoriae or lava, or a mixture of both, resulting from the action
of the craterlets with which they seem to be connected."

A comparison of the curves for the 20 lunations, April 1869 to November
1870, is suggestive of the craterlets being a distinct class of objects. The
phenomena characterizing the cratelets, as indicated by the curves, differ
very materially from the phenomena manifested by the spots ; for example,
in the correspondence of the maxima at the time of the supposed outbreak
of Aug.-Sept. 1869, we have an increase of visibility in spots, the behaviour
of the craterlets being altogether different. Certain neighbouring spots, to
which allusion has been made, declined greatly in visibility, and were very
seldom seen during a period in which the craterlets were almost always
visible ; and in connexion with this it may be remembered that craterlets
are characterized by high degrees of visibility, while of many spots which
have large ranges the normal degrees of visibility are low.

That a connexion exists between the streaks and spots is, as Mr. Pratt
remarks, "self-evident ;" and Mr. Elger has shown that most of the spots
occur on the streaks. Now as both spots and streaks vary in brilliancy and
visibility, may not the steaks consist, as Mr. Pratt suggests, of ejecta from
the volcanic orifices of the craterlets? The increased brightness of the
streaks in the neighbourhood of the border has been frequently noticed, as
well as the unevenness of the floor. It may be possible that newly ejected
matter (especially if it be of the character of "broken glass," suggested, I
believe, by Dr. Huggins as explanatory of the appearance of Linne) may
reflect light more strongly, and thus contribute to the brighter appearance
of the streaks about the time at which the craterlets manifest increased
activity, and this may become so great as even to conceal the craterlets
themselves. On the other hand, although we are perfectly ignorant of any
meteorological or chemical action occurring at the surface of the moon, it
may be permissible to suggest that, if such action be possible, the reflective
power of the ejecta may become impaired, and the streaks in consequence
rendered less bright.

It is exceedingly difficult to conceive that volcanic action can be in existence
on the moon's surface without "vapour" of some kind escaping from the
orifices. If this be the case, condensation must follow, and the orifice may be
covered by the condensed vapour, the upper surface of which may strongly
reflect the light and produce the appearance of a spot when not in a state of
actual eruption ; and this spot may be seen on a surface covered with ejecta,
the reflective power of which has been impaired since it left the orifice.

One of the brightest portions of the floor of Plato is the S.E., which is
characterized by the "sector" or "fan." On the 10th of January, 1870,
!l[r. Gledhill observed as many as nine crater-cones on the eastern part of
the floor, viz. Nos. 1, 9, 11, 17, 4, 3, 30, 7, and 32. It is easily con-
ceivable that ejecta from some of these may be the perennial source of the
reflective power of the " sector."

" It is, as far as I can see," says Mr. Pratt, " not at all proven that it is
impossible that they, the spots, may not be small acting volcanos at this
present moment ; and you will please credit me with having noted that, on
the 13th of May, although the spots were very greatly in excess of their
usual brightness, the relative brilliancy of the light streaks was not nearly

90 . REPORT — 1871.

in the 8ame proportion, indeed not so high as on some nights when fewer
spots have heen visible. The supposition of Schroter of an exceedingly low
atmosphere, confined to the lower regions, seems to me especially consonant
with the above observations, for the following among other reasons : —

" A thin atmosphere, the only possible detection of which is confined to the
lower parts of the floor [that is within the mountainous enclosure of Plato],
may obscure the streaks partially [to effect this there must be condensed
material of some kind] without affecting the spots, which, if craterlets, are
raised more or less above the level of the streaks [the low fogs, the upper sur-
faces of which are at a less elevation than ordinary buildings are high, may be
cited as examples] ; for such an atmosphere would probably be rendered more
dense by and during the supposed activity in the spots, which on that night
were unusually bright and, according to the hypothesis, in action. [It must
not be forgotten that on comparing the observations of Mr. Pratt with those
of Mr. Gledhill, the presumption is that the iinusual number and brilliancy
of the spots was simply the effect of a finer atmosphere at Brighton as
compared with that at Halifax. The phenomenon which is at variance with
this is the less brihiancy of the streaks as recorded by Mr. Pratt ; still we
have the bright streaks of Mr. Gledhill supporting the hypothesis of the effects
of the earth's atmosphere.] Hence after a subsidence of the brightness of the
spots and the restoration of the normal state of the atmosphere, we might
expect to see the streaks come out more distinctly."

It wiU be remarked that, in my suggestions above, the increased bright-
ness of the streaks is supposed to depend upon the craterlets actually
ejecting material, while the increased brightness of the spots depends upon
the escape of vapour. I have not quoted Mr. Pratt's remarks for the
purpose of controverting them ; they appear to me to be exceedingly
valuable, and in the present state of selenological inquiry it is important
to canvass every view that may be put forward. It is quite consonant with
both our views that increased activity in a spot may, and doubtless does,
manifest itself by increased brilliancy ; and it is not unlikely that the forma-
tion of a spot in the way suggested over a volcanic orifice otherwise invisible
may precede an actual eruption, contributing to an increased brilliancy of
the streaks if they really result from volcanic ejecta.

On the agencies capable of affecting the visibility of objects on the moon
Mr. Pratt remarks : — " To my own mind the only likely agencies that can
exist in the moon capable of affecting the visibility of objects are the every-
where-denied lunar atmosphere and real volcanic activity ; as far as I can
learn, the observations of some favour the one agency, while other observations
do the same for the other, at the same time that different observei-s
alternately deny the possible existence of either. Surely they are very
closely related. If volcanic activity be established, can it exist without
an atmosijhere ? AVhile if a low atmosphere be established, would not the
stronger objection to present volcanic activity be removed? The hope that
persistent and minute observation of a suitable region might produce a
result sufficient either to weaken or strengthen the supposition has been at
once the impetus and bond which has induced me to give a large share of
attention to Plato. "We may not have attained such a result even yet ; but
possibly continued application may be rewarded. I hope so. The close
study of typical species is generally the best method of acquiring a good
knowledge of genera."

Mr. Pratt further adds: — " The reverse of what I have here stated I have
several times observed, viz. that the light streaks on those occasions were

OBSERVATIONS Or LUNAR OBJECTS. 91

much hrigTiter relativehj to their best state thaa were the spots, of •which
generally at those times lew have been discernible."

1870, May 13. Mr. Pratt has not only specified the order of brightness as
follows : —

Spots No. :

Visibility :

1.
1-000

4.

-892

3.

•897

5.
•510

17.

•830

14.
•433

22.

•175

6.

•222

13.

•156

16.
-294

Spots No. :
Visibility :

20.
•046

2.3.
■046

18.
•072

19.
■150

29.
•036

0.
•046

24.

•057

21.
•026

9.

•222

10.
•062

Spots No. :
Visibility :

2.
-046

25.
•144

30.
•139

31.
•031

12.

•031

7.
•113

which we can compare with the degree of visibility for the 18 lunations as
given immediately under the number of each spot (trom this comparison we
see that the brightness ou May 13 was not strictly accordant with the
visibility), but he has described the character of visibility by the words easy,
conspicuous, &c., thus forming with the spots 7iot seen eight classes of objectSj
au analysis of which may be interesting.

Class I. contains one spot only, Jfo. 1, deg. of -ds. = 1-000.

Pratt. Exceedingly bright and dense.

Elgcr. Unusually bright.

Gledhill. Bright spot.
Class II. contains one spot only, No. 4, deg. of vis. = •892.

Pratt. Bright but hazy.

Elger. No remark.

Gledhill. S^Dot.
Class III. contains one sjjot only, No. 3, deg. of vis. = •897.

Pratt. Distinct ; he inserts 5 between 3 and 17.

Elger. 3 and 17 nearly equal.

Gledhill. Bright spot.

Class IV. contains

four spots, viz. Nos. 17,

5 14 22

No.

Pratt.

Elger.

Gledhill.

Vis.

17.

Con.spicuous.

Nearly equal to 3.
' Yery faint on east 1

Bright spot.

•830

5.

5>

- border of eastern -
arm of " trident."

Not seen.

•510

14.

»

Seen by glimpses.

)?

•433

22.

3)

Not seen.

)»

•175

Mr. Pratt observed the three components of the group 3, 30, 31 : he
described 30 and 31 as steadily seen ; they occur in Class VI. Mr. Pratt
accorded to spot No. 22 a high degree of brightness on this evening, and
described it as " conspicuous : " neither Mr. Elger nor Mr. Gledhill detected
it ; this doubtless depended upon the state of our own atmosphere. It may,
however, be remarked that the spot was less visible on May 13, 1870, as
compared with its visibility in August 1869, when it was seen by every
observer.

The position of spot No. 5, as observed by Mr. Pratt on August 26, 1869,
was on the ivest border of the eastern arm of the " trident." The spot No 5,
discovered by Challis, and possessing a normal visibility of -510, has been so
frequently observed as almost to warrant its stability of position ; and should
its relative position, as regards the eastern arm of the trident, be found to
vary, it will afford evidence of a probable variation in the position of the
arm. Schroter's drawings of the Mare Crisium indicate similar movements
of the streaks from Proclus over the Mare,

92

REPORT —

1871

•

ass V.

contains

eight spots, viz

. Nos.

16, 6, 13,

19,

18,20,

No.

Pratt.

Elger,

Glcdhill.

Yis.

16.

Easy.

Easy.

Not seen.

•294

6.

Not seen.

•222

13.

•156

19.

•150

18.

•072

20.

•046

23.

•046

29.

•036

Of tlie spots in this class, and which Mr. Pratt describes as easy, one
only. No. 16, was seen by Mr. Elger. This spot has a higher degree of
visibility than 22 in Class IV., " conspicnous ; " and this is perhaps another
indication that the \-isibility of No. 22 on May 13 did not wholly depend
upon the state of the earth's atmosphere.

The normal degrees of visibility in this class range from ^294 to -036,
furnishing a strong indication that they were seen in consequence of a fine
state of the earth's atmosphere.

Class VI. contains five spots, viz. Nos. 9, 30, 24, 31, 21.

Vis.
•222
•139
•057
•031
•026

The same remark may be applied to this class as to Class V., viz. that the
spots were seen in consequence of a fine state of the earth's atmosphere.
The two spots Nos. 9 and 30, with comparative high degrees of visibility,
are xeij frequently seen by Mr. Glcdhill, and doubtless were not seen by
him in consequence of the bad state of the atmosphere at Halifax.

Class VII. contains six spots, viz. Nos. 25, 7, 10, 2, 0, 12.

No.

Pratt.

Elger. Gledhill.

9.

Minute.

Not seen. Not seen.

30.

SteadUy.

99 99

24.

99

Seen 3 or 4 times. ,,

31.

99

Not seen. ,,

21.

99

99 99

No.

Pratt.

Elger.

Gledhill.

Vis.

25.

Frequently glimpsed.

Not seen.

•144

7.

, ,

Not seen.

•113

10.

, ,

99

•062

2.

Hazy.

99

•046

0.

, ,

99

•046

12.

, .

99

•031

Spot No.

25, vis.

•144, is frequently seen

ty

Mr. Elger.

In addition to the above, Mr. Elger frequently glimpsed No. 32. The
WHOLE of the above sj^ots, as well as the strcciJcs recorded by Mr. Pratt, were
observed three separate times at intervals of about twenty minutes. The
majority was seen much oftcner.

The following spots were not seen on the evening of May 13 : —
Spot: 11. 34. 8. 15. 33. 27. 26. 28. 35.
Vis.: ^144 ^026 -015 ^015 -010 -010 ^005 ^005 •OOo

"With the exception of spot No. 11, which is frequently seen by Mr.
Gledhill, these spots were doubtless concealed by or, rather, required a still
finer state of the atmosphere to bring them out. It is difficult to say why
^r. Pratt did not detect spot No. 11 when he saw thirteen sjiots with lower
degrees of visibility. It is one of those spots to which special attention

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 93

should be directed. Of the remainder, three have been observed orn^e only
by Mr. Gledhill, viz. Wos. 26, 28, and 3-5 ; two have been observed twice,
viz. Nos. 27 and 33 ; two thrice, both old spots, viz. 8 (Gruithuisen) and 15
(Dawes); and one, 1^0.34, six times between January 15 and March 13, 1870*.
In his letter dated 1870, May 19, Mr. Pratt says that " spot No. 8 could
not be recovered even with the most minute attention." Of spot No. 1 he
says, " it was brighter than I have seen it before, quite round and dense,
much hke the image of a star on a good night surrounded by the very least
trace of a ring of light. [Neither] internal nor external shadows could be
seen, although I constantly expected a slight glimpse."

Spot No. 22.

In reference to this spot Mr. Pratt writes, under date 1870 August 2Q, as
follows : —

" Spot No. 22, according to my observations, has manifested a remarkable
increase of brightness, and those parts of the shaded portions of the floor of
Plato which are nearest to the rim have come out more conspicuously darker
than the rest than I remember to have previously noted. The tint of the
floor, too, has progressively paled. These three phenomena [the increased
brightness of spot 22, the intensification of the darker parts of the floor near
the rim, and the progressive paling of the floor] may possibly be connected
by a common cause ; for certainly in this lunation there is somewhat of a
coincidence amongst them ; for instance, spot 22 is intensely bright at the
time the marginal portions of the shaded parts are most conspicuously dark,
and these two, again, coincide with the time when the general tint of the
floor is at its darkest. Again, after August 12 and 13, spot 22 decreased in
relative intensity, although I am not ready to hazard the assertion that it
had on August 16 positively declined to its \isual intensity, as it was not
seen. [It was on this evening that Mr. Pratt observed three spots only.]
Two similar instances, I believe, I have noted before, when 22 manifested a
singular brightness at sunrise. But the connexion between the visibility of
the deeper-tinted margin and the general deepening of colour is perhaps more
close still, as both certainly paled after August 13. The perplexity seems to
be that the variation in intensity of the margin is relative in respect of the
general colour ; and if difiorences of angles of illumination and vision do affect
the general tint, it might be supposed that they would in the same manner
afi'ect the margin and so produce no relative variation of intensity."

In connexion with the relative intensity of which Mr. Pratt speaks, the
state of the border is somewhat important. August 12 and 13, when the
marginal portions of the floor were intensified in colour, Mr. Pratt recorded
of the border : — " Definition fair at times, with much tremor, wind N.E."
This was on the 12th. On the 13th the record is : " Border, definition bad,

* The history of spot No. 34 is curious ; the following are the only records which exist
of it. The observations were all made by Mr. Gledhill with the Halifax 9 J-inch equatorial
in the Observatory of Edward Crossley, Esq.

1870, January 15, 10 to 13 hours. " I am continually thinking I see an object close to
No. 1 and to the west of it."

February 11, 6.45. " No. 1 often comes out double ; last year I often saw it thus. I am
now almost quite sure I see a minute object close to the west of it."

February 12, 6.0. " Saw 9, 11, 30, and object close west of No. 1."

March 12, 6 to 8 hours. No. 34 mentioned as having been seen.

March 13, G to 12 hours. "Unless I am very much mistaken indeed 34 is an easy
object, i. e. No. 1 comes out easily double."

There are no records after this date. Instruments less than 9-inches aperture are not
likely to redetect it.

94 REPORT 1871.

much boiling, wind N.E." On the 12th, definition fair, the floor was recorded
as " very dark." On the 13th it was dark, but not so much so as on the
12th. On the 16th, as well as on the 15th, the definition of the border was
" bad." These records clearly throw a doubt upon the supposition of the
" paling " having resulted from some lunar action, inasmiich as when, the
deeper tint was observed the definition was "good," the "tremor" and
" boiling " having a tendency to confuse the portions of the floor. On the
other hand, spots have been much more numerous with bad definition than
3 as observed by Mr. Pratt on the l(3th ; and this would lead to the supposition
that the (qrparent extinction of the spots with a pale floor was in some
way differently connected than by a deteriorated state of the earth's atmo-
sphere. I have often observed that the passage of a thin cloud over the
moon has greatly contributed to intensify the tints of the darker portions of
the surface ; but in this case the intensification has been general and not
partial, as it would be if dependent upon local lunar action.

Mr. Pratt records a case of parfial obscuration which was well seen oil
August 13. " It appeared," says Mr. Pratt, " on this wise. A general view
of the floor showed it much speckled and streaked in other pai'ts ; but over
the area specified [Mr. Pratt has not mentioned the particidar part of the
floor ; but from what follows I apprehend it must be in the neighbourhood of
No. 3] there seemed an absence of markings ; close attention, however,
enabled some to be seen, but not nearly so richly as the remainder of the
floor, and we know well enough that that particular area is not wanting in
markings. The evening's view has just occurred to memory when I first
discovered that spot 3 was a triple one, and had a remarkalile view of its
neighbourhood [Qy. "Was this on May 13 ?], therefore exactly the reverse
being the case. August 13 seems as conclusive a proof as one observer is
likely to obtain in a year's work."

Of four observers on the same evening, two record No. 3, and the other
two appear not to have seen it. Taking them in chronological order, Neison,
9.5 to 9.15, records it as distinct ; Pratt, 10.30 to 12.30, did not observe
it; Ormesher, 11.0 to 11.30, does not show it in his drawing; Gledhill,
14'', records it as a bright disk : he also records 30. As these observations
are not contemporaneous, with the exception of Ormcsher's, having been
made while Pratt was observing, it appears, from its absence in both their
records, that from 10.30 to 12.30 it was really not visible ; and this tends to
support Mr. Pratt's idea that for the time it was hidden by something like
an obscuring medium. "What this could have been it is difficult to surmise.
The remark, however, of Neison that 30 Avas not to be seen between 9.5
and 9.15 is interesting in connexion with Gledhill recording both spots at a
later epoch, 14'', and also detecting five not seen by Pratt, viz. 3, 30, 9, 11,
18. Neison suspected he saw 14, not recorded by Gledhill nor Pratt, but
seen by Ormesher. Pratt saw 22, not seen by either of the others. The
case of 14 is a little perplexing ; it might, however, have been missed by
Pratt on account of the bad definition. "With regard to the greater number
of spots seen by GledhiU, two circumstances may have contributed to this
result, the larger aperture of Mr. Crossley's instrument and the epoch at
which Mr. Gledhill observed. It may possibly be found that the greater
number of spots recorded after the sun's meridian passage at Plato depend
upon the. steadiness and purity of the air mostly experienced after midnight.

Suiisei and Sunrise on Plato,
Extracts from Mr. Pratt's notebook, 1870, Oct. 17, 11'' to \2\ Definl-

OBSERVATIONS OF LUNAR OBJECTS. 95

tion fair, -with boiling. * * Plato is a grand and striking sight. Tint of
floor medium. More than half the floor in shadow. Terminator just in-
cluding the W. rim. The rim of the crater on the N. exterior slope finely
seen. In three parts the rim appeared hrolcen down to Uvd of floor — close
to m, opposite to c, and nearly so at W. II E"/'^ [the hreaks at m and op-
posite c are in the line of the well-known fault crossing Plato from N.W.
to S.E.]. ^ was throwing a long spire of shadow the full length of the
floor at 11" 40°'. That part of the floor contiguous to the W. and S.W.
rim was deeply shaded, with streaks of shade running towards the centre of
the floor. Between the break near c and the shadow of '( a straight shading
as of a narrow valley was weU seen. [These shadings appear to be roughly
coincident with the dark spaces on the floor as seen under high illumination,
the straight shading being, as Mr. Pratt suggests, between the "sector" and
the E. arm of the " trident." Is there really a valley here running inta
the central depression between 1 and 4, seen by Mr. Elger in January, 1870,
and observed much earlier by Schrbter?] Between these shadings and the
shadow of the E. rim were three roundish lighter regions, the higher parts of
the floor giving the appearance of a strongly marked convexity."

" A strong suspicion arises that the apparently higher portions of the
floor are the light streaJcs usually seen, and the highest parts are spots 1, 17
and 5." Mr. Pratt further suggests that the light streaks are coincident
with formations analogous to " spurs "' from the chief centres of the residual
activity on the floor.

It is not a little remarkable that on the occasion of such a very favoiirable
oblique illumination the craterlets 1 and 17 should not have been detected
by Mr. Pratt ; both have raised rims of the nature of true volcanic cones,
and 1 has been seen, and I believe 17 also, with interior shadows and bright
interiors facing the sun. Mr. Pratt does not appear to have seen even the
remotest semblance of a shadow. The spots properlg so called do not appear
generally iintil the sun has attained an altitude of 20°. If craterlets are
recorded as spots earlier, it is probably in consequence of bad definition
confusing the crater-form appearance. Is it possible that on the two
occasions mentioned by Mr. Pratt, Oct. 17 and Nov. 1, the craterlets 1, 17,
3, and 4 were by some means concecded? As regards Nov. 1, the observation
of the crater-cones as the shadows gradually recede from E. to W. is very
frequent ; indeed the surface of Plato as it just emerges out of night ajjpears
to be in a very different state to what it is about mid-day ; objects are much
sharper, and it is difficult to conceive of any agency so affecting such visible
objects as to render them invisible at a time when they are generally most
conspicuous. So far as contemporaneous observations are capable of throwing
light on this phenomenon, three spots only were recorded on the same even-
ing ; No. 1 by Mr. Elger, who noticed it from 9'' to 9** S", near the shadow
of the summit of the middle peak of the W. wall, three hours later than
Mr. Pratt's observation. Mr. Gledhill at 6"*, same as Mr. Pratt, says, " Moon
so low and air so thick that very little light from moon can reach us ;" he
says also, " I sec 3 as double elevated cones [i.e. 3 and 30]. No other objects
can be seen." Mr. Neison, 5.10 to 8.15 [probably 8.10 to 8.15] succeeded
in seeing 3 only, which he records as very faint. He does not give the state
of the atmosphere as to definition ; but from his remarking that " a deep cleft
in west edge of wall was very distinctly seen," I should suppose that it was
pretty good. Taking the four sets of observations it would appear that at
sunrise on Plato Nov. 1, 1870, some ageney was in operation capable of
concealing the craterlets ; and combining these observations with those of

96 REPORT 1871.

Oct. X7, it would also appear that the same agency was in operation at the
time of the previous sunset.

1870, Nov. 1, 6'' to 6*" 40™. "A grand view again. Definition fair at
times. The margin of the eastern end of the floor very distinctly shaded,
showing that end to he convex as well as the western. This shading did not
conform to the general form of rim, but ran inwards (as shown in the
sketch) ; and three places on the floor were much brighter than the rest,
which was free from shading (their localities I have no doubt are those of
spots 3, 4, and 17), while the next bright parts of the floor are suggestive
of the light streaks; and the shading or lower part coinciding with the
narrowing of the streak between 4 and 3 as seen under higher illumination
in a measure supports the impression."

The dip of the floor towards the border, as mentioned by Mr. Pratt, is
now well established by numerous observations, also the comparatively
greater elevation in the neighbourhood of the fault crossing Plato from
N.W. to S.E. These characteristics will probably afford some clue towards
framing a theory of the formation of the plain and rampart. Starting with
the now acknowledged principle that the moon manifests on a large scale the
operation of volcanic forces, we may first inquire as to their modus operandi
in the forms we observe. So far as we know, volcanos and earthquakes are
closely connected, and there is great reason to believe that both are the
results of expansion occasioned by the intumescence of material beneath the

Pig. 8.

crust or surface. It was, I believe, Scropc who first called attention to the
effect of the expansion of an iutumescent mass elevating the superincumbent
material ; and Hopkins, twenty-two years later, clearly showed that when
the surface was elevated to the point at which the tension and cohesion just
balanced each other, the slightest increase of tension ruptured the surface
and produced fissures, which might be considerably augmented by earthquake-
waves accompanied by the sudden subsidence of the tract between two
principal lines of fissures. In applying this reasoning to the explanation of
the formation of " Plato," the remarks of Scrope are so much to_ the point
that a transcription of them is essential to the due apprehension of the
forces concerned.

In chapter x. of his ' Considerations of Yolcanos,' p. 205 (1825), Scrope,
speaking of M. de Buch's opinion that the intumescence and rise of the
basalt elevated the superincumbent strata, says : " 1 differ from him, inas-
much as I conceive the intumescence and rise of the basalt to be not
the cause but the result of the elevation of the overlying strata.

"A general fact, noticed by M. de Buch himself, proves this most
thoroughly, viz. that wherever the basalt appears, the strata are invariably
found dipping toivards it, which is wholly inexplicable under the idea that
the basalt elevated them. ... If, however, we suppose the expansion of
the subterranean bed of crystalHne rock to have taken place at a great depth,
elevating the overlying strata irregularly along the line of various fissures,

THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY OF METALS. 97

as for example at A and B (fig. 8), it is clear such fissures will open outwardly ;
but in the interval of two such fissures, as at C, another must be found opening,
on the contrary, downivards, that is, towards the confined and heated lava,
which in consequence must intumesce and fill the space afforded to it, and
perhaps force its way through some minor cleft upon the external surface of
the elevated rocks."

Plato we know to be a large cavity in an elevated region, between the
Mare Imbrium and the Mare Frigoris, connected with the mountain-studded
region of the Alps on the west, and descending with a precipitous slope
towards the east. The whole of the surface around Plato is exceedingly
rugged, containing at least the remains of three craters of more ancient date.
It is the floor of Plato only that presents any appearance of a recent character ;
and even this when Aaewed by very obhque light is far from being level.
The sketch (fig. 8) to which reference has already been made is intended to con-
vey some idea of the successive steps by which it is probable that Plato has
arrived at its present form. It is roughly drawn to scale, which is somewhat
too small, and, consequently, the height of the rim rather exaggerated ; the
extent being 316,800 English feet, the height, under 4000 feet (i. e. of the
rim exclusive of the four pinnacles), will be nearly -j^jth part. The letters
A and B are placed over the supposed foci of expansion, the arrows indi-
cating the direction of the elevating movements, the dotted line showing the
extreme height to which the surface could be raised without fracture. Over
A and B, and above C, are placed the three main fissures resulting from the in-
creased tension and the general breaking up of the elevated mass, and which
might have been accompanied with an almost immediate subsidence, as sug-
gested by Hopkins, Eeport Brit. Assoc. 1847, p. 64, in the following passage : —
" If the intumescence of the subjacent fluid, and consequently its supporting
power, were immediately afterwards diminished by the escape of elastic
vapours, there would be an immediate subsidence." Such a subsidence, or
rather a succession of subsidences, would fuUy account for the formation of
the floors of most craters ; and the upwelling of lava from numerous small
orifices would tend to produce such a floor as we observe on Plato. The
section presents all the characteristics of the walled plain under considera-
tion, the dip towards the border being strongly indicative of the main line of
fissiire opening outwardly at the foot of the rampart. It may be well to
mention that no new principle is introduced in this explanation, which is
based upon the views of two leading geologists, after comparing them with
phenomena that have been assiduously and repeatedly observed.

Second Provisional Report on the Thermal Conductivity of Metals.

By Prof. Tait.

Since the date of the former Report the Committee have obtained a splendid
set of Kew standard thermometers. "With these, complete sets of observa-
tions, at very diiferent temperatures, have been made on iron, two specimens
of copper, lead, german silver, and gas-coke. As great difficulty was found
in keeping the source of heat at a constant high temperature in the statical
experiments, they were repeated from day to day tiU satisfactory results
were obtained. But a simple and ingenious device of Dr. Crum Brown (con-
sisting in making the descending counterpoise of a small gas-holder nip an
india-rubber tube) supplied so very great an improvement in steadiness of
temperature that it was considered advisable to repeat all the statical expe-
1871. H

98 REPORT 1871.

riments with thia modification. This has accordingly been done, during the
present summer, but it has not yet been possible to perform the large amount
of calculation necessarj- to obtain final results. It may be stated, however,
that the results as a whole will not differ very considerably from those for-
merly obtained, so far, at least, as can be judged from a comparison of the
graphic representations of the experiments.

Report on the Rainfall of the British Isles, by a Committee, consisting
of C. Brooke, F.R.S. [Chairman), J. Glaisher, F.R.S., Prof.
Phillips, F.R.S., J. F. Batemax, C.E., F.R.S., R. W. Mylne,
C.E., F.R.S. , T. Hawksley, C.E., Prof. J. C. Adams, F.R.S. , C.
ToMLixsox, F.R.S., Prof. Sylvester, F.R.S., Dr. Pole, F.R.S.,
Rogers Field, C.E., and G. J. Symoxs, Secretary.

YorB Committee have much pleasure in reporting that the organization
under their supervision is believed to be in a generally efficient state. With
a stafi" of observers, numbering nearly two thousand, spread over the whole
extent of the British Isles, there can, however, be no question that, to ensure
perfect efficiency and uniformity of observation, a systematic inspection of
stations is absolutely necessary. In a paper read before the Society of Arts
in 185S, M!r. BaUey Denton appears to have considered that there should be
one inspector to about each 200 stations ; at that rate we ought to have ten.
The ;Meteorological Committee of the Royal Society have made it a rule to
have all their stations inspected each year. On the most moderate com-
putation it is indisputable that at least one inspector of stations is required
for our large body of observers, the whole of whose time should be devoted
to travelling.

Ever since their appointment yoiir Committee have felt and acted upon
this conviction ; but want of funds has prevented them from employing a
regular iuspector, and obliged them to rely solely upon the unpaid services of
their Secretary. Even under these adverse conditions considerable progress
has been made with the work, and upwards of 400 gauges had been visited
and examined previous to the Liverpool Meeting. At that Meeting, how-
ever, the Association only granted half the sum for which we asked, and we
have consequently (most reluctantly) been obliged to stop this important
and useful work.

As an interim meastire, and with a view to ascertaining ia what districts
inspection is most requisite, it has been suggested that a schedule of ques-
tions as to the positions of their rain-gauges should be sent to every observer.
The Committee unanimously approved of the suggestion, and annex a copy of
the Circular and Schedule they are about to issue.

British Association Rainfall Committee,

62 Camden Square, London, ^N.W.

Sis, — The above Committee feel that it is most important that precise in-
formation as to the position of aU the rain-gauges in. the British Isles should
be promptly obtained. They are aware that under present circumstances it
is impossible that each gauge should be personally inspected, and have there-
fore instructed me to ask you to fill up the accompanying form, which I
shall be obliged by your returning as soon as possible.

As an indication of the kind of information which the Committee desire
to collect, I have filled up one form for my own gauge ; but there are of
course many subjects not touched upon in the specimen which will be ac-

ON THE RAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES. 99

ceptable in others, such as distance from the sea and from lofty hills, as
well as their direction, <kc.

The Committee wiU also be glad of any suggestions as to the conduct of
rainfall work, and of information resjjecting any stations or old observations
not included in the list published by them in 1866, and of which I shall be
happy to send you a copy if you have not already received one.

Yours veiy truly,

G. J. Stmoks, Secretary,

[Illustration of mode of filling up return.]

POSITION AND PARTICULARS OF THE RAIN-GAUGE

At [Camden Square, London,]
In the County of [Middlesex.]

Distance.

Height.

. . 17 ft. .

6 ft.]

. . 92 ft. .

. 40 ft.^

. . 15 ft. .

5 ft.

. . 12 ft. .

5 ft.^

. . 16 ft. .

5ft.^

. . 24 ft. .

7ft.^

. . 6 ft. .

3ft.^

. . 12 ft. .

5 ft;

]. rises 30 ft.

in 1 mile.]

Year in which observations were first made [1858.]

Hour of observation [9 a.m.] If entered against the day of observation, or

the one preceding [Preceding].
Position [In garden, 120 ft. by 24 ft.]
Surrounding objects, their distances and heights :

N. [WaU

N.E. [House

E. [WaU

S.E. [Wall

S. [WaU

S.W. [Summer House

W. [Raspberry-bushes

N.W.[WaU

Inclination of ground [Quite level, but in

Height of Ground above sea-level [111] ft. as determined by [Levelling from
Ordnance Bench-mark].

Height of top of gauge above ground [0] ft. [6] in.

Pattern of gauge. (If similar to any on plate, quote the number ; if not,
give sketch.) [Sinular to No. X., but the bent tube is made straight,
and a jar inserted for the purpose of ensuring more accurate mea-
surement.]

Have the same gauge and measuring-glass been used throughout ? [No.]

Has the gauge always been in the same position ? [No.]

[ the previous position [300 yards further west.]

If not, state briefly ■< the reason for the alteration [Growth of trees.]
[ the supposed effect [None perceptible.]

Remarks.
[Measuring- glass broken in 1861, and a new tested one obtained, the
rainfaU of each day until its arrival being bottled separately, and mea-
sured by the new glass.] Signed, [G. J. SYMONS.]

Another branch of investigation which has been arrested by the same
cause is the relative amount of rain falling in different months, or, as we have
usually termed it, the " monthly percentage of mean annual rainfaU." Several
articles upon the subject have appeared in our previous Reports ; and last
year we pointed out that the observations for the decade 1860-69 offered
data of completeness unparalleled, either in this or any other country, tho

h2

100

REPORT 1871.

result of wbicb we had hoped to have submitted to the present Meeting.
Excepting in our own Reports, we are not aware that the seasonal distribu-
tion of rain in this country has received any attention, while on the Con-
tinent it has at all times been looked upon as almost equally important with
the gross amount.

Although several short and interrupted sets of observations have been
made in Northern Derbyshire, the rainfall of that hilly district has not
hitherto been examined with the thoroughness which its importance deserves.
"VVe have in previous Eeports urged the desii'ability of several additional
stations being established ; and as no one else undertook the work our Secre-
tary did so, and by the assistance of the observer at Buxton, and Mr.
Hazlewood, of Castleton, was enabled to commence several sets of rain-
gauge observations in the district. Some others are still required, which, if
our funds permit, we intend to add.

Pit-gauges. — In our last Eeport we drew attention to the fact that a gauge
of which the orifice was horizontal, level with the ground, but in a small pit
or excavation, had at Calne collected about 5 per cent, more than one of which
the receiving surface was one foot above the ground ; whence it followed
that as a great many rain-gauges (the majority in fact) are placed with their
apertures a foot above the surface, the records of all these gauges were
below what they would have been if placed in pits as just described. "We
gave some reasons which appeared to us to prevent the general use of pit-
gauges, and added the following concluding remark on page 176 : —

" This result appears so startling that further experiments will be con-
ducted on the subject."

The funds at our disposal have not allowed us to do so ; but fortunately the
Eev. F. W. Stow, M.A., has tried one pair of gauges mounted in this manner
at Hawsker, on the Yorkshire coast, a few miles south of Whitby. The
following are the results during 1870 : —

Table I. — Experiments with Pit-gauges.

Hawsker, 1870.

Brit.Assoc.Eeport, 1869-70.

Months.

5-in. gauge
at 1 foot.

5-in. gauge
in pit.

Eatio.

Calne, 1866-7,
mean ratio.

Difference.

January .
February .
March . . .

1-610
1-995
1-052
0-370

2-650
0-920
1-887
0-845
5-000
3-043
5-230

1-770
2-300
1-293
0-390

2-705
0-977
1-908
0-934
5-053
3-234
6-420

110
115
123
105

102
106
101
110
101
106
123

113
109
107
105

102
103
103
103
102
106
108

- 3

+ 6

+ 16
0

""o

+ 3

- 2
+ 7

- 1
0

+ 15

April . . .

May

June . . .

July

August .
September
October .
November
December

Totals

24-602

26-984

....

Means , . ,

109-3

105-5

+ 3-8

ON THE RAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES. 101

Of course it was not to be expected that the resxilts of a single year should
agree exactly with the mean of two other years, still less when the size of
gauge used was different, and the locality so opposite as the inland district
of Calne and the rock-bound Yorkshire coast. We therefore look upon it as
satisfactory that in only four months out of eleven do the ratios at Calne and
Hawsker differ more than 3 per cent. In April, June, and IS^ovemher they
are identical. The Calne results are thus strongly confirmed ; and it may be
considered as certain that pit-gauges always exceed those at one foot,
although the precise amount of excess remains to be determined.

In our last Eeport we expressed the hope that we should this year be able
to state the residt of the discussion of all the rainfall registers which were
absolutely continuous from January 1, 1860, to December 31, 18G9. We
have the pleasure of doing so in two respects, viz. (1) with reference to their
bearing on the question of the existence or otherwise of secular variation of
rainfall in the British Isles, and (2) as data indicative of the distribution of
rain over the country.

The secular variation of rainfall, or the relative dryness and wetness of
different years and groups of years, is one of the most important and difficult
branches of rainfall work. It has been treated in our Reports for 1865, and
very fully in that lor 1866. In the latter we gave the calculations in detail,
from which the values shown on the accompanying diagram were obtained.
Referring to that Report for full explanation, we have onljr now t-o mention
that the subsequent years 1866 to 1869 have been computed in the same
manner and added to the diagram (fig. 1). We may also remark that various
observations collected since its publication have confirmed the general accuracy
of the curve quite as much as could have been anticipated. On the present
occasion we do not intend to discuss the relative rainfall of different years, but
the relation of the fall during the ten years 1860-69 to previous decades.
For this purpose we have grouped the yearly values in decennial periods,
similar to those adopted in our 1867 Report, whence we obtain the following
result : —

Table II. — Ratio of Rainfall in each ten years since 1730 to the Mean of

sixty Years, 1810-69.

Period.

Ratio.

Period.

Ratio.

1730-39

89-9

1800-09

SS-2

1740-49

70-6

1810-19

98-6

1750-59

85-5

1820-29

103-2

1760-69

91-1

1830-39

101-4

1770-79

103-5

1840-49

102-6

1780-89

93-5

1850-59

95-2

1790-99

96-5

1860-69

101-5

Having previously pointed out the peculiarities of the earlier portion of
the curve, it is only necessary on the present occasion to caU attention to the
last forty years, whence it will be seen that, according to this mode of inves-
tigation (which is principally based on Enghsh returns), three out of the four
decades had a rainfall nearly identical, and the other (1850-59) considerably
below them, the deficiency being nearly 7 per cent.

This result is based on a combination of records, as fully explained in our
1866 Report. We proceed to examine how far it is corroborated by individual
stations, but are at once confronted by the paucity of stations of which per-
fectly continuous records for even half a century exist. We therefore con-
fine ourselves to the forty years, from 1830 to 1869, for which period we

102

REPORT ISrl.

be

1^

p^

Pm

O

h^

Oi

!0

h-l

00

-*j

1—1

Ph

P

<

W

W

O

H

en

ox

;2^

1— I

n

P

cc

-<

O

1^

O

1— 1

«

H

Ph

-^

P

H

O

P

)^

fH

3*

s

X)

1

00

1

CO

i

■Ti

1

00

i

as

1

3S

O

-H

3S*

.i

r*

3

oo

i

L

-

ill,

p™^^'

_

J

■i

™

■■"■

1

-

^^^

•

■

1

1 -

+

^^

1

oo

^

^

■™

M

1

J

.1

'

Bi

1

■

Xt

1 1

'

1

■■■

a

■

■

MMI

as

00

1

1

^

>■,

«

J

■

i

o

00

■■

■

1

■■

.

■

'-

o

1

1

■

.

■i^^

1

^

■

■■■■

_

—

_

-1

.

■i

■— ■,

—

-^

—

1L

V

^

^

■■

■1

■

L.

,

i

i

M

1 !■

I

^

■

."

_

M

"^^

■

^

^

^^^"

■ ■A^^

B

1

■

■

y

u

1

■

—

■

^

■■-

■■" .

^

^

,H

-.

■

L

m^im

Ol

■

■■■■

u

s

'

5"

C'

:

5

'

S

C

nt

0]

f

ro

ON THE RAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES.

103

have twelve perfect records at widely separated stations. The mean fall in
each decade and in the whole period, and the ratio of each decade to the
whole period at each station, is given ia Table III.

Kg. 2.

o\

6\

6\

C^s

6\

On OS CT\

6\

o\

o\

6\

«>

oo

1^

o

o

o

1-1

O O O

oo cr\ O

O
oo

00

o

CO

oo

oo

o

oo

From careful examination of Table III., it appears that the amount of
rain which fell in the ten years 1830-39 was very similar to that which
fell in the ten following years, the difference being a decrease, but scarcely
one per cent. The investigation in our 1866 Report shows an increase of
1-2 per cent. ; and examination of returns ceasing in 1850, and therefore not
quoted in either Report, show several cases of absolute identity.

With one investigation leading to a decrease of 1 per cent., another to an
increase of the same amount, and a third to identity, we are led to the con-
clusion that the two decades may be considered to show similar results.
This is a much more important fact than it at first appears ; and for this

Table III. — Comparison of the Rainfall in each Decade since 1829 with
the Mean Rainfall of forty years, ending with 1869.

Station.

Mean Rainfall in each 10 years.

Mean

1830-39.

1840-49.

1850-59.

1860-69.

Rainfall,
1830-69.

Epping

Exeter Institution

Tavistock

Halifax

Kendal

Point of Ayre ....
Rhinns of Islay . .

Isle of May

Buchanness

Kinnairdhead ....
Island Glass ....
Start Point

in.

25-84

28-92

52-81

34-51

56-22

28-26

34-07

21-96

26-40

19-66

33-23

27-39

in.

26-99

29-35

54-27

31-88

51-18

28-20

33-79

20-94

26-84

22-01

34-98

25-05

in.

2318

26-91

49-18

30-71

44-91

29-01

30-58

15-21

23-40

22-05

31-92

23-77

in.

24-13

31-76

53-17

33-31

53-32

30-61

33-43

20-48

25-59

24-17

31-13

31-37

in.

25-04

29-24

52-30

32-60

51-41

29-02

32-97

19-65

25-56

21-97

32-81

26-89

Means

32-44

3212

29-24

32-71

31-63

Ratio of Means . .

102-6

101-6

92-5

103-4

104

REPORT — 1871.

Table III. (continued).

SUition.

Ratio of Rainfall in each 10 years' to 40
years' Mean.

18.30-39.

1840-49.

1850-59.

1860-69.

Epping

Exeter Institution

Tavistock

Halifax

Kendal

Point of Ayre ....
Hhinus of Islay . .
Isle of May ....

Buchanuess

Kinnairdhcad ....
Island Glass ....
Start Point

103

99

101

106

109

97

103

112

103

90

101

102

108
100
104

98
100

97
102
107
105
100
107

93

93
92
94
94

87
100
93
78
92
100
97
88

96
109 j
101 1
102
104
106
102
103
100
110

95
117

Mean Eatios ....

102-2

101-8

92-3

103-7

reason : while there are only about a dozen registers complete for the four
decades, there are thirty-eight which are complete for the last three decades.
'Now that we have found the relation between the first two decades, the re-
turns for the thirty years are rendered almost as instructive as those for
forty years.

Fig. 3.

1866 Report.

1871 Report.
All stations.

90

We have therefore compiled Table IV., which differs from Table III. only
in its being for thirty years instead of forty, and in giving observations from
thirty-eight stations instead of twelve.

J

ON THE RAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES.

105

Table IV. — Comparison of the Rainfall in each. Decade since 1839 with the mean
Eainfall of thirty years ending 1869.

County.

II.

Sussex

III.

IV.
V.

»J
)}

»»

VI.

VII.

VIII.

IX.

»

»»

X.

f)

XI.
XII.
XIII.

XV.

«
>»

XVI.

x\^I.

»»

XIX.

>)

XXI.
XXIII.

Herts

Essex

Norfolk

Wilts

Devon

"

Worcester . . .
Nottingham...
Lancashire ...
Yorkshire . . .

II

II ■ • •

II

Durham

Westmoreland
Isle of Man . . .

Wigtown

Haddington...
Edinburgh ...
Bute

Arsvll

Fife

Perth

Kincardine ...
Aberdeen

JI

Ross

Sutherland ...

Caithness

Orkney

Shetland

Dublin

Antrim

Station.

Chichester Infirmary ..
,, (Chilgrove)..

Hemel Hempstead

Eppmg

Diss (Dickleburgh)

Salisbury (Baverstock)
Tavistock (West St.) ..

Exeter Institution

lIoniton(Broadhembury)

Tenbury (Orleton)

Welbeck

Bolton (The Folds)....

Redmires

HaUfax (Well Head) ..

Settle

York

Bishopwearmouth

Kendal

Point of Ayre

Mull of Galloway, L.H

Haddington

Inveresk

PladdaL.H

Mull of Cantire, L.H.
Rhinns of Islay, L.H.

Isle of May, L.H

Deanston

Girdleness, L.H

Buchanness, L.H

Kinnairdhead, L.H. ..

Island Glass, L.H._

Barrahead, L.H.

Cape Wrath, L.H

Dunnethead, L.H

Start Point, L.H

Sumburghhead, L.H. . .

Black Rock

Belfast Linen Hall

Mean Rainfall in each
10 years.

1840-49. 1850-.59. 1860-69.

in.
29-10

33'4i
25-86
26-99
25-05
31 09
S4"2'7
^9'35
35'i4
28-41
25-44
4646

407 s
31-88

43 '41
25-42
19-94
51-18
28-20
20-67
23-77
25-81
40-02
4576

3379
20-94

3574
2314
26-84
22-01
34-98
31-60
38-86
27-39
25-05

i5'43
23-20
29-44

m.
26-67
32-23
26-43
23-18
22-31
2869
49-18
26-91
32-75
2882
2329
44-01
37-86
30-71

35-51
22-02
16-91
44-91
29-01
22-52

24-35
24-72

35'23
41-19

30-58
15-21
39-21
19-71
23-40
22-05
31-92
32-67
36-94
22-09
23-77
25-22
21-78
3001

29-03
33-22
26-39
24-13

22-22
30-25

53'>7

31-76

34-56
30-90

24-64

48-98

39-68
33-31

41-35

24-48
20-25

53-32

30-61
27 66
25-63
2902

40-14
44-17

3 3 "43
20-48

43-99
22-72
25-59
24-17
31-13
31-73
39"37
25-40

31-37
26-45
27-10
36-77

Mean
Rain-
fall.

18i0-69.

28-27
32-95
26-23

24-77
2319

30-01
52-21

29-34

34-15
29-38
24-46
46-48

39'43
31-97
40-09
23-97

19-03
4980
29-27
23-62
24-58
2652
38-46

43-71
32-60
18-88

39-65
21-86
25-28
22-74
32-68
32-00

38-39
24-96
26-73
25-70
24-03
32-07

Ratio of Rainfall in

each decade to '60

years Mean.

1840-49. 1850-59. 1860-69.

103
iqi

99

109
108
104
104
100
103

97

104

100

103

100

108

106

105

103

96

88

97

97

104

105
104

III

90
106
106

97
107

99
101

110
94

99
96
92

Abstract of Table IV.

94

98

101

94
96
96

94
92
96
98
95
95
96
96
89

92
89

90

99
95
99
93
92
94
94
81

99
90

93
97
98
102
96
88
89
98
91
94

England and Wales, 19 stations

iScotland, 17 stations

'Ireland, 2 stations

Mean of the above

, Mean of 38 stations

33-23
29-52
26-32

2969
31-21

30-60
2769
25-90

28-06
29-05

33-28

30-73
31-93

31-98
32-07

32-37
29-31
28-05

29-91
30-78

102-8

100-9

94-0

99-2
1QI-5

94-7
94-0
92-5

93-7
94-3

From the above Table the remarkable similarity of the results obtained
by the two dissimilar modes of investigation is rendered so obvious that it

106

REPORT 1871.

is unnecessary to dwell further upon it. We now proceed to the second
part of our investigation, namely, to consider the distribution of the rain-
fall of the last decade, during which we have nearly four hundred perfect
sets of observations. As each set of observations comprises more than a
thousand entries, and the following Table contains the result of nearly half a
million observations, it is probable that it contains some slight percentage of
error, but we have no suspicdon of the existence of any which appreciably
affect the results.

The head-lines of the following Table sufficiently explain its contents.

Table Y. — Mean Rainfall at 325 Stations during the ten years 1860-69.

County.

Station.

Height of Rain-gauge.

Above
ground.

Above sea.

Mean
Annual
Eainfall,
1860-69.

Division I.
Middlesex . . .

Division II.

Surrey

>)

jj

J)

>>

Kent

>>

>)

J)

Sussex

>

>>

J)

J!

•7

>>

>>

J>

Hampshire . . .

>» • • •

>j . . .

„ . . ,

„ . . .

Berkshire . . .

» . . .

Division III.
Herts

Camden Town

Weybridge Heath

Croydon (Tanfield Lodge)
„ (Waldi-onhurst). .

Wimbledon

Kew Observatory

Hythe (Horton Park) ....

Tunbridge

Maidstone (Linton Park)

,, (Hunton Court)
West Thorney [Emsworth]
Chichester Museum ....

„ (Shopwyke) . .

„ (West Dean) . .

(Chilgrove)

Arundel ('Dale Park) ....
Hastings (High Wickham)
Maresfield Rectory

„ (Forest Lodge)
Isle of Wight (Osborne)
Fareham (North Brook). .

Peter sfield (Liss)

Selbome (The Wakes) . .

Aldershot

Reading (Englefield) ....
Long Wittenham

Bayfordbury

St. Albans (Gorhambury)

ft. in.

0 6

0 6

0 8
35 0

3 0

1 3
1 4
1 0
0 6
0 6
0 8

0 6

1 2

1 6

0 6
3 5

2 0

1 3
1 2
0 8
0 2

0 4
2 9

feet.

100

150
155
237
160

19
350

71
296

80

10?

50

61
250
284
316
212
250
259
172

26?

0

7

....

4

0

400

3

0

325

1

0

190

1

0

170

250

inches.

25-681

25-051
26-333
24-388
23-476
23-282
32-677
28-258
27-559
25-998
26-875
29-026
29-194
37-082
33-224
33-732
26-373
32-199
31-479
30-725
33-906
38-033
34-427
27-036
25-726
27-379

25011

27-849

ON THE RAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES.

107

Table V. (continued).

Countv.

Division III.

{continued).

Herts

Bucks
Oxford

Northampton

Station.

HemelHempstead(NashMills)

Tring (Cowroast)

Hitchin

Royston

High Wycomb

RadcliiFe Observatory . .
Banbury (High Street)

Althorp House

Wellingborough

Hunts I Kimbolton (Haraerton)

Bedford ' Cardington

Cambridge . .
>> ■ •

Division IV.
Essex

Suffolk

Norfolk
>>

. Ely (Stretham)

. ' Wisbeach (Harecroft House)

Epping

Witham (Dorward Hall) . .

Dunmow

Braintree (Booking)

Saffron Walden (Ashdon) . .

Hadleigh (Aldham)

Bury St. Ed. (Abbeygate) . .

„ (Westley) . . ."

„ (Barton Hall)

„ (Culford)

Diss (Dickleburgh)

Downham Market (Outwell)
„ ,, (Fincham) . .

Norwich Institution

„ (Cossey)

,, (Honingham Hall)

Fakenham (Egmere)

Holkham

Division V.
Wiltshire . . . .

Hunstanton

Baverstock

Salisbury Plain (Chiltern Ho.)
Swindon (Penhill)

Height of Rain-gauge.

Above
ground.

ft.

3

4
1
0
0
0
7
3
0
5
0
3
36
4
0

6
1
0
3
1
2

35
1
1
1
3
4
4

30
1
0
4
0
4
3

0
2
4
6
9
8
0
4
3
4
0
6
0
9
8

0
6
0
6
0
6
0
0
0
2
6
0
0
0
0
6
8
0
0
8

3 0

4 0
0 10

Above sea.

Mean
Annual
Rainfall,
1860-69.

feet.

250
395
238
266
225
207
350
310

170
106
109
142

11

360

20?
234
200

300

240?
216?
145?

84?
120

16
100

53

"ss

150
39
43
60

300
380?

inches.

26-388
27-594
23-922
23-569
25-705
26-129
26-222
23-349
24-092
23-132
22-487
21-760
18170
20-609
24-037

24-132
20-466
22-750
23-984
23-056
25-469
23-962
23-522
23-680
24-835
22-223
22-637
23-139
22-169
24-035
23-975
25-097
23-875
23-232
19-559

30-247
29-279
28-592

108

REPORT— 1871.

Table V. (continued).

Height of Kain-gauge.

Mean

County.

Station.

Above
ground.

Above sea.

Annual
Rainfall,
1860-69.

Division T

r

ft.

in.

feet.

inches.

(conti}

med^^

.

Dorset .

, . . Bridport

0

8

60

32-248

Devon .

. . . Plymouth (Saltram)

0

3

96

44-813

„ (Ham)

3

0

94

42-888

. . . Plympton StMary(Ridgeway)

0

6

116

48-646

. . . Tavistock (Library)

20

0

283

43-356

(West Street)

4

6

286

53-170

. . . Bovey Tracey

0

6

92

43-126

. . . Coryton Lew Down

6

0

445

45-941

. . . Exeter Institution

13

7

155

31-757 1

. . . CuUompton (Clyst Hydon) . .

1

0

200

32-694 :

... ,, (Bradninch)

1

6

234

38-060

. . . Houiton (Broadhemburj) . .

1

6

400

34-562

. . . South Molton (Castle Hill) . .

3

5

200

47-118

. . . Barnstaple

0

6

43

39-905

)7 ■ ■ • -

Cornwall . .

. . . Helstone

5

3

0

0
0
6

116

94

160

37-872
41-507
41-229

. . . Penzance

. . . Redruth (Tehidy Park)

5) • •

. . . Truro (Royal Institution) . .

40

0

56

42-877

... ,, (Penarth)

1

0

190

42-556

5? • •

. . . Bodmin (Castle Street) ....

2

6

338

47-708

)J • •

(Warleggan)

2

6

550

54-557

9f • '

. . . Wadebridge(TreharrockHo.)

2

9

303

39-301

Somerset . .

. . . Langport (Long Sutton) ....

0

10

50

28-574

?> ■ •

. . . E. Harptree (Sherborne Res.)

1

0

338

42-097

Division "V

^I.

Gloucester

. . . Bristol (Small Street)

25

0

40

30-549

))

(Phil. Inst.)

56

0

• • • •

32-955

)>

Clifton (South Parade)

0

6

192

34-085

))

. . . . Gloucester (Quedgeley) . . . .

0

10

50

27-421

9?

. . . . Cirencester (Further Barton)

1

2

420

32-612

Hereford . .

. . . . Ross (Archenfield)

1

0

250?

28-211

5> • •

. . . . ,, (Rocklands)

1

10

150

33-591

" . - '

. . . . Leominster (West Lodge) . .

1

0

250

27-105

Shropshire

. . . . Burford [Tenbury]

0

11

100?

26-744

5>

. . . . Ludlow (Knowbury)

0

4

1000?

28-530

»

Shiifnal (Haughtou Hall) . .

3

5

355

24-870

. . . . Shrewsbury

4

4

192

19-499

?5

?1

K ii* W If ^^^1*1. J

. . . . Oswestry (Hengoed)

6

0

470

35-647

Worcester
J)

. . . . Northwick Park

1
1

6
0

'l37

28-017
28-039

. . . . W^orcester (Lark Hill) . . . .

»>

. . . . Tenbury (Orleton)

0

9

200?

30-900

Warwick . .

. . . . Birmingham (Edgbaston) . .

1

3

510

30-562 !

ON THE RAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES.

109

Table V. (continued).

County.

Division VII.
Leicestershire .

Lincoln

Nottingham

Derby

DrvisioN VIII.
Cheshire

»

»

Lancashire

Station.

Height of Eain-gauge.

Above
ground.

Wigston

Thornton Reservoir . . . .

Waltham Rectory

Belvoir Castle

Grantham

Lincoln

Market Rasen

Gainsborough

Stockwith

Brigg

Grimsby

Barnetby

Brigg (Appleby Vic.) . . . .

New Holland

Southwell

Welbeck Abbey

Worksop

Retford

Derby

Chesterfield

Kilnarsh (Norwood) . . . .

Combs Moss

„ Reservoir

Chapel-en-le-Frith . . . ,
Woodhead

Bosley Minns ,

„ Reservoir

Macclesfield

„ (Park Green)
Bollington (Spond's Hill)

Whaley

Marple Aqueduct

„ Top Lock

Godley Reservoir

Mottram (Matley's Field)

Newton ,

Arnfield Reservoir ,

Rhodes Wood Reservoir . ,
Woodhead „

Denton „

Gorton ,,

ft. in.

0 6

2 8

1 0
1 0
0 6

3 6

3
3
3
3

3
3
3
3
3

6
6
6
6

15 0

3 6

0 9

3 6

0
0
6

1
4
3
3 6
6 0
3 6

6
6
6
6
6

6
6
6
1
6
6

3
3
3
2
3
3
3 6
3 6

3 6
3 6

i 0

0 10

AboTe sea.

feet.

220

420

560

237

179

26

100

76

21

16

42

51

60

18

200?

80
127
52
180
248
238
1669
710
965
878

1210
590
539
450

1279
602
321
543
500
399
396
575
520
680
324
263

Mean
Annual
Eainfall,
1860-69.

inches.

25-165
25-611
24-319
24-476
22-407
20-870
23-429
21-659
21-347
24-118
21-391
22-163
24-097
22-665
20-844
24-636
22-469
22-743
26-807
26-930
24-591
49-620
50-008
41-947
52-188

32-849
32-043
34-536
36-746
37-464
43-894
34-810
35-254
33-979
37-732
31-633
37-232
46-323
51-828
32-974
33-712

no

REPORT 18rl.

Table V. {continued).

County,

DiTisioN VIII
(^continued)

Lancashire

»
»

»
l>
>9
J»
>»
»>

»

»
»

Division IX.
Yorkshire, W. R.

>»
>»

>9
»

M
It
»

E. R,

N. R,

Station,

Manchester (Old Trafford) ,
„ (Ardwick) . . ,
„ (Piccadilly) . . ,

Fairfield

Oldham (Waterhouses) . , ,

„ (Gas-works)

„ (Strines Dale) . . ,
Bolton (The Folds)

„ (Belmont) ,

„ (Heaton)

Rochdale (Nagden Dane) ,

Ormskirk (Rufford)

Preston (Howick)

Blackpool (South shore) . , ,

Stonyhurst

Clitheroe (Downham Hall) .

Lancaster (Caton)

Cartmel (Holker)

Sheffield (Broomhall Park)

Redmires

Sheffield Station

TickhiU

Dunford Bridge

Saddleworth Station , . . .

Standedge

Huddersfield (Longwood)
„ (Rastrick) . ,

Halifax (Warley Moor) . ,
„ (WeU Head) . ,
„ (Midgeley Moor)
,, (Ovenden Moor)

Leeds (Leventhorpe Hall)
„ (Holbeck)

York (Bootham)

Settle

AmcKffe

Hull (Beverley Road) . , . .

Malton

Richmond (Aske) ...,.,

Height of Eain-gauge.

Above
ground.

ft, in.

2 7

3 0
40 0

6 0

3 6

6 0

6 0

3 6
0 0

0 0

1 6
0 8

0 6

1 8

0 8

1 6
1 6

4 8

2
4
3
2
3
5
2
4
1

0
0
6
0
6
0
0
6
3

0 11

2 0

32 0

0 6
40 0

2 9

3 10

1 0

2 8

Above sea.

feet.

106
154'
194
312
345
600
800
283
800
500
900
38
73
29
376
464
120
155

340

1100

188

61

954

640

1150

650

410

1425

487

1350

1375

90

127

50

498

750

11

75

550

Mean
Annual
RainftU,
1860-69.

inches.

34-727
32-597
36-775
40-898
36-133
37-123
36007
48-981
56-610
44-210
44-132
34-999
38-303
32-994
48-560
44-786
43-944
45-625

31-276
39-684
28-159
23-990
56-177
41-968
53-700
34-008
32-121
46-330
33-313
50-000
46-090
23-261
22-853
24-479
41-349
60-075
25-024
27-455
31-105

ON THE RAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES.

Ill

Table V. (continued).

Countj.

Division X.

Durham

Northumberland

Station.

Cumberland

Westmoreland .

Division XI.

Glamorgan . .
Cardigan ....
Brecknock . .
Radnor ....
Flint

Denbigh . . .
Isle of Man .
Guernsey .
Alderney. . .

Division XII.
"Wigton

Kirkcudbright .
Dumfries

Height of Kain-gauge.

Above
ground.

Above sea.

ft.

0
0
0
0
0

1

9
3
6
4
6
0

Bishopwearmouth

Allenheads

Shotley HaU

By well

Wylam Hall

North Shields (Wallsend)

„ (Rosella Place)

Stamfordham

Hexham (Parkend)

Lilburn Tower

Seathwaite

Ullswater (Watermillock) .
Bassenthwaite (Mirehouse) .
Cockermouth (Whinfell HaU)
Carlisle (Bunker's Hill) .
Kendal (Kent Terrace) .
Windermere (The Howe)
Appleby

WALES AND THE ISLANDS.

Cardiff (Ely)

Lampeter

Hay (Pen-y-maes)

Rhayader (Cefnfaes) . . .
Hawarden [Chester] . . .
Holywell (Maes-y-dre) .
Llandudno (Warwick House)
Point of Ayre

1

0

0

4

6

0

1

0

3

6

0

7

2

0

6

0

4

6

1

2

1

0

Mean
Annual
Rainfall,
1860-69.

Harbour Works

Roxburgh

SCOTLAND.

Mull of Galloway

Stranraer (South Cairn) . . ,

CorsewaU

Little Ross

Cargen [Dumfries] ,

Dumfries (March Hill Cott.)
Westerkirk (Carlesgill) . .

Wanlockhead

Kelso (Springwood Park)

1 4

feet.

1369
312
87
96
100
124
400
276
300
422
720
310
265
184
146
470
442

209

3 0

45

4 6

420

1 0

317

2 0

880

0 7

270

5 0

400

0 6

99

3 4

27?

12 0

204

10 0

48

3

3

130?

0

4

80

0

5

70

6'

4

1330

1

0

130

inches.

20-247
51-160
28-494
28-874
26-900
26-640
26-065
27-637
33-550
28-657
154-046
59-910
53-756
57-366
27-616
53-322
87-923
35-994

42-016
45-183
31-680
44-980
26-443
24-430
31-004
30-609
37-177
28-624

27-656
49-603
37-027
26-981
44-372
37045
60-092
66-628
24-663

112

REPORT 1871.

Table V. (continued).

County.

Division XIII.

Selkirk . .
Peebles . .
Berwick . .

j> • •

Haddington

Edinburgh

Division XIV.
Lanark

Ayr

3, . . . .

Renfrew

Division XV

Dumbarton . .
Stirling ....

Bute

Argyll

>)

)>

»

»

j>

)>

>f

»>

j>

Station.

Bowhill

Penicuick (jST. Esk Reservoir)
Lauder (Thirlestane Castle).
Dunse (Mungo's Walls) . . .
Prestonkirk (Smeaton) . . .
Haddington (Millfield) . . .

East Linton

Cobbinshaw Reservoir . . .
Inveresk

Hamilton (Auchinraith) . . .

„ (BotbweU Castle),
Glasgow (Ccssuock Park) .

,, (Observatory) . . .

Baillieston

Shotts (Hillend House) . . .
Ayr (Auchendrane House) .

Largs (Mansfield)

Gorbals, W. W. (Ryat Lynn)

(Waulk Glen)

„ (Middleton)...

Meams (Nether Place) ....

Greenock (Hamilton Street)

Loch Long (Arddaroch) . . . .

Falkirk (Kerse)

Stirling (Polmaise Gardens)

Pladda

Castle Toward

Lochgili^head (Callton Mor).

Inverary Castle

Appin (Airds)

Ardnamurchan

Cantire, Mull of

Campbeltown (Devaar) . . . ,

Rhinns of Islay

Lismore (Mousedale)

Mull, Sound of

Tyree (Hynish) ,

Height of Eain-gauge.

Above
ground.

ft. in.

11 0

0 6

0 3

0 6

13 0

4 0

0 3

0 7

2 0

4 9

18 0

4 4

0 1

0 3

7 0

2 3

0 6

0 5

0 5

0 5

0 6

0 6

0 10

1
0
3
4
4
0
0
3

0
2
3
0
6
1
3
6

3 4

3 0

3 4

0 6

Above sea.

feet.

537

1150
558
267
100
140

90
863

90

150
146

29
180
230
620

96

30
310
280
550
360

50

80

"12

55

65

65

30

15

82?
279?

75?

74?

37?

12?

Mean
Annual
Rainfall,
1860-69.

inches.

33-033

38-014
29-977
28-494
23-263
25-630
23-767
37-450
29-016

31-951

28-885
37-958
44-411
46-471
33-445
44-825
48-920
47-801
49-845
56-682
50143
66-156

78-321
32-960
41-300
40-141
54-554
54-253
67-370
63-640
45-594
44-166
47-312
33-434
46-215
72-159
79-992

ON THE RAINFALL OP THE BRITISH ISLES.

lis

Table V. (continued).

County.

Division XVI.

Kinross

Fife

)> ...

Perth ....."..'.

j>

J)

jj

j»

5)

if

5)

>>

>)

Forfar

>>

>>

>>

Division XVII.
Kincardine . . . .

Aberdeen

Banff

Station.

Height of Eain-gauge.

Above
ground.

Division XVIII

Ross & Cromarty
>> }>

Inverness . .

5>

Lochlcven Sluice

Balfour

Leven (Nookton)

Isle of May

Aberfoyle

Dunblane (Kippenross) . . . .

Deanston House

Lanrick Castle

Bridge of Tiu-k

Auclitcrarder House

„ (Trinity Gask)

Loch Earnhead (Stronvar) . .

Perth Academy .

Scone Palace

Barry

Craigton

Kettins

Hill Head

Arbroath

Brechin (The Burn)

Girdlcness

Braemar

Aberdeen (Rose Street) ...

Alford (Castle Newe)

Kiunaird Head

Buchanness

Gordon Castle

Isle of Lewis (Stornoway) .
„ (Beruera) . . .

Cromarty

Isle of Skye (Oronsay) . . .

„ (Kylcakin) . . .

„ (Raasay)

„ (Portree)

Barrahead

S. Uist (Ushenish)

Harris (Island Glass)

Rona

CuUoden House

ft. in.

0 10

0 6

0 6

2 2

0 6

0 4

0 4

0 0

0 6

2 3

0 1

64
2
0
0
1
0
2

1

0

1
3
0
3

5
6
3
3
0
3
0

0 6

4 7

0
4

3 4

1 6

3 4

0 G

3 4

0 6

0 2

1 4

8
0
4
4

0 6
3 0

Above sea.

Mean
Annual
Kainfall,
1800-09.

feet.

"l27

80
182

GO
100
130

"276
162
133

"83

80
3.5

481

218

570

60

235

86

1114

95

"64

"(30

31?
15

28
15?
3?

80

80
G40?
157?

50?
. 20
104

inches.

35-780
28-589
28-988
20-482
61-820
36-165
43-991
48-805
61-890
34-315
35-324
82-434
23-584
29-182
29-729
34-876
33-172
35-187
29-050

34-910
22-718
33-404
29-433
33-500
24-168
25-588
29-192

31-792
68-027
25-941
72-359
82-087
77-120
104-261
31-72G
43-905
31-129
39-470
27-084

1871.

114

REPORT 1871.

Table V. (continued).

County.

Station.

Division XIX.

Sutherland . . .

If • • •
Caithness

5>

>J

Orkney

J)

>>

»

»

?j

Shetland

»

Division XX.
Cork

Golspie (Dunrobin Castle) .

Cape Wrath

Wick (Nosshead)

Dunnethead

Pentland Skerries

Hoy (Graemsay East) . . .

„ .( „ West) . . .

j Shapinsay (Balfour Castle) .

j Pomona (Sandwick)

Sauda (Start Point)

liorth Eonaldshay

Sumburghead

Bressay Lighthouse

Height of Eain-gauge.

Waterford
Clare . . .

Division XXI.

Queen's County-
King's County

lEELAND.

Cork (Royal Institution)

Fermoy ,

Waterford (Newtown) . . ,
KiUaloe

Portarlington

Tullamore

Wicklow Bray (Fassaroe)

Dublin Black Eock (Eockville)

Division XXII.
Fermanagrh . . . .

EnniskOIen (Florence Court)

Armagh i Armagh Observatory

Antrim

Belfast (Queen's College)
(Linen Hall) . . . .

Above
ground.

ft. in.

0
3
3
3
3
3

3
6
4
6
3
4

0 6

2 0
0 6

3 4
3 4
0 4

Above sea.

.50

0

4"

6

5

0

1

2

3

0

5

0

29

0

11

0

1

5

/

4

4

0

feet.

6
355?
127?
300?

72?

27?

37?

50

78

29?

21?
265?

60

70

60
123

240

235

250

90

300

208

68

12

Mean
Annual
Eainfall,
1860-69.

inches.

27-692
39-371
24-699
25-401
28-763
39-007
32-693
32-408
38-853
31-371
31-015
26-454
36-488

34-771
37-207
40-669
47-654

36-8.57
27-938
41-822
27-090

44-368
32-014
34-225
36-767

Before accepting these decennial averages (1860-69) as data indicative of
the distribution of rain over the country, we have to offer a few prefatory
remarks. The difference between the amount collected by any two rain-
gauges depends on at least four separate and distinct conditions, three of
which must be ascertained and corrected for before the fourth can be accu-
rately determined.

The conditions are : — (1) length of series of observations ; (2) correction for
secular change ; (3) height of gauges above ground.

(1) Even if there were no other evidence in existence than the accompany-

ON THE KAINFALL OF THE BRITISH ISLES. 115

ing diagram (fig. 1) of the fluctuations of rainfall, we feel that it would suffi-
ciently prove the impossibility of determining accurately the rainfall at any
place except by observations continued over a long series of years at that
place, or by difterentiation from some proximate long-continued series.

(2) It does not follow that simultaneous observations, even for ten years,
giving for example a mean difference between two stations of five inches,
prove that the rainfall at the one station is greater than the other by that
amount, although if they are not very distant the one from the other it
would probably be a safe assumption.

(3) Before mean results can be given with any pretensions to accuracy and
finality, they must be corrected for the elevation of the rain-gauge above the
ground.

The above remarks sufaciently show that the mere average of the fall of
rain measured during ten or more years does not necessarily give the true
mean rainfall at that place.

Let us take as an example the highest amount recorded in the Table
(Seathwaite), which had during the ten years (1860-69) an average of
154 inches ; many persons would say at once that tliat was therefore the
mean rainfall at that station. It is, however, nothing like it. From
Table II. and fig. 2 we see that the rainfall over England, generally,
during those ten yeaz's was 1-5 per cent, above the average, upon which
evidence we are bound to reduce the observed mean in that proportion,
and then the average becomes 152 inches instead of 154. Even this, how-
ever, is not correct ; for we pointed out in condition (2) that the same
years, or groups of years, are not similarly wet in aU parts of the country.
Referring, therefore, to Table lY. we find that at the nearest station to
Seathwaite, Kendal, the decade in question was 7 per cent, above the thirty-
year mean ; hence, on the supposition that the Kendal values are applicable
to this station, we have to reduce 154 inches by 7 per cent, instead of by
1-5 per cent., and hence the probable mean comes out 141-8 inches.

Now most fortunately we can test the accuracy of this calculation in three
ways.

(1) The mean fall at Seathwaite in the previous decade was 126-98 ; from
the Kendal observations the fall in that decade was 10 per cent, less than

(126-98 \

— ^—=141-09 \ we find the probable

out 141-1 from this decade, and 141-8 from that of 1860-69. They thus
agree within less than an inch, or one half per cent.

(2) The fall at Seathwaite has now been continuously observed for twenty-six
years, viz. from 1845 to 1870 inclusive ; the mean of the whole twenty-six
years' observations is 140-03.

(3) This value, corrected according to the Table in ourl866Eeport, becomes
141-44, agreeing exactly with that indicated by the decades 1850-59 and
1860-69.

This example proves three points :- — (1) the great degree of accuracy which
is attainable by proper methods ; (2) the care requisite to secure it ; (3) the
serious errors inseparable from the use of mere arithmetical averages without
reference to secular changes.

These observations, however, must of course be taken as general results,
and not be construed as having any bearing on the relative rainfall even of
proximate stations, the rainfall of which will vary considerably according to
local circumstances.

Hence it will be seen that thepi-obable average at Seathwaite is 141 inches

i2

mean comes

116 REPORT 1871.

instead of 154, or 7 per cent. less. A similar, but generally less correction,
may be required for other stations. The figures in Table V. must not there-
fore be considered as showing the mean fall at the several stations, but only
as approximations generally pretty close. The data in our possession, if cor-
rected in accordance with the method explained, would afford more accurate
results, but the investigation is altogether beyond our present resources.

Large tracts of Ireland, and even of Scotland, are still without observers ;
much has recently been done to remedy these deficiencies, but there are still
many localities where observations are very much wanted ; we shall gladly
receive any off'ers of assistance from those who have residences or property in
those parts, and our Secretary wUl readUy advise them as to instruments.

Third Report on the British Fossil Corals. By P. Martin Duncan^
F.R.S.f F.G.S., Professor of Geology in King's College, London.

Introduction. — There can be no doubt that the palaeontology of the Madrc-
poraria of the Palaeozoic strata is in a condition of profound confusion.
When these Reports were commenced, the veiy excellent descriptions and
classification of the Palaeozoic Corals by MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime,
strengthened by those of M. de Eromentel, appeared to have satisfied pa-
heontologists, and they were received and adopted without much demur.
But during the last three or four years a series of more or less important
attacks has been made upon the views of those distinguished authors ;
consequently opinions respecting many important matters in the palaeontology
of the Palaeozoic corals are in a very unsatisfactory state.

L. Agassiz, A. Agassiz, and now Count Pourtales would remove the Ta-
bulata from the list of Madreporaria. Mr. Kent and I doubt the propriety
of establishing the Tabulata as a group. Count Keyserling demurred years
since at receiving the long se])taless Tubulata amongst the Madreporaria,
and, after due examination, I agree with him in relegating them to the Al-
cyonaria.

Working amongst the Rugosa, I have shown that they do not invariably
characterize Palaeozoic strata, for some of the types have persisted, and no
reasonable doubt cau be entertained concerning the descent of the Jurassic
Coral-fauna fro'n the Palaeozoic.

The genus Palceocyclns has been shown not to belong to the Fungidac,
but to the Cyathophyllidae. Genera with the hexameral arrangement of
septa have been found in Carboniferous and Devonian strata.

Lindstrom's interesting researches respecting the operculated condition of
some Palajozoic corals require most careful study and much following up,
and the assertion of L. Agassiz respecting the hydroid relationship of those
Eugosa which have tabulae demands further inquiry *.

Ludwig, of Darmstadt, has added to the confusion by not acknowledging
the received classification in the least ; and in his able enthusiasm (anti-

* G-. Lindstrcim, pamphlet translated by M. Lindstrcim from the original Swedish,
' Geological Magazine,' 1866, p. 356. He notices tliat Guettard first described an oper-
culum in a rugose coral, and that then Steenstrup saw one in a Cyathophyllum mUratum.
Lindstrom produces evidence respecting the genera Gonlophylhim, Calceola, Zaphrcntis,
Hallia, and Favosites (see also p. 406 et seq.).

ON THE BKITISH FOSSIL COKALS. 117

Gallican enougli) he alters generic and specific names, employing sesqui-
pedalian Greek, and even absorbing the original authors (' Pateontogra-
phica,' H. von Meyer, 1866).

Thus he confuses Stromatopora concentrica, Goldfuss, Avith the Madre-
poraria, and calls it Lioplacocyathus concentricus. Fortunately Ludwig gives
a plate of it (tab. Ixxii. fig. 1), and thus proves the total absence of all
structures which differentiate the Madreporaria. After thus dignifying a
rhizopod, we may be prepared for any thing.

The same author figures a form which is clearly that of Heliolites porosa,
and calls it by the extraordinary name of Astroplucocyatlms solidus, Ldwg.
It appears that this naturalist studied this eminently cellular type from a
cast, hence the term solidus. Again, in tab. Ixxi. fig. 2, Liidwig delineates a
good specimen of Cyatlwphyllum hexagonum, Goldfuss, 1826, and with sur-
passing coolness names it Astroplilceothylacus vulyaris, Ldwg. He then con-
founds a species oi Lithostrotion and Smithia Ifennali, E, & H., in one genus,
Astrophloeocyclus, Ldwg.

The student of the Silurian corals will be surprised perhaps to find that,
according to Ludwig, Hah/sites catenularia, Ed. & H., the Catenipora esclia-
roides of Lonsdale, is transformed into PiycJiophJcvohpas catenidaria, Ludwig,
doubtless on the principle that having found such a very distinguished generic
title, the compiler of it has the right to eclipse the discoverers of the form.
Chatetes, which some of us consider to belong to the Alcyonarian group, as
it has DO septa, Ludwig decorates with the title " LiopTdoeocyathus."

In his sixty-ninth plate, fig. 5, there is a very good representation of a
coral ordinarily known as Accrvidana Troscheli, Ed. & H. This form was
inaccurately described by Goldfuss, who called it CyathopjhyUum ananas. Now
the authorship is settled by this Alexander, who cuts the knot by claimiug
the species as his own, under the title of AstrocJiarfodiscus ananas, Ludwig !

Then Pleurodictyum prohUmaticum, Goldfuss, is altered into Tceniocharto-
cychis planus, Ldwg.

To render matters easier to the student, Ludwig associates Acervidarla
liLvurians and Cyathophylhan helianfhoides in one genus, Astroblascodiscus,
and of course places his name after the species. Then CyathophyUum ccespi-
tosum becomes, under the same lexicographic hands, Astrocalanocyathiis
co'spitosiis, Ludwig I In another place CyatliophyJlum helianthoides, Gold-
fuss, just mentioned under the term Astrohlascodiscus, appears as Astro-
discus. Lonsdale's CystipTiylhim cylindriciim is turned into Liocyathus ca-
tinifer, Ldwg.

This author, moreover, appears to hold a brief against the belief in the
quadrate arrangement of the septa in the Rugosa, and, in a manner which is
excessively arbitrary and artificial, terms such and such septa primaries, so
as to reduce the cycles to sixes. In spite of the evidence of great industry
given by Ludwig, I cannot accept his classification, nor do I find his hypo-
thetical septal readings consistent with facts. Nevertheless, Ludwig has
contributed to our knowledge of Permian corals, and has discovered some
species of genera hitherto supposed to characterize the Carboniferous forma-
tion in tlie Upper Devonian of German}'.

The nature of this Ueport must therefore be very different to those already
presented to the Association. Those reports relating to the Corals of the
Mesozoic strata were essentiallj' founded upon observed facts, and upon data
which had been more or less before the geological world for years; the
generalizations embodied in them were established i;pon very satisfactory-
details. But in the present instance there is much uncertainty ; there are

118 REPORT 1871.

vast accumulations of details to be worked out without the existence of a
satisfactory classification, and, in fact, the whole subject of the Palaeozoic
Madreporaria is in too transitional a state for an exhaustive report to be made
upon them.

In presenting this Report, therefore, I hope the Association will consider
that I have not yet completed my task, and that it will allow me to continue
my work and to present other reports when occasion offers. No fxirther
grant will be required, as the future reports will deal more with the results
of other labourers than with my own.

The present Report is divided into four parts,

I. The consideration of the alliances of the Neozoic and the Palaeozoic
Coral-faunas.

II. The classification of the Perforata.

III. The classification of the Tabulata.

IV. The Eugosa.

In order to avoid useless repetition of well-known facts, I have referred
to them by giving their bibliography, except when they are contained in
inaccessible works.

I. The Palaeozoic corals of Great Britain have been the subject of many
admirable works ; they have been largely treated of in the ' Monograph of
the British Fossil Corals' (Palaeontographical Society) by MM. Milne-Edwards
and Jules Haime, and by M'Coy in Sedgwick's great work. Phillips,
Lonsdale, King, Sam. "Woodward, Parkinson, Martin, Fleming, Portlock,
Sowerby, and Pennant have described species in their well-known works,
and Kent, James Thomson, and I have contributed some information on
the subject of the Scottish corals. But, with the exception of the labours of
the last three persons, the literature of the Palaeozoic Corals will be found very
accessible in the monograph already noticed ; any omissions, and a con-
siderable number of new species will be published in my Supplement to that
monograph, which I trust will appear year after year, especially as the
Supplement to the Mesozoic Corals is now complete (Palasoutographical
Society).

The vertical range and the horizontal distribution of the species of corals
have been worked out by llobert Etheridge, F.E.S., in a work which is now
in course of publication (Cat. of Brit. Fossils).

MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime classified the British Palaeozoic
Corals amougst the sections Aporosa, Tabulata, Tubulosa, and Rugosa. The
great section Perforata is not represented in the British strata, but it is in
the equivalent American beds.

The only representative of the Aporosa in their classification was one of
the Fungidoe, Palceocyclus being the genus. It is a SUurian form, and no
others of the family have been discovered in the other Palaeozoic rocks. The
genus has been the subject of a memoir in the Philosophical Transactions,
1867, where its rugose affinities are pointed out, and its cyathophyUoid na-
ture also. But the Aporosa are nevertheless represented in the Devonian and
Carboniferous rocks by the genera Battersby'm and Heterophyllia (Phil.
Trans. 1867).

The alliances of these forms and of some of the Rugosa with the Jurassic
Coral-fauna have been noticed in my Supplement to the Brit. Foss. Corals
(Pal. Soc), part "Liassic," and in the Essay in the Phil. Trans, of 1867*.

* The PALASTRiEACE^. Genera, £aiiershi/ia and Heterophyllia (Phil. Trans. 1867, p. 643
et seq., P. M. Duncan). — The so-called coenenchyma of Batter&hyia incsgualis, Ed. & H.,
is like that of Baiter &hyia grandis, nobis, and B. gemmans, nobi?, It is really nothing

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 119

I do not consider that the Tubulosa belonged to the Madreporaria, but
that they were Mcyonarians.

It is very certain that some Aporose, Perforate, and Rugose corals have
tabulag, and that their existence cannot remove the forms from their re-
ceived zoological position into the separate section of Tabulata.

Thus the well-known Aporose coral of the deep sea, Lopliohelia pro-

move, than portions of Stromatojiora which enclose the corallites and grow simultaneously
with them.

I have altered the generic characters of Battershyia, in consequence of a careful exami-
nation of the old and the two new species. It is as follows : — Corallum fasciculate and
branching ; corallites tall, cylindrical, unequal in size and distance ; septa numerous and
following no apparent cyclical order.

Endotheca very abundant : it is vesicular, and there are no tabulre. Epitheca, costa?,
and coenenchyma wanting. The wall is stout, and the septa spring from wedge-shaped
processes. The columellary space is occupied by vesicular endotheca. Gemmation extra-
calicular and calicular from buds having only five septa.

There are three species : —

Battersbyia inrequalis, I>uncan. I Devonian Limestone ;

grandis, Duncan. \ found in pebbles,

gemmans, Duncan. J and not in situ.

In Battershyia gemmans the buds which develop more than five septa grow into coral-
lites, which are destined to bud again from the external wall, and the buds which de-
velop five septa produce other buds from their interseptal loculi ; the buds thus developed
resemble the corallites with more than thi-ee septa. This curious alternation of gemma-
tion has not been noticed in any other genus.

The genera Battershyia and Heterophyllia (Phil. Trans, he. cit.) have much in common.
They have a stout wall, a vesicular and dissepimental endotheca, delicate septa, very irre-
gular in their number, and neither tabular epitheca nor a quaternary septal arrangement.

The genus Batfcrsbyia has nothing to ally it to the Eugosa or the Tabulata. Hetero-
fhyllia lias in some of its species the solitary septum or vacancy whicli is so often observed
in the Cyathophyllida^. Its costal wall and endotheca connect it with the Mesozoic and
recent Astrseidoe.

The singular septal development of Battershyia is witnessed in the fasciculate Liassic
Astrajidse. The pentameral arrangement of the Battersbyian septa is not unique, for
Acanthoeoenia Bathieri, D'Orb., of the Neocomian has only five septa, and so have the
species of Pentaccenia, all of which are from the same great formation. The proper Liassic
and some of the Lower Oolitic Thecosmiliaj and CalamophylUiB represent and are allied
by structure to Battershyia. The highly specialized characters of the Heterophyllise, espe-
cially of H. mirabilis, could hardly be perpetuated during great and prolonged emigra-
tions, so that the genus appears to be without representatives in the secondary rocks. Its
alliance to Battershyia, however, is evident enough.

The genus HeterophylUa, MCoy, was examined by me in 1867, and the study of several
new species of it rendered a fresh diagnosis requisite.

The following description of the diagnosis appeared in my essay on the genera Hetero-
phyUia, &c., already noticed: —

"The corallum is simple, long, and slender. The gemmation takes place around the
calicular margin, and is extracalicular. The septa are either irregular in number and
arrangement, or else are six in number and regular. The cost« are well developed, and
may be trabecular, spined, and flexuous. The wall is thick ; there is no epitheca, and the
endotheca is dissepimental."

The genus may be subdivided into a group with numerous septa, and a group with six
septa.

In the first the rugose type is faintly, and in the last the hexameral arrangement is well
observed.

The dense wall and the dissepimental endotheca prove that the type of the Mesozoic
Coral-fauna was foreshown.

The endotheca varies in quantity in the different species, and it resembles the tabular
arrangement ; but even when this is the ease and the cross structures are well developed
and numerous, they do not stretch over the axial space, so as to shut out cavities
as if they were floors ; they do not close in the whole of the visceral and interlocular

120 REPOKT— 1871.

I'tfera, Pallas, sp., may have some of its corallites subdivided by perfect
tabula) ; the species of Cijathopliora of the Oolites also ; yet it would be a most
objectionable and improper proceeding to remove these genera from their
recognized alliances. I found an Astrcvopora in the Museum at Liver-
pool with tabula; ; and Mr. Kent has pointed out the perforate affinities of
Koninclcia and of the form he has published. Some Eugosse have perfect
tabula;, others have them not ; and in Ci/clojjJiyllum and Glisiophyllum dis-
sepiments exist in some parts of a corallum and not in others, where they
are replaced by tabulae. This interesting fact may be gleaned from James
Thomson's sections taken from the Scottish corals.

JSTevertheless there are forms which are essentially tabulate, and not rugose,
but which, so far as their hard and septal structures are concerned, may
be aporose in one instance and perforate in another ; for instance, Cohwmaria
and Favosites. These forms may still p»'ovisionalhj be considered Tabulata.

Alliances. — The Lower Cretaceous and Neocomiau corals appear to connect
the oldest and the newest faunas, and to form an excellent starting-point
both for the study of the Tertiary as well as for the Palasozoic forms. It
will be readily observed that the succession of genera and species from the
lower Cretaceous horizon to the present day is gradual ; and that although
many forms died out, still the general appearance of the consecutive faunas,
such as those of the Middle and Upper Cretaceous, the Nummulitic, the Oii-
gocene, the Miocene, the Pliocene, and of the two great faunas of the present
day, presents a remarkable similarity of Avhat is usually called " facies."
The similarity between the Lower Cretaceous fauna and that of the Miocene
has been treated of elsewhere *, and the analogies of the mid-tertiary corals
and those of the Pacific also. Moreover since the last Eeport was read the
distinction between reef, deep-sea, and littoral corals has been more satisfac-
torily established, and the reason why consecutive faunas upon the same
areas could not possibly be identical, even as regards the genera, has been
explained f.

As the Coral-faunas are studied from those of recent date backwards in
time, extinct forms are met with which gradually fill up the spaces in the
very natural received classification, and it is perfectly evident that the existing
species were foreshadowed in the past. A great number of existing species
lived in the so-called Pliocene, and not a few in the Miocene %. Eeuss's
admirable researches amongst the vast reefs which are of an intermediate age
between the Flysch and the typical coral districts of the Miocene age, have
carried back the homotaxis of the existing coral areas to a time which has
hardly been recognized by British geologists, but whose fossils are clearly

cavities in a horizontal plane. In some species the dissepiments are curved, and are as
incomplete as ■when they are more or less horizontal in others, and vesicular endotheca
exists, more or less, in nearly all the forms.

There are no true tabula^ and the dissepiments do not interfere in any way with the
jiassage of the septa from the lowest part of the corallum to the calice.
There are eight species of HdcrophyUia : —

Heteropbyllia grandis, M'Coy. Heterophyllia M'Coyi, Duncan.

— — ornata, M'Coy. Lyelli, Duncan.

■ granulata, Duncan. mirabilis, Duncan.

angulata, Duncan. Sedgwicki, Duncan.

The first two are found in the Carboniferous limestone of Derbyshire, and the otliers in
the Scottish Carboniferous strata (see Phil. Trans. 1867, p. 043 et seq.).

* West-Indian Foss. Corals (P. M. Duncan, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. sxiv. p. 28).

t Coral Faunas of Europe (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. xxvi. p. 51 ct seq.).

I Corals of Porcupine Expedition (Proc. Eoyal Society, xviii. p. 289).

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 121

represented at Brockenhurst. In tlie great reefs of the Custcl-Gomberto
district there are the remains of a larger coral-fauna than that which now
exists in the Caribbean Sea ; and although a profound Plysch exists between
them and the reefs in the Oberburg distiict, indicating great oscillations of
the area and vast changes in the life of the time, still the genera which con-
tribute so largely to the formation of modern reefs are found represented in
abundance in the lowest reefs, which clearly belong to the Nummulitic period.

Our Eocene corals and those found at Brockenhurst are the stunted off-
shoots of the faunas which flourished at Oberburg and in the Vicentine, but
nevertheless some of their species are closely allied to those of much later
geological date.

Withoiit the assistance of the labours of Reuss and D'Achiardi zoophytolo-
gists could not have imagined that the well-known coral-faunas of the Hala
Mountains of Sindh, of the Nummulitic deposits of the Maritime Alps and
Switzerland, and of the London and Paris basins were but fractions of a
fauna which was probably richer in species than any modern coral tract ; and
this welcome aid proves the impropriety of neglecting foreign palaeontology,
even when writing reports like the present, and which treat of the produc-
tions of the rocks of a small area. The impossibility of comparing with any
satisfaction the Nummulitic coral-fauna and that of the Upper Chalk is
obvious ; because the NummuHtic fauna, so far as it is known to us, was
either a reef or a comparatively shallow-water one, whilst the corals of the
Upper Chalk were dwellers in a deep sea, where reef species cannot and
could not exist. We must seek to compare the Upper Cretaceous corals with
the deep-sea forms of the Nummulitic, but unfortunately they are not yet
found*.

The Lower Cretaceous corals of Great Britain were the contemporaries of
the reef-builders of the Gosau and equivalent formations, and thus deep-sea
and reef species were contemporaneous, as they are at the present time, but they
were separated by wide distances. The comparison of the reef-fauna and that
of the deep sea is in this instance as futile as it would be at the present time ;
but we may compare the reef-fauna of Gosau with that of the Nummulitic,
Oligocene, Miocene, and existing reefs, and not without benefit and good
results, for there are persistent species which unite the whole together.

A comparison may also be instituted between the deep-sea coral-faunas of
the Chalk and those which flourished at corresponding depths in the succeed-
ing geological epochs. Thus, thanks to Messrs. Wyville Thomson, Carpenter,
and Jeffreys, I have been able to assert the extraordinary homologies between
the deep-sea Cretaceous corals and those which now exist to the west of these
islands. These results are being published by the Zoological Society. The
present arrangement of coral genera in and about reefs was foreshadowed as
early as the Eocene, and such assemblages of genera existed in those old reefs as
would characterize the coral life of atoUs in the Caribbean Sea and in the raised
reefs of the Pacific Ocean. The genera Madrepora, Alveopora, Porites, Helias-
traa, and Millepora were represented in the Oberburg, and their species con-
stitute the bulk of existing reefs. It is important to be thus able, from the
labours of MM. Milne-Edwards, J. Haime, and Reuss, to determine the
existence of Perforate and Tabulate corals in the earliest tertiaries, for inter-
esting links are thus offered to the paleeontologist by which the older and
the newer faunas are connected. Such researches diminish the importance
of the break between the early Tertiary fauna and the present, and also, to a

* See P. M. Duncan on a new Coral from the Crag, and on the persistence of Cretaceous
types in the deep sea (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. sxvii. pp. 369 & 434).

122 KEPORT— ]871.

certain extent, that between the Palaeozoic and recent faunas. Thus the find-
ing of species of the great Perforate genus Madrepora in the Oberburg
carries the genus a step further back than their discovery in the OHgocene
of Brockenhurst, and when taken into consideration with the presence of
the StephanophylUa, a perforate simple coral, in the Crag, Eocene, and Lower
Cretaceous deposits, and with Actinads, a highly developed compound form,
in the Lower Cretaceous strata of Gosau, the immense break between the
next form of the family and the existing is materially diminished. The next
form is not met with until the Carboniferous deposits of Indiana are reached
in a downward course ; and we owe to the late Jules Haime the knowledge
of the structures of PaJceacis cimeiformis, Haime, MS., from Spurgeon Hill,
Indiana. It is indeed remarkable that the vast eoralliferous strata which
intervene between the Carboniferous and the Lower Chalk should not present
a satisfactory proof of the existence of those members of the existing great
reef -building family. There is a curious fact which may be taken for what
it is worth in considering the absence of genera which have been represented
in some ancient deposits and which have not been found in intermediate
strata. Thus the existing West-India reefs contain abundance of the species
of the genus Madrepora and Millepora ; indeed they, with the forms of
Porites, constitute the bulk of the formations. Now, although Porites is
common in the Miocene reefs of the area, the others are very rare, for the
coral structures were principally composed of tabulate forms and Heliastra?ans.
Yet we know that before the Miocene reefs flourished, Madreporae and MUle-
pora) were common enough ; they were living all the while in other coral
tracts. But the break between the Palaeozoic and the Lower Cretaceous forms
cannot be bridged over without investigating the value of the classification
which separates the most closely allied subfamily of the Perforata, although
the Perforata are found in the Great Oolite.

II. The Perforata characterized by a porous ccenenchyma and other tissues
present many modifications of their hard parts. Some approach the Aporosa,
and others would hardly be considered corals by the uninitiated on account of
the sponge-like reticulations of the skeleton. The genus Madrepora is defined
as follows by MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime : —

The coraUum is compound and increases by budding. The cojnenehj'ma
is abundant, spongy, reticulate, slightly or not at aU distinguishable from
the walls, which are very porous. The visceral chambers are subdivided by two
principal septa, which meet by their inner margins, and are more developed
than the others.

The septa, especially the two largest, although perforated, are continuous,
and very often lamellar.

MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime distinguish the Poritidae in the fol-
lowing manner : —

The coraUum is compound, and entirely formed of a reticulate ccenenchyma,
which is formed of trabeculae and is porous. The corallites are fused
together by their walls, or by an intermediate ccenenchyma, and they multiply
by budding, which is usually extracalicular and submarginal.
^ The septal apparatus is always more or less distinct, but never completely
lamellar, and is formed by a series of trabeculae, which constitute by their
union a sort of lattice-work. The walls present the same structure as the
septa. The visceral chambers sometimes have rudimentary dissepiments,
but are never divided by tabulae.

This family is divided into two subfamilies —

1. The Poritinae, with a rudimentary or absent ccenenchyma.

2. The Montiporinae, with a well-developed ccenenchyma.

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 123

It will be noticed, when specimens of Montiporinse and Madreporse are
compared, that the distinction is in the absence of the two large and not
very perforate septa in the case of the first-mentioned group, and it is clear
that the excessively trabecular character of its septa, coenenchjma, and walls
is characteristic. Moreover the Montiporinae are recent forms.

The genus Litharcea amongst the Poritinae approaches Madrepora, however,
and its septa are often so lamellar that they resemble those of some Helias-
traeans amongst the Aporosa. Here the distinction between the forms
becomes limited. The two great septa are not extended to the median line in
Litharcea, and there is scanty ccenenchyma, but still there is some. The colu-
mella of Litharcea is simply formed by the union of trabeculse from the septal
ends.

Now Protarcea vetusta, Hall, and Protarcea VerneuiU, Ed. & H., Lower Silu-
rian corals from Ohio, only differ from the species of Litharcea by having more
aporosesepta and some coenenchymal protuberances*. It is necessary, however,
on account of the comparatively late appearance (so far as our investigations
has as yet gone) of Madrepora and Litharcea, whilst admitting the extraor-
dinary relation of the last-named genus to Protarcea, to examine another of
the Jurassic Perforata.

The genus Microsolena of the Poritinao carries the excessively trabecular
type of the Poritinae as far back as the Great Oolite ; it is of course one of
the extreme forms, and most remote from Madrepora. It has more or
less confluent septa, and nothing like the styliform columella of Protarcea.
Thus Pcdceacis, a form of the Madreporinfe, and Protarcea, a typo of the
Poritinfe, are still unsatisfactorily disconnected by intermediate species vidth
their allies in the secondary rocks. Eut, on the other hand, it is something
to be able to show an anatomical connexion between the Protarcece of the
Lower Silurian and the Mierosolence of the Jurassic and of the Lithara'ce of the
Nummulitic rocks, and between Palceacis and the Turbinarians of the group
Madrepora, of which Actinacis is the oldest (Lower Chalk)t. It shows that
the reticulate or perforate corals existed amongst the first known eoralliferous
rocks, that the scheme of their organization has been perpetuated to the
present day through many kinds of variations, but with a great break, which
is owing to the imperfection of the geological record.

III. The Tabulata, which form such large portions of many modern reefs,
were, as has been already noticed, in existence during the Miocene+, the
01igocene§, and the Eocene ||. They were, of course, not found amongst
the deep-sea deposits of the Cretaceous period, such, for instance, as our
White Chalk ; but Eeuss found the genera in the reefs of Gosau. Eeliopora
Partschi, Eeuss, sp. ; If. raacrostoma, Eeuss, sp. ; Polytremacis Blainvilleana';
P. hulhosa, d'Orb. : these are not uncommon in the reefs which were in
relation with the Hippurites, and the last coral genus lived during the
Eocene. Eeuss estabUshed a genus in 1854 for some compound, massive
corals, with prismatic corallites with thick imperforate walls. The calicos
are without radiating septa and have no columeUae. The tabulae are very
irregular, some being complete and others uniting obliquely with their neigh-
bours. The septa are represented by trabeculae. This Lower Cretaceous
genus he named StyJophyllum, and will be considered further on.

* See Hist. Nat. des Corall. vol. iii. p. 185.

t M. Lindstrom has lately described a Caloci/stis, a perforated coral from the Silm-ian.

J See Duncan, West-Indian Fossil Corals (Q. J. Geol. Soc.) ; Eeuss, Corals of Java, &c.

I Reuss, op. cit., and Duncan (Pal. Soc. Tertiary Corals of Brockenhurst).

II MM. Milne- Edwards and Haimej Hist. Nat. des Corall. &o.

124 REPORT — 1871.

Pocillopora, so common a genus amongst the Indo-Pacific reefs, was found
in the West-India Miocene, the Javan deposits, and at Turin and Dax. It
is considered to be allied to Ccenites by Milne-Edwards, but Jules Haime
doubted the Zoantharian characters of the last-named genus, which is Palae-
ozoic. Seriatopora, a modern genus, does not appear to have been found
fossil ; but it is closclj' allied, according to the received opinion, with Rhab-
dopora, Dendrop>ora, and Traclinpora, all Palfeozoic genera, the first being
Carboniferous and the others Devonian. Millepora, the great reef-building
genus of the West Indies, can be traced into the Lower Tertiaries, and is
closely allied to the Heliopora already mentioned, and by structure to the
Heliolites of the Palaeozoic period.

Between the Lower Cretaceous reefs and the Palaeozoic there were the
Devonian, the Oolitic, the Lower Liassic, the Rhaetic, and the St. Cassian and
the Muschelkalk reef's, but not a trace of a tabulate coral has been recorded
from them, in spite of the affinities of the modern and most ancient genera
of the Devonian. Cyathopliora has tabulae, but its alliances are with the
Astraeidfe. On examining the lists published in my last Eeport, the absence
of tabulate corals in the whole of the Mesozoic strata of Great Britain will be
apparent, and I have not been able to distinguish any foreign forms belonging
to that vast age (except our HoJocystis eJeguns, Ed. and H.), of which notice
wiU be taken in treating of the Rugosa and the species of Columnastnea.

Just as the Thecidae, Favositidas, and Halysitinac formed the reef-builders of
the tabulate fauna of the Palaeozoic times, so MiUeporidas and Seriatoporidae
contribute to the recent reef-fauna ; but these last genera had species in the
Palaeozoic fauna, so the break of the end of the Permian or Carboniferous
periods was not complete so far as the Tabulata were concerned. The ab-
sence of them from the successive secondary reefs that have been examined
by palaeontologists has probably been produced by the destructive fossilization
which is so common in existing reefs, and by the real absence of the forms
from certain reef-areas of which there is an example (see ' West-Indian Fossil
Corals,' Duncan).

The Tabulata were as abundant in the Palajozoic periods as during the
Tertiary epochs, and the ancient and modern genera and species have certain
characters which differentiate them more or less from all other coral forms.

MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime characterize the Tabulata as fol-
lows (Hist. Nat. des Corall. iii. p. 223) : — •

The coraUum is essentially composed of a well-developed mural system, and
the visceral chambers are divided into a series of stages by transverse floors,
which act as complete diaphragms.

The septal apparatus is rudimentary, and is cither completely deficient or
only represented by trabeculae which do not extend far into the intertabular

spaces.

The lamellar diaphragms, floors, or tabulae, which close the visceral
chamber of the coraUite at difl'erent heights, diff"er from the dissepiments of
the Astrffiidse by not depending in any manner upon the septa, by closing
completely the space below, for they stretch uninterniptedly from side to
side, instead of simply occupying the interseptal loculi.

The septal apparatus does not affect the Rugose type, but that character-
istic of the Perforata and Aporosa. The forms classified under the section of
the Tabulata are very numerous, and hence the importance of determining
whether they can be undoubtedly allied with the rest of the Actinozoa.

Many years have elapsed since Agassiz expressed his opinion, founded upon
direct observation, that the Milhporce, an important genus of the Tabulata,

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 125

were not Actiuozoa, but Hydrozoa, aud lately he has reasserted this state-
ment. If MUlepora is one of the Hydrozoa, those tabulate forms which
resemble it in structure, such as Heliolites, must reasonably be asso-
ciated with it in classification. The importance, then, of determining this
point is very great, and unfortunately it is accompanied by many difficulties.
Before proceeding to criticise Agassiz's remarks, it is necessary to examine
the nature of the structures of the genera associated with MUlepora, or, in
fact, to review the classification of the Tabulata, and to note their affinities
with the other sections. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime divide the Tabulata
into four families : — MiUeporidEe, Seriatoporidae, Favositidae, Thecidas.

The principle upon which this classification is founded is philosophical and
natural to a certain degree. The first two families have more or less coenen-
chyma between the coraUites, and the last two have little or none, the co-
raUites being soldered together by their walls.

The genus Pocillopora unites the two divisions, for it belongs to the Favo-
sitidae, and yet has a compact coenenchyma on the surface of the corallum.

The classificatory value of the presence of coenenchyma in the whole of the
Madreporaria may be estimated by examining the scheme of MM. MUne-
Edwards aud Jules Haime.

When treating of the Madreporidae (Hist. Nat. des Corall. vol. iii. p. 91),
they subdivide them into Eupsamminae without an independent coenenchyma,
Madreporince and Turbinarinae with a very abundant coenenchyma.

The Poritidae they subdivide into the Poritinae without coenenchyma, and
the Montiporinae with an abundance of that structure in the spongy or
alveolar form.

The EiiphyUiaceae (Ed. & H. op. cit. pp. 184 & 197) have such genera
as BarysmiUa and Dichocosnia, associated with Dendrogyra, Gyrosmilia, Pa-
chyr/yra, Rhipidogyra, which have or have not much cosnenchyma.

The StylinaceaD are divided into independent, " empatees," aud agglomerate.
The independent genera have no coenenchyma; the " empatees" possess it in
the extreme so as to merit the term peritheca.

The agglomerate have an excess of exotheca, but some genera are admitted
which are united by their walls, and are therefore without exotheca or coe-
nenchyma. Thiis PhyJIocosnia has an exotheca quite ccenenchymatous, and
Astroca'iiia has none. The corallites of Elasmoccenia have large mural ex-
pansions, and those of Aphccenia are soldered by their walls. Heteroccenia
and Pentaccenia present the same anomalies.

The Astraeinae present such genera as ApJirastrcea and Septastrcea, the one
with and the other without extramural tissue, and Heliastrcea and Solenastrcea
with and Isastrcea without the same structure.

It is then evident that the presence or absence of coenenchyma had difierent
significations in the estimation of the distinguished French zoophytologists.

It is e%'ident that the structure of the corallites of Isastraeae and their defi-
ciency in coenenchyma in comparison with the Heliastraeae and Solenastraeae
cannot be of any very great organic significance ; for the coraUites of Heli-
astraeae occasionally grow so close together as to produce absorption of the
exotheca and costas, and the same occurs in the Astroccenife. The presence
of exotheca, peritheca, aud coenenchyma (for they are grades of a particular
structure) depends very much upon the habits of the corallum, and the notion
of teleology can hardly be separated from the consideration of this presence
a7id absence. Certainly to separate great groups by the presence or absence
of coenenchyma is not natural. It may be very useful to the classificatory
student, because the limitation qf forms is the prevaUing want; but it is not

126 REPORT 1871.

so to the biologist, for these mixed and unnatural limitations and separations
only form gaps in his argument, which require bridging over.

The Favositidae and Thecidae, Palaeozoic forms, may then be separated, for
the pui'poses of classification, from the Milleporidae and Seriatoporidae, which
are almost aU post-Palaeozoic ; but this hmitation is not to impede the plain
course of the palaeontologist, who studies from a biological point of view ;
nor is it to stand in the way of the assertion, that the break between the
Palaeozoic and younger Tabulata is almost nil.

The genus Millepora belongs to the Milleporidae, and the ccenenchyma of its
species is very abundant. It is of " a very irregular and spongy structure,
rather than tubular " (Ed. & H.), The cahces are of very different dimen-
sions on the same coraUum. There are no distinct septa, nor is there a
columella. The tabulae are horizontal. These are the diagnostics of the
genus according to Milne-Edwards and Jules Hame. A careful examination
of the calices of good specimens determines that the trabeciilae, of which the
ccenenchyma is composed, often projects into them, in the position of septa;
but there is nothing like the regular arrangement as seen in Heliopora, or
in the Poritidae of the Perforata. The cells of the ccenenchyma may occa-
sionally be seen to open into the space above the last tabula.

The absence of septa and this relation of the ccenenchyma to the gastric
space are most important. The tubular nature of much of the ccenenchyma
is evident, and longitudinal sections of some size prove that the spongy nature
of it is by no means constant nor uniform.

In Heliopora, belonging also to the Milleporidae, the ccenenchyma is very
abundant, and covered here and there with rounded pores arranged more or
less regularly and separated by papillose granules. These grains are the
extremities of cylindrical "tigelles" which circumscribe the tubules, the
calice of which is open at the surface. The calices are circular. The septa
are slightly developed, and there are twelve of them. The tabulae are well
developed and horizontal (Ed. & H.). The nature of the ccenenchyma and
the distinct septa distinguish this genus from the last. Both of the extinct
species have a papillose or striated structure running over the coenenchymal
surface. In all the species the septa do not project far into the calice ; but
the amount of projection is not sufficient, as a structural peculiarity, in any
case to determine more than a specific distinction. Hence MM. Milne-
Edwards and Jules Haime when they separate, in their scheme of the Millepo-
ii^yd* , Millepora and Heliopora and other genera ivova. Hcliolites, Propora,
and Lyellia, the particular Palaeozoic genera, they can only be permitted to do
so on the plea that the plan renders the genera readily distinguishable. The
projection or non-projection is not sufficient to determine a generic difference.

Now Heliolites has a beautiful ccenenchyma, very geometric, and not irre-
gular and spongy ; its cellules are placed regularly and symmetrically. In
most of the species the septa are distinct, and project far inwards, but in
Heliolites Orayi they are almost rudimentary,
' The genus Pohjiremacis hnks Heliolites and Heliopora together, for its
ccenenchyma is that of the second, and the septa resemble those of the first-
named genus. Polytremacis is not older than Heliopora in the secondary
ages, and the septal distinction which cannot expel Heliolites Grayi from
its genus, and which is improperly allowed to distinguish Polytremacis and
Heliopora, and these and Heliolites, may well have been produced by varia-
tions in a succession of early secondary forms.

» Op. cii. p. 225.

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 127

The septal development of Heliolites is exaggerated in Propora, a genus
from the Upper Silurian, and which perhaps lasted into the Carboniferous.
The costaj in this genus are well developed, but the ccenenchymal cells are
less geometric than in Heliolites. The structural relations are of the closest,
and the generic distinction is not of the usual generic value. Another
Upper Silurian genus, Lyellia, represents these symmetrical Milleporidse
in America. The corallite walls are subcostulate and not so costulate as in
Propora. The septa (12) are well developed, as in Heliolites and Propora and
Heliopora, and the coenenchyma is perfectly vesicular — spongy, in fact, like
Heliopora. Here, then, in the distant and British and Northern European
Silurians, there were closely allied forms varying amongst themselves, but
more than the secondary types, the variation having some sort of likeness in
both instances. It is impossible not to acknowledge the genetic affinities of
all these genera except Millepora, of which more will be said, or to hesitate
to assert that there has never been a break in the Tabulata, and that the Ee- 1
cent and Palaeozoic Heliopora and Heliolites are very closely allied, the one
being the descendant of the other*. Axopora is a tertiary genus, and its
immense columella, which fills up the corallite inferiorly and leaves but little
room in the calice around it, of course prevents the tabiilae from reaching
across the axial space. The tabulae come in contact with but do not perfo-
rate the columella, so that this structure grows progressively without any
reference to them ; they do not form floors upon which a columella is deve-
loped f. There are no septa, and the coenenchyma is reticulate in the ex-
treme. No living analogue of this genus exists, and exception may be taken
whether it be a true coral. It has no Palasozoic representatives.

Battershyia is a very remarkable Palaeozoic genus, and has been examined
by me+. MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime§ classify it with the Mil-
leporidaj, but apparently only provisionally ; but it will be noticed elsewhere.
I have associated Battershyia and Heterophyllia together as a new division
of the Aporosa of the Astraeidae, under the name of the Palastraeaceae, which
are noticed in the first part of this Eeport.

The Eavositidae are divided by MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime into
the following subfamilies : Eavositinae, Chaetetinae, Halysitinae, PociUoporinae.
All are presumed to present the following family characteristics : — " The
corallum is formed essentially of the lamellar walls of the coraUites, and
possesses hardly any or no coenenchyma. The visceral chambers are divided
by tabulfe, which are numerous and well developed."

The subfamilies without any coenenchyma, and those whose coralHt€s fonn a
massive corallum, are the Eavositinae and the Chastetiase, and the genera whose
corallites are not united on all sides the Halysitinae. The Pocilloporinfe
constitute the ccenenchymal subfamily. One of the great difliculties of the
zoophytologist appears strongly enough whilst investigating these Tabulata, for
the question constantly arises, and can only be answered very unsatisfactorily,
are such and such forms really Actinozoa? are they not Polyzoa, Hydrozoa,
or of some class which has become extinct, and which has no modern repre-
sentatives ?

Some genera are characterized by the absence of septa. Thus Chcetetes
has long basaltiform coralKtes, numerous tabulae which do not correspond in
their- plane throughout the coraUum,. no septa, and the reproduction is fissi-
parous. I

* See Huxley's Address, Geol. Soc. 1870.

t Pal. Soc. Tertiary Corals, 3rd*Series, P. M. Buncan, pi. vii. figs. 11-15,

t Phil, Trans, 1867. § Op. cit, p, 244.

128 REPORT 1871.

Keyserling considered the genus to belong to the Alcyonaria amongst the
Actiuozoa ; but MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime, considering the great
analogj- between Chcetetes aud Favosites, and particularly with. Beaumontia,
" ou la presence de cloisons n'est pas contestable"*, determined its position
to be amongst the true Tabulata.

The same authors now recognize the necessity of separating Chcetetes from
Monticulipora, and assert that the members of the last-named genus increase
by gemmation.

The genus Dania differs from Chcetetes in having the tabulae on regular
planes which traverse the whole coraHum. This peculiarity is hardly of
generic value.

Stellijjora (Hall) is not generically different from Monticulipora, and the
truth of this assertion can be estimated by comparing the diagnosis of the
genera given by MM. Mibie-Edwards and Jules Haime f.

The differentiation of Delcayia (Ed. & H.) J and of Lahechia is also unsatis-
factory, aud their more or less mamraillated ccBnenchyma ranges them together
\ by the side of Stellipora as subgenera of Monticulipora.

Now Jiiles Haime, when investigating the Oolitic Polyzoa, classified forms
without septa and with tabulae, hke Chcetetes or Monticulipora, as Polyzoa,
and the beautiful Stelliporce were especially included.

Now the question arises, are there any recent Polyzoa whose soft parts
have been examined that have tabulaj ? From our knowledge of the recent
Polyzoa, it is unsafe to answer this in the affirmative. There is a freshwater
species which is said to have tabulas, but the assertion requires confirmation.
The classification, then, of these forms amongst the Polyzoa must be deferred,
and I propose to decide against it now.

Beaumontia, the genus noticed above, is distinguished by MM. Milne-
Edwards and Jules Haime § as follows : — " This genus is distinguished from
all other Chaetetiuffi by the formation of its tabuliie, which are irregular or
vesicular, and it thus resembles Michelenia, belonging to Favositinae." The
presence of septa belonging to three cycles is asserted by the same authors,
and this fact must remove the genus quite out of the neighbourhood of septa-
less forms.

The genera of the Cheetetiuce were formerly Chcetetes, Monticulipora, Dania,
Stellip)ora, Dekayia, Beaumontia, and Lahechia. It has been shown that
Stellipora, Delcayia, and Lahechia are subgenera of Monticulipora, that Dania
cannot be separated from Chcetetes, and that Beaumontia has no correct affinity
with the others, and that it belongs to another family.

The genera should stand thus : —

Chcetetes. Subgenus Dania,
Monticulipora. Subgenus Stellipora.

,, Delcayia.

„ Lahechia,

But the subgeneric names should be dropped.

This result is interesting because it eliminates Beaumontia and makes a
compact sei'ies, the affinities of which are not Polyzoan, but which may be
Alcyonarian or Hydrozoan.

The long tab\ilar or basaltiform corallites of Chcetetes and its allied forms,

« Op. cit. pp. 271. f Op. cit. vol. iii. pp. 272, 281.

X Ibid. p. 283. § Op. cit. vol. iii. p. 282.

ON THK BEITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 129

and their more or less horizontal and perfect tabulae, recall the Tubiporiuoc
amongst the order of the Alcyonaria.

The Alcyonaria are Actinozoa which are separated by MM. Milne-Edwards
and Jules Haime from the Zoantharia on account of the pinnate structure of
the tentacles, and from these important organs being invariably eight in
number.

The zoantharian tentacles, on the contrary, are simple or irregularly rami-
fied, and increase in number with age.

The Alcyonaria are divided into the families of the Alcyonidee, the Gorge-
nidae, and the Pennatulidae.

The first two families have an adherent corallum, and the last consists of
free forms.

The Alcyonidae have no hard central axis, but this characterizes the
Gorgonidffi.

Now the Cornularinse, Telestingg, and Alcyoninas, subfamilies of the Alcy-
nidae, are clearly allied to the Tubiporina; by their soft structures ; but the
hard external structures of this subfamily are only faintly shown in the spi-
culate scoi'iaceous conditions of the external tegument of NejjJithy a, Spoggodes,
and Paralcyonium. The polypes oi JSfejjMii/a and Paralcyonium enter their
spiculate and dense external covering when they contract; but the hard
structures of S^oggodes celosia, Lesson, are very slightly developed.

TuBiPOEA (pars), Linnaeus.

Tuhipora, Lamarck.

The genus has been examined by MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime
with their usual care and acumen.

The specimens of Tuhipora are so common that the descriptions of these
authors concerning the hard parts of the corallum can readily be followed.

The coraUitcs are formed principally by a tabular waU, the tissue of which
is calcareous and readily fractured. There are no septa, but there are ru-
dimentary tabulas, which cut off the visceral cavity into more or less perfect
stages. The corallites arc cylindrical, and usually attain an equal height ;
but they do not touch each other, for they are united by a peritheca, which
is only seen here and there in distinct floors. The budding takes place
from the connecting peritheca, which is therefore a true coenenchyma, and
not like that of Solenastrcea. Were the corallites in contact the appearance
of Chcetefes would be presented ; so that the presence of the coenenchyma is
the differentiating structure. It is only of generic value, and thus there is '
a very strong reason for associating the Chsetetinee and all the other fossils
with long tubular structures, no septa, and tabulae with the Alcyonidae in the
subfamily Tubiporinse and near the genus Tubijjora. These retaarks are ■
subject, of course, to the consideration whether the views of Agassiz already
noticed are correct.

Keuss's genus Styhphyllum (Gosau Chalk) cannot be associated with the
Alcyonidee, for the species has septa. The corallites are united by their
walls without there being a coenenchyma, and tlie walls are imperforate. The
junction of the corallites takes place by means of an epitheca.

The junction may occur at any part of the corallito.

The resemblance of StyhphyUum to some of the Halysitinte (Ed. & H.)*
necessitates an examination of their structural peculiarities.

* Op. cit, vol. iii. p. 286.
1871. K

130 REPORT 1871.

MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime differentiate the Halysitinse as
follows : —

"The corallum is compound, but its corallites unite imperfectly, and
constitute lamellar expansions or long fasciculi ; they are either free on two
sides, or arc united together by ' ea-pansions murales.' "

The septa are small, but usually very distinct ; finally the walls are well
developed and aporose.

The genera are : — Hah/sites, Fischer ; Syringopora, Goldfuss ; Tliecostegites,
Ed. & H. (Ilarmodites, Michelin) ; Conostefjitcs, Ed. & H. ; Fletcheria, Ed.
&H.

Hall/sites. The species are invariably formed by corallites which are joined
on two sides, and which in transverse outline resemble links of a chain.
The epitheca is very strong, and unites the corallites perfectly where
they are in contact from the base to the calice. Septa 12. Tabulas
horizontal and well developed. (Silurian.)
Thecostegites. The corallites have septa, horizontal tabulae, and an exotheca
unites them, and it is more or less tabular in structure, and exists in
stages like the Tuhipora. In 'T, pm-mda the ccenenchyma is nearly
compact. (Devonian.)
C'onostegites. There are numerous septal s-trise, which mark also the smooth
and convex surfaces of the tabula). The tabulte are more or less infun-
dibuliform, and the epitheca unites the corallites hero and there.
Byringopora. The coraUum is fasciculate ; the corallites are cylindrical and
very long, parallel, and free laterally, except where horizontal tubes
connect them. The walls are well developed, and clothed with a strong
epitheca ; septa exist. The tabula) are infundibuliform.
Fletcheria. The corallum is fasciculate ; the corallites are cylindrical, close,
and long. The epitheca is complete ; septa exist. Tabulae horizontal
and well developed. No intcrcorallite tubes or expansions of epitheca.
Gemmation calicular.
It is evident that some of these genera are very slightly allied ; for in-
stance, Syringopora and Fletcheria, and both of them and Halysites.

Halysites, with its stout epitheca and simple tabulae with non-tubular
joints, is a very definite form.

Thecostegites should belong to the Milleporidae.

Conostegites, with infundibialiform tabulae, is related to Halysites as Miche-
linia is to Favosites.

Fletcheria is altogether aberrant.

The Halysitince comprehend, according to this analysis, Halysites, Fischer ;
Btylophyllmn, Eeuss ; Conostegites, Ed. & H.

The genera Syringopora and Fletcheria will be considered further on.
The subfamily of the Pocilloporinae contains the genera Pocillopora and
Ccenites.

Pocillopora has septa (and my specimens show 12), which, even in fossil
specimens, mark the top of the tabulae. There is a columellary swelling on
its tabula). The ccenenchyma is very stout and thick in old portions of the
corallum, less so where growth has just ceased, and the ccenenchyma barely
exists where the corallites or calicos are developing. It is cellular at first,
and then fills up with calcite and other coral salts.

Fossil forms have been described by Eeuss and myself from the Cainozoic
formations.

Ccenites resembles Pocillopora in a certain density of its ccenenchyma, but
differs in only having three tooth-liko septa, like the genus Alveolites.

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 131

The number of septa and the habit of growth of the two genera separate
them very widely ; and the propriety of connecting the last-named one with
the MUleporidse must be considered.

There are four genera in the family of the Seriatoporidte : — Seriatopora,
Dendropora, JRhahdopora, Trachypora.

The family is characterized by the continual growth of the lower parts of
the corallites and the rarity of tabulte.

Seriatopora is a recent genus, and therefore those associated with it must
be carefully examined.

Dendropora, Michelin, is clearly too closely allied to Bhahdopora to be
separated generically.

Rhahdopora, formed for the Dendropora megastoma, M'Coy, by MM. MUne-
Edwards and Jules Haime, has only one species, the diagnosis of which is as
follows : —

Rhahdopora megastoma, M'Coy, sp. — The corallum is branching. Branches
four-sided, starting from the stem at an angle of 70°, and very equal. Coe-
nenchyma granulated or subechinulated and obscurely striated. Calicos in
vertical series on each face of the branches. Septa (teeth) 12 in number and
subequal.

It is impossible to separate this from Seriatopora, for the four-sided suture
of the branches is only a specific (if that) distinction.

Trachypora appears to be an Alcyonarian.

The distinction between PociUopora and Seriatopora is not generic, and
therefore these genera and Dendropora (for Dendropora and Rhahdopora
are equal, and the first name is the oldest) are absorbed in one. Oken'a
name Acropora (1815) may be used as the generic term : — Acropoea
{Seriatopora, Lamarck ; PociUopora, Lamarck ; Dendropora, Michelin ; Rhah~
dopora, Ed. & Haime).

All the species of the absorbed genera should take the generic name of
Acropora, and the family becomes that of the Acroporinaa. Thus the sharp
distinction between the recent and Palaeozoic forms is partly smoothed down,
and the old Dendroporre and Rhabdoporge were doubtless the ancestral
forms of the recent Acroporse. Ccenites cannot be associated with the
family.

The family of the Thecidese is characterized by well-formed septa, which
are prolonged throughout the visceral chamber, well-developed tabulae, which
grow like dissepiments upon the sides of the septa, and these last do not
spring from the upper surface of the tabiilse, as in some Tabulata. The walls
are solid, compact, and united.

The corals contained in the family are all Silurian forms, so far as is
known at present.

Thecia, Ed. & Haime. It is a most remarkable fact that this genus, the
species of which have no true wall, but a dense ccenenchyma between septal
prolongations or costa?, should here give the family name. Tliecia Siuinder-
niana, Goldfuss, sp., has been called ^(7«nc?'a, Porites, Astreopora, and PaJceo-
pora by different authors, so that its classificatory position may well be a
matter of doubt. It is not in the least allied to Columnarife, which has soHd
walls, and which fulfils all the characteristics of the Thecidaj.

In Thecia, Ed. & H., there is a long visceral cavity surrounded by a dense
tissue, as in Mtllepora, through which the septa, or rather the costa, run.

What is the structure of Plasmopora and Propora but that of Thecia
slightly modified. The genus clearly must be associated with them amongst
the Milleporidip.

k2

132 REPORT— 1871.

Columnaria is a fine form ; the great septa (12 to 18) and tabulae, with
the compact walls, distinguish it at once. Col. alveolata is a Lower SHuriau
form, C GotMandka is Upper Silurian. It is a most important genus, and
its affinities will be noticed.

The Favositidse have a massive corallum without ccenenchyma, septa, and
perforate walls ; that is, there are openings which permit the visceral cavity
of one coraUite to communicate with that of another in several places. The
foUovsdng genera are included by MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime : —
Favosites, Emmonsia, MicJielinia, Roemeria, Koninchia, Alveolites.

Favosites is the typical genus. In some species the mural foramina are
scanty in number, in others numerous ; and they are even in relation with
the angles of the wall, especially in F. alveolar is.

The earliest species of the genus are Lower Silurian, for instance : — F. Qoth-
landica, F. multipora, F. aspera, F. Forbesi (which ranges through to the
Upper Silurian), and F. fibrosa (having the same vertical range, and is found
as a Devonian fossil).

F. Hisingeri has the same range as F. fibrosa. F. cristata and F. cervi^
cornis are the same, and the range is from the Upi^er Silurian of England
to the Devonian of Russia.

The species which are Devonian, and do not range above or below, are : —
F. Goldfussi, F. basaltica, F. polymorp'ha, F, alveolaris, F. pedicidata, F. Tclii-
TiatcheJJi, and F. niammillaris. The only known Carboniferous Favosites is
F. parasitica, and it is a degenerate form.

F. Oothlandica has rounded processes encircling the mural pores, and the
projections formed upon one fit against those of the neighbouring corallite.
F. multipara has three vertical series of pores, and its walls are almost as per-
forate as some Alveoporte.

The tabulae are almost universally horizontal in the lavosites, but some are
wavy in their course ; and the septa are a series of vertical spines which vary
in size according to the cycle, and are often referable to three cycles in six
systems. In some there is a faint columellary swelling on the tabula?.

A careful examination of the species proves that the earliest known forms
are as highly developed as the Devonian, but that the sj^eciea parasitica is
dwarfed.

Emmonsia has imperfect tabula;. The tabulae are vesicular at the sides,
or dissepimental, and they communicate more or less with each other.
Roemeria has infundibuhform tabulas, and the species is Devonian.
Koninckia is an Upper Cretaceous form ; it has thin and nearly horizontal
tabulae, thiu walls very much perforated, and six series of large spiny septa.
Michelinia has irregular and vesicidar (dissepimental) tabulae, and simple
striae for septa (Devonian and Carboniferous). The alliance of Michelinia,
Roemeria, and Emmonsia is very evident. Mr. Kent has written a most
interesting description of Favositipora (Kent), Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1870,
vol. vi. p. 384, which unites the Favositiuae and the Favositidae.

Alveolites ofi'ers the same objection to being united to i^rtvosjV^s that Cten? to
does to PociJlopora ; in fact Alveolites is a Coenites with perforated walls,
and it is proposed to deal with both genera by disassociating them from their
recognized families.

Biiringopora I propose uniting with the Favositida?, as it has tubular
connexions between the visceral centres of the corallites, which are fore-
shadowed in F. Gotldandica.

After this analysis of the TabiJata, it is necessary to state the opinions of
Prof. Agassiz respecting their Hydrozoau characteristics.

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS. 133

Prof. Agassiz (senior) writes as follows in the ' American Journal of Science
and Arts,' 2nd series, vol. xxvi. p. 140, N'ovember 1858 : —

" The animals of Millepora are Hydroid Acalephs and not polyps ;" that
is to say, they are Hydrozoa and not Aetinozoa. The resume of several letters
to Dana is given at the same place. ''I have seen," writes Agassiz, "in
the Tortugas something very unexpected. Millepora is not an actinoid polyp
biit a genuine Hydroid, closely allied to Hydractinia. This seems to carry
the whole group of Favositidte over to the Acalephs, and displays a beautiful
array of this class from the Silurian to this day."

Dana adds a note to this statement. " The drawings of Professor Agassiz
which have been sent us for examination are so obviously Hydractiuian in
most of their characters that no one can question the relation. With re-
gard to the reference of all the FavositidtB (a group including Favosiies,
Fenestella, PociUopora, &c., as well as the minuter MiUejJora, Chcetetes, &c.)
to the Acaleph class, direct evidence is not yet complete, as the animal of the
Pocilhpom has not been figured by any author on zoophytes. Prom the
specimens of the species of this genus which I procured in the Pacific, I never
obtained a clear view of the polyps, and hence made no figure. The brief
description on page 523 of my Report may be reasonably doubted until con-
firmed by new researches. The much larger cells in Pocillopora, FavosiUs,
and Fenestella than in Millepora, and the frequently distinct rays in these
cells, are the characters I had mentioned to Prof. Agassiz as suggesting a
doubt as to their being Acalephs, and to this what follows above relates."

Agassiz observes, in a subsequent letter, after observing that the Sidero-
porffi obviously are polyps, " There are two types of radiating lamelte which
are no£ homologous. In true polyps (excluding Favositidas as Hydroids) the
lamella} extend from the outer body-waU inward along the whole height of that
wall, and the transverse partitions reach only from one lamella to the other,
so that there is no continuity between them, while the radiating lameUte
are continuous from top to bottom in each cell. In Milleporidse the partitions
are transverse and continuous across the cells ; so are they in Pocillopora and
in all Tabulata and Eugosa ; while the radiating lamella?, where they exist,
as in Pocillopora and many other Favositida), rise from these horizontal
floors, and do not extend through the transverse partitions ; indeed they are
limited within the spaces of two successive- floors, or to the ujiper surface of
tlie last. A careful comparison of the corallum of Millepora and Pocillopora
with that of Hydractinia has satisfied me that these radiating partitions of
the Favositida?, far from being productions of the body-wall, are foot-secre-
tions, to be compared to the axis of the Gordonia corallum &:c., and their
seeming radiating lamellae to the vertical groove or keel upon the surface of
the latter, which, reduced to a horizontal ijrojeetion, would also make the
impression of radiating lamellas in the foot of the polyp. If this be so, you
see at once that apparent radiating lamellae of the Favositidte do no longer
indicate an affinity with the true polyps, but simply a peculiar mode of
growth of the corallum ; and of these we have already several types, that of
Actinoids, that of Alcyonoids, that of Bryozoa, that of Millepora, and other
corallines, to which we now add that of Hydroids. Considering the subject
in this light, is there any further objection to uniting all the Favositida? with
the Hydroids ? Sideropora and Alveopora being of course removed from the
Favositida;. It is a point of great importance in a geological point of vicAv,
and for years I have been anticipating some such result, as you may sec by
comparing my remarks in the ' American Journal,' May 1854, p. 315. If all
the Tabulata and Eugosa are Hydroids, as I believe them to be, the class of

134 KEPORT — 1871.

Aealephs is no longer an exception to the simultaneous appearance of all the
types of Radiata in the lowest fossiliferous formations, and the peculiar cha-
racters which these old Hydi-oid corals present appears in a new and very
instructive aspect."

A. Agassiz includes the Tabulata amongst the Hydrozoa. He notices
" that the absence of radiating partitions in the Tabulata seems to show
without much doubt that their true place is among the Hydroids." It is
true that Prof. Agassiz has not observed the Medusa-buds on the specimens
he has figured, yet the Hydroid character of the animal and their similarity to
I[aIochcens-]ike Hydroids is very striking (Havard Catalogue, 1865, p. 219).

Prof . Alexander Agassiz informs me that his father still holds these opinions,
and that new researches have satisfied him about the correctness of the
di'aAvings which have been lately reproduced. '•' MiUeiJora is not an actinoid
polyp, but a genuine Hydroid, closely allied to H)jdractinia."

This very strong expression of opinion is founded iipon the appearance
presented by the polyps of Millepora cdcicornis, the drawing of which has
been reproduced by A. Agassiz. Now the distinction between the Actinozoa
and the Hydrozoa is well marked ; in the first the generative apparatus is
included in the gastric and perigastric cavities, and in the last the digestive
and generative organs are perfectly apart. Every variety of tentacular and
disk apparatus may exist in either, but the external development of the gem-
mules, ova, and embryonic forms must be recognized before any Coelenterate
animal can be associated with the Hydi'ozoa.

Here is the point at which Agassiz faUs. His researches are only sug-
gestive, until the generative organs are recognized on the protruded polypes
of Millepora, and until the mesenterico-ovarian layers are proved not to exist
■within the cahces. The external resemblance of the Milleporc polypes to the
sterile Hydractinia is evident.

The remarks upon Pavositidse, Sideropora}, and other genera, made by
Agassiz in consequence of the assumption that Mdlepora is Hydrozoan, are of
doubtful value ; and I must refer back to my analysis of the Tabulata to show
how a confused classification between both classes imperils research. Sidero-
2)ora is not a tabulate form even. A careful examination of Columnarla satis-
fies me that Agassiz's description of the lamellae fails in that genus ; and inas-
much as the wavy lines of Gorgonia and CoraUium are connected with the water
system of the species, they can have no possible relation with the radiate
amellfe or groovings of the MiUeporan calices. The homologucs of the grooves
are the depressions and irregular interstriatcd portions on top of the ccenen-
chyma between the calices in the Tabulata.

The perforate walls and the septa of the true Favositidae seem to remove
them from the range of the remarks of Agassiz, which may well deserve
attention, so far as Millepora is concerned, for it is a genus with^ marked
distinctions from all other corals.

It is not reasonable to include the Rugosa, because some of them have no
tabulic, and others have them so much like dissepiments, or associated with
dissepiments, that we are impressed with the unimportance of the differen-
tiations established by the presence of horizontal tabukic!.

It is most important that the minute structure of the MiUeporidae should
be thoroughly investigated, and any report on the Palaeozoic corals must be
very incomplete -ndthout a detailed description of its study.

ON THE BRITISH FOSSIL CORALS.

135

With ccenenchyma . .
Without coenenchyma

Section TABULATA.

Families.

J MiUeporidce, Coenenchyma cellular.

[ Acroporklce. Ccenenchj^ma compact.

(Favositidce. Walls perforated.

Halysitidce. Walls imperforate.

Alveolitidce. Septa trideutate.

Genera.
CMillepora*.
j Heliolites, Hellopora-f, Pohjtremacis.

MiLLEPOEiD^ J P'-^^^r''^ P^asmopora, Thecia.

I Lyelha.
I Thecostegites,
'^Axopora.
1 i -^cro2Jom, Seiiatopora, PocillojJOra, DendrojJora, Bhah-

\ dopora.

( Favosites, Koninchia, Favosltipora, genus nov. (Kent).
I Mklielinia, Scemeria, Emmonsia.
■^1 Syringopora.
\^ Aulop)ora.
'' Halysites.
Stylopliyllum.
Conostegites.
Columnaria.
Beaumontia.
j Alveolites.
\ Ccenites.

T . J- f Fistidipora.

Incerttc sedis \ m ^ i •

\ Fletchena.

Fayositid^

Halysitid^ ■(

AxTBOlIXIDiE

Alcyoxakta.
Chcetetes. Montladipora. Dania.

ora.

Lahechia.

TV. The Eugosa. — Mil. Miliic-Edwards and Jules Haime observe (op>. cit.
vol. iii. p. 323), "'that this division comprehends simple and compound
corals, and that the septal apparatus never forms six distinct systems, and
appears to be derived from four primitive elements. Sometimes this dispo-
sition is shown by the great development of four principal septa, or by the
existence of four depressions which occupy the bottom of the calice and
take on a cross-like look. In other instances there is observed only one of
these depressions or excavations, or one large septum interferes Avith the
regularly radiate and star-shape of the septal arrangement. Finally, there
arc instances where no traces of distinct groups or systems of sejita can be
recognized, and where the septa are represented by numerous stria; arising
on the upper surface of the tabulaj or dissepiments near the calicular mar-
gin." They continue as follows : — " The corallites are always perfectly di-
stinct amongst themselves, and are never united by independent coenenchyma.
The walls are in general very slightly developed. The visceral chamber is

* MiUcpora is a most aberrant genus if it is one of the Madreporaria Tabulata. I have
not yet satisfied myseK about the Hydroidean characteristics of its soft parts ; but an
examination of the coenenchyma of a series of species throws great doubt upon the Ma-
dreporarian affinities.

t The relation of ReU<ypora to Heliolites is of the closest.

136 EBPOiiT — 1871.

ordinarily occupied by a series of tabulra or vesicular endotheca, and tbc
eudotheca often occupies the greater part of the corallum. The septal
laminfc, although generally very incomplete, arc never perforated or ' pou-
trellaire ; ' finally, their lateral faces are not furnished with synapticulse, and
are only rarely granular.

" The individual corallites increase by gemmation, and never by fissiparity.
The buds are generally calicular, and this form of gemmation may continue
in the same individual. In some cases the gemmation is lateral."

The originators of the " Rugosa" divide them into four families : —

1. Stauridffi. 3. Cyathophyllidas.

2. Cyathosonidge. 4. Cystiphyllidse,

In criticising this classification some definite plan must be adopted, which
should refer to the philosophy of the classification of the Aporosa and Per-
forata. In fact the scheme of generic subdivision and differentiation adopted
in the Neozoic corals can be made to apply to those of the Palceozoic age.
Thus an essential distinction is made amongst the Neozoic corals by the
simple or compound nature of the corallum. Simple Caryophyllinse constitute
a series of genera, and the compound forms are separated as Ccenocyathi.
Now in the Paltcozoic genus CijafJiojjJu/Ihun, MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules
Haime admit, in direct opposition to the Neozoic scheme, both simple and
compound forms. This, I think, is an error, but only an error of classifica-
tion, for there can be no reasonable doubt of the intimate genealogical
relation of the simple and compound genera of Ct/athophyllum,

Families *.

1. SiATJEiDiE. — Genera: Siauria, Hohcystis, Polyccelia, Metrio][jliyllum,
Conosmilia.

Of these Ilolocystis is a Lower Greensand form, and Conosmilia is Austra-
lian and Tertiary.

MM. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime place the Stauridse first in their
list of families ; but it would have made the classification more simple if the
second family took their place ; and I propose to change the order of arrange-
ment, but proceed at present in the recognized method.

There is a well-developed wall in the Stauridaj ; the septa are continuous
from the top to the bottom of the calico, and are eminently quaternary in
their arrangement. The endotheca assumes the vesicular structure between
the septa, and then crosses over in the form of horizontal tabulps. The
Staiiridaj approach the CyathophyUidaj more than the Cjathoxonidae ; and,
indeed, the only essential distinction between the first two families is in the
truly lamellar state of the septa in the first instance, and in the incomplete
condition of them in the second. Nevertheless it should constitute a family
distinction.

Two of the Stauridian genera are compound, and three arc simple forms.

Stauria, which as yet has not been found in British strata, has neither colu-
mella nor costa?, whilst Hohcystis has both of these structures. There is no
reason why the last-named genus should not be the lineal descendant of the
former. Both were probably shallow-water forms in the neighbourhood of
reefs.

The simple forms Conosmilia and Poh/ccelia are closely allied, and the
presence of the first in the Australian Tertiaries, and of the other in the Euro-

* See Hist. Nat. cles Coralliaires, vol. iii. p. 325 c( scq. (Milne-Edwards aud Jules
Haime).

ON HEAT GENERATED IN THE BLOOD. 137

pean Pcrmiau, is highly suggestive. The remaining form, lletriojjhT/Uum,
offers a great difficulty, for if the received classification be adopted, the genus
is very aberrant. Thus 3Iefr{o2)hi/Uum has not four principal septa, but the
septa are arranged in four groups, a gap or kind of septal fossula being be-
tween each gToup. The British Devonian species (M. Battershiji, Ed. & H.)
was founded upon a transverse section of a slab, and therefore the entire
nature of the septa could hardly he determined. The question arises at once,
what do those septal fossute mean? And another follows very naturally, are
they in relation with the primary septa ?

I think that they denote a difference in the physiology of the polype, for
they would permit of a deeper development of the visceral cavity and an
enlarged condition of the ovarian apparatus. Moreover, these fossulaj may
have much to do with the growth of the coral in calibre and in septal num-
ber ; and, furthermore, Lindstrom's admirably suggestive paper on the oper-
culated structures, necessitates much attention being paid to them. Can
there be any genealogical classification which will connect in one family
such different forms as MetriojpliyUum and Pohjcxelia ? I think not.

Eliminating, then, MetriophyUam from the Stauridaj, I propose to permit
the genus to remain per se for the present.

2. Ctathoxonidje. — Genera: Cyathoxonia, Palaeozoic; HaplopliylUa^Som-
tales) and Guynia (Duncan), recent.

This group has no endotheca, and resembles the TurbinolidoB amongst the
Neozoic corals, but it has the quaternary arrangement of the septa.

All the forms are simple. Cyathoxonia preceded the others, and all are
closely allied. The foreshadowing of the Neozoic forms in the Palteozoic
Cyathoxonidse is evident enough.

Re]}ort on the Heat generated in the Blood during the process of
Arterialization. By Arthur Gamgee^ M.D., F.R.S.E., Lecturer on
Physiology in the Extra-Academical Medical School of Edinburgh.

In a Report which was submitted to the British Association in Liverpool
last year*, I very shortly alluded to the objects which I had in view in com-
mencing an investigation on the very obscure subject of the heat generated
during the arterialization of blood.

I pointed out that two methods of research suggested themselves as likely
to elicit facts which would lead to a solutioii of the problem, and I stated
that both these methods had been employed by previous observers.

The first method, which would at first sight appear likely to furnish us
with most important data, consists in ascertaining the temperature of the
blood in the right and left ventricles of the heart of living animals. If our
methods of experimenting were free from the great fallacies which are in-
troduced when we are compelled to interfere, in a serious manner, with the
central organ of the circulation, and if it resulted that the left side of the
heart contained blood warmer than that of the right side, we should be driven
to the conclusion either that during the process of absorption and combina-
tion of the oxygen of the air a very perceptible evolution of heat had oc-

* Eeport of the Liyerpool Meeting, p. 228.

138 KEPOHT — 1871.

curred, or that within the pulmonary vessels considerable oxidation processes
of the blood contained in them had taken place. If, on the other hand, the
temperature of the left side were the same as that of the right side, or lower,
the question would still remain an open one ; for heat might be evolved in
the lungs, and yet the quantity might be insufficient to counterbalance the
loss of heat due to the evolution of large quantities of watery vapour, of car-
bonic acid, and to the heating of the air which we daily inspire.

The first method, or that which consists in ascertaining the temperature
of the two sides of the heart, need scarcely be touched upon at present ; and
I shall merely confine myself to the statement that, in the hands of the most
experienced and reliable physiologists, and specially in those of Professor
Claude Bernard, it has led to the curious resxilt that the blood which
reaches the left ventricle is colder than that which leaves the right. This
result would, at first sight, appear to prove that if any heat be evolved in
the lungs, its amount is not sufficient to compensate the losses to which I
have already alluded, and rendered it absolutely essential that fresh experi-
ments should be conducted by a second method, which consists in ascer-
taining whether, when venous blood removed from the body is agitated with
oxygen or atmospheric aii', any changes occur in its temperature.

The first step in the inquiry consisted in ascertaining the specific heat of
blood, for none of the experiments previously made had led to trustworthy
results. Dr. Crawford had, in the last century, advanced a theory of animal
heat which was based upon an assumed diff'erence in the specific heat of
arterial and venous blood : he supposed that the former possessed a very high,
and the latter a comparatively low specific heat ; so that in becoming arte-
rialized in the lungs, the heat resulting from the condensation, solution, and
probable chemical combination of oxygen with the blood became latent,
being, however, evolved as the blood circulated through the body, when,
becoming venous, it acquired a continually diminishing specific heat. Dr.
John Davy, in his ' Researches, Physiological and Anatomical,' vol. i. p. 141,
in a chapter entitled " On the Capacities of Venous and Arterial Blood for
Heat," described experiments which contradicted the hypothesis of Crawford
as to the difl^crence in the specific heat of the two varieties of blood, although
the extraordinary discrepancies between difi'erent experiments rendered it
impossible that any calculations could be based upon Dr. Davy's results. In
his experiments. Dr. DslXJ made use of defibrinated blood, employing for the
determination of specific heat the methods of mixture and rate of cooling.

In the experiments which I performed last year, and wliich are published
in the last volume of the Eeports of the British Association, I made use
of the method of mixture, taking care to adopt aU the precautions which
modern experience has suggested. Making use of the perfectly fresh blood
of the ox, which was sometimes venous, sometimes arterial, I obtained re-
markably concordant results, the mean of which gave 1-02 as the coefficient
of the specific heat of blood. Having made this determination, I could pass
to the experiments intended to determine whether, in being arteriahzed,
blood which is perfectly venous becomes hotter.

As a preface to my own researches on this subject, it is incumbent upon me
to allude to all the observations which have been made on this subject. In
the second volume of Dr. Davy's ' Eesearchcs, Physiological and Anatomical,'
at p. 168 a section is devoted to the following question: — " WJien oxygen is _
absorbed by the blood, is there any production of heat ? "

" To endeavour to determine this point," sa3^s Dr. Davy, " of so much in-
terest in connexion with the theory of animal heat, a very tliju vial, of the

ON HEAT GENEKATEl) IN THE BLOOU. 139

capacity of eight liquid ounces, was selected and earefuUy enveloped in bad
conducting substances, viz. several folds of flannel, of fine oiled paper, and
of oiled cloth. Thus prepared, and a perforated cork being provided holding
a delicate thermometer, 2 cubic inches of mercury were introduced, and im-
mediately after it was fiUed with venous blood kept liquid as before described.
The vial was now corked and shaken ; the thermometer included was sta-
■iiouary at 45°. After five minutes that it was so stationary the thermometer
■was withdrawn ; the vial, closed by another cork, was transferred to a mercu-
rial bath, and Ig cubic inch of oxygen was introduced. The common cork
was retui-ned, and the vial was well agitated for about a minute : the ther-
mometer was now introduced ; it rose immediately to 4G°, and, continuing
the agitation, it rose further to 46°-5, very nearly to 47°. This experiment
was made on the 12th of February, 1838, on the blood of the sheep. On the
following day a similar experiment was made on the venous blood of man.
The -sial was filled with 11 cubic inches of this blood, its fibrine broken up in
the usual manner, and with 3 cubic inches of mercury; the temperature of
the blood and mercury was 42°-o, and the temperature was the same after
the introduction of 3 cubic inches of oxygen. The temperatui-e of the room
being 47°, a fire having shortly before been lit, the vial was taken to an ad-
joining passage, where the temperature of the air was 39°. Here the vial
was well agitated, held in the hand with thick gloves on as an additional
protection ; after about three quarters of a minute the thermometer in the
vial had risen a degree, viz. to 43°'5." Dr. Davy relates two other experi-
ments, of which the first Avas performed on the venous blood taken from the
jugular vein of a sheep, the second on arterial blood. The three experiments
with venous blood showed that when agitated with mercury and air for the
space of a minute, venous blood was heated to the extent of 1° Pahr., whilst
the arterial blood was heated only half a degree.

Dr. Davy quotes Sir Charles Scudamore, who, in his ' Essay on the Blood,'
at p. 59, states that venous blood cools much more slowly in oxygen gas than
in atmospheric air ; that the same blood divided into two cupping-glasses,
" after an interval of eight minutes from the beginning of the experiment,"
exhibited a diff'erence of 8°, — that exposed to oxygen being 85°, that to atmo-
spheric air 77°.

H. Nasse, in his article on Animal Heat in the fourth volume of Wagner's
* Handwiirterbuch der Physiologic' (1842), quotes Marchand to the effect
that when oxygen is shaken with blood the latter is heated.

In a paper entitled " On the lielative Temperature of Arterial and Yenous
Blood," Mr. "W. B. Savory, having described at considerable length observa-
tions on the temperature of the two sides of the heart, describes others
performed with a view to check the accuracy of the experiments of Dr.
John Davy, and states the conclusions to which he was led by his own
experiments, viz. : — 1st, that when venous blood is treated, as was done by
Dr. Davy in his experiments, with oxygen, its temperature was usuaU}- raised
from 1° to 1|° or 2°; 2ndly, that when venous blood was treated in a similar
manner with hydrogen or carbonic acid, its temperature was as frequently
raised, and generally to the same extent ; 3rdly, that similar experiments
upon arterial blood usually jdelded the same results ; 4thly, that in all cases
the increase of temperature seemed to be the result of the agitation. In
concluding his paper, Mr. Savory remarked, " At present there is no evi-
dence upon which we can safely venture further into this inquiry. If, as I
conclude from my experiments, arterial blood is warmer than venous, the
increase of temjierature must occur in the lungs as a resvilt of those changes

140 REroRT — 1871.

which tho hlood there undergoes. Of the nature of those changes, little or
nothing is known,"

In my early researches, conducted during the months of May and June
1869, I had attempted to determine, by means of comparatively simple con-
trivances, whether any heat was evolved during arteriahzation, making use of
delicate thermometers. At first I used a glass bottle furnished with a tubu-
lature, near the bottom in which a cork, perforated and furnished with a glass^
tube closed by india-rubber tubing and a clip, was inserted. The neck of the
bottle was furnished with a cork perforated in two places ; through one of
the perforations a delicate Centigrade thermometer passed into the centre of
the flask, whilst into the other was inserted a bent glass tube through which
gas might be introduced into the apparatus. The bottle which I have de-
scribed was filled with venous blood, both the tubes communicating with its
interior being closed. It was then maintained at a temperature varying be-
tween 30° and 35° C. for many hours, until it had assumed the characteristic
cherry-red coloration which indicates the complete removal of the loosely
combined oxygen of the blood. The apparatus having been allowed to cool,
it was invested with a jacket of felt. An india-rubber tube was made to
connect the upper glass tube with a hydrogen gasometer, whilst the lower
tube being opened, the hydrogen expelled any required quantity of blood.
The apparatus was then shaken and the temperature determined. Then by
a repetition of the process (followed in the introduction of hydrogen) pure
oxygen gas was made to displace more of the blood, and the process of shaking
repeated as before. The results of such experiments were eminently unsatis-
factory, varying obviously with the amount of mechanical work which was
formed by the experiments, and which yet did not admit of exact deter-
mination.

In some experiments I observed a heating which amounted to 0°-3 C. ; in
other cases the difference in the readings, before the introduction of oxj^geu
and after it, seemed to point to a cooling instead of to a heating. To
give an idea of the indefinite and perplexing results which I obtained, I
shall cite the details of an experiment performed on the 23rd of June, 1870,
by Professor Tait and myself, the apparatus used being a tin vessel resem-
bling in principle the one of glass which I have already described. This
vessel was covered with felt, and, when shaken, it was held by means of a
very strong iron clamp. Having been filled with sheep's blood, it was placed
in an air-oven and maintained for a period of twelve hours at a temperature
which oscillated between 100^ and 110° Pahr. It was afterwards placed in
the room in which my experiments were carried on ; but in order to make
it cool more rapidly, its felt covering was taken off, and it was placed in
water at a temperature of 15° C. It was dried, again covered with felt,
and fixed in its clamp. Hydrogen was then made to expel 4-5 cubic
inches of blood, which was found by spectroscopic examination to exhibit the
single band of reduced haemoglobin ; after shaking the blood and hydrogen
in the apparatus, its temperature was found to be 17°'S 0., then 18° C, the
temperature of the air being 20°-4 C. 10 cubic inches of blood were then
drawn off and replaced by oxygen, which was brought in contact with the
blood by shaking ; the temperature rose to 18°-1 C. : more oxygen was intro-
duced and the shakinc; repeated, the temperature rising to 18°-25, 18°-4, 18°-5,
18°-6, 18°-6, 18°-55,l8°-7, 18°- 75, 18°-77. At the conclusion of the experi-
ment the quantity of blood which had been arterialized was found to be 3G0
cubic centims. This experiment merely gave one of many results ; for as long
as I followed this method I was quite unable twice to determine the same

ON HEAT GENERATED IN THE HLOOD. 141

amount of heat as the result of oxygenation of the blood. The amount of
heating in a given time depended upon several important factors, as the dif-
ference bet-sveen the temperature of the blood in the experimental vessel and
that of the surrounding air, upon the amount of blood contained in the appa-
ratus, and the space through which the vessel was moved during its agitation,
no less than upon the number of the agitations.

To describe, or even to give the results of a series of experiments so emi-
nently unsatisfactory, woiild be a mere waste of time ; it will be sufficient
for me to state, however, that I clearly came to the conclusion that, like those
who had preceded me, I had obtained no positive proof of the heating of
blood when it absorbs oxygen, there having been as great a heating when
water as when blood was experimented upon.

In commencing new experiments this year, I did so with the conviction
that, in order to obtain results of any value, my apparatus shoiild be so con-
structed and my experiments so conducted as to preclude the possibility of
any appreciable rise in temperature resulting from the mechanical work of
shaking. Then I decided upon discarding thermometers, and making use of
thermo-electric junctions of great delicacy.

The galvanometer employed in the research was one resembling one of
Sir Wm. Thomson's older forms, constructed especially for Professor Tait,
every possible precaution having been taken to avoid a trace of iron in
the coils and framework. The wire was drawn through agate plates
from electrolytic copper, covered with white silk and formed into four coils,
each adjusted to produce the maximum effect with the least resistance,
those parts of the coils nearest the magnets being made of finer wire.
The astatic system vibrated under the earth's force once in eight seconds ;
but as this was much too delicate for my purpose, I placed near the in-
Btriiment a bar-magnet, which reduced the period of vibration to 3^-4.

The thermo-electric junctions which I employed were made by twisting
very thin iron and copper wire together, the free ends of the copper wires
being immersed into the mercury pools of a very simple form of commu-
tator placed in the circuit, which enabled me, with the greatest ease, to
reverse the current flowing along the wires.

The apparatus actually employed in my experiments consisted of an
upper glass vessel, which I may call the blood reservoir, to which was con-
nected a lower vessel, also of glass, and in which the blood, wliich was the
subject of experiment, could be brought in contact Avith the gases which
were intended to act upon it.

The iipper vessel was a glass bulb of a pyriform shape, and had a capacity
of about 150 cubic centimetres. Above and below it was drawn out, so as to
present two tubes, the upper of which was bent at right angles and furnished
with a piece of india-rubber tubing, which admitted of being closed by a clamp,
whilst the lower was furnished with a very accurately ground stopcock. In
the side of the bulb was a round tubulature, which could be closed with a cork,
through which passed a thermo-electric junction. The lower, or mixing-
vessel, was cylindrical in shape, and possessed four apertures. The upper one
was closed by a cork, bored so as to allow of the passage of a glass tube,
attached above by means of an elastic tube to the stopcock of upper vessel or
reservoir, and made of such a length as to reach to the bottom of the mixing-
vessel. N^ear the upper aperture was a second lateral one, into which a
glass tube had been fused. This glass tube could be connected, by means of
a metallic tube and stopcocks, eitlier with a Sprengel mercurial aspirator or
with an oxygen or hydrogen gasometer. A third lateral aperture waa

142 REPORT— 1871.

closed with a cork, perforated (like the one which closed the upper vessel)
by a second thermal junction. A fourth aperture in the mixing-vessel,
closed by a stopcock, enabled it to be emptied.

In determining with such an apparatus whether heat is generated when
venous blood becomes arterial, the upper vessel is disconnected from the
lower at a point below the glass stopcock previously described ; it is com-
pletely filled with water, and then the water is displaced by a stream of
pure hydrogen gas admitted through the upper tube.

The lower glass tube is then connected with the vessel which contains the
blood to be experimented upon. The upper tube, through which hydrogen had
been admitted, is now connected to the Sprengel pump, which rapidly sucks
the blood into the vessel, Avithout the slightest j)ossibility of its coming in
contact with oxygen. The upper vessel is either partially or completely filled
with blood, but it always is ultimately left in connexion with a hydrogen
gasometer.

The mixing-vessel (the lowest aperture of which has been closed by india-
rubber tubing and clip) is now connected to the Sprengel pump, and a va-
cuum is formed into which hydrogen is allowed freely to flow. The vacuum
is renewed three or four times consecutively, hydrogen being allowed to flow
into the apparatus each time. The object of this is to exclude traces from
the lower vessel of atmospheric oxygen.

The stopcock which connects the upper and lower vessels is opened, and
venous blood is allowed to flow into the lower vessel. In actual work both
the upper and lower vessels are thickly covered with wadding. The upper
one is firmly fixed in a clamp, and constitutes a reservoir, which, except
when the atmospheric changes in temperature are abnormally sudden, main-
tains during limited periods of time a constant temperature. The lower .tube
being connected to the stopcock of the upper by means of a flexible india-
rubber tube, admits of being comj^letcly tilted, or, if necessary, shaken.

As soon as the lower vessel contains the blood to be experimented upon,
the thermal junctions are bi'ought in connexion with the galvanometer.
The amount of deviation on the graduated scale, and the direction of the
deviation, at once tells the experimenter whether the upper or the lower
junction be the hotter. The lower vessel is thoroughly shaken, then, after
some time, the temperature of its contents is determined by reading on the
scale placed in front of the galvanometer. The tube and its contents are
then repeatedly tilted, a reading of the galvanometer being taken after each
set of five tilts. After a certain time the lower vessel has assumed a constant
temperature, and readings, at the interval of two or three minutes, show no
perceptible change. I may remark that the galvanometer which, through
the kindness of Prof. Tait, was placed at my disposal was so set tbat in my
various experiments one division of the divided scale corresponded to the
100th or the 120th of a degree Cent. The first observations made with my
apparatus were intended to determine whether such an amount of agitation
as would be required to communicate a thoroughly arterial colour to perfectly
venous blood would heat the fluid to a perceptible extent, in consequence of
the mechanical work expended in the agitation.

In preliminary experiments I foimd that venous blood assumed a beauti-
ful arterial hue, when it was mixed with oxygen contained in the mixing-
vessel, by successively tilting the tube twenty times. In each tilt the tube
containing blood and oxygen was completely reversed. In other preli-
minary experiments I found that when the tulje contained thoroughly arte-
riaUzed blood or water, the process of tilting had no influence on the

ON HEAT GENERATED IN THE BLOOD. 143

temperature of the contained fluid. It was, therefore, obvious that any heat-
ing which might occur in the process of tilting or shaking in subsequent
experiments could not be referred to the mechanical work expended in the
tube and its contents.

My next experiments consisted in determining whether, when agitated
with a neutral gas, as, for example, hydrogen, any material change in the
temperature of the blood occurred ; they led to the result that when agi-
tated with hydrogen gas no heating of the blood results, it being always
remembered that the mechanical agitation to which the blood and the
neutral gas were subjected was the same as in my experiments with blood
and oxygen.

In ray systematic experiments on the heat generated during the process
of arterialization, the following observations were always made : —

1. The temperature of the lower as contrasted with the upper vessel was
determined after the latter had been exhausted.

2. The temperature- observations were repeated after shaking with hy-
drogen.

3. After the renewal of a vacuum.

4. After admission of oxygen in the mixing-vessel.

5. After oxygen had been thoroughly shaken with the blood.

The results of my experiments on veiy numerous samples of venous blood
have led to the conclusion that whilst, as I have previously mentioned, no
heat is evolved on agitating blood with hydrogen, there is, on agitation with
oxygen, always a slight evolution of heat.

To determine the exact heating, when venous blood of varying gaseous
composition is arterialized, appears to be most desirable. We should espe-
cially attempt to determine the heating observed when the average venous
blood contained in the right ventricle and directly drawn from it is ar-
terialized. The first and most important datum to be ascertained appeared
to me, however, to be the heating which takes place when blood which has
been thoroughly reduced, i. e. which contains no loosely combined oxygen
and exhibits Stokes's spectrum, is completely arterialized.

From five sets of experiments on the heat developed during the arteriali-
zation of perfectly reduced blood, I arrived at the conclusion that the mean
rise of temperatiire during the absorption of oxygen amounted to 0°-0976 C.
The maximum heating found was 0°'lll C, and the minimum 0°-083C.

The research, of which the above are the results, was conducted in the
Physical Laboratory of the University of Edinburgh ; and I have to express
my thanks to Professor Tait for the uniform kindness with which he helped
me by advice, assistance, and apparatus in ascertaining the facts which are
recorded in this Report. I intend to extend these researches very greatly.
It is most desirable that in future experiments venous blood of known com-
position be employed, and that the amount of oxygen absorbed and CO^
evolved be ascertained after each experiment. I propose likewise to increase
the period during which the blood is agitated, making use of an arrangement
whereby the mechanical work performed in the agitation may be precisely
determined.

144- REPORT — 1871.

Report of the Committee appointed to consider the subject of
Physiological Experimentation.

A CouoiiTTEE, consisting of ten individuals, having been appointed at the last
Meeting of the British Association, held at Liverpool, to consider the subject
of Physiological Experimentation, in accordance -with a Resolution of the
General Committee hereto annexed, the following Report was drawn up and
signed by seven members of the Committee.

Report.

i. No experiment which can be performed under the influence of an anaes-
thetic ought to be done without it.

ii. No painful experiment is justifiable for the mere purpose of illustrating a
law or fact already demonstrated ; in other words, experimentation with-
out the employment of ansesthetics is not a fitting exhibition for teaching
purposes.

iii. Wliencvcr, for the investigation of new truth, it is necessary to make a
painful experiment, every effort should l)e made to ensure success, in
order that the suffering inflicted may not be wasted. For this reason,
no painful experiment ought to be performed by an unskilled person
with insufficient instruments and assistance, or in places not suitable to
the purpose, that is to say, anywhere except in physiological and patho-
logical laboratories, under proper regulations.

iv. In the scientific preparation for veterinary practice, operations ought not
to be performed upon living animals for the mere purpose of obtaining
greater operative dexterity.

Signed by : — M. A. Lawson, Oxford. G. M. HtriirnRT, Cambridge.
WH.BALEorK,! j,^^^^^^^_
Arthur Gamoee, J °

William Flower, Royal College of Surgeons, London.
J. BuRDOiq^ Sanderson, London.
George Rolleston, Secretary, Oxford.

Hesohdions referred to in the Report.

That the Committee of Section D (Biology) be requested to draw up a
statement of their views upon Physiological Experiments in their various
bearings, and that this document be circulated among the Members of the
Association.

That the said Committee be further requested to consider from time to time
■whether any steps can be taken by them, or by the Association, which will
tend to reduce to its minimum the suffering entailed by legitimate physiolo-
gical inquiries ; or any which will have the effect of employing the influence
of this Association in the discouragement of experiments which are not clearly
legitimate on live animals.

The following resolution, subsequently passed by the Committee of Section
D (Biology), was adopted by the General Committee : —

" That the following gentlemen be appointed a Committee for the pur-
pose of carrying out the suggestion on the question of Physiological Expe-
riments made by the General Committee, — Professor Rolleston, Professor
Lawson, Professor Balfour, Dr. Gamgee, Professor M. Foster, Professor
Humphry, Professor W. H. Flower, Professor Sanderson, Professor Mac-
alister, and Professor Redfern ; that Professor Rolleston be the Secretary,
and that they be requested to report to the General Committee."

PHYSIOLOGICAL ACTION OF ORGANIC CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS. 145

Report on the Physiological Action of Organic Chemical Compounds.
By Benjamin Ward Richardson, M.A., M.D., F.R.S.

The plan I have heretofore followed, of passing under review the practical
results of the labours chronicled in previous Reports, cannot be carried out
this year. The review itself would now become so comprehensive that it
would occupy all the time allowed for the reading of the Report to the ex-
clusion of the new matter to be brought forward. I shall therefore proceed
at once to the description of new research.

Chloeal Hydrate.

It is two years since the substance called chloral hydrate (the physio-
logical properties of which had been previously discovered by Liebreich) was
introduced into this country at the jN'orwich Meeting of this Association.
During the first year of tlie employment of chloral hydrate the enthusiasm
connected with the learning of its value prevented, in some degree, all fair
criticism as to its real values and dangers. The year immediately past
has afforded time for calmer and more judicial observation, greatty, as I think,
to the advantage of the public, since it has given to the professors of medical
art the opportunity of learning that the new agent placed in their hands,
blessing as it is to humanity, is not an unalloyed blessing, but one that haS
engendered a new and injurious habit of narcotic luxury, and has added
another cause to the preventible causes of the mortality of the nation.

Recognizing these truths, I have felt it a duty to devote some part of the
labours of this Report to the elucidation of questions which have become of
public, not less than of scientific importance, and to these I would now ask
attention.

1. I have endeavoured to ascertain what is a dangerous and what a fatal
dose of chloral hydrate. The conclusion at which I have been able first to
anive on this point is, that the maximum quantity of the hydrate that can
be borne, at one dose, bears some proportion to the weight of the animal
subjected to its influence. The rule, however, does not extend equally to
animals of any and every class. The proportion is practically the same in
the sam'e classes, but there is no actual universality of rule. A mouse weigh-
ing from three-quarters of an ounce to an ounce .will be put to sleep by one
quarter of a grain of the hydrate, and will be killed by a grain. A pigeon
weighing twelve ounces will be put to sleep by two grains of the hydrate, and
will be killed by five grains. A guineapig weighing sixteen ounces will be
put by two grains into deep sleep, and by five grains into fatal sleep. A
rabbit weighing eighty-eight ounces will be thrown by thirty grains into
deep sleep, and by sixty grains into fatal sleep.

The human subject, weighing from one hundred and twenty to one hundred
and forty pounds, will be made by ninety grains to pass-into deep sleep, and
by one hundred and forty grains into a sleep that will be dangerous.

Prom the eflfects produced on a man who had of his own accord taken a
hundred and twenty grains of the hydrate, and who seemed at one period to
be passing into death, I was led to infer that in the human subject one
hundred and forty grains should be accepted as dangerous, and one hundred
and eighty as a fatal dose. Evidence has, however, recently been brought
before me which leads me to think that, although eighty grains would
in most instances prove fatal, it could, under very favourable circumstances,
be recovered from.

1871. 1

146 REPORT — 1871.

Dr. Hills, of the Thorpe Asylum, Norwich, has, for example, favoured me
with the facts of an instance in which a suicidal woman took no less than
four hundred ami seventy-hvo grains of the hydrate dissolved in sixteen ounces
of water, and actually did not die for thirty-three hours. Such a fact, ably
observed as it was, is startling ; but it does not, I think, militate against the
rule that one hundred and forty grains is the maximum quantity that
should, under any circumstances, be administered to the human subject.

2. A second point to which my attention has been directed is, what quan-
tity of hydrate of chloral can be taken with safety at given intervals for a
given period of time, say of twenty-four hours. To arrive at some fair con-
clusion on this subject, I calculated from a series of experiments the
time required for the development of symptoms from different doses of the
hydrate, the full period of the symptoms, and the time when they had entii-ely
passed away. Great difficulties attend this line of investigation ; but I may
state, as a near approximation to the truth, that an adult person who has
taken chloral in sufficient quantity to be influenced by it, disposes of it at the
rate of about seven grains per hour. In repeated doses, the hydrate of chloral
might therefore be given at the rate of twelve grains every two hours for
twenty-four hours, with less danger than would occur from giving twelve
times twelve (14-i) grains at once ; but I do not think that amount ought,
except in the extremest emergencies, to be exceeded even in divided
quantities.

3. A third point to which I have paid attention is, the means to be adopted
in any case when, from accident or other cause, a large and fatal dose of
chloral hydrate has been administered. I can speak here with precision. It
should be remembered that this hydrate, from its great solubility, is rapidly
diffused through all the organism. It is in vain, consequently, to attempt its
removal by any extreme measures after it has fairly taken effect. In other
words, the animal or person under chloral, like an animal or person in a
fever, must go through a distinct series of stages on the way to recovery or
death ; and these stages will be long or short, slightly dangerous or intensely
dangerous, all but fatal or actually fatal, according to the conditions by which
the animal is suiTounded, One of the first and marked effects of the chloral is
reduction of the animal temperature ; and when an animal is deeply under the
influence of the agent, in the fourth degree of narcotism of Dr. Snow, the tem-
perature of its body, unless the external warmth be carefully sustained, will
quickly descend seven and even eight degrees below the natural standard.
Such reduction of temperature is itself a source of danger ; it allows conden-
sation of fluid on the bronchial pulmonary surface, and so induces apncea,
and it indicates a period when the convulsion of cold (a convulsion which
sharply precedes death) is at hand.

I offer these explanations in order to indicate the first favourable condition
for the recovery of an animal or man from the effects of an extreme dose of
chloral hydi'ate. It is essential that the body of the animal be kept warm,
and not merely so, but that the air inspired by the animal be of high tempe-
rature. The first effort to recovery, in short, should consist in placing the
animal in a warm air. This fact is perfectly illustrated by experiment on
the inferior animals. In the pigeon an air of 95° Fahr. is most favourable,
in the rabbit an air at 105° to 110°, in the dog the same. In man the
air to be breathed should be raised and sustained at 90° Fahr. at least*.

* I have no doubt it -n-ill be found, as tbo chronicle of deaths from chloral hydrate in-
creases, that the mortality from the agent wUl be greatest when the thermometrical
readings are the lowest, and vice versa.

PHYSIOLOGICAL ACTION OF ORGANIC CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS. 147

The nest thing to be remembered in the recovery of persons under the
fatal influence of chloral hydrate is to sustain the body by food. I find that
under even deep sleep from the narcotic, although the process of waste is less
than is common under natural conditions of rest, there is still a very con-
siderable waste in progress, which, if not made up, is against recovery. I
find also that the digestive and assimilating powers, thoiigh impaired diuing
sleep from chloral, are not arrested, but may be called into fair action with so
much advantage, that if two animals be cast into deep sleep by an excessive
quantity of the narcotic, and one be left without food and the other be artifi-
cially fed on warm food, one fourth of the chance of recovery is given to the
animal that is supplied with food. In the human subject wai-m milk, to
which a little lime-water has been added, is the best food. Milk is very easily
administered mechanically, and it should be administered in the proportion
of half a pint every two hours*.

4. The fourth point to remember is to sustain the breathing ; in the
inferior animals the question of life or death can be made to turn on this
pivot. But the artificial respiration must be carried out with great gentle-
ness ; it must not be done by vehement movements of the body or compres-
sions of the chest, but by the simple process of inflating the luugs by means
of small bellows, through the nostrils. I have devised, in the course of the
researches conducted chiefly for the Association, various instruments for
artificial respiration, viz. a small double-acting bellows, a small syringe, and
a double-acting india-rubber pocket-bellows ; but I have lately made an ob-
servation which leads to a simpler method still, i. e. I merely attach to a
single hand-bellows a nostril-tube, and gently inflate the lungs, letting the
elasticity of the chest-wall do the work of expiration. A little valve near
to the nostril-tube effectually stops aR back currents from the lungs into
the bellows. For the human subject, five charges of air from the bellows
should be given at intervals of five seconds apartt.

There is another subject of public interest connected with the employ-
ment of chloral hydrate. I refer to the increasing habitual use of it as a
narcotic. As there are alcoholic intemperants and opium-eaters, so now
there are those who, beginning to take chloral hydrate to relieve pain or to
procure sleep, get into the fixed habit of taking it several times daily and in
full doses. I would state from this public place, as earnestly and as forcibly
as I can, that this growing practice is alike injurious to the mental, the
moral, and the purely physical organization, and that the confirmed habit
of taking chloral hydrate leads inevitably to confirmed disease. The diges-
tion gets impaired ; natural tendency to sleep and natural sleep are impaired ;
the blood is changed in quality, its plastic properties and its capacity for
oxidation being reduced; the secretions are depraved; and, the nervous system
losing its regulating, controlling power, the muscles become unsteady, the
heart irregular and intermittent, and the mind uncertain and irritable. To
crown the mischief, in not a few cases already the habitual dose has been the
last, involuntary or rather unintentional suicide closing the scene.

I press these facts on public notice not a moment too soon, and I add to
them the facts, that hydrate of chloral is purely and absolutely a medicine,
and that whenever its administration is not guided by medical science and
experience, it ceases to be a boon, and becomes a curse to mankind.

* This question of feeding is applicable to all foi-ras of accidental narcotic poisoning.
In every such case the poisoning is a distinct process, and the recovery turns largely on the
sustainnient of tlie animal force by supply of food and of external -warmth.

t Dr. Richardson exhibited the different instruments described.

1.2

148 REPORT ISri.

Anhtdrotts Chloral.

The hydrate of chloral, of which I have treated above, is made from
another substance, called anhydrous chloral, by the addition to the latter of a
certain proportion of simple water. Anhydrous chloral was discovered
by Liebig in 1832, and is formed by the process of passing chlorine through
absoMe alcohol. It is a colourless oily fluid, of specific gravity 1502, at
64° Pahr. It boils at 93° Cent. (199° Fahr.); its composition is C.HClj 0, and
its vapour-density, taking hydrogen as unity, is 73. It dissolves in ether,
alcohol, and hydride of amyl.

The vapour of anhydrous chloral is irritating and painful to an extreme
degree when it is inhaled, and the substance has consequently not attracted
attention as a subject for physiological study. Having, however, a pure
specimen of it prepared by Dr. Versmann, I thought it was worth while to
make a research with it. The results have proved worthy of the trouble ; in
fact I have rarely derived from so simple an investigation so rich a practical
result. It would be inferred a priori that anhydrous chloral in the liquid
state would be, like its vapour, a powerful irritant to the skin and mucous
membrane. I soon found, however, that this was not the fact, that I could
apply the fluid freely to my ovm. skin and to the tongue without injury, and
that the caustic action is extremely mild, even when the substance is applied
to a moist surface. If a quarter grain of it (anhydrous chloral) be placed
upon the skin of the frog in a dry atmosphere, there is a rather quick ab-
sorption, followed by the formation of a white film of the hydrate of chloral
beneath the skin, which film soon disappears by absorption, the symptoms
following the absorption being the specific narcotic symptoms of chloral
hydrate. The animal soon falls into a deep sleep with complete muscular
exhaustion.

If in higher animals, birds and rabbits, anhydrous chloral be injected sub-
cutaneously, the same phenomena are indicated, the quantities for producing
the specific effects being the same as are required for the hydrate.

It is clear from these observations that anhydrous chloral, when brought
into contact with the exposed surfaces of the^body, abstracts water from the
part with which it is in contact, becomes converted into the hydrate, and is
directly absorbed into the body, producing tlie same symptoms as the pre-
pared hydrate produces when it is introduced into the organism.

As anhydrous chloral is soluble in amyl hydride, ether, and many other
volatile fluids, I tried whether any of it coiild be carried over with the vapour
of amyl hydride, and whether, if it were administered in this way, it would
produce prolonged narcotism by being transformed into the hydrate in the
lungs and taken up into the blood.

The result of the experiment was to show that in frogs, guineapigs, and
pigeons general narcotism can be so induced, and that the narcotism is pro-
longed far beyond what follows from the simple inhalation of